FKM Guideline

ANALYTICAL STRENGTH ASSESSMENT

OF COMPONENTS
Made of Steel, Cast Iron and Aluminum Materials
in Mechanical Engineering

6th revised Edition, 2012

Editor:

Forschungskuratorium Maschinenbau (FKM)

P.O. Box 71 08 64, D - 60498 Frankfurt/Main
Phone *49 - 69 - 6603 - 1345
© 2013
VDMA Verlag GmbH
Lyoner Straße 18
60528 Frankfurt am Main
www.vdma-verlag.com
All rights reserved, in particular the right for duplication and dissemination as well as translation. No part of the work may
be reproduced in any form (print, photocopy, microfilm or other method) or filed, edited, duplicated or disseminated using
electronic systems without the prior written consent of the publisher. Please contact the publisher for any requests regarding
the commercial use of the document or any licensing for the purposes of training and counseling.

ISBN 978-3-8163-0649-8
 This guideline was elaborated under a contract agreement between the Forschungskuratorium
Maschinenbau e. V. (FKM), Frankfurt/Main, and IMA Materialforschung und Anwen-
dungstechnik GmbH, Dresden, as contractor in charge,
by
Dr. Ing. Roland Rennert
IMA Materialforschung und Anwendungstechnik GmbH, Dresden,

Prof. Dr. Ing. Eckehard Kullig

Hochschule für Technik und Wirtschaft, Dresden (Dresden University of Applied Sciences)

Prof. Dr. Ing. Michael Vormwald

Technische Universität Darmstadt, Fachgebiet Werkstoffmechanik (TU Darmstadt, Mechanics of Materials Department)

Prof. Dr. Ing. Alfons Esderts

Technische Universität Clausthal, Institut für Maschinelle Anlagentechnik und Betriebsfestigkeit (TU Claustahl, Institute
for Plant Engineering and Fatigue Analysis)

Dr. Ing. Dieter Siegele

Fraunhofer Institut für Werkstoffmechanik (Fraunhofer Institute for Mechanics of Materials), Freiburg

in continuation of the 1st to 5th editions of this guideline prepared by

Dr. Ing. Bernd Hänel † Dresden

Prof. Dr. Ing. Erwin Haibach † Bad Soden
Prof. Dr. Ing. Timm Seeger Darmstadt
Dipl. Ing. Gert Wirthgen Dresden
Prof. Dr. Ing. Harald Zenner Clausthal and Dresden

and complemented substantially by

Dr. Ing. Karsten Hinkelmann, Clausthal; Dr. Ing. Philipp Leis, Darmstadt;
Dipl. Ing. Olaf Hertel, Darmstadt; Dipl. Ing. Christian Versch, Darmstadt

Additionally it was discussed among experts from industry and research in the FKM expert group "Strength of
components".

Financial grants were obtained from the Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft (BMWi, Bonn) through the Arbeitsgemeinschaft
industrieller Forschungsvereinigungen "Otto von Guericke" e. V. (AiF, Cologne). The Forschungskuratorium Maschinen-
bau e. V. gratefully acknowledges the contributions by the experts involved as well as the financial support from the BMWi
and the AiF.

Terms of liability
This guideline conforms with the state of the art. It has been prepared with the necessary care. The users are expected to
decide whether the guideline meets their particular requirements. The appropriate care shall be taken in its application. Nei-
ther the publisher nor the editor (Forschungskuratorium Maschinenbau e. V.), the authors and the experts involved shall be
liable to the purchaser or any other person or entity with respect to any loss or damage caused or alleged to have been
caused directly or indirectly by the application of this guideline.
 The preceding five editions of the guideline received a
Preface to the 6th edition significant amount of interest, showing user need for such
an up-to-date design basis for various cases of application.
For engineers concerned with design and calculation in This interest was confirmed by the VDI conferences on
mechanical engineering and in related fields of industry, "Computational Strength Analysis of Metallic Compo-
the FKM Guideline for analytical strength assessment has nents", that were organized in the context of the guideline
been available since 1994. This guideline was elaborated in Fulda in 1995, 1998 and 2002, as well by the DVM
by the expert group "Strength of components" with finan- conference "Neue Entwicklungen für die Bauteilfes-
cial support by the Forschungskuratorium Maschinenbau tigkeitsnachweise" (New developments in the strength
(FKM) and the Arbeitsgemeinschaft industrieller For- assessment of components) in Darmstadt in 2010.
schungsvereinigungen "Otto von Guericke". The contents-related changes introduced with the third
Based on former TGL standards, the former guideline edition were mainly concerned with the inclusion of stain-
VDI 2226 and further sources, the guideline has been elab- less steel and of forging steel, with the technological size
orated and further developed to meet the current state of factor, with the section factor for assessing the static
knowledge. strength, with the fatigue limit of grey cast iron and of
malleable cast iron, with additional detail categories and
The FKM Guideline with the specification of an effective damage sum smaller
– is applicable to mechanical engineering and related than unity for the assessment of the variable amplitude
fields of industry; fatigue strength, with the analytical assessment of welded
components, with the assessment of multiaxial stresses and
– allows the analytical strength assessment for rod- with a strength assessment using experimentally deter-
shaped, shell-shaped and block-shaped components, mined component strength values.
taking all relevant influences into consideration;
An essential formal change in the third edition was a new
– describes the assessment of the static strength and of structure, which provided four chapters describing the
the fatigue strength, the latter in the form of an assess- assessment of the static strength and the assessment of the
ment of the fatigue limit, the fatigue strength for finite fatigue strength with either nominal stresses or local
life or the variable amplitude fatigue strength, depend- stresses determined based on the elasticity theory, respec-
ing on the service stress conditions; tively. For ease of application each of these chapters con-
– is valid for steel, including stainless steel, at component tains a complete description of the particular calculation
temperatures from -40 °C to 500 °C; procedure, although this results in repetitions of identical
or nearly identical text segments in the corresponding
– is valid for cast iron materials at component tempera- sections.
tures from -25 °C to 500 °C;
The major change in the fourth edition of 2002 is the pos-
– is valid for aluminum materials at component tempera- sibility of an analytical strength assessment also for com-
tures from -25 °C to 200 °C; ponents made of aluminum materials, by applying the
– is applicable to components produced with or without same calculation procedure that had, so far, been used for
machining, or by welding; components of steel and cast iron materials.
– allows an evaluation of nominal stresses as well as of The specifications necessary to include aluminum materi-
local stresses, determined using the theory of linear als were derived from literature evaluations. In doing so, it
elasticity, derived by means of analytical solutions, by became evident, however, that some of the relevant factors
finite element or boundary element analyses, or from of influence had not yet been examined with the desirable
measurements. comprehensiveness or that available results could not be
evaluated objectively due to major scatter. In the fourth
A uniformly structured calculation procedure applies to all edition, the specifications were based on a careful consid-
of these cases of application. Most of the calculation pro- eration of the factual relations in these particular cases.
cedure is predetermined. The user is only required to make
a few decisions. The involved research institutes and the For-
schungskuratorium Maschinenbau e. V. (FKM) appreciate
The guideline is a calculation algorithm, consisting of any reports on practical experience as well as any pro-
instructions, equations and tables. Most of the included posals for improvement resulting from the practical appli-
figures have an explanatory function only. Textual declara- cation of the guideline.
tions are given where appropriate to ensure reliable appli-
cation. In addition to the correction of any misprints and an im-
provement of the wording, the fifth revised edition has also
The rather comprehensive possibilities of calculation given been modified factually where necessary as compared with
here comply with the state of knowledge to an extent that the fourth. The main modifications are as follows:
may be presented in a guideline. The employed symbols
are partly adapted to the more recent development. The – complementary advice regarding the assessment of the
presented calculation procedure is complemented by ex- static strength;
planatory examples for better comprehensibility.
– a consistent differentiation between the constant ampli- – inclusion of the assessment of the static strength for
tude fatigue limit equaling the point of reference for the welded components using the R1 concept, based on the
calculation at the knee point of the curve of the fatigue critical strains for structural steels;
strength for finite life at ND, on the one hand, and the
– complete revision of the assessment of the fatigue
endurance limit associated with N = v for model II
strength for welded components, including an adapta-
constant amplitude S-N curves, on the other hand;
tion of FAT classes and safety factors to the current
– a uniform calculation procedure for the assessment of IIW recommendations as well as rewording regarding
the fatigue strength for finite life, of the constant ampli- the thickness factor and the estimation of residual
tude fatigue limit or of the endurance limit; stresses;
– the calculation using a damage-equivalent stress ampli- – integration of a new material-mechanical concept of
tude; support effects;
– as well as a new wording regarding the experimental – clear wording in the Haigh diagram for shear stresses;
determination of component strength values.
– new wording for the differentiation between component
The fifth edition of the FKM Guideline has also been pub- variable amplitude fatigue strength and yield strength;
lished in English with an identical content; the English
– improved method of the consistent version of Miner’s
version received remarkable interest among the users on an
rule for model II constant amplitude S-N curves;
international level.
– new wording for the effective damage sum;
This sixth revised edition of the FKM Guideline now
takes into consideration more recent research results, par- – new comparative hypothesis for non-proportional
ticularly those of the research projects "Assessment of the stresses acting on rod-shaped components;
static strength" and "Improved calculation concept for the
– complete revision of the material tables;
FKM Guideline".
– new Chapter 5.5 on the estimation of the fatigue limit
The chapters on standard spectra, on classes of utilization
of surface treated components;
as well as on an improved method for computing the com-
ponent fatigue limit in the case of synchronous multiaxial – new Chapter 5.7 giving advice on design loads.
stresses have been deleted to make the FKM Guideline
Ongoing as well as future research projects will contribute
more clear. Using these methods in accordance with the
to the further improvement of the guideline.
fifth edition of the FKM Guideline, however, is still per-
missible.
For the sixth edition of the FKM Guideline, all chapters
have been completely revised. The main modifications are
as follows:
– lifting of the strict formal uniformity of the different
assessment procedures, provided this results in better
understanding;
– clear allocation between characteristic service stresses
and component designs: nominal stresses for rod-
shaped components with section size-related stress
types, local stresses for all components based on the
stress components;
– new safety level "mean consequences of failure";
– complete revision of the assessment of the static
strength for welded components with separate material
tables and taking into consideration of the softening of
aluminum in accordance with DIN 4113;
– in the assessment of the static strength, relating the
strength values to the yield strength and omission of a
summarized design factor;
– conversion of the assessment of the static strength
using local stresses to an assessment using equivalent
stresses, degree of multiaxiality and rewording of the
critical strain;
References

/1/ TGL 19 340 (1983). Ermüdungsfestigkeit, Dauerfestigkeit der Maschinenbauteile.

/2/ TGL 19 341 (1988). Festigkeitsnachweis für Bauteile aus Eisengusswerkstoffen.
/3/ TGL 19 333 (1979). Schwingfestigkeit, Zeitfestigkeit von Achsen und Wellen.
/4/ TGL 19 350 (1986). Ermüdungsfestigkeit, Betriebsfestigkeit der Maschinenbauteile.
/5/ TGL 19 352 (Draft 1988). Aufstellung und Überlagerung von Beanspruchungskollektiven.
/6/ Guideline VDI 2226 (1965). Recommendations for the stability calculation of metallic building
components.
/7/ DIN 743 (2005). Calculation of load capacity of shafts and axles.
/8/ DIN 7190 (2001). Interference fits—Calculation and design rules.
/9/ DIN 4113-2, Corrigendum 1 (2008). Aluminum constructions under predominantly static loading—Part 2: Static anal-
ysis of welded constructions. Corrigenda to DIN 4113-2:2002-09.
/10/ DIN 18800, Part 1 (2008). Steel structures—Part 1: Design and construction.
/11/ DIN ENV 1993-1-1 (2010). Design of steel structures—Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings (Eurocode 3).
/12/ DIN EN 1999, Part 1-1 (2010). Design of aluminum structures—Part 1-1: General structural rules (Eurocode 9).
/13/ Hobbacher, A.: Recommendations for Fatigue Design of Welded Joints and Components. International Institute of
Welding, doc. XIII-2151r4-07/XV-1254r4-07. Paris, October 2008. (IIW Recommendations).
/14/ Fricke, W.: Guideline for the Fatigue Assessment by Notch Stress Analysis for Welded Structures. International Insti-
tute of Welding, doc. XIII-2240r2-08/XV-1289r2-08, July 2010.
/15/ Haibach, E.: Betriebsfestigkeit—Verfahren und Daten zur Bauteilberechnung. 3rd corrected and supplemented edition,
Berlin and Heidelberg: Springer-Verlag, 2006, ISBN 3-540-29363-9.
/16/ Radaj, D.; Vormwald, M.: Ermüdungsfestigkeit: Grundlagen für Ingenieure. 3rd revised and extended edition, 2nd Prin-
ting. Berlin and Heidelberg: Springer-Verlag, 2007, ISBN 3-540-71458-8.
/17/ FKM-Forschungsheft 143 (1989). Schweißverbindungen I.
/18/ FKM-Forschungsheft 180 (1994). Schweißverbindungen II.
/19/ FKM-Forschungsheft 183-1 (1994). Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis für Maschinenbauteile, Kommentare.
/20/ FKM-Forschungsheft 183-2 (1994). Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis für Maschinenbauteile, Richtlinie.
/21/ FKM-Forschungsheft 221 (1996). Wechselfestigkeit von Flachproben aus Grauguss.
/22/ FKM-Forschungsheft 221-2 (1997). Mehrachsige und zusammengesetzte Beanspruchungen.
/23/ FKM-Forschungsheft 227 (1997). Lebensdauervorhersage II.
/24/ FKM-Forschungsheft 230 (1998). Randschichthärtung.
/25/ FKM-Forschungsheft 241 (1999). Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis für Bauteile aus Aluminumwerkstoff.
/26/ FKM-Forschungsheft 284 (2004). Statischer Festigkeitsnachweis.
/27/ FKM-Forschungsheft 306 (2010). Verbessertes Berechnungskonzept FKM-Richtlinie.
/28/ FKM-Forschungsheft 313 (2011). Datenbank und Auswertesystem Betriebsfestigkeit.
/29/ FKM-Richtlinie Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis für Maschinenbauteile, 3rd completely revised and extended editi-
on (1998).
/30/ FKM-Richtlinie Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis für Maschinenbauteile, 4th extended edition (2002).
/31/ FKM-Richtlinie Rechnerischer Festigkeitsnachweis für Maschinenbauteile, 5th extended edition (2003).
/32/ Diemar, A.; Thumser, R.; Bergmann, J. W.: Statistischer Größeneinfluss und Bauteilfestigkeit—Eine neue Methode
zur Ermittlung von Spannungsintegralen, Materialprüfung 3, 2004.
/33/ Grimm, D.: Untersuchungen zum statistischen Größeneinfluss—Entwicklung und Verifikation einer FE-basierten
Analysesoftware. FG Werkstoffmechanik, FS-4/2001, TU Darmstadt, 2001.
/34/ Kienzler, R.; Kutschan, K.: Beschreibung des modifizierten Programmpakets "STAU". Fachbereich 4, Universität
Bremen, 2003.
/35/ Sonsino, C. M.: Zur Bewertung des Schwingfestigkeitsverhaltens von Bauteilen mit Hilfe von örtlichen Beanspru-
chungen. Konstruktion 45(1), 25-33, 1993.
/36/ Krebs, J.; Hübner, P. and Kaßner, M.: Eigenspannungseinfluss auf Schwingfestigkeit und Bewertung in geschweißten
Bauteilen, DVS-Berichte Band 234, 2nd revised edition, DVS Media GmbH, Düsseldorf, 2012.
/37/ Krebs, J. and Kaßner, M.: Influence of welding residual stresses on fatigue design of welded joints and components.
(IIW-Doc. XIII-2126-06 / XV-1220–06), Welding in the World, Vol. 51, No. 7/8-2007, Journal of Welding, Interna-
tional Institute of Welding, Paris, France.
/38/ Sonsino, C. M.; Bruder, T.; Baumgartner, J.: S-N lines for welded thin joints—suggested slopes and FAT values for
applying the notch stress concept with various reference radii. (Doc. IIW 2078-09), Welding in the World, Vol. 54, No.
11/12-2010, Journal of Welding, International Institute of Welding, Paris, France.

Related Conference Proceedings

Festigkeitsberechnung metallischer Bauteile, Empfehlungen für Konstrukteure und Entwicklungsingenieure. VDI Be-
richte 1227, Düsseldorf, VDI-Verlag, 1995.
Festigkeitsberechnung metallischer Bauteile, Empfehlungen für Entwicklungsingenieure und Konstrukteure. VDI Be-
richte 1442, Düsseldorf, VDI-Verlag, 1998.
Festigkeitsberechnung metallischer Bauteile, Empfehlungen für Entwicklungsingenieure und Konstrukteure. VDI Be-
richte 1698, Düsseldorf, VDI-Verlag, 2002.
Bauteillebensdauernachweiskonzepte. DVM-Bericht 800, Deutscher Verband für Materialforschung und -prüfung,
Berlin 1997.
Betriebsfestigkeit—Neue Entwicklungen bei der Lebensdauerberechnung von Bauteilen. DVM-Bericht 802, Deutscher
Verband für Materialforschung und -prüfung, Berlin 2003.
Neue Entwicklungen für die Bauteilfestigkeitsnachweise. DVM-Bericht, Deutscher Verband für Materialforschung
und -prüfung, Berlin 2010.
Contents

0 General survey .................................................................................................................................................... 10

0.0 Scope .................................................................................................................................................................... 10
0.1 Technical Background........................................................................................................................................ 10
0.2 Required assessments ......................................................................................................................................... 10
0.3 Stresses and component types ............................................................................................................................ 11
0.4 Procedure of calculation ..................................................................................................................................... 14
1 Assessment of the static strength using nominal stresses ................................................................................ 16
1.0 General ................................................................................................................................................................ 16
1.1 Characteristic service stresses ........................................................................................................................... 17
1.2 Material properties ............................................................................................................................................. 19
1.3 Design parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 26
1.4 Component strength ........................................................................................................................................... 29
1.5 Safety factors ....................................................................................................................................................... 30
1.6 Assessment ........................................................................................................................................................... 32
2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using nominal stresses .............................................................................. 35
2.0 General ................................................................................................................................................................ 35
2.1 Characteristic service stresses ........................................................................................................................... 35
2.2 Material properties ............................................................................................................................................. 38
2.3 Design parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 40
2.4 Component strength ........................................................................................................................................... 47
2.5 Safety factors ....................................................................................................................................................... 58
2.6 Assessment ........................................................................................................................................................... 59
3 Assessment of the static strength using local stresses ...................................................................................... 62
3.0 General ................................................................................................................................................................ 62
3.1 Characteristic service stresses ........................................................................................................................... 62
3.2 Material properties ............................................................................................................................................. 65
3.3 Design parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 73
3.4 Component strength ........................................................................................................................................... 77
3.5 Safety factors ....................................................................................................................................................... 78
3.6 Assessment ........................................................................................................................................................... 80
4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local stresses.................................................................................... 82
4.0 General ................................................................................................................................................................ 82
4.1 Characteristic service stresses ........................................................................................................................... 82
4.2 Material properties ............................................................................................................................................. 85
4.3 Design parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 87
4.4 Component strength ........................................................................................................................................... 95
4.5 Safety factors ..................................................................................................................................................... 106
4.6 Assessment ......................................................................................................................................................... 106
5 Annexes .............................................................................................................................................................. 110
5.1 Material tables .................................................................................................................................................. 110
5.2 Stress concentration factors ............................................................................................................................. 149
5.3 Fatigue notch factors ........................................................................................................................................ 156
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components made of structural steel and of aluminum alloys ......................... 165
5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of surface treated components ..................................................................... 178
5.6 Experimental determination of component strength values ......................................................................... 185
5.7 Design loads ....................................................................................................................................................... 187
6 Examples............................................................................................................................................................ 190
6.1 Shaft shoulder ................................................................................................................................................... 190
6.2 Cast component ................................................................................................................................................. 201
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast iron ..................................................................................................... 204
6.4 Welded perforated rod ..................................................................................................................................... 209
6.5 Welded T-section made of aluminum ............................................................................................................. 217
6.6 Welded aluminum structure ............................................................................................................................ 219
7 Symbols .............................................................................................................................................................. 227
7.1 Abbreviations .................................................................................................................................................... 227
7.2 Indexes ............................................................................................................................................................... 227
7.3 Lower case characters ...................................................................................................................................... 227
7.4 Upper case characters ...................................................................................................................................... 228
7.5 Greek alphabetic characters ............................................................................................................................ 229
7.6 Basic equations .................................................................................................................................................. 231
8 Modifications ..................................................................................................................................................... 232
8.1 General .............................................................................................................................................................. 232
0.0 Scope 10 0 General survey

0 General survey In particular, it is presupposed that for welded components

the limit values regarding weld thickness, weld length and
0.0 Scope weld imperfections required by the relevant standards are
complied with.
This guideline is valid for mechanical engineering and
related fields. Its application shall be agreed between the
contracting parties. 0.1 Technical Background
For mechanically stressed components, the guideline al- The basis of the guideline are the references listed on
lows an analytical assessment of the static strength and of page 6, in particular the former TGL standards, the former
the fatigue strength, the latter in the form of an assessment VDI Guideline 2226 and the regulations of DIN 18800,
of the fatigue limit, the fatigue strength for finite life or the DIN 4113-2, the IIW recommendations as well as Euro-
variable amplitude fatigue strength, depending on the ser- codes 3 and 9. Based on the results of more recent re-
vice stress conditions. Other analytical assessments, for search, the guideline has been further developed to comply
example of stability, of safety against brittle fracture (for with the current state of knowledge.
deep temperatures or pulse loads) or of deformation under
load as well as experimental strength assessments are not
subject of this guideline. 0.2 Required assessments
The guideline is valid for components of iron or aluminum In the case of static loading, the assessment of the static
materials—including cases of elevated temperatures— strength is sufficient. In the case of fatigue loading, the
produced by milling, forging, casting, with or without combined assessment of both the static and the fatigue
machining, or by welding. In detail, it applies to: strength is always required; the respective higher degree of
utilization is relevant. In performing this method, the as-
– components with geometrical notches; sessment of the static strength shall be performed based on
– components with welded joints; either the maximum stress of the cyclic stress history or
based on the constant stress of a special load case. It shall
– static loading; be decided
– fatigue loading from about 104 constant or variable – which cross-sections or reference points of the compo-
amplitude cycles onwards; nent shall be assessed for strength and
– milled and forging steel, including stainless steel, cast – which service loadings shall be considered in determin-
iron materials as well as wrought or cast aluminum al- ing the stress.
loys;
The service loadings shall be specified to be on the safe
– component temperatures side and to be higher than most of the normally occurring
from 40°C to 500°C for steel, loadings with a sufficient probability. As a rule, no quanti-
fication of the required probability is possible. The strength
from 25°C to 500°C for cast iron materials and values for the assessment of both the static and the fatigue
from 25°C to 200°C for aluminum materials; strengths are to correspond to a probability of survival of
PÜ = 97,5 %.
– a non-corrosive environment.
The points of reference are those points in the components
In accordance with the material standards taken into con- where the degrees of utilization are highest, i.e. those with
sideration, the maximum material strength is the highest quotients of stress and strength. In special cir-
Rm = 1 250 MPa for steel (30CrNiMo8 in accordance with cumstances, several potential points of fatigue crack initia-
EN 10083-1) and 610 MPa for aluminum (AlZnMgCu0,5 tion shall be evaluated in order to determine the highest
in accordance with EN AW-7049A). The field of applica- degree of utilization of the component.
tion of the algorithms in this guideline may be extended
with caution to tensile strengths of Rm = 1 600 MPa for The component static strength is not necessarily deter-
mined by failure occurring at a notch cross-section. In-
steel. It is not yet possible to state a higher limit for alumi-
stead, global failure occurring at a different, possibly un-
num. If an application of the guideline is outside the men-
notched or moderately notched cross-section of the com-
tioned fields of application, additional specifications shall
ponent may be possible as well, Figure 0.2-1.
be agreed upon.
Kt,A
The guideline is not applicable if a strength assessment in Kt,B<<Kt,A
accordance with other standards, rules or guidelines is A
required or if specific calculation documents are available, B
for example for screw connections.
F F
It is presupposed that the components have been profes-
sionally produced with regard to design, material and
workmanship, and that they are technically without fault. Figure 0.2-1: Different cross-sections for local failure (A)
and global failure (B)
0.3 Stresses and component types 11 0 General survey

0.3 Stresses and component types At the reference point, the nominal stress types axial load
(Szd), bending (Sb), shear (Ts) and torsion (Tt) are taken
0.3.1 Characteristic service stresses into consideration depending on the acting section sizes.
The stresses shall be determined at the reference point,
based on the component loads. Components may be rod-,
shell- or block-shaped. Furthermore, a differentiation be-
tween non-welded and welded components shall be made
with regard to the considered reference point.
The stresses shall be determined analytically using elemen-
tary or advanced methods of theoretical mechanics or nu-
merically applying the finite element or the boundary ele-
ment method, or experimentally by measurement. When
calculating the stresses, linear elastic material behavior is
assumed. Figure 0.3-1: Rod-shaped non-welded component (round
bar with groove). Nominal stress in bending Sb, maximum
All stresses, including the stress amplitudes, are initially
combined with a sign. Compressive stresses are negative. local stress ımax at the reference point W
The sign of the stress amplitudes, however, plays a role
only in the case of the superposition of several stress com- The separate consideration of the individual stress types
ponents. As far as a pure strength calculation is concerned, (axial load, bending, shear, torsion) in the assessment of
the amplitudes are assumed to be positive. the nominal stress is due to the fact that this way, when
using a system of main axes for the cross-section,
The stresses existing at the reference point can be deter-
mined as: – the calculation of the plastic notch factors in the as-
sessment of the static strength and
– nominal stresses S and T, or as
– the calculation of the related stress gradient in the as-
– local stresses V and W. sessment of the fatigue strength
Correspondingly, the component strength values (critical are a major simplification covering important applications.
stresses) shall be determined as: In the case of complicated cross-sections, e.g. thin-walled
– nominal strength values or closed or open, where such simplifications are no longer
possible, or where no system of main axes is used, the
– local strength values. assessment should be performed using local stresses.
Shell-shaped components exhibit an approximately plane
0.3.2 Nominal stresses stress state. In accordance with the elementary theory of
plates and shells, a stress distribution which is linearly
Nominal stresses can be determined for rod- and for shell- variable over the thickness is assumed, which does not take
shaped components, in most cases applying the elementary into consideration the local peak stresses occurring at ge-
equations of technical mechanics. The main characteristics ometrical discontinuities, Figure 0.3-2. In the direction of
of nominal stresses are as follows: the shell surface, on the other hand, there is usually a vari-
– reference to a defined cross-section of the component; able stress distribution (local nominal stress). Analogously
to the bar, different stress types can be allocated to the
– neglect of the local peak stresses occurring as a result length-related section sizes here as well.
of geometrical notches or load applications.
Geometrical notches may be cross-sectional steps and
knees (in the case of rod-shaped components) or thickness
steps, knees and branchings (in the case of shell-shaped
components). The nominal stress is linearly distributed
across the cross-section of the component.

0.3.2.1 Non-welded components

The main field of application of nominal stresses are rod-
shaped components. Here, a component-related coordinate Figure 0.3-2: Shell-shaped non-welded component (plate
system according to Figure 0.3-1 applies, where the branching); nominal stresses due to bending (Sb), axial
– x-axis corresponds with the longitudinal axis of the rod load (Szd—membrane stress) and shear (Ts) at the
and reference point W do not comprise the local peak stress; in
– the y- and z-axes correspond with the main axes of the addition, a normal stress may act in parallel to the
cross-section. reference area (SII)
0.3 Stresses and component types 12 0 General survey

The representation of the nominal stress assessment in this – the principle stresses V1 and V2 in the direction of the
guideline is performed by means of rod-shaped compo- component surface as well as V3 normal to the surface.
nents. In the case of shell-shaped components, this ap-
Principle stress V3 occurs only when an external load
proach may be used analogously by considering the corre-
sponding reference surface (shear lag effect). If there is an acts on the surface at the reference point.
additional normal stress acting in the direction of the refer-
ence surface (SII), it shall be considered in addition—in the
same manner as with the general plane stress state—when
computing the equivalent degree of utilization.

0.3.2.2 Welded components

As a rule, welded components consist of shell-shaped
parts, e.g. rolled sections joined by butt or fillet welds, or Figure 0.3-3: Local stress components at the reference
plates, disks and shells connected by butt or fillet welds. point; left side: in relation to a Cartesian coordinate
As they are (ideally) rod-shaped components, they can be system x,y,z situated in the component surface; right side:
computed using nominal stresses. As is the case with non- as principle stresses V1, V2, V3
welded components, the calculation of the nominal stress
in the weld is performed based on the section sizes, but The following specification applies to the procedure of the
using the characteristic values for the cross-section of the assessment of the static strength:
weld. – For ductile materials (rolled and forging steel, GS,
wrought aluminum alloys), the stresses can be comput-
ed by both methods, either in relation to a Cartesian
0.3.3 Local stresses coordinate system as Vx, Vy and W, or as principle
Local stresses are calculated based on a linear-elastic mate- stresses V1, V2 and V3.
rial model.
– For semi-ductile and brittle materials (GJS, GJM, GJL
and cast aluminum alloys) of different tensile and com-
0.3.3.1 Non-welded components pressive strength, the assessment is always performed
based on the principle stresses V1, V2 and V3.
Local stresses comprise the peak stresses resulting from
geometrical notches. In cases where it is possible to define
a reference cross-section, they can also be computed by
multiplying the nominal stress with the stress concentration
factor. Usually, however, the calculation is performed
numerically based on the finite element method and using
the relevant solid models which shall realistically reflect
the component geometry. The global component shape
(rod, shell or block) is no longer of importance for the
determination and evaluation of the stress. What is decisive
is the local stress state at the reference point or in its vicini-
ty.
It is pre-supposed that the critical reference points occur at
the surface of the component. In the absence of external
loads, the stress state at the component surface is plane. At
the reference point, the following local coordinate system
applies:
– the x- and the y-axes are in the surface;
– the z-axis is normal to the surface and directed towards
the inside of the component.
The local stress values used in this guideline are as fol-
lows, see Figure 0.3-3:
– the stresses Vx, Vy and W = Wxy within the surface; nor-
mal and shear stresses in the z-direction are to be negli-
gible, or
0.3 Stresses and component types 13 0 General survey

0.3.4 Uniaxial and multiaxial stresses

0.3.3.2 Welded components
The stresses occurring at the reference point are the result
Local stresses in welded components take the form of of one single load or of several loads acting simultaneous-
structural stresses (local nominal stresses, geometrical ly. In both cases, either uniaxial or multiaxial stresses can
stresses, at the maximum hot-spot value) or as elastic notch occur at the reference point.
stresses.
Uniaxial stresses occur for example in a tension loaded
prismatic bar or at unloaded edges of shell- and block-
shaped components, even if several loads act simultane-
ously. In addition, uniaxial stresses may be assumed if any
further stress components are small.

Assessment of the static strength

For the assessment of the static strength, the most unfavor-
able case shall be assumed regarding the superposition of
the individual stress types or stress components.

Assessment of the fatigue strength

Figure 0.3-4: Shell-shaped welded component For the assessment of the fatigue strength (assessment of
fatigue limit, the fatigue strength for finite life and the
Example: Strap with longitudinal stiffener. According to variable amplitude fatigue strength), stresses varying with
Radaj /16/. time shall be differentiated between as follows:
Top: Weld joint, Centre: Stress history, Bottom: Profile. Relevant – proportional stresses;
is the stress at the reference point W (in this case at the toe of the
weld). – synchronous stresses;
Calculation using nominal stresses: Stress Sx. – non-proportional stresses.
Calculation using structural stresses: Maximum stress ıx,max
occurring directly in front of the weld, obtained from extrapolat-
ing the stress history towards the weld (can also be determined by Proportional stresses
way of approximation, based on the branching point of structural Usually, proportional stresses result from a single load
and notch stresses).
acting on the component.
Calculation using effective notch stresses: Maximum stress
ıK,max occurring at the weld. Examples of proportional multiaxial stresses are the cir-
cumferential and the longitudinal stresses occurring under
loading of a cylindrical vessel by internal pressure or the
bending and torsional stresses influencing a clamped cy-
lindrical bar acted upon eccentrically by a single load.
If a single load varies with time, all multiaxial stresses are
proportional to that load and to each other, i.e. also with
regard to their amplitudes and their mean values. This
results in constant principle stress directions. The absolute
values of the stresses, also in the stress spectra of the am-
Figure 0.3-5: Shell-shaped welded component plitudes, may be converted using constant factors. The
Example: Cruciform joint and butt weld. According to Radaj /16/.
spectra of all stresses are similar, except for their height.

Calculation using effective notch stresses: The maximum stress Proportional multiaxial stresses also result from several
ıK,max occurring in the weld shall be computed by introducing a loads acting proportionally on the component.
ficticious notch radius r = 1 mm for notch radii r < 1 mm. For proportional multiaxial stresses, the strength hypothe-
sis given in Chapters 2.6 and 4.6 is applicable if the related
rules of signs are observed.
0.3 Stresses and component types 14 0 General survey

Synchronous stresses Non-proportional stresses

Synchronous stresses are a simple case of non-proportional Non-proportional stresses result from the action of at least
stresses: The amplitudes are proportional, the mean values two loads that vary with time in a different manner. In
are non-proportional. general, different load or stress spectra, respectively, apply
to the individual loads and the resulting stresses.
Synchronous multiaxial stresses result e.g. from a com-
bined action of a load that is varying with time and a con- In the general case of non-proportional multiaxial stresses,
stant load. Examples are a shaft under rotating bending the absolute values and directions of the principle stresses
load and non-changing torsional load or a long, lying cy- vary with time.
lindrical vessel under pulsating internal pressure: the longi-
In this guideline, an adapted strength hypothesis is applied
tudinal stress is non-proportional to the circumferential
to evaluate non-proportional stresses in the case of nominal
stress because of the bending stress being additively over-
stresses, Chapter 2.6.
laid and resulting from the dead weight.
In the general case of local stresses, variable principle
For synchronous multiaxial stresses, the strength hypothe-
stress directions cannot be covered by the strength hypoth-
sis given in Chapters 2.6 and 4.6 is approximately correct
esis given in Chapter 4.6.
in terms of material-mechanics, provided the related rules
of signs are observed, because it is applied to the propor- The material-mechanics based methods of calculation
tional amplitudes and because the fatigue strength is main- developed specially for this case require a great deal of
ly determined by the amplitudes computing effort and are applicable with computer pro-
grams only. Therefore, in the guideline, only a rough ap-
proximate way of calculation considered safe can be given
for this case, Chapter 4.6.
In doing so, it shall be kept in mind that the critical refer-
ence points of the component can differ for the individual
load combinations. This means that, for non-proportional
stresses, several critical reference points may have to be
considered. The assessment should be performed in the
direction of the critical section plane, Chapter 4.6.
According to the current state of the art, an experimental
assessment of the fatigue strength should be performed,
particularly in the case of high safety requirements, in
order to enable a more precise evaluation of the compo-
nent.
0.4 Procedure of calculation 15 0 General survey

0.4 Procedure of calculation In Figures 0.4-1 and 0.4-2, the arrangement of the individ-
ual calculation elements (top-down) illustrates the possible
The procedure of calculation at a reference point is pre- time-related procedure of calculation.
sented in Figure 0.4-1 for the assessment of the static
strength and in Figure 0.4-2 for the assessment of the fa- The guideline has four main chapters, Figure 0.4-3:
tigue strength. The general procedure of the assessments is – assessment of the static strength using nominal stresses,
the same for non-welded and for welded reference points Chapter 1;
as well as for nominal stresses and local stresses.
– assessment of the fatigue strength using nominal stress-
es, Chapter 2;
– assessment of the static strength using local stresses,
Chapter 3;
– assessment of the fatigue strength using local stresses,
Chapter 4.

Figure 0.4-1: Procedure of the assessment of the static

strength
Figure 0.4-3: Structure of the guideline

The procedure of calculation is completely described in

each of the four main chapters in accordance with Fig-
ures 0.4-1 and 0.4-2, although this results in repetitions of
identical or nearly identical text segments.
Nominal stresses are only used for rod-shaped compo-
nents.
Local stresses shall be applied:
– for shell- and block-shaped components;
– if there are no well-defined cross-sections;
– if stress concentration factors or fatigue notch factors
are not known;
– in combination with an FE or boundary element meth-
od (with linear-elastic material model);
– when performing an assessment of the static strength
for brittle materials or in the case of severe notches.

Figure 0.4-2: Procedure of the assessment of the fatigue

strength

The assessment consists of the individual modules present-

ed above so that one after the other the characteristic val-
ues for the material, the design and the service stress con-
ditions result in the component strength. The assessment is
performed by calculating the degree of utilization, together
with the existing stress and a required safety factor.
The assessment of strength is successful if the degree of
utilization of the component material properties by the
characteristic service stress is 100 % max.
1.0 General 16 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1 Assessment of the static W: The assessment shall be performed using the stresses
strength using nominal stresses in the primarily stressed welds (SA, T__). The relevant fac-
tors are the critical stresses in the weld.
1.0 General The assessment of the weld is not required for secondarily
stressed welds (no force flow through the weld) as well as
In this chapter, the assessment of the static strength using
for welds subject only to a stress acting in parallel with the
nominal stresses is carried out for rod-shaped components.
weld (S__).
The procedure can be transferred correspondingly to other
components, provided a meaningful nominal cross-section Softening aluminum materials
can be specified. Examples are a thin-walled internally
pressurized vessel or cases where, in general, a reference HAZ (BM): Two cases shall be differentiated between
cross-section is specified in a shell-shaped component by in terms of the position of the HAZ with regard to the bar
taking the shear lag effect into consideration. cross-section. In both cases, the types of stress (Szd, Sb, Ts,
Tt) are calculated in the same way as for a non-welded
The assessment of the static strength using nominal stress-
es is permissible if component.

– the stress concentration factor is not too high, the ap- Case a) The cross-section is part of the HAZ
proximate limit value is Kt = 5;

– the material has sufficient ductility.

In this guideline, the ductility of the material is evaluated
based on the elongation at break A; the limit value is
A t 6 %. This way, the assessment of the static strength For BM and HAZ, a common assessment is performed.
using nominal stresses can be performed for The HAZ is taken into consideration in calculating the
– milled and forging steel, GS; strength (critical nominal stress). Analogously with
DIN 4113, the effective cross-sectional parameters are
– grades GJS, GJM and aluminum materials (wrought or taken into consideration based on an effective softening
cast alloys) of a high elongation at break A t 6 %. factor UW.
In other cases as well as for shell- and block-shaped com- Case b) The cross-section comprises either only the BM
ponents, the assessment of the static strength shall be per- or only the HAZ
formed in accordance with Chapter 3, using local stresses.
Surface treatment
The assessment of the static strength using nominal stress-
es is only permissible for mechanical surface treatment
(e.g. shot peening, cold rolling) if the before-mentioned
conditions are fulfilled.
In cases of components with chemo-thermal or thermal BM and HAZ shall be assessed separately. In the case of
surface hardening, the assessment of the static strength identical cross-sectional dimensions, the assessment of the
shall be performed in accordance with Chapter 3 using HAZ is relevant. Softening is taken into consideration
local stresses. based on the softening factor of the material UWEZ.

Welded components W: The assessment shall be performed using the stresses

in the primarily stressed welds (SA, T__).
When assessing the static strength of a weld joint, the
general areas to be differentiated between are the base The assessment of the weld is not required for secondarily
material (BM), the heat affected zone (HAZ) and the weld stressed welds (no force flow through the weld) as well as
(W). The HAZ shall only be taken into consideration in the for welds subject only to a stress acting in parallel with the
case of surface treated or hardened aluminum materials weld (S__).
exhibiting reduced tensile strength and yield strength under
the influence of temperature (softening). In detail, the For all required assessments (BM, HAZ, W), the first step
following areas shall be assessed at a weld joint: consists in separately assessing the stress types by means
of calculating a degree of utilization. Afterwards, superpo-
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials sition is performed by calculating an equivalent degree of
BM: The assessment shall be performed in the same way utilization.
as for a non-welded component, using the types of stress For welded components and material groups such as condi-
(Szd, Sb, Ts, Tt) in the base material. tionally weldable steel, stainless steel and weldable cast
iron materials, the calculation is provisional and may be
applied with caution only.
1.1 Characteristic service stresses 17 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

Elevated temperature ed or whether several points in the cross-section are over-

laid by the stress values existing there.
In the case of elevated temperatures, the assessment of the
static strength for the maximum stress values Smax and Tension (sign +) and compression (sign –), including those
Smin shall generally be performed as follows: due to bending loads, shall be considered separately for
materials with different tensile and compressive strengths.
a) In each case, i.e for both short-term and long-term Otherwise, as well as for shear and torsion, the respectively
action of elevated temperatures, the assessment shall first higher absolute stress value is relevant.
be performed using the short-term strength values (strength
at elevated temperature, yield strength at elevated tempera-
ture), Chapter 1.2.1.7. 1.1.1 Non-welded components
b) In the case of a long-term combined action of maxi- In general, the following stress types act in the cross-
mum stress and elevated temperature, an additional as- section of a rod-shaped component: one axial stress (ten-
sessment using the long-term strength values (creep sion or compression), two bending stresses, two shear
strength, 1 % creep limit) shall be performed, Chap- stresses and one torsional stress:
ter 1.2.1.7.
Szd = Fzd/A
This applies to a long-term acting stress Smax which is
constant over time. Otherwise the assessment is on the safe Sby = Mby/Wby
side, as the absolute values of the stresses are usually lower
Sbz = Mbz/Wbz
than Smax or Smin. The reason for this is that, in the case of
(1.1.1)
stresses which vary with location or time, the maximum Tsy = Qsy · Sy/(Iby · t)
values act only very limitedly or over a short period of
time. Tsz = Qsz · Sz/(Ibz · t)

c) Instead of b), the assessment can be carried out using Tt = Mt/Wt

the mean stress value Sm and the long-term strength values
Fzd axial force in the x-direction
to obtain a rough approximate result.
(longitudinal force);
Mby, Mbz bending moment around the y- or
1.1 Characteristic service stresses the z-axis, respectively;
1.1.0 General Qsy, Qsz transverse force in the y- or z-direction,
In accordance with this chapter, the required characteristic respectively;
nominal stress values shall be specified seperately for non- Mt torsional moment;
welded and for welded components.
A cross-sectional area;
In general, there are different acting stress types: axial
stress (tension or compression) Szd, bending stress Sb, Wby, Wbz section modulus against bending around the
shear stress Ts and torsional stress Tt. The relevant factors y- or z-axis, respectively;
are their maximum and minimum values (Smax, Smin or Iby, Ibz moment of inertia against bending around
Tmax, Tmin, respectively) for: the y- or z-axis, respectively;
– the most unfavorable operating conditions; Sy, Sz static moment of the cut-off cross-
– special load cases according to specification or due to sectional area;
physical limits. t cross-sectional width;
The values of Smax, Smin or Tmax, Tmin, respectively, shall Wt section modulus against torsion.
at least correspond with the extreme values of a generally
varying stress history for which an assessment of the fa- x,y,z is a component-related coordinate system
tigue strength shall be carried out. By including special (main axes system, Figure 0.3-1).
load cases, however, they can assume higher values as the
special load cases do not necessarily have to be taken into
consideration in the assessment of the fatigue strength.
In overlaying the individual stress types, the most unfavor-
able case is relevant. If the locations of the maximum
stresses in the cross-section do not coincide (e.g. maximum
bending stress and maximum shear stress), it shall be de-
cided in each case whether the maximum values are over-
laid at different points, whether one stress may be neglect-
1.1 Characteristic service stresses 18 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1.1.2 Welded components stress parallel to the weld and T__—shear stress parallel to
the weld.
1.1.2.0 General
Component S__ is not used for the assessment of the static
As a rule, welded rod-shaped components consist of indi-
vidual sheets connected or joined by means of butt welds strength.
or fillet welds (thin-walled open or closed cross-sections). Alternatively, the shear stresses TA occurring in fillet
As far as the position of the weld with regard to the rod welds can be regarded as normal stresses SA, Figure 1.1-2:
axis is concerned, two cases are taken into consideration,
for examples see Figure 1.1-1: SA { TA (1.1.2)
a) W longitudinal to the rod axis In the following, SA is used for the calculation.
b) W transverse to the rod axis

Figure 1.1-2: Stress in the fillet weld regarded as normal

stress SA or as shear stress TA

Example: Axial force Fzd.

With regard to the stress component SA, a differentiation is

made between the section size-related stress types as in the
case with non-welded components. This facilitates the
calculation of a plastic notch factor for any cross-section.
As no shear plasticization is allowed due to the thin-walled
Figure 1.1-1: Examples of welds in rod-shaped cross-sections, the shear component does not have to be
components, illustrating possible stress components in the divided.
weld (W) Thus, the following stress types shall be determined for the
assessment of the static strength of the weld:
In other cases, e.g. sloped welds, it is recommended to SA,zd – normal stress perpendicular to the
perform the assessment in accordance with chapter 3, using
weld, resulting from axial load (longitudinal
local stresses. force), Fzd;
As is the case with non-welded components, usually six SA,by – normal stress perpendicular to the
section forces and moments (influence lines) act in the weld, resulting from bending around the y-
cross-section of the rod-shaped component: Fzd, Mby, Mbx, axis, Mby;
Qsy, Qsz and Mt. From these, the relevant stress types shall SA,bz – normal stress perpendicular to the
be calculated for the respective areas required in accord- weld, resulting from bending around the z-
ance with Clause 1.0 (BM, HAZ, W). axis, Mbz;
T|| – shear stress parallel to the weld, result-
ing from the combination of the transverse
1.1.2.1 Base material BM and heat affected zone
forces Qsy, Qsz and the torsional moment Mt.
HAZ
For the BM and the HAZ, the nominal stresses shall be The calculation of the listed stress types is also performed
calculated in the same manner as for non-welded compo- in accordance with (1.1.1), but using the cross-sectional
nents, using the characteristic cross-sectional values of the values of the welds. The analytically derived weld areas
sheets, Eq. (1.1.1). result from the a-dimension along the root line (for fillet
welds) or from the existing weld thickness and length (for
butt welds). As is the case with the slope of the cutting area
1.1.2.2 Weld W for fillet welds, no weld overfill is taken into consideration
for butt welds.
With regard to the weld line, as a first step a differentiation
shall be made between the following stress components:
SA—normal stress perpendicular to the weld, S__—normal
1.2 Material properties 19 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1.2 Material properties

1.2.0 General
In accordance with this chapter, the required material
strength values tensile strength Rm, yield strength Rp and
further characteristic values shall be determined separately
for non-welded and for welded components. The term
yield strength is used as a generalized term for the yield
stress (of milled and forging steel) and the 0.2 proof stress
(of nodular cast iron, malleable cast iron and aluminum
materials).
If in this chapter values are given for GJM, GJL and cast Figure 1.2-1: Standard values and standard component
aluminum alloys, they are needed for the assessment of the values
fatigue strength in accordance with Chapter 2. The assess-
ment of the static strength for these material groups shall Standard specimen diameter, d0;
be carried out in accordance with Chapter 3, using local Standard values Rm,N and Rp,N at deff,N;
stresses. In such cases it is recommended, however, to Values according to the drawings Rm,Z and Rp,Z at deff;
additionally perform the assessment of the fatigue strength Standard component values Rm and Rp at deff.
in accordance with Chapter 4, using local stresses. All material groups except GJL: semi-logarithmic decrease of the
strength values with the effective diameter deff. GJL: double-
logarithmic decrease of the strength values with deff.
1.2.1 Non-welded components
1.2.1.0 General
1.2.1.2 Standard component values
All material strength values apply to the material specimen
of a diameter d0 = 7,5 mm. Standard values for semi- The standard component values Rm, Rp are valid for the
finished products (deff,N) and component values (deff) shall effective component diameter deff and have the same prob-
be distinguished. Examples of component values are ability of survival as Rm,N, Rp,N, i.e. PÜ = 97,5 %.
standard values, values according to the drawings or actual
Rm and Rp may be used for an assessment of strength valid
values, Figure 1.2-1.
for the "entirety of all components" (not limited to a certain
Material specimen component).
The material specimen is an unnotched polished round The standard component values Rm, Rp can be calculated
specimen of a diameter d0 = 7,5 mm. Here, the calculated based on the standard values for semi-finished prod-
strength values apply, even if standard specimens for ten- ucts Rm,N, Rp,N or the component values according to the
sile tests have other diameters. drawings Rm,Z, Rp,Z.

Standard component values based on standard values

1.2.1.1 Standard values for semi-finished products for semi-finished products
The standard values for semi-finished products or the test Rm = Kd,m · KA · Rm,N (1.2.1)
piece (Rm,N, Rp,N) are valid for the effective diameter deff
Rp = Kd,p · KA · Rp,N
and have a probability of survival PÜ = 97,5 %.
Rm, Rp standard component values for tensile
Rm,N is the minimum value, the guaranteed value or the strength and yield strength;
lower limit of the range specified for the smallest size of Kd,m, Kd,p technological size factors, Chapter 1.2.1.4;
the semi-finished product (wrought alloys) or for the test KA anisotropy factor, Chapter 1.2.1.5;
piece (cast alloys) defined by the material standard. Rm,N, Rp,N standard values for semi-finished products or
Rp,N is the minimum value or the guaranteed value for the standard values for the test piece, respective-
smallest size of the semi-finished product or for the test ly, Chapter 5.1.
piece defined by the material standard. Standard component values based on component values
according to the drawings
Rm = 0,94 · Rm,Z (1.2.2)
Rm standard component value for tensile
strength;
Rm,Z component value according to the drawings.
1.2 Material properties 20 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

Rm,Z is the tensile strength of the component’s material GJL

required "according to the drawings". As Rm,Z is verified deff d 7,5 mm:
by random inspection only *1, it is assumed to have a Kd,m = Kd,p = 1,207 (1.2.4)
probability of survival of less than PÜ = 97,5 %, thus being deff ! 7,5 mm:
less safe. Rm,Z becomes the standard component value Rm Kd,m = Kd,p = 1,207 · (deff/7,5 mm)0,1922 (1.2.5)
only after conversion in accordance with (1.2.2).
Stainless steel
The yield strength Rp is calculated as follows:
Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 (1.2.6)
K d,p R p, N
Rp ˜ ˜R m (1.2.3) Other material groups
K d,m R m,N
deff d deff,N:
Kd,p, Kd,m technological size factors, Chapter 1.2.1.4;
Rp,N, Rm,N standard values for the semi-finished product Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 (1.2.7)
or standard values for the test piece, respec- deff ! deff,N:
tively, Chapter 5.1.
1  0,7686 ˜ a d,m ˜ lg(d eff / 7,5 mm)
The conversion in accordance with Eq. (1.2.3) takes into K d,m
consideration the different size effects of the tensile 1  0,7686 ˜ a d,m ˜ lg(d eff,N,m / 7,5 mm)
strength and the yield strength.
1  0,7686 ˜ a d, p ˜ lg(d eff / 7,5 mm)
K d, p (1.2.8)
1  0,7686 ˜ a d, p ˜ lg(d eff, N,p / 7,5 mm)
1.2.1.3 Actual component values
deff is valid within the ranges of dimensions given in the
If actual component values (Rm,I, Rp,I) for a particular
material standards.
component have been determined experimentally, the
strength assessment can be performed for that particular For milled steel no further strength drop is taken into con-
component (e.g. recalculation of consequences of failure, sideration above the limit deff,max = 250 mm.
safety factor jges = 1). This value applies to the particular
deff > deff,max = 250 mm:
component only, not for the "entirety of all components".
Kd = Kd (deff,max = 250 mm) (1.2.9)
If only the tensile strength Rm,I is known, the yield
deff effective diameter;
strength Rp,I can be calculated in accordance with
deff,N, ad Table 1.2.1 and Table 1.2.2, for Rm with
Eq. (1.2.3) (with Rm = Rm,I).
index m, for Rp with index p.

Aluminum material
1.2.1.4 Technological size factor
For wrought aluminum alloys the standard component
The technological size factor Kd in Eq. (1.2.1) accounts for values Rm and Rp are given in Chapter 5 as a function of
the decrease of the material strength values usually ob- the type of material and its condition and depending on the
served with increasing dimensions of the component. It is thickness or diameter of the semi-finished product, and the
valid within the ranges of dimensions given in the material technological size factor Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 applies.
standards, Figure 1.2-1.
For cast aluminum alloys the following technological size
Outside the scope of the material standards, agreements factor is valid for Rm and Rp.
shall be made between the involved parties.
The profile is described as Kd (deff,N, ad); more precisely,
deff d 12 mm:
Kd,m (deff,N,m, ad,m) for the tensile strength and Kd,p
Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 (1.2.10)
(deff,N,p, ad,p) for the yield strength.
12 mm < deff < 150 mm:
Steel and cast iron materials
Kd,m = Kd,p = 1,1 · (deff/7,5 mm)–0,2 (1.2.11)

1 Rm,Z is to be checked, for example, by three hardness meas- deff t 150 mm:
urements (n = 3). Each test value shall reach or exceed the re-
Kd,m = Kd,p = 0,6 (1.2.12)
quired value. The probability of survival of the lowest test value
is 25 % (1/(n1) = 1/(3  1) = 0,25); the probability of survival
for Rm,z is PÜ,Z = 75 %. The standard component value
PÜ = 97,5 % required for the strength assessment is smaller: with
a coefficient of variation of 4 %, Eq. (1.2.2) applies.

Effective diameter
1.2 Material properties 21 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

For components with a simple shape of the cross-section, —4 No technological size effect within the ranges of dimensions of the
the effective diameter deff is given in Table 1.2.3 as a func- material standards.
—5 For 28NiCrMoV8 5 and 33NiCrMo14 5: d =d =
tion of the cross-sectional shape. eff,N,m eff,N,p
500 mm or 1000 mm, respectively, with unchanged values ad,m and
The upper limit of deff is, in general, specified in the mate- ad,p.
rial standards; an exception is milled steel, Eq. (1.2.9).
Rod-shaped components made of heat treatable steel
For the specification of deff as a function of the material
deff depends on the processing sequence.
group, case 1 and case 2 shall be distinguished.
Case 1 a) machining subsequent to the heat treatment: deff equals
the largest diameter.
For components (including forgings) made of quenched
and tempered heat treatable steel, case hardening steel, b) machining prior to the heat treatment: deff equals the
nitriding steel—both nitrided or quenched and tempered—, local diameter.
heat treatable cast steels, GJS, GJM and GJL, deff accord-
The first case results in higher deff and lower Kd and is,
ing to Table 1.2.3, Case 1, applies.
therefore, on the safe side.
In general, the following applies:
Table 1.2.2 Constants deff,N,m, } and adm, } for cast
deff = 4 ˜ V/O (1.2.13) iron materials
V, O volume and surface of the considered cut-out Values in the respective upper row refer to Rm, while values in the lower
of the component. row refer to Rp.
Case 2 deff,N,m ad,m
Material group deff,N,p ad,p
For components (including forgings) made of non-alloyed
in mm
structural steel, fine grain structural steel, normalized heat
treatable steel, general cast steel and aluminum materials Cast steel in accordance 0,15
DIN EN 10293 with Table 5.1.10 0,3
deff according to Table 1.2.3, Case 2, applies.
Heat treatable cast steel in accordance 0,15
Table 1.2.1 Constants deff,N,m, } and adm, } for DIN EN 10293 —1 with Table 5.1.11 0,3
steel GJS 60 0,15
Values in the respective upper row refer to Rm, while values in the lower DIN EN 1563 60 0,15
row refer to Rp. GJM —2 15 0,15
DIN EN 1562 15 0,15
deff,N,m ad,m
—1 For G28Mn6, G34CrMo4 and G42CrMo4: a
Material group —1 deff,N,p ad,p d,m = 0,3.
in mm —2 —2 The values for GJM are not needed here, see Chapter 1.0. they are
Non-alloyed structural steel 40 0,15 needed, however, for the assessment of the fatigue strength.
DIN EN 10025 40 0,3
Table 1.2.3 Effective diameter deff
Fine grain structural steel 70 0,2
DIN 17102 40 0,3 deff deff
No. Cross-sectional shape
Case 1 Case 2
Fine grain structural steel 100 0,25
DIN EN 10113 30 0,3
Heat treatable steel, q&t 16 —3 0,3 1 d d
DIN EN 10083-1 16 0,4
Heat treatable steel, n 16 0,1
DIN EN 10083-1 16 0,2 2 2s s
Case hardening steel, bh 16 0,5
DIN EN 10084 16 0,5
Nitriding steel, q&t 40 0,25 3 2s s
DIN EN 10085 40 0,30
Stainless steel – –
DIN EN 10088-2 —4 – – 2b ˜ s
4 s
Steel for larger forgings, q&t 250 0,2 bs
SEW 550 —5 250 0,25
Steel for larger forgings, n 250 0
SEW 550 250 0,15 5 b b
—1 The material group is comprised of the material types.
—2 For more precise values depending on the material type (except for
non-alloyed structural steel) see Tables 5.1.2 to 5.1.7, 5.1.9.
—3 For 30CrNiMo8 and 36NiCrMo16: d = 40 mm, with un-
eff,N,m
changed values ad,m and ad,p.
1.2 Material properties 22 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1.2.1.5 Anisotropy factor Rc,m compression strength;

The anisotropy factor KA for Eq. (1.2.1), depending on the Rc,p yield strength in compression;
tensile strength, is the quotient of the material strength fV compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
transversely and longitudinally to the preferred direction of Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength,
processing. For milled steel and forgings (wrought alloys: Eqs. (1.2.1) to (1.2.3).
steel, aluminum) transverse to the preferred direction of
Shear strength factor
processing, KA in accordance with Table 1.2.4 applies.
The shear strength factor fW, Table 1.2.5, takes into consid-
Material strength values in accordance with Chapter 5
eration the difference between shear strength Rs,m and
The material strength values given in Chapter 5 are valid tensile strength Rm or between yield strength in shear Rs,p
for stresses longitudinally to the preferred direction of and yield strength Rp, respectively. Rs,m and Rs,p are not
processing. Here, the following applies:
explicitly required for the strength assessment; only fW is
KA = 1 (1.2.14) necessary and is used in Chapter 1.4 to calculate the static
component strength. In detail, the following applies:
Cast iron and cast aluminum alloys
Rs,m = fW · Rm
KA = 1 (1.2.15)
(1.2.19)
Rs,p = fW · Rp
Multiaxial stresses, including shear stress
Rs,m shear strength;
KA = 1 (1.2.16) Rs,p yield strength in shear;
Table 1.2.4 Anisotropy factor KA fW shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
Steel: Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength,
Rm up to 600 above above above Eqs. (1.2.1) to (1.2.3).
in MPa 600 and 900 and 1200 Table 1.2.5 Compression strength factor fV and shear
up to 900 up to
1200 strength factor fW
KA 0,90 0,86 0,83 0,80 fV fV fW
Material group for for compres-
Wrought aluminum alloys: tension sion
Case hardening
Rm up to 200 above above
steel
1 1 0,577—1
in Mpa 200 and 400 and
up to 400 up to 600 Stainless steel 1 1 0,577
Forging steel 1 1 0,577
KA 1 0,95 0,90 Other kinds of
1 1 0,577
steel
GS 1 1 0,577
1.2.1.6 Compression strength factor and shear GJS 1 1,3 0,65
strength factor GJM 1 1,5 0,75
Compression strength factor GJL 1 2,5 1,0—2
Wrought alumi-
The compression strength factor fV, Table 1.2.5, takes into num alloys
1 1 0,577
consideration the difference between tensile strength Rm Cast aluminum
1 1,5 0,75
and compression strength Rc,m or between yield alloys
strength Rp and yield strength in compression Rc,p, respec- —1 0,577 = 1 / 3 , in accordance with v. Mises criterion.
tively. Here, compression strength and yield strength in —2 in accordance with normal stress criterion.
compression are assumed to be positive, resulting in fV
being positive as well. Rc,m and Rc,p are not explicitely
required for the strength assessment; only fV is necessary 1.2.1.7 Temperature factors
and is used in Chapter 1.4 to calculate the static component The temperature factors allow for the fact that the material
strength. In detail, the following applies: strength decreases with an increasing temperature. The
short-term and long-term values Rm,T, Rp,T or Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt,
Tension or tension in bending:
are not explicitely required for the strength assessment;
fV = 1 (1.2.17) only the temperature factors KT,m, KT,p or KTt,m, KTt,p, are
Compression or compression in bending: necessary and are used in Chapter 1.5.
Rc,m = fV · Rm A differentiation shall be made between normal tempera-
Rc,p = fV · Rp (1.2.18) ture, low temperature and elevated temperature.
1.2 Material properties 23 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

Normal temperature – for GS, T > 100 °C:

KT,m = KT,p = 1 – 1,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100) (1.2.24)
Normal temperatures are as follows:
– for GJS, T > 100 °C:
– for fine grain structural steel from –40 °C to +60 °C; KT,m = KT,p = 1 – 2,4 ˜ (103 ˜ T/°C)2 (1.2.25)
– for other kinds of steel from –40 °C to +100 °C;
Eqs. (1.2.22) to (1.2.25) are valid starting from the indicat-
– for cast iron materials from –25 °C to +100 °C; ed temperature and up to 500 °C. For temperatures exceed-
ing approximately 350 °C they are generally valid only for
– for age-hardening auluminum alloys from –25 °C to
stresses acting for a short time. So far, no values are known
+50 °C;
for stainless steel.
– for non-age-hardening auluminum alloys from
Aluminum alloys
–25 °C to +100 °C.
– age-hardening auluminum alloys:
For normal temperatures, the temperature factors are as T > 50 °C, Figure 1.2-3
follows: KT,m = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 50); 0,1)
KT,m = } = 1. (1.2.20) KT,p = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 50); 0,1)
(1.2.26)
Low temperature – non-age-hardening auluminum alloys:
Low temperatures below the limits listed above are outside T > 100 °C, Figure 1.2-3
the scope of this guideline. When performing a strength KT,m = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100); 0,1)
assessment at low temperatures, the danger of brittle frac- KT,p = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100); 0,1)
ture shall be taken into consideration. (1.2.27)
Elevated temperature Eqs. (1.2.26) and (1.2.27) are valid starting from the indi-
In the case of elevated temperatures—up to 500 °C for cated temperature T up to 200 °C; in general this is appli-
steel and cast iron materials and up to 200 °C for alumi- cable only for stresses acting for a short time.
num materials—the influence of the temperature on the
strength values shall be taken into consideration. The ten-
sile strength Rm is replaced by the strength at elevated
temperature Rm,T or by the creep strength Rm,Tt. The yield
strength Rp is replaced by the yield strength at elevated
temperature Rp,T or by the 1 % creep limit Rp,Tt. The deci-
sion as to which of the mentioned values is relevant is
made at the assessment stage, taking the associated safety
factors into consideration.
For the short-term and long-term values Rm,T, Rp,T or
Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt, Eqs. (1.2.21) to (1.2.29) apply.

Short-term values
Rm,T = KT,m · Rm (1.2.21)
Rp,T = KT,p · Rp
KT,m, KT,p temperature factors, Eqs. (1.2.22) to (1.2.27);
Figure 1.2-2: Static strength values for non-alloyed
Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength, Eqs.
structural steel as a function of the temperature, plotted for
(1.2.1) to (1.2.3). comparison
Rm,T and Rp,T are not explicitly required for the strength
Rp/Rm = Re/Rm = 0,65
assessment, only KT,m and KT,p are necessary.
Rm,T/Rm = KT,m Rp,Tt/Rp = KT,p
Steel and cast iron materials Rm,Tt/Rm = KTt,m Rp,Tt/Rp = KTt,p
– fine grain structural steel, T > 60 °C: Rm,T, Rp,T as well as Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt for t = 105 h
(there is an insignificant discontinuity at T = 60 °C) Safety factors (Chapter 1.5):
jm = 2,0, jp = jmt = 1,5, jpt = 1,0.
KT,m = KT,p = 1 – 1,2 ˜ 103 ˜ T/°C, (1.2.22)
Long-term values
– other kinds of steel, except stainless steel Rm,Tt = KTt,m ˜ Rm
T > 100 °C, Figure 1.2-2: (1.2.28)
KT,m = KT,p = 1 – 1,7 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100) (1.2.23) Rp,Tt = KTt,p ˜ Rp
1.2 Material properties 24 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

KTt,m, KTt,p temperature factors, Figures 1.2-2 and 1.2-3, Aluminum materials
Eq. (1.2.29); For aluminum materials and t = 100 000 hours, KTt,m is
Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength,
given by Figure 1.2-4.
Eqs. (1.2.1) to (1.2.3).
Factor KTt,p has not been specified as yet. It may be as-
Steel and cast iron materials
sumed, however, that the quotient Rp,Tt/jpt—which is rele-
KTt,m and KTt,p as a function of T and t, Figure 1.2-2: vant for the assessment of the static strength—is more or
less equal to Rm,Tt/jmt, see Figure 1.2-2 (required safety
(Larsen-Miller parameter P and Larsen-Miller constant C)
2 factors jpt = 1,0 and jmt = 1,5). So far, it has not been pos-
(a Tt,m  b Tt,m ˜ Pm  c Tt,m ˜ Pm )
KTt,m = 10 sible to provide an equation for aluminum materials similar
(1.2.29) to Eqs. (1.2.29) which can be used to compute KTt,m and
( a Tt,p  b Tt,p ˜ Pp  c Tt,p ˜ Pp2 ) KTt,p as a function of temperature T and time t.
KTt,p = 10
Table 1.2.6 Constants aTt,m, }, Cp —1
Non-
Fine grain Heat
alloyed
Steel —2 structural
structural treatable
steel —4 steel —5
steel —3
Creep strength
aTt,m 0,994 1,127 3,001
bTt,m 2,485 2,485 3,987
cTt,m 1,260 1,260 1,423
Cm 20 20 24,27

Creep limit
aTt,p 5,019 6,352 3,252
bTt,p 7,227 9,305 5,942
cTt,p 2,636 3,456 2,728
Cp 20 20 17,71

Cast iron
Figure 1.2-3: Strength values for aluminum materials as a GS —6 GJS —7
materials
function of the temperature, plotted for comparison Creep strength
aTt,m 7,524 2,50
Static strength values:
bTt,m 9,894 1,83
Rm,T/Rm = KT,m = Rp,T/Rp = KT,p
cTt,m 3,417 0
Rm,Tt/Rm = KTt,m = Rp,T/Rp = KTt,p
Cm 19,57 20
Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt for t = 105 h.
Fatigue limit for completely reversed stress Creep limit
aTt,p 10,582 0,12
(for 106 cycles):
bTt,p 8,127 1,52
VW,zd/Rm = 0,30; VW,zd,T/VW,zd = KT,D.
cTt,p 1,607 1,28
Safety factors (Chapters 1.5 and 2.5):
Cp 35,76 18
jm = 2,0, jp = jmt = 1,5, jpt = 1,0, jD = 1,5.
—1 guideline values, valid starting from approximately 350 °C and up to
Pm = 104 · (T/°C + 273) · [Cm + lg(t/h)] 500 °C.
(1.2.30) —2 except for stainless steel.
Pp = 104 · (T/°C + 273) · [Cm + lg(t/h)]
—3 initially only for St 38, R = 360 MPa, approximately similar to St
aTt,m, }, Cp constants, Table 1.2.6 ; m
37.
T temperature [°C]; —4 initially only for H 52, R = 490 MPa, approximately similar to StE
m
t operating time [h] at T. 355; the absolute values Rm,Tt are the same as for St 38.
Eqs. (1.2.29) are valid for temperatures from approximate- —5 initially only for C 45 N (normalized) with R = 620 MPa. For C 35
m
ly 350 °C and up to 500 °C, but only for stresses acting for N, with Rm = 550 MPa, the constants –3,001 and –3,252 shall be re-
a long time. In general, they do not apply to temperatures placed by –2,949 and –3,198, the absolute values Rm,Tt and Rp,Tt are
below approximately 350 °C (this could lead to unrealistic the same as for C 45 N.
results); here the short-term values KT,m and KT,p are rele- —6 initially only for GS-C 25 with R = 440 MPa.
m
vant instead. —7 initially only for GGG-40 with R = 423 MPa.
m
1.3 Design parameters 25 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

Material fW
Steel, BM 0,577
Aluminum, BM, HAZ 0,577

The difference between shear and tensile strength for the

weld W is specified based on the weld factor Dw,W in ac-
cordance with Chapter 1.3 and not based on the shear
strength factor fW.

Figure 1.2-4: Temperature factor KTt,m = Rm,Tt/Rm for 1.2.2.4 Temperature factors
aluminum materials and 100 000 hours Temperature factors KT,m,} as in Chapter 1.2.1.7.

The curve is the same as in Figure 1.2-3, except for the

factor (1/jm). 1.2.2.5 Softening factor
In the case of welded components made of aluminum,
particularly strain hardened or heat treated alloys, the heat
1.2.2 Welded components
introduced by welding can result in a considerable reduc-
1.2.2.0 General tion of the static strength. In terms of analysis, this strength
reduction is taken into consideration by the softening fac-
All material strength values are valid for the dimensions
tor
given in the material tables for the base material BM, Ta-
bles 5.1.24 and 5.1.25. The technological size factor Kd UWEZ ” 1 (1.2.31)
and the anisotrophy factor KA are omitted in the case of
in accordance with Table 5.1.25, analogously to DIN 4113.
welded components.
Comment: The resulting strength reduction of aluminum
For material groups such as conditionally weldable steel is higher for the yield strength Rp than for the tensile
and stainless steel as well as for cast iron and cast alumi-
num, the calculation is provisional and may be applied strength Rm. The values for UWEZ given in Table 5.1.25
with caution only. have been set such that, in combination with the different
safety factors for Rm and Rp, they result in the HAZ stress-
es permissible in accordance with DIN 4113. The mean
1.2.2.1 Static strength values for milled steel and values for the softening factor for all materials given in
cast steel Table 5.1.25 are as follows: UWEZ | 0,5 for Rp,
Tensile strength Rm and yield stress Re for the base materi- UWEZ | 0,68 for Rm and UWEZ | 0,62 as the mean value
al BM in welded components made of milled steel and cast for the analytical strength assessment.
steel, as a function of the thickness of the product in ac-
cordance with DIN 18800, see Table 5.1.24.
1.2.2.2 Static strength values for aluminum
Static strength values tensile strength Rm and 0.2 proof
stress Rp0.2 for the base material BM in welded compo-
nents made of aluminum, as a function of the semi-finished
product and the material state in accordance with
DIN 4113, see Table 5.1.25.

1.2.2.3 Compression strength factor and shear

strength factor
Compression strength factor fV in accordance with Ta-
ble 1.2.5, shear strength factor fW in accordance with Ta-
ble 1.2.7.
Table 1.2.7 Shear strength factor fW for base material
BM and heat affected zone HAZ in welded components
1.3 Design parameters 26 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1.3 Design parameters The following section factors npl may be taken into con-
sideration:
1.3.0 General
Austenitic steel in the solution annealed condition
In accordance with this chapter, the required design pa-
rameters shall be calculated individually, separately for npl,by = Kp,by
non-welded and for welded components. In general, the npl,bz = Kp,bz (1.3.1)
following design parameters shall be differentiated be-
tween: npl,t = Kp,t
npl: section factor to make best use of the load- Kp,by, } plastic notch factor, Table 1.3.2.
bearing reserves once the elastic limit load Due to the high ductility, only the limit load and not the
has been exceeded by means of the permis- strain criterion is considered.
sible partial or total plasticization of full
component cross-sections; Other ductile materials
DW: weld factor to reduce the strength of the For steel and cast steel as well as cast iron materials (GJS,
weld as compared with the adjacent material GJM), wrought and cast aluminum alloys with A t 6 %,
(BM or HAZ); the following applies:
UW: effective softening factor to cover the pro-
portional effect of the HAZ. UW is only re- npl,by = MIN ( Rp,max / Rp ; Kp,by)
quired for case a) The cross-section is part
of the HAZ in accordance with Chapter 1.0, npl,bz = MIN ( Rp,max / Rp ; Kp,bz) (1.3.2)
for softening aluminum alloys.
The design factors shall be determined separately for the npl,t = MIN ( Rp,max / Rp ; Kp,t)
respective existing stress type; in the case of welded com- Rp,max constant in accordance with (1.3.3) or Ta-
ponents, they shall be determined separately for the con- ble 1.3.1;
sidered areas (BM, HAZ, W). Rp yield strength, Chapter 1.2;
Kp,by, } plastic notch factor, Table 1.3.2.
1.3.1 Non-welded components MIN means that the respectively smaller value is relevant.
1.3.1.1 Section factor Constant Rp,max
The pre-requisite for using a section factor npl is an inho- In general, the ficticious yield strength Rp,max is calculated
mogeneous distribution of the nominal stresses (stress as follows:
gradient) in the cross-section, Figure 1.3-1. npl is limited
by reaching the plastic limit load or the critical local strain. E ˜ İ ertr
Rp,max
K 2t
(1.3.3)
E Young's modulus, Table 1.3.1;
Hertr critical strain, Table 1.3.1;
Kt stress concentration factor.

For stress concentration factors in the range Kt d 3, Rpmax

may also be specified in a generalized manner in accord-
ance with Table 1.3.1.
Table 1.3.1 Critical strain Hertr, Young's modulus E and
generalized specification of Rp,max for stress concentration
factors Kt d 3
Wrought
Figure 1.3-1: Definition of the section factor, using the Material Steel, Cast alumi-
GJS GJM aluminum
example of bending an unnotched or a notched bar group GS num alloys
alloys
Rp,max
Bending moment Mb, yield strength Rp, static component
[MPa] 1150 750 400 400 150
strength in bending SSK,b, section factor npl,b = SSK,b/Rp.
(Kt d 3)
Thin straight line: fictitious distribution of the nominal E in
2,1 1,7 1,8 0,7 0,7
stresses calculated elastically; solid angular polygonal 105 MPa
line: nominal stress distribution in the case of elastic ideal- Hertr 0,05 0,04 0,02 0,05 0,02
plastic material behavior.
1.3 Design parameters 27 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

For materials with a yield strength Rp d Rp,max, (1.3.2) Due to the fact that the hardening has been neglected, the
results in nominal stress section factors npl t 1. In the case calculated limit load—and thus also the plastic notch fac-
tor—become increasingly conservative as the yield stress
of yield strengths Rp ! Rp,max, the assessment of the static
ratio Rp/Rm becomes smaller when compared with the real
strength should preferably be carried out in accordance
failure load. This is why—in order to calculate the plastic
with Chapter 3, using local stresses. The assessment using
limit load—the offset yield stress
nominal stresses, however, remains correct even if the Kt-
Kf ratio calculated according to Eq. (1.3.2) becomes small- Rp,ers = 0,5 · (Rp + Rm)
er than one. In that case, the relevant factor is the strain may be used if the yield stress ratio is Rp/Rm  0,75. Thus,
criterion, i.e. the radical in Eq. (1.3.2). The reason consists
as compared with Eq. (1.3.6), the plastic notch factor with-
in the fact that the assessment of the static strength based
out the offset yield stress increases by a factor of 0,5 · (1 +
on critical strains is originally a local assessment which has
Rm/Rp).
been converted to nominal stresses in this chapter.
Plastic notch factor Kp Mechanical surface treatment
In the case of mechanically surface treated components, npl
Table 1.3.2 Plastic notch factors Kp,b and Kp,t
shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. (1.3.1) or
Bending Torsion Eq. (1.3.2), in the same way as for non-surface treated
Cross-sectional shape
Kp,b Kp,t components.
Rectangle —1 1,5 –
Circle 1,70 —2 1,33 —3
Circular ring 1,27 —4 1—5
1.3.2 Welded components
I-section or box —6 – 1.3.2.1 Section factor
—1 or plate,
Taking a section factor into consideration for welded com-
—2 1,70 = 16/(3 ˜ S), ponents is only permissible in the following cases for
—3 1,33 = 4/3 stresses due to bending (BM/HAZ: Sby, Sbz; W: SAby,
—4 thin-walled, 1,27 = 4/S
SAbz):
—5 thin-walled; otherwise, the following applies:

1  (d / D)3 (1.3.4) – full penetration welds (including those welded on one

K p, t 1,33 ˜ side, if verifiable);
1  ( d / D) 4
d, D inner and outer diameters – in the case of welds without full penetration on both
2
—6 1  (b/B ) ˜ (h/H) sides but covering the whole cross-section (e.g. double
K p,b 1,5 ˜ (1.3.5)
fillet weld).
1  (b/B ) ˜ (h/H)3
b, B inner and outer widths, The section factors are the same for BM, HAZ and W. As
h, H inner and outer heights.
the section factors may only be taken into consideration in
For other cross-sectional shapes not listed in Table 1.3.2, the case of welds covering the cross-section, they may be
the section factors can generally be calculated based on the calculated based on the cross-sectional dimensions of the
following ratio: sheets.
plastic limit load For the shear stress (BM/HAZ: Tsy, Tsz, Tt; W: T__), no
Kp
elastic limit load (1.3.6) plasticization is allowed due to the thin-walled cross-
sections.
The pre-requisite for Kp ! 1 is a nominal stress gradient,
The following applies:
i.e. plastic notch factors for rod-shaped components exist-
ing in the case of the stress types bending and torsion. Milled steel and GS
For bending, the calculation may be performed as follows: npl,by = Kp,by
the elastic limit moment Me results from the elastic stress (1.3.7)
npl,bz = Kp,bz
distribution when the maximum nominal stress reaches the Kp,by, } plastic notch factor, Table 1.3.3.
yield strength, in general: Me = Rp · Wb. In order to calcu-
late the plastic limit moment, the cross-section shall be Other ductile materials
separated into a tension and a compression zone of equal
proportions, where the constant yield stress acts in the npl,by = MIN ( Rp,max / Rp ; Kp,by )
respective opposite direction. From this stress distribution, (1.3.8)
the plastic limit moment Mp results. Thus, Kp,b = Mp/Me npl,bz = MIN ( Rp,max / Rp ; Kp,bz )
applies. Rp,max constant, Table 1.3.1;
For torsion, proceed analogously. Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.24, Table 5.1.25;
Kp,by, } plastic notch factor, Table 1.3.3.
 28 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

Table 1.3.3 Plastic notch factors for welded components For butt joints in sectional steels of S235JR (obsolete:
(analogously with DIN 18800) St37-2) and S235JRG1 (obsolete: USt37-2) with t >
Bending 16 mm,
Cross-sectional shape
Kp,b Dw = 0,55
I, y-axis (transverse axis) 1,14
I, z-axis (vertical axis), plate 1,25 applies in the case of tensile stress.
box, y-axis —7 —8
circular ring 1,27 —9 1.3.2.3 Effective softening factor
—7 analogous for the z-axis
The effective softening factor UW takes into consideration
—8 1  (b/B) ˜ (h/H) 2 , but maximally 1,25 (1.3.9)
K p,b 1,5 ˜ the effect of the HAZ on the static strength for cases in
1  (b/B) ˜ (h/H) 3
which the HAZ does not cover the whole cross-sectional
b, B internal and external widths; h, H internal and external heights.
—9 thin-walled; 1,27 = 4/S area. This is why UW is only required in the case of soften-
ing aluminum materials, assessment HAZ, case a) The
For other cross-sections not listed in Table 1.3.3, the plas- cross-section is part of the HAZ, and only in combination
tic notch factors may be calculated in accordance with with the stress types tension and bending. In detail, the
Chapter 1.3.11, in the same way as for non-welded com- following applies:
ponents.
A WEZ
Special case of aluminum components ȡ w, zd 1  (1  ȡ WEZ ) ˜
A
For components made of aluminum alloys, the section
factors are initially calculated in accordance with A WEZ ˜ z 2
ȡ w,by 1  (1  ȡ WEZ ) ˜
Eq. (1.3.8). They are, however, limited upwardly by: Ib, y (1.3.11)
npl,Alu d 1,1 (1.3.10)
A WEZ ˜ y 2
Taking a section factor into consideration is not permissi- ȡ w,bz 1  (1  ȡ WEZ ) ˜
Ib, z
ble in the case of welds without full penetration on one
side or on both sides, unless the welds cover the whole UWEZ softening factor for aluminum, Table 5.1.25;
cross-section (danger of a root crack). AWEZ cross-sectional area of the HAZ;
A full cross-sectional area;
Ib,y } full moment of inertia against bending;
1.3.2.2 Weld factor z, y distance between the HAZ and the neutral
The weld factor DW results from Table 1.3.4 (for steel and grain.
cast iron materials) and from Table 5.1.26 (for aluminum). The area of the HAZ, AWEZ, can be calculated from its
Table 1.3.4 Weld factor DW for steel width bWEZ, Table 1.3.5.
S355 Table 1.3.5 Width of the heat affected zone
S235
P355
Weld Type GS200 S420 t [mm] bWEZ [mm]
S275 G20Mn5
Weld quality of GS240 S460 S690
—1 stress G17Mn5+
P275 +N
S460 d6 20
G20Mn5
QT
+Q d 12 30
com- d 25 35
full all pres- ! 25 40
penetra- sion 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 0,9
tion weld veri-
or with fied ten-
back sion Provided the heat treatment is performed using the result of
not or
weld veri- the original strength existing after welding, the HAZ does
shear not have to be taken into consideration (UWEZ = 1).
fied
com-
partial pres- 0,95 0,85 0,8 0,7 0,55
penetra- sion/
tion weld all ten-
or butt sion
weld or
shear
—1 The weld quality is verified if the radiographic or ultrasound testing
of 10 % of the welds does not result in any failures.
1.4 Component strength 29 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1.4 Component strength TSK,t = fW · Rp · UWEZ

fV compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
1.4.0 General Rp yield strength, Table 1.2.5;
In accordance with this chapter, the values of the compo- fW shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
nent static strength SSK shall be calculated individually for npl, } section factors in accordance with Eqs. (1.3.7)
each relevant stress type, separately for non-welded and for and (1.3.8);
welded components. Uw, } effective softening factors in accordance with
1.4.1 Non-welded components Eq. (1.3.11);
UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25.
The following applies to non-welded components:
SSK,zd = fV · Rp Case b) The cross-section consists exclusively of the BM
SSK,by = fV · Rp · npl,by or the HAZ
SSK,bz = fV · Rp · npl,bz In this case, (1.4.2) applies to the base material as well.
TSK,sy = fW · Rp (1.4.1) Provided BM and HAZ have the same dimensions, only
TSK,sz = fW · Rp the assessment of the HAZ is relevant.
TSK,t = fW · Rp · npl,t The following applies to the HAZ:
fV compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5; SSK,zd = fV · Rp · UWEZ
Rp yield strength, Eq. (1.2.1) or Eq. (1.2.3); SSK,by = fV · Rp · UWEZ · npl,by
fW shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5; SSK,bz = fV ·Rp · UWEZ · npl,bz
npl, } section factors in acc. with Eqs. (1.3.1), (1.3.2). TSK,sy = fW · Rp · UWEZ (1.4.4)

1.4.2 Welded components TSK,sz = fW · Rp · UWEZ

TSK,t = fW · Rp · UWEZ
1.4.2.0 General
fV compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
The component strength values SSK are calculated sepa- Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.25;
rately for the areas listed in Chapter 1.0 (BM, HAZ, W), fW shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
depending on the material (steel or aluminum). npl, } section factors in accordance with Eqs. (1.3.7)
1.4.2.1 Base material BM and heat affected zone and (1.3.8);
HAZ UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25.
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials 1.4.2.2 Weld W
Non-softening aluminum materials: UWEZ = 1, in accord- Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
ance with Table 5.1.25.
Non-softening aluminum materials: UWEZ = 1, in accord-
The following applies to the base material of welded com- ance with Table 5.1.25.
ponents: SSK A zd = fV · Rp · Dw
SSK,zd = fV · Rp
SSK A by = fV · Rp · Dw · npl,by
SSK,by = fV · Rp · npl,by
SSK A bz = fV · Rp · Dw · npl,bz (1.4.5)
SSK,bz = fV · Rp · npl,bz
TSK,sy = fW · Rp (1.4.2) TSK || = Rp · Dw
TSK,sz = fW · Rp fV compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
TSK,t = fW · Rp Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.24, Table 5.1.25;
fV compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5; npl, } section factors in accordance with Eqs. (1.3.7)
Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.24, Table 5.1.25; and (1.3.8);
Dw weld factor, Table 1.3.4 or 5.1.26.
fW shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
npl, } section factors in acc. with Eqs. (1.3.7), (1.3.8). Softening aluminum materials
SSK A zd = fV · Rp · Dw · UWEZ
The HAZ is not taken into consideration.
SSK A by = fV · Rp · Dw · UWEZ · npl,by
Softening aluminum materials SSK A bz = fV · Rp · Dw · UWEZ · npl,bz (1.4.6)
Case a) The cross-section is part of the HAZ TSK || = Rp · Dw · UWEZ
SSK,zd = fV · Rp · Uw,zd fV compression strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
SSK,by = fV · Rp · Uw,by · npl,by Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.25;
SSK,bz = fV · Rp · Uw,bz · npl,bz (1.4.3) npl, } section factors in acc. with Eqs. (1.3.7), (1.3.8);
TSK,sy = fW · Rp · UWEZ Dw weld factor, Table 5.1.26;
TSK,sz = fW · Rp · UWEZ UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25.
1.5 Safety factors 30 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1.5 Safety factors The basic safety factors have different values depending on
the probability of the occurrence of the highest stress or the
1.5.0 General most unfavorable stress combination and depending on the
consequences of failure.
In accordance with this chapter, the required safety factors
and the resulting total safety factor to be used for the as- Table 1.5.1 Basic safety factors for ductile materials
sessment shall be determined separately for non-welded (A t 6 %)
and for welded components. jm Consequences of failure
The safety factors refer to a probability of survival of the jp
moderate
characteristic strength values of PÜ = 97,5 %. jmt high mean
—1
jpt
In general, the safety factor consists of partial safety fac-
tors with regard to the load (existing stress) and to the 2,0 1,85 1,75
material (critical stress). 1,5 1,4 1,3
Probability of high
1,5 1,4 1,3
j = jS · jF (1.5.1) occurrence of 1,0 1,0 1,0
stress or stress
combination 1,8 1,7 1,6
j safety factor;
—2 1,35 1,25 1,2
low —3
jS load factor; 1,35 1,25 1,2
1,0 1,0 1,0
jF material factor. —1 Moderate consequences of failure of a less important component in
the sense of "no catastrophic effects" being associated with a failure;
The load factor can be specified only in combination with for example because of a load redistribution towards other members of
the design load, Chapter 5.7. Provided the load is assumed a statically undeterminate system. Reduction by a factor of 1,15
with sufficient safety, resulting in the stress calculated (rounding 0,05).
from this, Smax, becoming the design value, the strength —2 Generally with reference to the magnitude of the load, not the fre-
quency. Reduction by a factor of 1,10 (rounding of 0,05).
assessment may be performed without the load factor and —3 Including exactly estimable loads which can safely be assumed to
jS = 1 applies. occur infrequently due to e.g. the testing and assembling conditions.

The material factor is comprised of a stepped basic safety Partial safety factor for cast components
factor and additional partial safety factors.
For cast components, an additional partial safety fac-
tor (casting factor jG) shall be taken into consideration.
1.5.1 Individual safety factors This way, the larger strength dispersions caused by una-
voidable and, therefore, permissible imperfections in the
Basic safety factors material are taken into consideration:
The following basic safety factors are used for the assess- jG = 1,4 castings that have not been
ment of the static strength: subject to non-destructive
jm assessment of fractures in the case of normal testing
or short-term elevated temperatures, i.e. as- (1.5.2)
sessment of the tensile strength Rm or the
jG = 1,25 castings that have been subject
strength at elevated temperature Rm,t; to non-destructive testing
jp assessment of flow in the case of normal or
short-term elevated temperatures, i.e. as-
In mechanical engineering, cast components are of stand-
sessment of the yield strength Rp or the yield
ard quality for which a further reduction of the cast fac-
strength at elevated temperature Rp,t; tor—as is done for high quality cast components (jF = 1,0
jmt assessment of fractures in the case of long- in limit cases such as the aircraft industry)—does not, thus
term elevated temperatures, i.e. assessment far, seem possible. Those high quality cast components
of the creep strength Rm,Tt; meet special requirements for the qualification and moni-
jpt assessment of flow in the case of long-term toring of the manufacturing process as well as for the qual-
elevated temperatures, i.e. assessment of the ity and range of product testing so that component proper-
creep limit Rp,Tt. ties with little scatter can be ensured.

The basic safety factors in accordance with Table 1.5.1 The cast factor specified analogously to other standards is
apply to ductile materials (elongation at break A t 6 % in very high and is often not confirmed when checked exper-
accordance with Chapter 5.1): imentally. In accordance with Chapter 0.0, supplementary
agreements are then possible.
– steel and GS: all material types;
– cast iron material: GJS and GJM, partly;
– aluminum alloys: wrought and cast, partly.
1.5 Safety factors 31 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

Base material BM, heat affected zone HAZ, weld W. jG in

Partial safety factor for welded components accordance with Eq. (1.5.2), jw in accordance with
Eq. (1.5.3).
For welded aluminum components, an additional partial
safety factor shall be taken into consideration in accord- Comment: As the required total safety factor comprises the
ance with DIN 4113: temperature factors and the yield stress ratio, it can no
longer be interpreted as a safety factor in the sense of safe-
jw = 1,13 (aluminum) ty against failure as would be the case with, e.g., jp = 1.5 or
jw = 1 (milled steel and cast iron) (1.5.3) jm = 2.

1.5.2 Total safety factor

From the individual safety factors, the total safety fac-
tor jges shall be determined (maximum value is relevant):

§ j Rp jp j Rp jpt ·
jges jS ˜ jz ˜ MAX ¨ m ˜ ; ; mt ˜ ; ¸
¨ K T,m Rm K T,p K Tt,m Rm K Tt,p ¸
© ¹
(1.5.4)
jS load factor;

jm, } individual safety factors, Table 1.5.1;

KT,m, } temperature factors, Chapter 1.2.1.7;

jz additional partial safety factor for cast or welded

components, Table 1.5.2; here, jG and jw shall not be ap-
plied in combination, only jG (BM and HAZ) or jw (W).

Based on the total safety factor in accordance with

Eq. (3.5.5), it is implicitely specified which of the four
individual assessments is relevant.
Special cases
The following special cases apply to Eq. (1.5.4):
– in the case of normal temperatures, proportions 3 and 4
are omitted; the equations for KTt,m and KTt,p would
lead to unrealistic results. Furthermore,
KT,m = KT,p = 1 applies;

– for Rp/Rm d 0,75, proportions 1 and 3 are omitted;

for Rp/Rm ! 0,75, proportions 2 and 4 are omitted;

– for milled steel and ductile aluminum materials in

welded components, proportions 1 and 3 are omitted.
Table 1.5.2 Additional partial safety factor jz for non-
welded and for welded components
non- welded
jz
welded BM, HAZ W
milled steel,
wrought aluminum 1 jw jw
alloys
GS, GJS, GJM,
GJL, cast aluminum jG jG jw
alloys
1.6 Assessment 32 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

1.6 Assessment S A,bz

aSK Abz d 1
1.6.0 General SSK Abz /jges
The assessments shall initially be performed for each indi-
vidual type of stress—tension or compression, bending T||
aSK|| d 1
around two axes, shear stress in two directions and torsion. TSK|| / jges
In addition, superposition of the individual types of stress
shall be carried out by calculating the degree of utilization
for the combined types of stress. 1.6.0.2 Superposition of the individual stress types
For materials with different tensile and compression In the case of non-welded components as well as for BM
strengths, the assessment is required for both the maximum and HAZ in welded components, the superposition of the
and the minimum stress. Otherwise, the highest absolute individual stress types is performed using a strength hy-
stress value is relevant. pothesis which is a combination of the v. Mises criterion
and the normal tension hypothesis. The division depends
on the ductility of the material and is controlled via a pa-
1.6.0.1 Degree of utilization for individual stress rameter q such that in the case of pure shear stress, the
types shear strength determined by fW results. In detail, the fol-
The individual assessments shall be carried out by calculat- lowing applies:
ing the static degrees of utilization aSK. aSK is the quotient
aSK,Sv = q · aNH + (1 – q) · aGH d 1 (1.6.3)
of the existing service stress Szd, } and the allowable
static stress at the reference point. The allowable static 3  (1/fIJ ) (1.6.4)
stress is the quotient of the critical static strength, q
3 1
SSK,zd, } and the total safety factor jges. The degree of
utilization of the static strength always has a positive val- 1 § · (1.6.5)
˜ ¨ s  s2  4 ˜ t 2 ¸
ue.
aNH = 2 © ¹
For non-welded components as well as for BM and HAZ
2 2 (1.6.6)
aGH = s  t
in welded components, the following individual degrees of
utilization shall be calculated:
s = aSK,zd + aSK,by + aSK,bz (1.6.7)
S zd
aSK,zd d 1 t = aSK,sy + aSK,sz + aSK,t (1.6.8)
SSK,zd/jges
fW shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
Sby
aSK,by d 1 asK,zd, } degree of utilization of the static strength in
SSK,by /jges
accordance with (1.6.1).
Sbz Comment: In general, the comments given in Clause 1.1.0
aSK,bz d 1
SSK,bz /jges apply to taking into consideration the shear stresses due to
(1.6.1) transverse forces. The additive superposition of the degrees
Tsy of utilization aSK,sy and aSK,sz is always on the safe side. It
aSK,sy d 1 is valid, if—in the case of thin-walled cross-sections—the
TSK,sy /jges
shear stresses due to Qy and Qz are oriented along the
profile. In the case of prismatic cross-sections, the follow-
Tsz
aSK,sz d 1 ing more practicable superposition applying the SRSS
TSK,sz /jges method may be used:
2 2
Tt t a SK,sy  a SK,sz  a SK, t
aSK,t d 1
TSK,t /jges
Rules of sign: For the purposes of the superposition of the
For the weld W in welded components, the following indi- individual stresses, the degrees of utilization shall be in-
vidual degrees of utilization shall be calculated: serted in (1.6.7) and (1.6.8) with the signs of the stress
types. In the case of effects acting proportionally or syn-
S A,zd chronously in phase (e.g. positive tensile stress and bend-
aSK A zd d 1
SSK A zd /jges ing stresses), aSK,zd,} or aSK,sy,}, respectively, shall be
(1.6.2) used with equal (positive) signs, in the case of effects act-
S A,by ing proportionally or synchronously out of phase (e.g.
aSK Aby d 1
SSK Aby /jges
1.6 Assessment 33 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

positive tensile force and negative bending force), with Combined types of stress
different signs.
Degree of utilization of the component static strength for
The values for parameter q according to Eq. (1.6.4) have combined stress types in accordance with Eqs. (1.6.3) to
been compiled in Table 1.6.1 for the individual material (1.6.8).
groups, based on the values for fW in accordance with Ta-
1.6.2 Welded components
bles 1.2.5 and 1.2.7.
1.6.2.0 General
Table 1.6.1 Relationship between fW and q as a function
of the material group, in accordance with (1.6.4) For welded components, all assessments shall be per-
Steel, formed separately for the different areas (BM, HAZ, W).
GJM,
wrought 1.6.2.1 Base material BM and heat affected zone
GJS cast alumi- GJL
aluminum HAZ
num alloys
alloys
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
fW 0,577 0,65 0,75 1,0
Individual types of stress
q 0 0,264 0,544 1,0
Degrees of utilization of the component static strength,
depending on the stress type, according to (1.6.1) with:
For the purposes of the assessment of the W of welded Szd,} maximum or minimum value, respectively, of
components, an empirical strength hypothesis analogous to
the stress types in accordance with (1.1.1);
DIN 18800 is used.
SSK,zd component static strength in accordance with
(1.6.9)
aSK,SN = s2  t 2 d 1 (1.4.2);

s = aSKAzd + aSKAby + aSKAbz (1.6.10) jges total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.2.

t = aSK|| (1.6.11) Combined types of stress

aSKAzd, } degree of utilization of the component static Degree of utilization of the component static strength for
combined stress types in accordance with (1.6.3) to (1.6.8).
strength in accordance with (1.6.2).
The HAZ is not taken into consideration.
Rules of sign: For the purposes of superpositioning the
individual stresses, the degrees of utilization shall be in- Softening aluminum materials
serted in Eq. (1.6.10) with the signs of the stress types.
Case a) The cross-section is part of the HAZ
1.6.0.3 Relevant degree of utilization
BM and HAZ are assessed together.
The assessment is successful if all required degrees of
Individual types of stress
utilization are a maximum of one. Thus, the relevant factor
is the highest degree of utilization of all individual degrees Degrees of utilization of the component static strength,
of utilization and the combined degree of utilization; in the depending on the stress type, according to (1.6.1) with:
case of welded components, additionally the highest de-
Szd, } maximum or minimum value, respectively, of
gree of utilization between the areas BM, HAZ and W.
the stress types in accordance with (1.1.1);
The following specifications apply to the stresses and
strengths to be used. SSK,zd, } component static strength in accordance with
(1.4.3);
jges total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.2.
1.6.1 Non-welded components
Combined types of stress
Individual types of stress
Degrees of utilization of the component static strength for
Degrees of utilization of the component static strength,
combined stress types in accordance with (1.6.3) to (1.6.8).
depending on the stress type, according to (1.6.1) with:
Case b) The cross-section consists exclusively of the BM
Szd, } maximum or minimum value, respectively, of
or the HAZ
the stress types in accordance with (1.1.1);
BM and HAZ are assessed separately.
SSK,zd component static strength in accordance with
Provided BM and HAZ have the same dimensions, only
(1.4.1);
the assessment of the HAZ is relevant. Otherwise, the
jges total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.2. degrees of utilization of the individual stress types and of
the combined stress types for the base material are calcu-
lated—in the same way as for a non-welded component—
1.6 Assessment 34 1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses

in accordance with (1.6.1) using the component strengths

in accordance with (1.4.2) and (1.6.3) to (1.6.8).
The following applies to the HAZ:
Individual types of stress
Degrees of utilization of the component static strength,
depending on the stress type, according to (1.6.1) with:
Szd, } maximum or minimum value, respectively, of
the stress types in accordance with (1.1.1);
SSK,zd, }component static strength in accordance
with (1.4.4);
Jges total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.2.

Combined types of stress

Degrees of utilization of the component static strength for
combined stress types in accordance with (1.6.3) to (1.6.8).

1.6.2.2 Weld W
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
Individual types of stress
Degrees of utilization of the component static strength,
depending on the stress type, according to (1.6.2) with:
SA,zd, } maximum or minimum value, respectively,
of the stress types in accordance with Chap-
ter 1.1.2.2;
SSKAzd, } component static strength in accordance
with (1.4.5);
Jges total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.2.

Combined types of stress

Degree of utilization of the component static strength for
combined stress types in accordance with (1.6.9) to
(1.6.11).
Softening aluminum materials
Individual types of stress
Degrees of utilization of the component static strength,
depending on the stress type, according to (1.6.2) with:
SA,zd, } maximum or minimum value, respectively,
of the stress types in accordance with Chap-
ter 1.1.2.2;
SSKAzd, } component static strength in accordance
with (1.4.6);
jges total safety factor, Chapter 1.5.2.

Combined types of stress

Degree of utilization of the component static strength for
combined stress types in accordance with (1.6.9) to
(1.6.11).
2.0 General 35 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2 Assessment of the fatigue cided in each case, whether the maximum values are over-
strength using nominal stresses laid at different points, whether one stress may be neglect-
ed or whether several points in the cross-section are over-
laid by the stress values existing there.
2.0 General
Shear stresses
In this chapter, the assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses is carried out for rod-shaped components. The characteristic service stresses are described in Chap-
The procedure can be transferred correspondingly to other ters 2.1.3 to 2.1.5, based on the normal stresses S. They
components, if a meaningful nominal cross-section can be apply analogously to shear stresses T.
specified. Examples are a thin-walled internally pressur-
ized vessel or cases where generally a reference cross-
section is specified in a shell-shaped component by taking 2.1.1 Non-welded components
the shear lag effect into consideration.
Rod-shaped components
For rod-shaped non-welded components, the stress types
2.1 Characteristic service stresses
 axial stress Szd;
2.1.0 General
 bending stresses Sby and Sbz;
In accordance with this chapter, the required parameters of
the stress spectrum shall be specified. A stress spectrum  shear stresses Tsy and Tsz as well as
shall usually be specified for the intended operation. Non-
recurrent stresses due to special events or misuse shall be  torsional stress Tt
taken into consideration in the assessment of the static
shall be taken into consideration in accordance with
strength.
Eq. (1.1.1).
Relevant are the stress spectra of the individual stress
The respective amplitudes and associated mean values are
components with the stress cycles consisting of the ampli-
tudes Sa,i and the mean values Sm,i, see Figure 2.1-1, as Sa,zd,i, Sa,by,i, Sa,bz,i, Ta,sy,i, Ta,sz,i, Ta,t,i,
well as with the associated numbers of cycles correspond- Sm,zd,i, Sm,by,i, Sm,bz,i, Tm,sy,i, Tm,sz,i, Tm,t,i.
ing with the required fatigue life N with ni load cycles per Shell-shaped components
step i = 1 to j. The following clauses refer to rod-shaped components.
The calculation applies from approximately N = 104 The information for normal stresses of rod-shaped compo-
cycles onwards. nents (tension-compression and bending) shall be applied
to the normal stresses of shell-shaped components (x- and
The reference value of a stress spectrum to be used for y-directions). The information for shear stresses can be
calculation is the step i = 1 with the highest amplitude Sa,1 used with the same designation. Torsional stresses are
and the associated mean value Sm,1. omitted in the case of shell-shaped components.
S
Stress ratio: Sa
Sm
Sm  S a Sa
2.1.2 Welded components
R
Sm  S a Rod- and shell-shaped components
(2.1.1)
t
From the six general section sizes, the stress components
Figure 2.1-1: Stress cycle acting on the weld shall be calculated using Eq. (1.1.1).
The nominal stresses are always oriented with regard to the
Tensile stresses have positive signs and compression
weld. The weld's amplitudes and the associated mean val-
strengths have negative signs.
ues are as follows:
Sa,A,i, Sa,||,i, Ta,i
Superposition Sm,A,i, Sm,||,i, Tm,i
If several proportional or synchronous stress components Special requirements for the stress determination for cer-
act simultaneously at the reference point, see Chapter tain weld cases are given in the FAT catalogue, see Chap-
0.3.4, they shall be overlaid. For different types of stress ter 5.4.
(for example bending and torsional stresses, including non-
Unlike the assessment of the static strength, in general, no
proportional stresses), the superposition shall be carried
separate consideration of base material BM, heat affected
out at the assessment stage, Chapter 2.6.
zone HAZ and weld W is required for the assessment of
In overlaying the individual stress types, the most unfavor- the fatigue strength.
able case is relevant. If the locations of the maximum
stresses in the cross-section do not coincide (e.g. maximum
bending stress and maximum shear stress), it shall be de-
2.1 Characteristic service stresses 36 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

If the maximum stresses do not occur at the weld but in the Model I constant amplitude S-N curves exhibit one knee
non-welded area instead, an additional assessment of the point and a horizontal profile for N ! ND.
base material is required in that area.
Model II constant amplitude S-N curves exhibit two knee
points and a horizontal profile for N ! ND,II.
2.1.3 Stress spectrum and constant Characteristic values of the constant amplitude S-N
amplitude S-N curve curve: (see Figure 2.1-2)
2.1.3.1 Parameters of the stress spectrum
Sa
In the case of variable amplitudes, a stress spectrum shall (lg)
be specified for every stress type. A stress spectrum de- k
scribes the frequency distribution of the stress cycles con-
tained in the stress history.
The derivation of the stress spectrum from the stress histo- SAK
fII
I
kII
ry shall be performed in accordance with the rainflow SAK,II II
counting procedure or to the same effect of that method.
Parameters of the stress spectrum:
Sa,1 highest amplitude, i = 1 (maximum value of the spec-
ND ND,II N (lg)
trum);
Sm,1 mean value with regard to Sa,1, step 1;
Figure 2.1-2: Constant amplitude S-N curve
Sa,i amplitude in step i, Sa,i ! 0, ordered by size:
Sa,i+1 d Sa,i; Sa stress amplitude;
Sm,i mean value in step i; SAK nominal component fatigue limit;
N total number of cycles corresponding to the SAK,II endurance limit;
required fatigue life (required total number of N number of cycles;
cycles), N = 6ni (i summed up for 1 to j); ND number of cycles at knee point of the component
ni related number of cycles in step i, Ni = 6nk constant amplitude S-N curve;
(k summed up for 1 to i); ND,II only for model II constant amplitude S-N curves:
i spectrum step, i = 1 to j; number of cycles at second knee point of the
j last step of the spectrum or number of all steps of component constant amplitude S-N curve;
the spectrum, respectively; k exponent of the component constant amplitude
v damage potential, characteristic value for the S-N curve for N  ND;
shape of the spectrum, Chapter 2.4.3.5. kII only for model II constant amplitude S-N curves:
Sa,i/Sa,1 and ni/ N characterize the shape of the stress exponent of the component constant amplitude
S-N curve for ND  N  ND,II;
spectrum. The amplitudes Sa,i are always positive; the
fII factor by which the endurance limit is lower than
mean values Sm,i can be positive, negative, or zero.
the nominal component fatigue limit.
The constant amplitude stress spectrum can be regarded as
a special case for which the following applies: i = 1 and
Sa = Sa,i = Sa,1

Sm = Sm,i = Sm,1 and

N = ni = n1

2.1.3.2 Characteristic values of the constant

amplitude S-N curve
The constant amplitude S-N curve describes the relation-
ship between stress amplitude and critical number of load
cycles and shall be determined for each site of the assess-
ment and each stress component.
Based on the material constant amplitude S-N curve and
taking into consideration the design factor, Chapter 2.4.1,
and the mean stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2, the component
constant amplitude S-N curve results, Chapter 2.4.3.4.
2.2 Material properties 37 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.1.4 Adaptation of a stress spectrum to 2.1.5 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude

match the component constant amplitude S-N
curve The damage-equivalent stress amplitude Säqu is a constant
stress amplitude which is damage-equivalent to the stress
The component constant amplitude S-N curve applies to a spectrum in question and has an assigned number of cycles
constant stress ratio R. Stress spectra, e.g. from rainflow equal to the number of cycles at the knee point of the com-
matrices, can have different mean stresses per step of the ponent constant amplitude S-N curve, ND, taking into
spectrum. To allow the adaptation of any stress spectrum
consideration the shape of the stress spectrum, the required
to the component constant amplitude S-N curve, all steps
total number of cycles and the maximum value in the spec-
of a spectrum shall be converted to the stress ratio of the
highest step R1 or that of another suitable spectrum step. trum, Figure 2.1-3.

Conversion to a stress ratio R = –1

In a first step, a conversion to the stress ratio Ri = R = –1
shall be performed, as the constant amplitude S-N curve is
also initially calculated for a stress ratio R = –1, Chap-
ter 2.4.1.
In order to do so, the damage-equivalent alternating stress
amplitude Sa,W,i at R = –1 shall be calculated from the
amplitude existing at the stress ratio Ri for each step of a
spectrum:
Sa,W,i = Sa,i/KAK,i (2.1.2)
Sa,i stress amplitude of spectrum step i,
Chapter 2.1.3.1;
KAK,i mean stress factor of spectrum step i with stress Figure 2.1-3: Damage-equivalent stress amplitude
ratio Ri for type of overloading F2, Eqs. (2.4.8)
The damage-equivalent stress amplitude refers to ND and
to (2.4.12).
thus it allows the external form of the assessment of the
Control of spectrum sorting fatigue limit.
When calculating the alternating stress spectrum from a Parameters of the damage-equivalent stress spectrum
two-parametric classification result, usually a rainflow
matrix, in accordance with Eq. (2.1.2), it is not generally Säqu damage-equivalent stress amplitude as a combination
expected for the spectrum steps to be sorted by size as of the shape of the spectrum, the required total number of
required in Chapter 2.1.3.1. cycles and the maximum value in the spectrum;
In this case, the spectrum steps of the alternating stress Sm(Säqu) associated mean stress, in general, Sm(Säqu) = 0
spectrum shall be sorted such that the condi- should be used;
tion Sa,W,i+1 d Sa,W,i is fulfilled.
N (Säqu) associated number of cycles, N (Säqu) = ND.
Conversion to another stress ratio R
Using the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK,
In the second step, the stress amplitudes Sa,W,i of the spec-
Chapter 2.4.3.5, results in the damage-equivalent stress
trum for R = –1 can be converted to any other uniform amplitude:
stress ratio R:
Säqu = Sa,1/KBK (2.1.4)
Sa,R,i = Sa,W,i · KAK (2.1.3)
Sa,1 maximum value of the spectrum;
Sa,W,i alternating stress amplitude of spectrum step i,
Eq. (2.1.2); KBK variable amplitude fatigue strength factor in
KAK mean stress factor for type of overloading F2, accordance with Chapter 2.4.3.5.
Eqs. (2.4.8) to (2.4.12), as a function of the Application
required stress ratio R.
For a given stress spectrum, the relevant damage-
equivalent stress amplitude can be calculated. By using the
damage-equivalent stress amplitude, the assessment of the
variable amplitude fatigue strength can be performed as an
assessment of the fatigue limit, which is easier but has the
same content-related quality.
2.2 Material properties 38 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.2 Material properties al fatigue limit for completely reversed stress is lower for
shear stresses than for axial stresses, Table 2.2.1.
2.2.0 General Table 2.2.1 Fatigue strength factor for completely re-
In accordance with this chapter, the required material versed normal stress, fW,V, and shear stress, fW,W —1
properties (standard component values) shall be deter-
Material group fW,V fW,W
mined; these are the material fatigue limit for completely
reversed axial stress, VW, and shear stress, WW, as well as 0,577
Case hardening steel 0,40 —2 —2 —3
further characteristic values. —4
Stainless steel 0,40 0,577
The influence of the frequency on the material fatigue limit Forging steel 0,40 —4 0,577
for completely reversed stress has not been considered thus
far, although it might be of importance for aluminum mate- Steel other than these 0,45 0,577
rials. GS 0,34 0,577
GJS 0,34 0,65
GJM 0,30 0,75
2.2.1 Non-welded components GJL 0,34 1,0 —5
2.2.1.1 Standard component values Wrought aluminum alloys 0,30 —6 0,577
For non-welded components the standard component val- Cast aluminum alloys 0,30 —6 0,75
ues of the material fatigue limit for completely reversed —1 f 6
W,V and fW,W are valid for a number of cycles of N = 10 .
axial stress and shear stress are as follows: fW,W equal to fW in Table 1.2.5.
—2 Blank hardened. The influence of carburization on the component
VW,zd = fW,V · Rm
(2.2.1) fatigue limit for completely reversed stress shall be taken into consid-
WW,s = fW,W · VW,zd eration based on the surface treatment factor KV, Chapter 2.3.3.
—3 0,577 = 1/ 3 , according to the v. Mises criterion.
fW,V fatigue strength factor for completely re-
—4 Preliminary values.
versed normal stress, Table 2.2.1;
—5 According to the normal stress criterion.
fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re- —6 f does not correspond with the endurance limit for N = ’ here.
W,V
versed shear stress, Table 2.2.1;
Rm tensile strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1,
Eqs. (1.2.1), (1.2.2). 2.2.2 Welded components
The values VW and WW apply to the number of cycles ND,V 2.2.2.1 Standard component values
= ND,W = 106.In the case of model I constant amplitude S- For the throat section and for the toe section of profession-
N curves, they correspond with the fatigue limit as well as ally welded components—weld imperfections occurring
with the endurance limit for N = v. In the case of model II with normal production standards are allowable —, weld-
constant amplitude S-N curves, the fatique limit differs specific characteristic values of the fatigue limit for com-
from the endurance limit N = v, Chapter 2.4.3.4. pletely reversed stress apply independent of the kind of
material.
The standard component values according to Eq. (2.2.1)
characterize the fatigue limit for completely reversed stress Apart from the material type,
of the material without any influences by the structure, but – steel or
nevertheless for the existing component size (by taking
into consideration Kd,m and KA in Eq. (1.21). Analogous to – aluminum material,
the standard component value of the tensile strength, a the decisive factor for the fatigue strength of welded com-
probability of survival PÜ = 97,5 % is to be valid. ponents is the concrete design, determined by the structural
detail, the type of joint and the weld design. Therefore, no
specific characteristic material properties are specified for
2.2.1.2 Fatigue strength factors for completely welded components. The fatigue strength is specified in
reversed normal stress and completely Chapter 2.4, using design factors in accordance with Chap-
reversed shear stress ter 2.3.
The fatigue strength factor for completely reversed normal Caution: For other types of material (conditionally welda-
stress, fW,V, serves to convert the tensile strength to the ble steel, stainless steel, weldable cast iron material) this
fatigue limit for completely reversed axial stress, Table calculation method shall be considered as provisional and
2.2.1. may be applied with caution only.
The fatigue strength factor for completely reversed shear
stress, fW,W takes into consideration the fact that the materi-
2.2 Material properties 39 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.2.3 Temperature factor Table 2.2.2 Constant aT,D

The temperature factor applies to welded and non-welded Material group GJS GJM GJL
components and takes into consideration the fact that the aT,D 1,6 1,3 1,0
material fatigue limit for completely reversed stress de-
creases with an increasing temperature. Eqs. (2.2.4 a–d) apply to steel and cast iron materials from
the indicated temperature T up to 500 °C. Eq. (2.2.4 e)
Normal temperature, low temperature and elevated temper- applies to aluminum materials up to 200 °C.
ature shall be distinguished.
Quantities VW,T and WW,T are not explicitly necessary for
Normal temperature the strength assessment, only temperature factor KT,D is
Normal temperatures are as follows: required.
– for fine grain structural steel from –40 °C to +60 °C;
– for other kinds of steel from –40 °C to +100 °C; Comment: For elevated temperatures, and in particular in
– for cast iron materials from –25 °C to +100 °C; cases of a mean stress Sm  0, the component fatigue limit,
– for age-hardening auluminum materials from fatigue strength for finite life or variable amplitude fatigue
–25 °C to +50 °C; strength, respectively, may be higher in terms of the max-
– for non-age-hardening auluminum materials from imum stress than the component static strength with the
–25 °C to +100 °C. result that the assessment of the static strength is relevant.
For normal temperatures, the temperature factor is
KT,D = 1 (2.2.2)

Low temperature
Low temperatures below the values listed above are out-
side the field of application of this guideline.
Elevated temperature
In the range of elevated temperatures—up to 500 °C for
steel and cast iron materials and up to 200 °C for alumi-
num materials—the influence of the temperature on the
characteristic strength values shall be taken into considera-
tion. For elevated temperatures the characteristic fatigue
limit values for completely reversed normal stress and
completely reversed shear stress are as follows:
VW,zd,T = KT,D · VW,zd
(2.2.3)
WW,s,T = KT,D · WW,s
KT,D temperature factor in accordance with Eq.
(2.2.4);
VW,zd, WW,s characteristic material fatigue limit value for
completely reversed stress, Chapter 2.2.1.
The following applies depending on the temperature T:
– for fine grain structural steel, T > 60 °C:
KT,D = 1 – 10–3 · T/°C (2.2.4 a)
– for other kinds of steel, T > 100 °C, Figure 2.2-1:
KT,D = 1 – 1,4 · 10–3 · (T/°C – 100)
(2.2.4 b)
No values are known for stainless steel.
– for GS, T > 100 °C: Figure 2.2-1: Temperature dependent values of the
KT,D = 1 – 1,2 · 10–3 · (T/°C – 100) characteristic strength, plotted for comparison.
(2.2.4 c)
– for GJS, GJM and GJL, T > 100 °C, Figure 2.2-1: Safety factors j according to Chapter 1.5 or 3.5, respective-
KT,D = 1 – aT,D · (10–3 · T/°C)2 ly.
(2.2.4 d) Rm,T/Rm = KT,m Rp,T/Rp = KT,p
– for aluminum materials, T > 50 °C: Rm,Tt/Rm = KTt,m Rp,Tt/Rp = KTt,p
KT,D = 1 – 1,2 · 10–3 (T/°C – 50) Rm,T, Rp,T as well as Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt for t = 105 h
(2.2.4 e) Fatigue limit for completely reversed stress at elevated
Figure 1.2-3 in Chapter 1.2, temperature:
aT,D Constant, Table 2.2.2. VW,zd,T/VW,zd = KT,D.
Top: Non-alloyed structural steel, as in Figure 1.2-2
2.3 Design parameters 40 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

Rp/Rm = Re/Rm = 0,65, VW,zd/Rm = 0,45 2.3.1.2.1 Fatigue notch factors computed from
jm = 2,0, jp = jmt = 1,5, jpt = 1,0, jD = 1,5 stress concentration factors
Bottom: GJL, as in Figure 3.2-2 The fatigue notch factors for axial, bending, shear and
VW,zd/Rm = 0,34, jm = 3,0, jmt = jD = 2,4 torsional stresses for the component designs given in
Chapter 5.2 shall be computed from the stress concentra-
tion factors and from the Kt-Kf ratios:
2.3 Design parameters K t,zd
2.3.0 General nı (r)
Kf,zd =
In accordance with this chapter, the required design pa- K t,b
rameters shall be computed in terms of design factors. nı (r) ˜ nı (d)
Kf,b =
A differentiation shall be made between non-welded and (2.3.2)
K t,s
welded components.
n W (r)
Kf,s =
K t,t
2.3.1 Non-welded components
n W (r) ˜ n W (d)
Kf,t =
2.3.1.1 Design factors
Kt,zd, } stress concentration factor depending on the
The design factors of rod-shaped non-welded components type of stress, Chapter 5.2;
for axial, bending, shear and torsional stresses are:
nV (r), } Kt-Kf ratio of the component for normal
§ 1 · 1
K WK, zd ¨ K f,zd   1¸ ˜ stress or for shear stress from the local or the
¨ ¸
© K R,ı ¹ K V ˜ KS notch stress gradient;
nV (d), } Kt-Kf ratio of the component for normal
§ ·
K WK,b ¨ K f,b  1  1¸ ˜ 1
stress or for shear stress from the global or
¨ K ¸ K ˜K ˜K
© R,ı ¹ V S NL,E the nominal stress gradient;
§ · r notch radius of the component;
K WK,s ¨ K  1  1¸ ˜ 1 d diameter or width of the component.
¨ f,s
K R,R, IJ ¸ K ˜K
© ¹ V S
2.3.1.2.2 Fatigue notch factors determined from
§ ·
K WK, t ¨ K f,t  1  1¸ ˜ 1 experimental values
¨ ¸ (2.3.1)
© K R,IJ ¹ K V ˜KS The fatigue notch factors of rod-shaped components for
axial, bending, shear and torsional stresses for the compo-
Kf,zd, } fatigue notch factor, Chapter 2.3.1.2; nent designs given in Chapter 5.3 shall be determined from
the experimentally derived fatigue notch factors given for
KR,V, } roughness factor, Chapter 2.3.1.3;
notched specimens and from the respective Kt-Kf ratios.
KV surface treatment factor, Chapter 2.3.3;
KS coating factor, Chapter 2.3.4; The fatigue notch factors depend on the notch radii r and rp
KNL,E factor for GJL, Chapter 2.3.5. and, for bending and torsion, additionally on the dimen-
sions d and dp at the notch cross-section.
In the case of biaxial bending and shear due to transverse
forces in two directions, the design factors shall be deter- The fatigue notch factors are as follows:
n r
mined separately for the two stress types. Kf,zd = Kf,zd (dP) ˜ ı P
The additive combination of the fatigue notch factor Kf nı (r)
with the reciprocal roughness factor KR results in the fact nı (rP )
Kf,b = Kf,b (dP) ˜
that, compared with the unnotched component (low Kf), a nı (r) ˜ nı d
nW (rP ) (2.3.3)
lower roughness sensitivity is assumed for the notched Kf,s = Kf,s (dP) ˜
component (high Kf). nW (r)
nW (rP )
Kf,t = Kf,t (dP) ˜
nW (r) ˜ nW d
2.3.1.2 Fatigue notch factors
Kf,zd (dP),} fatigue notch factor of the specimen accord-
2.3.1.2.0 General
ing to type of stress, Chapter 5.3;
The fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd, }, allow for the influence nV(rP),} Kt-Kf ratio of the specimen for normal stress
of the design (shape and size) on the fatigue strength of a or for shear stress, respectively, as a function
non-welded component. They shall be computed from of rp;
stress concentration factors or, if these are not applicable
or not known, from experimental values.
2.3 Design parameters 41 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

nV(r),} Kt-Kf ratio of the component for normal taken into consideration in the guideline since its applica-
stress or for shear stress, respectively, as a tion is somewhat easier when compared with the newer
function of r; methods, see Chapter 2.3.1.2.4.
nV(d),} Kt-Kf ratio of the component for normal A new aspect is the application of a material-mechanically
stress or for shear stress, respectively, as a reasonable Kt-Kf ratio which, particularly in the case of
function of d; severe notches, makes use of strength reserves. Further-
r notch radius of the component; more, the new concept of support effects takes into consid-
d diameter of the component;
eration the static size effect, Chapter 2.3.1.2.3.1.
rP notch radius of the specimen;
dP diameter of the specimen.
2.3.1.2.3.1 Kt-Kf ratios according to Stieler
The experimentally determined fatigue notch factors given
in Chapter 5.3 are applicable to notched specimens made The Kt-Kf ratios for normal stress, nV(r) and nV(d), Figure
of steel without surface treatment. Additionally, however, 2.3-1, shall be computed using Eqs. (2.3.6) to (2.3.8), de-
an approach for surface treated components and for com- pending on the related stress gradient GV(r) or GV(d), re-
ponents made of cast iron materials and aluminum materi- spectively.
als is described therein. The following applies to GV ” 0,1 mm–1
For computing the Kt-Kf ratios, a radius is required § Rm ·
¨¨ aG 0,5 ¸
bG ˜MPa ¸¹
which—particularly for unclear cases—is specified in nı 1  Gı ˜ mm ˜ 10 ©
Chapter 5.3. Any possible incorrectness will be reduced by (2.3.6)
the quotient nV(rP)/nV(r), } The following applies to 0,1 mm–1 < GV ” 1 mm–1
§ Rm ·
The Kt-Kf ratios nV(rP), } shall be computed in accord- ¨¨ aG  ¸¸
© b G ˜MPa ¹
nı 1  Gı ˜ mm ˜ 10
ance with Chapter 2.3.1.2.3.1 or 2.3.1.2.4, as a function of (2.3.7)
the related stress gradient GV(rP), } The following applies to 1 mm–1 < GV ” 100 mm–1
§ Rm ·
Because of the similarity of the specimen and the compo- ¨¨ a G  ¸
b ˜MPa ¸¹
nent, the following applies: nı 1  4 Gı ˜ mm ˜ 10 © G
(2.3.8)
r/d = rP/dP (2.3.4)
aG, bG constants, Table 2.3.1.
Caution: If Eq. (2.3.3) results in values Kf,zd, } < 1, the
following values apply:
Kf,zd = } = 1 (2.3.5)
Exception in the case of bending:
for Kf,b(dP) < nV(r)/nV(rP), the following applies:
Kf,b(dP) = nV(r)/nV(rP) (2.3.5 a)
Analogous for torsion.
Comment: The following difference applies to defining
the fatigue notch factor for bending: The fatigue notch
factor for the analytical strength assessment described in
this guideline corresponds with the relationship between
the fatigue limit for completely reversed axial stress of the
unnotched specimen and the fatigue limit for completely
reversed bending stress of the notched component. On the
other hand, the experimentally determined fatigue notch
factor describes in Chapter 5.3 the relationship between the
fatigue limit for completely reversed bending stresses of
unnotched and notched specimens. This deviating defini-
tion has been taken into consideration in Eq. (2.3.3).

2.3.1.2.3 Computation of the Kt-Kf ratios

2.3.1.2.3.0 General
The computation of the Kt-Kf ratios can be performed
using two different methods.
According to Stieler’s concept of support effects, the Kt-Kf
Figure 2.3-1: Kt-Kf ratio nV
ratio depends considerably on the related stress gradient.
This method corresponds with the one given in the FKM
guideline up to the 5th edition (2003). It will continue to be The diagram may be extended to up to = 100 mm1.
2.3 Design parameters 42 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

Numerical values 1/0,65 to 1/0,95: Difference between the Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress
characteristic fatigue limits for completely reversed axial
and completely reversed bending stress, valid for the mate- The Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress, nW(r) and nW(d), shall be
rial specimen of the diameter d0 = 7,5 mm. computed using Eqs. (2.3.6) to (2.3.8), as a function of the
related stress gradients GW (r) and GW (d), after having
Not included in the figure:
Stainless steels, threshold values for GV = 1 mm1: replaced V by W and the tensile strength Rm by fW,W · Rm
highest value: nV = 1,27 for Rm = 400 MPa and where fW,W is the fatigue strength factor for completely
lowest value: nV = 1,14 for Rm = 1070 MPa. reversed shear stress in accordance with Table 2.2.1.
Wrought aluminum alloys, threshold values for GV =
1 mm1: 2.3.1.2.3.2 Material-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio
highest value: nV = 1,69 for Rm = 95 MPa and
The material-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio nV consists of three
lowest value: nV = 1,18 for Rm = 590 MPa.
individual factors by which the related influences can be
Cast aluminum alloys, threshold values for: GV = 1 mm1:
covered separately:
highest value: nV = 2,02 for Rm = 130 MPa and
smallest value: nV = 1,88 for Rm = 330 MPa. nV = nst · nvm · nbm (2.3.9)
nst statistical Kt-Kf ratio;
Table 2.3.1 Constants aG and bG nvm deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio;
Mate- Stain- Other nbm fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio.
rial less kinds GS GJS GJM GJL
group steel of steel In the case of high stress gradients, the Kt-Kf ratio clearly
aG 0,40 0,50 0,25 0,05 0,05 0,05 exceeds the one according to Stieler; in the case of small
bG 2400 2700 2000 3200 3200 3200 gradients, it may be lower as well. In fact, Kt-Kf ratios
smaller than 1 are possible. The reason is the proportion of
the statistical size effect which, for large highly stressed
Wrought alumi- Cast aluminum component areas, can also have a reducing effect on the
Material group
num alloys alloys fatigue strength.
aG 0,05 0,05
Statistical Kt-Kf ratio
bG 850 3200
The statistical Kt-Kf ratio is the same for all stress types
and results from the ratio of the highly stressed surfaces of
Particularities in the case of surface hardened compo- a reference specimen and the component under considera-
nents tion:
1
For surface hardened components (components with ther-
§ A ref,st · k st
mal or chemo-thermal surface treatment), the Kt-Kf ratios nst ¨ ¸ (2.3.10)
¨ A ¸
are lower than for non-surface hardened components © ı,st ¹
Aref,st reference surface for statistical Kt-Kf ratio;
The Kt-Kf ratio for a crack originating in the surface is
AV,st highly stressed surface;
lower because the surface tensile strength (tensile strength
of the hard surface layer) of the component is higher than kst Weibull exponent for the statistical Kt-Kf
the core tensile strength (tensile strength of the weak core ratio.
material according to the material standard). The geometry of the reference specimen is assumed to be a
The Kt-Kf ratio for a crack originating in the core material cylindrical round specimen of a diameter of 8 mm and a
is lower because the related stress gradient in the core cylindrical section of 20 mm. This results in:
material of the component is lower than that at the surface. Aref,st = 500 mm2 (2.3.11)
The surface tensile strength is approximately Rm = (3,3 ·
The Weibull exponent for the statistical Kt-Kf ratio kst
HV) · MPa where HV is the Vickers hardness of the hard
depends on the material group and is specified preliminar-
surface layer. However, as this equation was not specifical-
ily as given in Table 2.3.2.
ly developed for hardened surface layers, it shall be ap-
plied with caution. In particular the fatigue limit for com- Table 2.3.2 Weibull exponent kst
pletely reversed stress of the hardened surface layer must GJS, Wrought
Material Cast alumi-
not be calculated from the tensile strength thus determined: Steel GS GJM, aluminum
group num alloys
VW,zd  fW,V · Rm. GJL alloys
kst 30 15 10 20 10
2.3 Design parameters 43 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

The highly stressed surface is chosen if the fatigue crack Hpl,W strain in alternating plasticity rated for en-
originates from the component surface or the layer near the durance strength;
surface layer. This is the general case. The highly stressed – for steel: Hpl,W = 2 · 10–4 · <
surface for simple geometries is given in Table 2.3.3.
up to Rm d 630 MPa:
If the origin of the fatigue crack is inside the component, <=1
the highly stressed volume becomes relevant. The highly from Rm > 630 MPa on:
stressed volume VV,st shall be determined based on local
§ Rm ·
stresses. < 1  0,375 ˜ ¨¨  1¸¸
© 630 MPa ¹
Table 2.3.3 Highly stressed area AV,st
– for wrought aluminum alloys:
Geometry Stress type
Highly stressed Hpl,W = 1,6 · 10–5;
area AV,st
– other, in particular castings: Hpl,W = 0;
Rm material tensile strength, Eqs. (1.2.1),
(1.2.2);
tension-
b·U n' for steel: n' = 0,15,
compression
for aluminum: n' = 0,11.
Fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio

The growth of an incipient fatigue crack, which is slower

tension- in a stress field with a stress gradient as compared with that
compression b·U in a homogenous field of the same maximum stress, is
and bending covered by the fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio.

1
nbm
n vm ˜ n st 2  3 ˜ K t1  K t 3 (2.3.14)
tension- 
Kt 4 ˜ Gı ˜ a *
compression 0,8 · b · U
and bending nvm fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio,
Eqs. (2.3.12) and (2.3.13);
tension- nst statistical Kt-Kf ratio, Eq. (2.3.10);
compression, Kt stress concentration factor according to the
S·a·U
rotating bend-
ing, torsion stress type, Chapter 5.2;
GV related stress gradient, according to the
bending 0,3 · S · a · U
stress type, Eq. (2.3.17);
tension- a* length of the microstructure,
compression, 2
0,8 · S · a · U §R ·
rotating bend-
a* 0,1 mm ˜ ¨¨ m,bm ¸¸
ing, torsion
© Rm ¹
bending 0,24 · S · a · U Rm trensile strength, Eqs. (1.2.1, 1.2.2);
Rm,bm reference tensile strength for the fracture-
mechanical Kt-Kf ratio in accordance with
Deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio Eq. (2.3.14), see Table 2.3.4.
The deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio is the same for all Table 2.3.4 Reference tensile strength Rm,bm
stress types. It represents NEUBER’s macro-support effect Material group Steel Aluminum
and is determined for ductile steels and wrought aluminum
Rm,bm [MPa] 680 270
alloys. The following applies to all other material groups:
nvm = 1 (2.3.12)

The following applies to ductile steels and wrought alumi- Provided Eq. (2.3.14) results in a value smaller than one,
num alloys: the following applies:
nbm = 1 (2.3.15)
E ˜ İ pl, W 1
n vm 1 ˜ nst n' 1 (2.3.13)
ıW Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress
nst statistical Kt-Kf ratio, Eq (2.3.10); The Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress, nW, shall be calculated in
VW material fatigue limit for completely re- accordance with Eq. (2.3.9), in the same way as the Kt-Kf
versed stress, Eq. (2.2.1); ratios for normal stress nV.
E Young's modulus, Table 1.3.1;
2.3 Design parameters 44 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.3.1.2.4 Related stress gradient resulting total fatigue notch factor in the most unfavorable
case is
The related nominal stress gradient due to the load (bend-
ing, torsion; "global stress gradient") is as follows, as a Kf = 1 + (Kf,1  1) + (Kf,2  1) (2.3.18)
function of dimension d:
With a distance between the two notches of 2 r or more,
GV(d) = GW(d) = 2/d (2.3.16) superposition does not need to be taken into consideration.
The local related stress gradient due to the notch ("local The value of 2 r is likely to be on the safe side.
stress gradient"), GV(r) and GW(r), shall be determined in 2.3.1.3 Roughness factor
accordance with Table 2.3.5. The roughness factor KR,V or KR,W, respectively, accounts
Table 2.3.5 Related stress gradient GV(r) and GW(r) for for the influence of the surface roughness on the fatigue
simple component designs —1 strength of the component.
Gı (r) The roughness factor valid for polished components is
Component design GW (r) —4
—2 —3 KR,V = KR,W = 1 (2.3.19)

2 1 For rolling skin, forging skin or the skin of castings, an

˜ (1  M) average roughness value Rz = 200 ȝm applies.
r r
The roughness factor for normal stress, Figure 2.3-2, and
for shear stress is
2,3 1,15
˜ (1  M)
r r §R · § 2˜R ·
K R,ı 1  aR,ı ˜ lg ¨¨ z ¸¸ ˜ lg ¨ m ¸
© ȝm ¹ ¨ Rm ¸
© ,N,min ¹

2 § 2˜R ·
˜ (1  M) - §R ·
r K R,W 1  f w,IJ ˜ aR,ı ˜ lg ¨¨ z ¸¸ ˜ lg ¨ m ¸
© ȝm ¹ ¨ Rm ¸
© ,N,min ¹
(2.3.20)
2,3 aR,V constant, Table 2.3.6;
˜ (1  M) -
r Rz average roughness of the component surface,
in ȝm, in accordance with DIN 4768;
Rm tensile strength, Eqs. (1.2.1), (1.2.2);
2,3 Rm,N,min constant, Table 2.3.6;
-
r fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re-
Round or flat bar versed shear stress, Table 2.2.1.
—1 r > 0. For round bars, the equations are approximately valid in the
case of a longitudinal hole as well.
Table 2.3.6 Constants aR,V and minimum tensile
—2 M = 0 for t/d > 0,25 or t/b > 0,25, strength, Rm,N,min, for the material group considered
M = 1/ 4 ˜ t/r  2 for t/d d 0,25 or t/b d 0,25. Material
Steel GS GJS GJM GJL
—3 The related stress gradient G (r) applies to axial and bending stress- group
V
es; the difference is taken into consideration by the Kt-Kf ratio nV(d) in aR,V 0,22 0,20 0,16 0,12 0,06
Eqs. (2.3.2) and (2.3.3). Rm,N,min
—4 The related stress gradient G 400 400 400 350 100
W•(r) applies to shear and torsional in MPa
stresses; the difference is taken into consideration by the Kt-Kf ratio
nW(d) in Eqs. (2.3.2) and (2.3.3).
Material Wrought aluminum
The total stress gradient to be used for the fracture- Cast aluminum alloys
group alloys
mechanical Kt-Kf ratio is:
aR,V 0,22 0,20
GV = GV(d) + GV(r) or Rm,N,min
(2.3.17) 133 133
GW = GW(d) + GW(r) in MPa

2.3.1.2.5 Fatigue notch factor for superimposed

notches Comment: The determining factor for the influence of the
surface on the component fatigue limit are, in particular,
For superimposed notches—for example a fillet and a hole residual stresses and the surface treatment as a result of
—with the partial fatigue notch factors Kf,1 and Kf,2, the
manufacturing, rather than the roughness. According to the
current state of knowledge, however, no new specifications
2.3 Design parameters 45 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

can be set with the result that the traditional equations are 2.3.2 Welded components
to be considered valid for the time being.
2.3.2.0 General
The following design parameters are relevant for welded
components:
FATA, } fatigue class, Chapter 2.3.2.1;
fFAT,V, } factor for conversion from fatigue class to
component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Eq. (2.3.22);
ft thickness factor, Chapter 2.3.2.2;
KV surface treatment factor, Chapter 2.3.3.

2.3.2.1 Fatigue class (FAT) and conversion factor

The fatigue classes (FAT) apply to normal stresses perpen-
dicular and parallel to the weld and to shear stresses in
steel, cast iron and aluminum materials, to some extent
derived from the IIW recommendations as well as Euro-
code 3 and Eurocode 9.
The fatigue class in Chapter 5.4 corresponds with the dou-
ble amplitude existing at the reference number of cy-
cles NC. The stress ratio between the reference number of
cycles of the fatigue class and the number of cycles at knee
point of the component constant amplitude S-N curve
depends on the exponent of the constant amplitude S-N
curve and is as follows:
1/k ı
§ N ·
fFAT,ı 0,5 ˜ ¨ C ¸
¨N ¸
© D,ı ¹
(2.3.22)
1/k
§ NC · W
fFAT,W 0,5 ˜ ¨ ¸
¨N ¸
© D,W ¹
ND,V, ND,W number of cycles at knee point of the com-
ponent constant amplitude S-N curve, Table 2.4.3;
NC reference number of cycles of the fatigue class,
NC = 2 · 106;
Figure 2.3-2: Roughness factor KR,V k V, k W exponent of the constant amplitude S-N curve,
Table 2.4.3.
Top: Steel; bottom: Cast iron materials with skin; steel
with rolling skin for comparison. The following results for the constant amplitude S-N
curves according to Table 2.4.3:
For surface hardened components and a crack origin at the fFAT,V = 1/2,71 = 0,37
surface, the roughness factor is less favorable (smaller) (2.3.22.a)
fFAT,W = 1/4,37 = 0,23
than for components which have not been surface hard-
ened, this is due to the higher surface tensile strength Rm,
see also Chapter 2.3.1.2.1.
2.3.2.2 Thickness factor
Normally, in combination with experimentally determined The thickness factor ft accounts for the influence of the
fatigue notch factors, the roughness factor does not need to
be taken into consideration (KR,V = KR,W = 1). If the sheet metal thickness on the fatigue strength of the welds,
see Figure 2.3-3. The thickness factor is to be valid for
roughnesses of component and specimen differ considera-
steel, but also for aluminum alloys.
bly from each other, KR,V and KR,W in Eq. (2.3.1) shall be
replaced by Case A
~
K R,ı = KR,V(Rz)/KR,V(Rz,P) This case corresponds with the general wording of the IIW
~ (2.3.21) recommendations and shall be used if the user has no expe-
KR,W = KR,W(Rz)/KR,W(Rz,P)
rience or no sector-specific experience is available which
Rz average surface roughness of the component in µm; would justify the application of case B.
Rz,P average surface roughness of the specimen in µm.
2.3 Design parameters 46 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

The following applies to sheet metal thickness- 2.3.3 Surface treatment factor
es t d 25 mm:
ft = 1 (2.3.23) The surface treatment factor KV allows for the influence
The following applies to sheet metal thickness- of a surface layer on the fatigue strength of the component.
es t ! 25 mm: Without a surface treatment, the following applies:
n KV = 1 (2.3.28)
§ 25 mm ·
ft ¨ ¸
© t ¹ (2.3.24) For components with surface hardening, the surface treat-
with n according to Table 2.3.7. ment factor depends on whether a crack originates at the
surface or in the core. Essential factors of influence are the
Case B ratio of the fatigue limit values of the surface layer and of
The influence of the thickness on the fatigue strength of the core as well as the ratio of the local load stress values
welds, including in the case of sheet metal thicknesses on the surface and in the core (at a distance from the sur-
 25 mm, is known; due to insufficient experimental proof, face which corresponds with the depth of case).
however, it has not yet been generally formulated. The ranges of the surface treatment factor KV for steel and
If the user has experience or sector-specific experience is cast iron materials are given in Table 2.3.8. The exact
available, e.g. in automotive engineering and railway vehi- value shall be specified by the user.
cle manufacturing (technical rules DVS 1608, DVS 1612),
Provided the methods of surface treatment are applied to
the thickness factor according to case B can be used.
aluminum materials, the KV-values for cast iron materials
are to apply approximately.
The following applies to sheet metal thickness-
es t d 10 mm: Table 2.3.8 Surface treatment factor KV, guideline
ft = 1.1 (2.3.25) values —1 —2

The following applies to sheet metal thickness- Unnotched Notched compo-

Method
es 10 mm < t d 25 mm: components —3 nents
0,1 Steel
§ 25 mm ·
¨
ft ¸ (2.3.26) Chemo-thermal methods
© t ¹ Nitriding
The following applies to sheet metal thickness- Depth of case 0,1 to 1,10 – 1,15 1,30 – 2,00
es t ! 25 mm: 0,4 mm,
(1,15 – 1,25) (1,90 – 3,00)
surface hardness 700 to
n
§ 25 mm · 1000 HV 10
¨
ft ¸ (2.3.27) Case hardening
© t ¹ Depth of case 0,2 to 1,10 – 1,50 1,20 – 2,00
with n according to Table 2.3.7. 0,8 mm,
(1,20 – 2,00) (1,50 – 2,50)
surface hardness 670 to 750
HV 10
Carbo-nitriding
Depth of case 0,2 to
0,4 mm, (1,80)
surface hardness 670 HV
10
Mechanical methods
1,10 – 1,25 1,30 – 1,80
Cold rolling
(1,20 – 1,40) (1,50 – 2,20)
1,10 – 1,20 1,10 – 1,50
Shot peening
(1,10 – 1,30) (1,40 – 2,50)
Thermal methods
Inductive hardening
Flame-hardening Depth of 1,20 – 1,50 1,50 – 2,50
Figure 2.3-3: Thickness factor ft case 0,9 to 1,5 mm,
(1,30 – 1,60) (1,60 – 2,80)
surface hardness 51 to 64
Table 2.3.7 Exponent n for the thickness factor HRC
Type of the welded joint n Cast iron materials
Cruciform joints, transversely loaded T-joints, sheets with Nitriding 1,10 (1,15 ) 1,3 (1,9)
transverse stiffeners, ends of longitudinal stiffeners Case hardening 1,1 (1,2) 1,2 (1,5)
- as welded 0,3 Cold rolling 1,1 (1,2) 1,3 (1,5)
- toe ground 0,2 Shot peening 1,1 (1,1) 1,1 (1,4)
Transversely loaded butt joints, as welded 0,2 Inductive hardening,
1,2 (1,3) 1,5 (1,6)
Butt joints ground flush with the sheet, longitudinally flame-hardening
0,1
loaded welds or gussets —1 Applies to component guideline values, including those for addition-
al methods, see also FVA Worksheet "Schwingfestigkeitssteigerung"
("Increasing the fatigue strength").
2.4 Component strength 47 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses
—2 The guideline values apply to the component fatigue limit. Values
applying to the component variable amplitude fatigue strength are usu-
2.4 Component strength
ally lower. The values are valid for specimens of 30 to 40 mm diame-
ter; values in parentheses apply to specimens of 8 to 15 mm diameter.
2.4.0 General
—3 For unnotched and slightly notched components.
In accordance with this chapter, the component fatigue
A simple prelimininary calculation method for estimating strength shall be calculated as follows:
the fatigue limit of surface treated non-welded components – first the component fatigue limit for completely re-
made of milled steel is given in Chapter 5.5. versed stress taking into consideration the design fac-
tors, Chapter 2.4.1;
– then the amplitude of the component fatigue limit de-
2.3.4 Coating factor
pending on the mean stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2;
The coating factor KS allows for the influence of a surface
– then the amplitude of the component variable ampli-
coating on the fatigue strength of a component made of an tude fatigue strength depending on the variable ampli-
aluminum material. tude fatigue strength factor, Chapter 2.4.3.
The following applies to steel and cast iron materials:
KS = 1 (2.3.29)
The following applies to aluminum materials without coat- 2.4.1 Component fatigue limit for completely
ing: reversed stress
KS = 1 (2.3.30)
2.4.1.0 General
The following applies to aluminum materials with coating:
KS < 1 (2.3.31) In accordance with this chapter, the critical nominal values
KS for example in accordance with Figure 2.3-4 (guideline of the component fatigue limit for completely reversed
stress shall be calculated taking into consideration the
values).
design factors.
2.4.1.1 Non-welded components
The critical nominal values of the component fatigue limits
for completely reversed axial, bending, shear and torsional
stresses are as follows
SWK,zd = VW,zd/KWK,zd
SWK,by = VW,zd/KWK,by
SWK,bz = VW,zd/KWK,bz
(2.4.1)
TWK,sy = WW,s/KWK,sy
TWK,sz = WW,s/KWK,sz
TWK,t = WW,s/KWK,t
VW, WW material fatigue limit for completely re-
Figure 2.3-4: Influence of a coating based on anodic
versed stress, Chapter 2.2.1;
oxidation on the fatigue limit (at 106 cycles) of a KWK,zd, } design factor, Chapter 2.3.1.
component made of an aluminum material, as a function of
the layer thickness (according to Wilson). Guideline Comment: For non-welded components made of austenit-
values. ic steel or wrought and cast aluminum alloys, the fatique
limit is different from the endurance limit for N = v, Chap-
2.3.5 Factor KNL,E ter 2.4.3.4
The factor KNL,E accounts for the non-linear elastic stress
strain behavior of GJL when loaded in bending. It can be
used if the stress state in the vicinity of the assessment
point is mainly characterized by bending, that is if the
cross-section under consideration comprises both fields of
tension and fields of compression.
The following applies to all material groups except GJL:
KNL,E = 1 (2.3.32)
For GJL, KNL,E according to Table 2.3.9 applies.
Table 2.3.9 Factor KNL,E
Material GJL GJL GJL GJL GJL GJL
type -100 -150 -200 -250 -300 -350
KNL,E 1,075 1,05 1,025
2.4 Component strength 48 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

KAK,zd, } mean stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.4;

2.4.1.2 Welded components
SWK,zd, } component fatigue limit for completely re-
The critical nominal values of the component fatigue limits
versed stress, Chapter 2.4.1.1.
for completely reversed normal stress perpendicular and
parallel to the weld and for completely reversed shear
stress are 2.4.2.1.2 Mean stress sensitivity

SWK,A = FATA · fFAT,V · ft · KV · KNL,E The mean stress sensitivity Mı or MW, in combination with
SWK, || = FAT|| · fFAT,V · ft · KV · KNL,E (2.4.2) the mean stress factor, describes to what extent the mean
stress affects the amplitude of the component fatigue limit,
TWK = FATW · fFAT,W · ft · KV
Figure 2.4-1.
FATA, } fatigue class, Chapter 5.4;
For non-welded components the mean stress sensitivity for
fFAT,V, } factor for conversion from fatigue class to
normal stress and for shear stress applicable in the case of
component fatigue limit for completely re- normal or elevated temperatures is as follows:
versed stress, Eq. (2.3.22);
ft thickness factor, Chapter 2.3.2.2; MV = aM · 10–3 · Rm/MPa + bM
(2.4.5)
KV surface treatment factor, Chapter 2.3.3, MW = fW,W · MV
KNL,E constant for GJL, Chapter 2.3.5. aM, bM constants, Table 2.4.1;
fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re-
The normal stress values SWK,A, SWK,|| apply to the num-
versed shear stress, Table 2.2.1.
ber of cycles ND,V = 5 · 106. The shear stress value TWK
Table 2.4.1 Constants aM and bM
applies to ND,W = 1 · 108. The characteristic values for
completely reversed stress of welded components corre- Material group Steel —1 GS GJS GJM GJL
spond with the fatigue limit at ND and the endurance limit aM 0,35 0,35 0,35 0,35 0
for N = v. bM -0,1 0,05 0,08 0,13 0,5

2.4.2 Component fatigue limit as a function Material Wrought aluminum Cast aluminum al-
of the mean stress group alloys loys
2.4.2.0 General aM 1,0 1,0
In accordance with this chapter, the amplitude of the com- bM -0,04 0,2
ponent fatigue limit shall be calculated depending on the —1 including stainless steel.
given mean stress, taking into consideration a multiaxial
state of stress where appropriate. For components that have been surface hardened (not
applicable to cold rolling or shot peening) the mean stress
The calculation applies to non-welded and welded compo- sensitivity in the tensile stress field is higher than that of
nents, using different input values in each case. components which have not been surface hardened; this is
due to the higher surface tensile strength Rm.
In the case of a stress spectrum, the stress ratio R refers to
step 1 of the stress spectrum (maximum value) R1.

The mean stress factor allows for the influence of the 2.4.2.1.3 Residual stress factor
mean stress on the fatigue strength. Without mean stress The residual stress factor for non-welded components is
the mean stress factor is
KE,V = KE,W = 1 (2.4.6)
KAK,zd = } = 1 (2.4.3)

2.4.2.2 Welded components

2.4.2.1 Non-welded components
2.4.2.2.1 Amplitude of the component fatigue limit
2.4.2.1.1 Amplitude of the component fatigue limit
The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo-
The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo- nent fatigue limit for normal stress perpendicular and par-
nent fatigue limit of rod-shaped components for axial, allel to the weld and for shear stress are as follows:
bending, shear and torsional stresses are:
SAK,A = KAK,A · KE,V · SWK,A
SAK,zd = KAK,zd · SWK,zd SAK, || = KAK,| · KE,V · SWK,|| (2.4.7)
SAK,by = KAK,by · SWK,by TAK = KAK,W · KE,W · TWK
SAK,bz = KAK,bz · SWK,bz KAK,A, } mean stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.4;
(2.4.4)
TAK,sy = KAK,sy · TWK,sy
KE,V, } residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.2.3;
TAK,sz = KAK,sz · TWK,sz
TAK,t = KAK,t · TWK,t
2.4 Component strength 49 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

SWK,A, } component fatigue limit for completely re-

2.4.2.3 Fatigue limit diagram
versed stress, Chapter 2.4.1.2.
Field of mean stress
2.4.2.2.2 Mean stress sensitivity
The mean stress factor KAK depends on the mean stress
For welded components the mean stress sensitivity for
normal stress and for shear stress applicable in the case of sensitivity, the field of mean stress and the type of over-
normal or elevated temperatures shall be taken from Table loading. The field of mean stress is determined by the
2.4.2, as a function of the intensity of the residual stress, stress ratio R. Here, four fields of mean stress shall be
but independent of the material. distinguished.
Normal stresses
2.4.2.2.3 Residual stress factor For normal stresses, a Haigh diagram with increasing
amplitudes applies to the tension field, see Figure 2.4-1.
The residual stress factor accounts for the influence of
residual stresses on the fatigue strength of welded compo- Field I: R > 1, field of fluctuating compression stress. R
nents. = + or  ’ is the zero compression stress.
For welded components made of steel and of aluminum, Field II:  ’ d R d 0. R < 1 is the field of alternating
the residual stress factor is given in Table 2.4.2 for normal compression stress, R = 1 is the completely reversed
stress and shear stress, as a function of the intensity of the stress, R > 1 is the field of alternating tension stress.
residual stress.
Field III: 0 < R < 0,5, field of low fluctuating tension
Table 2.4.2 Residual stress factor KE and mean stress stress. R = 0 is the zero tension stress.
sensitivity M for welded components
Field IV: R t 0,5, field of high fluctuating tension stress.
Residual
KE,ı Mı KE,W MW —1 Indices "zd" for axial stress and "b" for bending.
stresses
high 1,00 0 1,00 0
moderate 1,26 0,15 1,15 0,09
low 1,54 0,30 1,30 0,17
—1 The following applies to shear stresses:
MW = fW,W · Mı, fW,W = 0,577, Table 2.2.1

Estimation of residual stresses in accordance with /36/, /37/

High residual stresses shall be assumed in the case of
– complex thick-walled components subject to strong
multiaxial stresses or
Figure 2.4-1: Diagram for fatigue limit for normal stresses
– the presence of design-related global residual stresses.
(Haigh diagram)
Moderate residual stresses shall be assumed in the case of
Critical amplitude SAK, mean stress Sm, stress ratio R,
– narrow girders with longitudinal welds and with trans-
component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress SWK
verse welds of less than 300 mm in length;
– transversely stressed welds on components with a sheet Shear stresses
metal thickness of up to 10 mm; For shear stresses, a Haigh diagram which is symmetrical
– mainly longitudinally stressed welds on components to Tm = 0 and exhibits no increasing amplitudes for R < –1
with a sheet metal thickness of up to 16 mm, provided is valid.
the transverse stress is lower than half the longitudinal
Field I: not existing for calculation;
stress (SA < 0,5 · S||);
Field II:  1 d R d 0 (lower boundary changed);
– all aluminum welded joints to which the criteria for low
residual stresses do not apply. Field III: 0 < R < 0,5 (unchanged);
Low residual stresses (of up to approximately 0,2 · Rp) Field IV: R t 0,5 (unchanged).
shall be assumed in the case of Indices "s" for shear due to transverse forces and "t" for
– welding with subsequent stress-relief heat treatment or torsion.

– if residual stresses can safely be ruled out.

2.4 Component strength 50 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

Sm/Sa = (1 + R)/(1 – R) (2.4.10)

Field III, 0 < R < 0,5:
3  MV
K AK (2.4.11)
(1  MV ) ˜ (3  MV ˜ Sm /Sa )
Field IV, R t 0,5:
3  MV
K AK (2.4.12)
3 ˜ (1  MV )2
R stress ratio;
Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.1.2 or
Figure 2.4-2: Diagram for fatigue limit for shear stresses 2.4.2.2.2;
(Haigh diagram) Sm mean stress;
Sa stress amplitude.
Critical amplitude TAK, mean stress Tm, stress ratio R,
Shear stresses
component fatigue limit for completely reversed
stress TWK Indices "s" for shear due to transverse forces and "t" for
torsion.
Mean stress sensitivity
The mean stress factor for shear stress shall be calculated
The mean stress sensitivity for normal stresses MV or for based on the absolute value of the mean shear stress. This
shear stresses MW is calculated in accordance with Chap- always results in R t –1.
ter 2.4.2.1.2 (for non-welded components) and in accord-
Otherwise the mean stress factor for shear stress is calcu-
ance with Chapter 2.4.2.2.2 (for welded components).
lated in the same manner as for normal stresses, in accord-
ance with Eqs. (2.4.9) to (2.4.12), provided MV is replaced
2.4.2.4 Mean stress factor by MW. Field I is omitted.

The mean stress factor is calculated in the same manner for Calculation for type of overloading F1
welded and for non-welded components. In the case of overloading in service, the mean stress Sm
Type of overloading remains constant.
The mean stress factor KAK depends on the type of over- Normal stresses
loading, F1 to F4. This shall be specified as a function of
Indices "zd" for axial stress and "b" for bending.
the stress behavior in the case of a possible load increase in
service (not by crash), that is in the sense of "safety in Based on the related mean stress
service". The types of overloading are as follows: Sm
sm (2.4.13)
– Type F1: the mean stress Sm remains constant. K E,ı ˜ S WK
– Type F2: the stress ratio R remains constant. Sm mean stress;
– Type F3: the minimum stress Smin remains constant.
KE,V residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.1.3 or
– Type F4: the maximum stress Smax remains constant.
2.4.2.2.3;
Intermediate types of overloading are possible. Depending SWK component fatigue limit for completely reversed
on the type of overloading, the critical amplitude of the stress, Chapter 2.4.1.1 or 2.4.1.2,
component fatigue limit is different, Figure 2.4-1. the following applies:
Field I, sm < –1/(1 – MV):
Calculation for type of overloading F2
KAK = 1/(1 – MV) (2.4.14)
Type of overloading F2 is described first because it is of Field II, –1/(1 – MV) d sm d 1/(1 + MV):
the highest practical importance. In the case of overloading
KAK = 1 – MV · sm (2.4.15)
in service, the stress ratio R remains constant.
Field III, 1/(1+MV) < sm < (3+MV)/(1+MV)2:
Normal stresses
1  MV / 3 MV
K AK  ˜ sm (2.4.16)
Indices "zd" for axial stress and "b" for bending. 1  MV 3
Field I, R > 1:
Field IV, sm t (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2:
KAK = 1/( 1  Mı) (2.4.8)
Field II,  ’ d R d 0: 3  MV
K AK (2.4.17)
1 3 ˜ (1  MV )2
KAK = (2.4.9)
1  Mı ˜ Sm /Sa Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.1.2 or
The notation applying Sm/Sa avoids numerical problems if 2.4.2.2.2.
R = –v.
2.4 Component strength 51 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

Shear stresses tmin is calculated in accordance with the sign of the shear
Indices "s" for shear due to transverse forces and "t" for stress Tmin. For the calculation of the mean stress factor,
torsion. the following cases shall be distinguished:
The following applies analogously to Eq. (2.4.13): For tmin t –1 the mean stress factor for shear stress is cal-
culated in the same manner as for normal stresses, in ac-
Tm
tm (2.4.18) cordance with Eqs. (2.4.21) to (2.4.23), provided MV is
K E,W ˜ TWK
replaced by MW and smin is replaced by tmin. Field I is omit-
The mean stress factor for shear stress shall be calculated ted.
based on the absolute value of the mean shear stress. This For tmin  –1, tmax = –tmin applies and the mean stress
always results in a positive value tm t 0.
factor for shear stress is calculated analogously to the type
Otherwise the mean stress factor for shear stress is calcu- of overloading F4 and in the same manner as for normal
lated in the same manner as for normal stresses, in accord- stresses, in accordance with Eqs. (2.4.27) to (2.4.29), pro-
ance with Eqs. (2.4.15) to (2.4.17), provided MV is re- vided MV is replaced by MW and smax is replaced by tmax.
placed by MW and sm is replaced by tm. Field I is omitted. Field I is omitted.

Calculation for type of overloading F3 Calculation for type of overloading F4

In the case of overloading in service, the minimum In the case of overloading in service, the maximum
stress Smin remains constant. stress Smax remains constant.

Normal stresses Normal stresses

Indices "zd" for axial stress and "b" for bending. Indices "zd" for axial stress and "b" for bending.

Based on the related minimum stress Based on the related maximum stress
Smin Smax
smin smax (2.4.25)
K E,ı ˜ S WK
(2.4.19) K E,ı ˜ S WK
Smin minimum stress; Smax maximum stress;
KE,V residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.1.3 and 2.4.2.2.3; KE,V residual stress factor, Chapter 2.4.2.1.3 or
SWK component fatigue limit for completely reversed 2.4.2.2.3;
SWK component fatigue limit for completely reversed
stress, Chapter 2.4.1.1. or 2.4.1.2,
stress, Chapter 2.4.1.1 or 2.4.1.2,
the following applies: the following applies:
Field I, smin < –2/(1 – MV): Field I, smax < 0:
KAK = 1/(1 – MV) (2.4.20) KAK = 1/(1 – MV). (2.4.26)
Field II, –2/(1 – MV) d smin d 0: Field II, 0 d smax d 2/(1 + MV):
1  MV ˜ smin 1  M V ˜ s max
K AK (2.4.21) K AK
1  MV (2.4.27)
1  MV
Field III, 0 < smin < 2/3·(3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2:
Field III, 2/(1+MV) < smax < 4/3 · (3+MV)/(1+MV)2:
1 M ˜s
K AK  V min (2.4.22) 3  MV
1  MV 3  MV  MV ˜ smax
1  MV (2.4.28)
Field IV, smin t 2/3 · (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2: K AK
3  MV
3  MV Field IV, smax t 4/3·(3+MV)/(1+MV)2:
K AK (2.4.23)
3 ˜ (1  MV )2 3  MV
Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.1.2 or K AK (2.4.29)
3 ˜ (1  MV )2
2.4.2.2.2.
Shear stresses Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 2.4.2.1.2 or 2.4.2.2.2.

Indices "s" for shear due to transverse forces and "t" for Shear stresses
torsion. Indices "s" for shear due to transverse forces and "t" for
The following applies analogously to Eq. (2.4.19): torsion.

Tmin The following applies analogously to Eq. (2.4.25):

t min (2.4.24)
K E, W ˜ TWK Tmax
t max (2.4.30)
K E,W ˜ TWK
2.4 Component strength 52 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

tmax is calculated in accordance with the sign of the shear Sa individual stress ratio;
stress Tmax. For the calculation of the mean stress factor, Rv equivalent stress ratio;
the following cases shall be distinguished: Smin,v equivalent minimum stress;
For tmax t 1 the mean stress factor for shear stress is calcu- Smax,v equivalent maximum stress.
lated in the same manner as for normal stresses, in accord- The equivalent mean stress, Eq. (2.4.32), for normal stress
ance with Eqs. (2.4.27) to (2.4.29), provided MV is re- is
placed by MW and smax is replaced by tmax. Field I is omit- Sm,v = q ˜ Sm,v,NH + (1 – q) · Sm,v,GH (2.4.33)
ted. 3  (1/ fw,W )
q (2.4.34)
For tmax  1, tmin = –tmax applies and the mean stress factor 3 1
for shear stress is calculated analogously to the type of 1 § 2 2 ·
overloading F3 and in the same manner as for normal Sm, v,NH ˜ ¨ Sm  S m  4 ˜ Tm ¸
2 © ¹
stresses, in accordance with Eqs. (2.4.21) to (2.4.23), pro-
2 2
vided MV is replaced by MW and smin is replaced by tmin. S m, v, GH Sm  3 ˜ Tm
Field I is omitted. q constant in accordance with Table 2.6.1;
Sm, Tm individual mean stresses, Eq. (2.4.36) or
2.4.2.5 Individual or equivalent mean stress
Eq. (4.4.37).
In each case, quantities R, Smin and Smax are determined
The following applies to shear stress
based on the mean stress and the amplitude. The mean
stress may be taken either as the individual mean stress Tm,v = fW,W · Sm,v (2.4.35)
according to the type of stress or as an equivalent mean fW,W shear strength factor, Table 2.2.1.
stress determined based on the individual mean stresses of
all types of stress. Non-welded components
Non-welded components: For axial, bending, shear and For rod-shaped non-welded components the equivalent
torsional stresses, the quantities Smin,zd, }, Rzd, mean stress in accordance with Eq. (2.4.33) shall be com-
Smin,by, }, Rby, Smin,by, }, Rbz, Tmin,sy, }, Rsy, puted only for values Sm,zd + Sm,by + Sm,bz t 0. The fol-
Tmin,sz, }, Rsz or Tmin,t, }, Rt apply. lowing applies:
Sm = Sm,zd + Sm,by + Sm,bz
Welded components: For normal stresses perpendicular and (2.4.36)
Tm = Tm,sy + Tm,sz + Tm,t
parallel to the weld as well as shear stresses, the quantities
Smin,A, }, RA, Smin,||, }, R||, or Tmin, } Rt apply. Sm,zd, } individual mean stresses, Chapter 2.1.

Individual mean stress Comment: In general, the comments given in Clause 2.1.0
apply to taking into consideration the shear stresses due to
As a rule, Smin, Smax and R are determined based on the transverse forces. The additive superposition of the mean
individual mean stress Sm. In that case, the following ap- shear stresses Tm,sy and Tm,sz is always on the safe side. It
plies: is valid, if—in the case of thin-walled cross-sections—the
Smin = Sm – Sa shear stresses due to Qy and Qz are oriented along the
Smax = Sm + Sa (2.4.31) profile. In the case of prismatic cross-sections, the follow-
R = Smin/Smax ing more practicable superposition applying the SRSS
Sa stress amplitude; method may be used:
Smin minimum stress; 2 2
Tm Tm,sy  Tm,sz  Tm, t
Smax maximum stress;
R stress ratio. As their effects may become added or subtracted, the val-
Equivalent mean stress ues Sm,zd, Sm,by, Sm,bz, Tm,sy, Tm,sz and Tm,t shall be in-
serted into Eq. (2.4.36) with the proper signs.
In the case of „bending and torsion", which is typical of
numerous applications in machine design, and in similar Welded components
cases of normal and shear stresses, the equivalent variables For welded components the equivalent mean stress in ac-
Smin,v, Smax,v and Rv shall be used with an equivalent
cordance with Eq. (2.4.33) shall be computed only for
mean stress Sm,v derived from the individual mean stresses values Sm,A t 0 and Sm,|| = 0 (or vice versa). The following
of all stress types, using Eq. (2.4.33). In that case, the fol- applies:
lowing applies:
Sm = Sm,A or Sm = Sm,||
Smin,v = Sm,v – Sa (2.4.37)
Tm = Tm
Smax,v = Sm,v + Sa (2.4.32)
Rv = Smin,v/Smax,v Sm,A, } individual mean stresses, Chapter 2.1.
2.4 Component strength 53 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

Preference of the individual mean stress

2.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue
Should the equivalent mean stress in accordance with strength
Eq. (2.4.33) be smaller than the individual mean stress in
the case of an individual stress type, this stress type shall 2.4.3.0 General
be calculated using the individual mean stress. In accordance with this chapter, the amplitude of the com-
ponent variable amplitude fatigue strength shall be com-
puted as a function of the stress spectrum and the compo-
nent constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.4.
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK to be
calculated depends on the stress spectrum, that is on the
required total number of cycles (equals the required com-
ponent fatigue life) and on the shape of the spectrum, as
well as on the component constant amplitude S-N curve.
The calculation may be performed
– for a constant amplitude stress spectrum using an as-
sessment of the fatigue limit (or an assessment of the
endurance limit for N = v) or an assessment of the fa-
tigue strength for finite life or
– for a variable amplitude stress spectrum using an as-
sessment of the variable amplitude fatigue strength. In
a simplified manner the assessment of the variable am-
plitude fatigue strength can be performed on the basis
of a damage-equivalent stress amplitude, in which case
it takes the form of an assessment of the fatigue limit.
The calculation for a constant amplitude stress spectrum is
a special case of the general case of calculation for a varia-
ble amplitude stress spectrum. In each case the calculation
procedure is the same, but the variable amplitude fatigue
strength factors are different.
The calculation algorithm applies to non-welded and weld-
ed components, using different input vales in each case.

2.4.3.1 Non-welded components

The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo-
nent variable amplitude fatigue strength (highest critical
amplitude in stress spectrum) for axial, bending, shear and
torsional stresses are
SBK,zd = KBK,zd · SAK,zd
SBK,by = KBK,by · SAK,by
SBK,bz = KBK,bz · SAK,bz
(2.4.38)
TBK,sy = KBK,sy · TAK,sy
TBK,sz = KBK,sz · TAK,sz
TBK,t = KBK,t · TAK,t
KBK,zd, } variable amplitude fatigue strength factor,
Chapter 2.4.3.5;
SAK,zd, } component fatigue limit, Chapter 2.4.2.

2.4.3.2 Welded components

The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo-
nent variable amplitude fatigue strength (highest critical
amplitude in stress spectrum) for normal stresses perpen-
dicular and parallel to the weld as well as for torsion are
2.4 Component strength 54 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.4.3.4 Component constant amplitude S-N curve

SBK,A =KBK,A · SAK,A
SBK, || = KBK,|| · SAK,|| (2.4.39) For numbers of cycles at knee point ND and slope expo-
TBK = KBK,W TAK nents k of the component constant amplitude S-N curves
KBK,A, } variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, for non-welded (without surface hardening) and welded
Chapter 2.4.3.5; components as well as for normal and shear stress, see
SAK,A, } component fatigue limit, Chapter 2.4.2. Table 2.4.3, Figures 2.4-4 and 2.4-5.

2.4.3.3 Restriction of the maximum amplitude The value of the component fatigue limit SAK shall be
taken from Chapter 2.4.2. In the case of model I constant
The critical amplitude of the variable amplitude fatigue amplitude S-N curves, fatigue limit and endurance limit for
strength SBK is restricted by the static strength SSK as well
N = v are identical. In the case of model II constant ampli-
as by the component yield strength, Figure 2.4-3. tude S-N curves, fatigue limit and endurance limit for
N = v differ by the factor fII, Table 2.4.3. The fatigue limit
is the relevant basis for calculation in all cases.
Table 2.4.3 Number of cycles at knee point, slope ex-
ponents and values fII,V, fII,W —1 of the component constant
amplitude S-N curves
Normal stress
Component ND,V ND,II,V kV kII,V fII,V
Steel and cast iron materials (model I S-N curve)
non-welded 106 - 5 - -
welded 5˜106 - 3 - -
Figure 2.4-3: Restriction of the critical amplitude of the Aluminum materials and austenitic steel
variable amplitude fatigue strength, SBK, illustrated in (model II S-N curve)
terms of the Haigh diagram non-welded 106 108 5 15 0,74
welded 5˜106 - 3 - -
Thus, the maximum value of the amplitude of the compo- —1 f , f from N , N
nent variable amplitude fatigue strength, determined sepa- II,V II,W D D,II and kII in accordance with Eq. (2.4.49)
rately for each stress type at the reference point, is
for non-welded components
SBK,max,zd = 0,75 · Rp
SBK,max,by = 0,75 · Rp · npl,by
SBK,max,bz = 0,75 · Rp · npl,bz
(2.4.40)
TBK,max,sy = 0,75 · fW · Rp
TBK,max,sz = 0,75 · fW · Rp
TBK,max,t = 0,75 · fW · Rp · npl,t
and for welded components
SBK,max,A = 0,75 · Rp · npl · Dw · UWEZ
SBK,max,|| = 0,75 · Rp · npl · Dw · UWEZ (2.4.41)
TBK,max = 0,75 · Rp ˜ Dw · UWEZ
Rp yield strength, Chapter 1.2.1.1;
fW shear strength factor, Table 1.2.5;
n section factors, Chapter 1.3.1.1;
Dw weld factor, Chapter 1.3.2.2;
UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25.
The following applies to each stress type:
if SBK t SBK,max then
SBK = SBK,max and (2.4.42)
KBK = SBK,max/SAK
KBK, } variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, Chap- Figure 2.4-4: Component constant amplitude
ter 2.4.3.5; S-N curves for non-welded components
SBK, } component variable amplitude fatigue strength,
Top: Normal stress S (axial stress, bending).
Eqs. (2.4.38), (2.4.39);
Bottom: Shear stress T (shear stress, torsion).
SAK, } component fatigue limit, Chapter 2.4.2.
2.4 Component strength 55 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

Steel and cast iron materials, except austenitic steel (mod- 2.4.3.5 Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
el I). 2.4.3.5.1 Calculation for a constant amplitude stress
Aluminum materials and austenitic steel (model II). spectrum

For surface hardened components (not applicable to cold Model I component constant amplitude S-N curve:
rolling or shot peening) the slope of the component con- Horizontal for N > ND (steel and cast iron material, weld-
stant amplitude S-N curves is more shallow than for com- ed components).
ponents which have not been surface hardened. Instead of
the values kV = 5 and kW = 8, Table 2.4.3, the values kV = The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue
15 and kW = 25 apply to surface hardened, non-welded strength for finite life:
components made of steel and cast iron materials, provided 1
the numbers of cycles at knee point ND,V and ND,W remain § N ·k
KBK = ¨ D ¸ for N < ND (2.4.43)
unchanged. © N ¹
Shear stress
Component ND,W ND,II,W kW kII,W fII,W
The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue limit
Steel and cast iron materials (model I S-N curve) and the endurance limit for N = v:
non-welded 106 - 8 - -
KBK = 1 for N t ND (2.4.44)
welded 108 - 5 - -
Aluminum materials and austenitic steel Model II component constant amplitude S-N curve:
(model II S-N curve)
Horizontal for N > ND,II sloping for ND < N < ND,II
non-welded 106 108 8 25 0,83
(aluminum materials and austenitic steel, non-welded).
welded 108 - 5 - -
The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue
strength for finite life:
1
§ N ·k (2.4.45)
KBK = ¨ D ¸ for N < ND
© N ¹
1
§ N ·k (2.4.46)
KBK = ¨ D ¸ II for ND < N < ND,II
© N ¹
The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue
limit:
KBK = 1 for N = ND (2.4.47)
The following applies to the assessment of the endurance
limit for N = v:
KBK = fII for N t ND,II (2.4.48)
N required number of cycles;
ND number of cycles at knee point of the component
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.4;
k slope exponent of component constant amplitude
S-N curve for N < ND, Chapter 2.4.3.4;
ND,II number of cycles at second knee point of the
component constant amplitude S-N curve, only
for model II constant amplitude S-N curve,
Chapter 2.4.3.4;
kII slope exponent of the component constant
amplitude S-N curve for ND < N < ND,II, only
Figure 2.4-5: Component constant amplitude S-N curves
for welded components for model II constant amplitude S-N curve,
Top: Normal stress S (perpendicular and parallel to the Chapter 2.4.3.4;
weld). fII factor by which the endurance limit is lower than
Bottom: Shear stress T (shear). the fatigue limit, Chapter 2.4.3.4.
Steel, cast iron materials and aluminum materials (mod- 1
el I). § ND · kII
NC is the reference number of cycles corresponding to the fII ¨ ¸ (2.4.49)
¨N ¸
characteristic strength value SAC or TAC (the fatigue class), © D,II ¹
see Eq. (2.3.22).
2.4 Component strength 56 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.4.3.5.2 Calculation for a variable amplitude stress

spectrum
In the case of a variable amplitude stress spectrum, the
calculation shall preferably be performed using the con-
sistent version of Miner’s rule or, in a simplified manner,
using the more conservative elementary version of Miner’s
rule.
Figure 2.4-7 Effective damage sum Dm

Table 2.4.4 Lower limit of the effective damage sum

Dm,min
Steel, GS, Aluminum, not welded 0,3
Welded components 0,5
GJS, GJM, GJL, not welded 1,0

Comment: The values given in Table 2.4.4 shall be used

with caution as the effective damage sum may be lower in
special cases, e.g. with intense mean load variations.
Figure 2.4-6: Variable amplitude fatigue strength
Distinction from constant amplitude stress spectrum
factor KBK
The following applies to model I constant amplitude S-N
Example: Elementary version of Miner’s rule, Model I curves: If a value KBK  1 is calculated using Eq. (2.4.50),
component constant amplitude S-N curve, Dm = 1. then KBK = 1.
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, Figure 2.4-
6, for model I and model II constant amplitude S-N curves The following applies to a model II constant amplitude S-N
is: curves: If, using Eq. (2.4.50), a value KBK smaller than the
1 value KBK obtained using Eq. (2.4.46) or Eq. (2.4.48) (as a
§ A ˜ ND ˜ Dm · k (2.4.50)
K BK ¨ ¸ function of N ) is calculated, then KBK calculated using
© N ¹
Eq. (2.4.46) or Eq. (2.4.48) shall be applied.
N required number of cycles;
ND number of cycles at knee point of the component Calculation using a damage-equivalent stress amplitude
constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.4; Alternatively, the calculation may be performed based on
A distance between fatigue life curve and constant the damage-equivalent stress amplitude. In that case, the
amplitude S-N curve, variable amplitude fatigue strength factor to be used in
Aele for the elementary version of Miner’s rule, Eqs. (2.4.38) and (2.4.39) is, as a rule:
Eq. (2.4.55); KBK,äqu = 1 (2.4.52)
Akon for the consistent version of Miner’s rule,
Eqs. (2.4.58), (2.4.60); For the assessment of the fatigue strength in accordance
k slope exponent of the component constant with Chapter 2.6, the damage-equivalent stress amplitude
amplitude S-N curve for shall be used instead of the highest amplitude of the stress
N < ND, Chapter 2.4.3.4. spectrum Sa,1,
The effective damage sum Dm, Figure 2.4-7, is: Säqu = Sa,1/KBK (2.4.53)

2 taking into consideration the restriction of KBK in accord-

Dm (2.4.51)
4 ance with Eq. (2.4.42).
A
as well as Damage potential

if Dm > 1 then: Dm = 1 and The damage potential (not required for further calculation)
if Dm < Dm,min then: Dm = Dm,min for model I and model II constant amplitude S-N curves is:
1
Dm,min lower limit of the effective damage sum in v (2.4.54)
k A
accordance with Table 2.4.4.
A Aele or Akon, Eq. (2.4.55), (2.4.58) or
Eq. (2.4.60);
2.4 Component strength 57 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

k slope exponent of the component constant k 1 k 1

§ Sa,Ȟ · § Sa,Ȟ 1 ·
amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chap- Z2 ¨ ¸ ¨ ¸
¨S ¸ ¨ S ¸
ter 2.4.3.4. © a,1 ¹ © a,1 ¹
Calculation using the elementary version of Miner’s k
m 1 n§ Sa,i ·
rule N1 ¦ ˜ ¨¨i ¸
¸
i 1 N © Sa,1 ¹
The calculation using the elementary version of Miner’s
rule may be performed directly. The following applies to k
Ȟ n § Sa,i ·
model I and model II constant amplitude S-N curves: N2 ¦ i ˜¨ ¸
¨S ¸
1 i 1N © a,1 ¹ .
A ele
k ND number of cycles at knee point of the component
ni §¨ Sa,i ·¸
j
(2.4.55)
¦ ˜
¨ S
N © a,1 ¹ ¸ constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 2.4.3.4;
i 1 k slope exponent of the component constant
N required number of cycles, N = 6 ni amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chap-
(summed up for 1 to j), Chapter 2.1.3; ter 2.4.3.4;
ni related number of cycles in step i, Chap- Dm effective damage sum, Eq. (2.4.51);
ter 2.1.3; N required number of cycles, N = 6 ni (summed
k slope exponent of the component constant up for 1 to j), Chapter 2.1.3;
amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chapter ni related number of cycles in step i, Chapter 2.1.3;
2.4.3.4; Sa,i stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum;
j total number of steps in the spectrum;
Sa,1 maximum stress amplitude in step i of the
i running number of the respective step in the
spectrum; spectrum;
~
Sa,i stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum; Säqu approximate damage-equivalent amplitude;
Sa,1 maximum stress amplitude in step i = 1 of j total number of steps in the spectrum;
the spectrum. i running number of the respective step in
the spectrum;
Calculation using the consistent version of Miner’s rule m number of the first step in the spectrum below
The calculation using the consistent version of Miner’s ~
Säqu , to be specified for each iteration step.
rule shall be performed iteratively.
For the summation of the term Z2, it shall be observed that
Model I component constant amplitude S-N curve: ~ ~
Saj+1 = 0. If Säqu > Sa,1, then N = v applies to
Horizontal for N > ND (Steel and cast iron material, weld-
Eq. (2.4.57).
ed components).
The computation in accordance with Eq. (2.4.57) shall be
As an iteration start value, an approximate damage- ~
equivalent amplitude repeated iteratively for differing values of Säqu , until a
~ ~
Säqu Sa,1/KBK,ele (2.4.56) value N is obtained which corresponds with the required
number of cycles N . Based on the obtained value of Akon,
shall be calculated in accordance with the elementary ver- the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor shall be cal-
sion of Miner's rule with KBK,ele, using Eqs. (2.4.50) and culated using Eq. (2.4.50).
(2.4.55). Based on the approximate damage-equivalent
amplitude, the following number of cycles results:
k Model II component constant amplitude S-N curve:
§S~ ·
~
N A kon ˜ ND ˜ Dm ˜ ¨ äqu ¸ (2.4.57) Horizontal for N > ND,II, sloping for ND < N < ND,II
¨ Sa,1 ¸
© ¹ (aluminum materials and austenitic steel, non-welded).

with As an iteration start value, an approximate damage-

equivalent amplitude in accordance with the elementary
k 1
ª Z1 j Z2 º § S · version of Miner's rule shall be calculated using
 ¦ ¨ a,1 ¸
A kon « »˜¨ ~ ¸
(2.4.58) Eq. (2.4.56). Based on the approximate damage-equivalent
¬« N1 Ȟ m N2 ¼» © S äqu ¹ amplitude, the following number of cycles results:
~ kx
~ k 1 k 1 §S ·
§S · §S · ~ ¨ äqu ¸
¨ äqu ¸  ¨ a,m ¸ N ND ˜ A kon ˜ Dm ˜ (2.4.59)
Z1
¨ Sa,1 ¸ ¨S ¸ ¨ Sa,1 ¸
© ¹ © a,1 ¹ © ¹
~ ~
with kX = k for Säqu < Sa,1 and kX = kII for Säqu t Sa,1.
2.5 Safety factors 58 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

k 1
The computation in accordance with Eq. (2.4.59) shall be
ª Z3 j
Z4 º» §¨ Sa,1 · ~
¦ ¸
« repeated iteratively for differing values of Säqu , until a
A kon  ˜ (2.4.60)
« N3 Ȟ p N4 » ¨ fII ˜ S
~ ¸ ~
¬ ¼ © äqu ¹ value N is obtained which corresponds with the required
and number of cycles N . Based on the obtained value of Akon,
the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor shall be cal-
~ k 1 k 1
§ fII ˜ S · § Sa,p · culated using Eq. (2.4.50).
Z3 ¨ äqu ¸  ¨ ¸
¨ Sa,1 ¸ ¨S ¸
© ¹ © a,1 ¹
k 1 k 1
§ Sa,Ȟ · §S ·
Z4 ¨ ¸  ¨ a,Ȟ 1 ¸
¨S ¸ ¨ S ¸
© a,1 ¹ © a,1 ¹
~
The following applies to Sa,1 t Säqu

k II k
§ Sa,i · §¨ Sa,1 ·¸
k k II
m 1 n p 1 n§ Sa,i ·
N3 ¦ i ˜ ¨ ¸  ~ ˜ ¦ ˜ ¨¨
i ¸
¨ ¸ ¨S ¸ ¸
i 1 N © Sa,1 ¹ © äqu ¹ i m N © Sa,1 ¹

k k II  k k II
rȞ
ni § S a,i · § f ˜S · Q
n § S a,i ·
N4 ¦
i 1 N
˜ ¨¨ ¸  ¨ II a,1 ¸
¸ ¨ S ¸ ˜ ¦ i ˜ ¨¨ ¸
¸
© S a,1 ¹ © a, Ȟ ¹ i rȞ 1 N © S a,1 ¹
~ ~
The following applies to Säqu > Sa,1 t fII ˜ Säqu

kII
p 1 n § Sa,i ·¸
N3 ¦ i ˜ ¨¨ ¸
i m 1 N © Sa,1 ¹

~ k k k
§S · II rȞ n § Sa,i ·
N4 ¨ äqu ¸
˜¦ i ˜¨ ¸
¨ Sa,1 ¸ ¨S ¸
© ¹ i 1N © a,1 ¹
~ k k k II
§ fII ˜ S · II Ȟ § Sa,i ·
¨ äqu ¸ n
˜¨ ¸

¨ Sa,Q ¸
˜ ¦ i ¨S ¸
© ¹ i rȞ 1 N © a,1 ¹

in addition to the designations of Eq. (2.4.57):

ND,II number of cycles at second knee point of the
component constant amplitude S-N curve, only
for model II constant amplitude S-N curves,
Chapter 2.4.3.4;
kII slope exponent of the component constant
amplitude S-N curve for ND < N < ND,II, only
for model II constant amplitude S-N curves,
Chapter 2.4.3.4;
fII factor by which the endurance limit is lower than
the fatigue limit, Table 2.4.3;
~
p first step in the spectrum below fII ˜ Säqu ;
rQ number of the last step in the spectrum for which
the following applies: Sa,i t Sa,Q/fII for i = 1}j.

The summation limits m, p and rQ shall be specified for

each iteration step.
~
If fII ˜ Säqu > Sa,1, the following applies to Eq. (2.4.59):
~
N = v.
2.5 Safety factors 59 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.5 Safety factors 2.5.2 Welded components

2.5.0 General The material safety factor for the fatigue strength depends
on the possibilities of inspection and the consequences of
The safety factors are valid on the condition that the char- failure, see Table 2.5.3.
acteristic strength values exhibit an average probability of
survival of PÜ = 97,5 %. Table 2.5.3 Material safety factors jF for welded com-
ponents
Provided that reliable design loads are used, the following Consequences of failure —1
load safety factor applies: jF
severe mean moderate
jS = 1,0 (2.5.1)
Regular inspec- no 1,4 1,25 1,15
For comments on the load safety factor, see Chapter 5.7. tions —2 yes 1,2 1,1 1,0
—1 Severe consequences of failure: loss of human life.
2.5.1 Non-welded components Mean consequences of failure: loss of the entire structure, reduction by
about 10 %.
2.5.1.1 Steel and wrought aluminum alloys Moderate consequences of failure: loss of secondary components;
possibilities for load redistribution in statically indeterminate system,
The material safety factor for the fatigue strength depends reduction by about 20 %.
on the possibilities of inspection and the consequences of —2 Regular inspection in the sense of monitoring for early detection of
failure, see Table 2.5.1. damage. Reduction by about 15 %.
Table 2.5.1 Material safety factors jF for non-welded
steel and wrought aluminum alloys
2.5.3 Total safety factor
Consequences of failure —1
jF
severe mean moderate The total safety factor for the assessment of the fatigue
strength jD is:
Regular inspec- no 1,5 1,4 1,3
tions —2 yes 1,35 1,25 1,2 jF
jD jS ˜ (2.5.2)
—1 Severe consequences of failure: loss of human life. K T,D
Mean consequences of failure: loss of the entire structure, reduction by
about 7,5 %. For cast components in accordance with Chapter 2.5.1.2,
Moderate consequences of failure: loss of secondary components;
possibilities for load redistribution in statically indeterminate system,
the following shall be used instead of Eq. (2.5.2):
reduction by about 15 %.
j ˜j
—2 Regular inspection in the sense of monitoring for early detection of jD jS ˜ F G (2.5.3)
damage. Reduction by about 10 %. K T,D
jS load safety factor, Chapter 2.5.0;
2.5.1.2 Cast iron and cast aluminum materials jF material safety factor, Tabs. 2.5.1 and 2.5.3;
The material safety factor for the fatigue strength jF of cast jG cast factor, Table 2.5.2;
iron and cast aluminum materials shall be specified based Kt,D temperature factor, Chapter 2.2.3.
on Table 2.5.1.
Due to inevitable but allowable defects in castings, the
safety factors shall be increased by a partial safety factor
(casting factor) jG in accordance with Table 2.5.2.

Table 2.5.2 Casting factors jG

jG
Castings not subject to non-destructive
1,4
testing
Castings subject to non-destructive testing
—1
1,25

High quality cast components —2 1,0

—1 It is assumed that testing ensures a verifiably higher quality of the
cast components.
—2 High quality cast components meet special requirements for qualifi-
cation and monitoring of the production process as well as for the ex-
tent and quality of product testing in order to ensure uniform compo-
nent properties with little scatter.
In mechanical engineering, cast components are of a standard quality for
which a further reduction of the casting factor for high quality cast
components, such as in the aircraft industry, does not, thus far, seem
possible.
2.6 Assessment 60 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.6 Assessment stress is multiaxial, the combined types of stress shall be

considered as described below.
2.6.1 General
Eq. (2.6.5) has the character of a strength hypothesis in the
The assessment of the fatigue strength using nominal case of proportional stresses only. In general, Eq. (2.6.5)
stresses shall be carried out in accordance with Chap- has the character of an empirical interaction equation. It
ter 2.6.1 for individual stress types. can be applied to proportional stresses and—by way of
approximation—to synchronous stresses.
The assessment of the fatigue strength using nominal
stresses shall be carried out in accordance with Chap- For non-proportional stresses, Chapter 2.6.2.2,
ter 2.6.2 for combined stress types. Eq. (2.6.13), shall be used.
The calculation applies to both non-welded and welded
components.
2.6.1 Inividual stress types
Degree of utilization
The cyclic degrees of utilization of non-welded rod-shaped
The assessment shall be carried out based on the cyclic components for the stress types tension-compression,
degree of utilization. The cyclic degree of utilization is the bending, shear and torsion are:
quotient of
Sa,zd,1
– the existing stress amplitude Sa,1 and aBK,zd d1
SBK,zd/jD
– the allowable amplitude of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength at the reference point. Sa,by,1
aBK,by d1
The allowable amplitude of the component variable ampli- SBK,by /jD
tude fatigue strength is the quotient of
Sa,bz,1
– the critical amplitude of the component variable ampli- aBK,bz d1
SBK,bz /jD
tude fatigue strength SBK and
(2.6.3)
– the required total safety factor jD. Ta,sy,1
aBK,sy d1
TBK,sy /jD
Existing and critical amplitudes as well as the cyclic de-
gree of utilization are always positive. Ta,sz,1
aBK,sz d1
A differentiation shall be made between the assessments of TBK,sz /jD
– the variable amplitude fatigue strength;
Ta,t,1
– the fatigue strength for finite life; aBK,t d1
TBK,t /jD
– the fatigue limit or
In the case of welded components with normal stresses
– the endurance limit for N = f. perpendicular and parallel to the weld as well as shear
In each case the calculation procedure is the same, provid- stresses, the following applies:
ed the appropriate variable amplitude fatigue strength Sa,A,1
factors KBK are chosen in accordance with Chapter 2.4.3 aBK,A d1
SBK,A /jD
and the following is applied in the calculation:
– in the case of a constant amplitude spectrum: Sa,||,1
aBK,|| d1 (2.6.4)
Sa,1 = Sa (2.6.1) SBK,||/jD

– and in the case of a damage-equivalent stress ampli- Ta,1

aBK,IJ d1
tude: TBK,IJ /jD
Sa,1 = Säqu (2.6.2)
Sa existing constant stress amplitude for the Sa,zd,1, } highest stress amplitude, depending on the
required number of cycles;
type of stress, Chapter 2.1.1 or 2.6.0;
Säqu damage-equivalent stress amplitude for ND
SBK,zd, } related component variable amplitude fa-
cycles.
tigue strength (highest critical stress ampli-
Superposition tude), Chapter 2.4.3;
jD total safety factor, Chapter 2.5.3.
If different types of stress such as tension-compression,
bending, torsion, } act in combination or if the resulting
2.6 Assessment 61 2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses

2.6.2 Combined types of stress Special cases

2.6.2.1 Proportional or synchronous stresses The following applies to non-ductile wrought aluminum
alloys (elongation at break A < 6 %):
The applied strength hypothesis for combined stress types
consists of two proportions in accordance with the normal q = 0,5
stress hypothesis and the von Mises criterion. The following applies to surface hardened components
Both proportions are controlled by constant q or by fW,W in (not to mechanical surface treatment):
accordance with Eq. (2.6.10), depending on the ductility of q=1
the material.
The following applies to welded components:
For steel and wrought aluminum alloys, q = 0 applies, with
the result that only the von Mises criterion is valid. For 1 ˜§ s  sa,||  sa,A  sa,|| 2 ·
 4 ˜ t a2 ¸ d 1
aBK,Sv ¨
2 © a,A
cast components, q z 0 applies, with the result that both the ¹
von Mises criterion and the normal stress hypothesis are
valid in certain proportions. (2.6.11)
The cyclic degree of utilization of non-welded rod-shaped with
components for combined stress types is:
sa,A = aBK,A
aBK,Sv = q · aNH + (1 – q) · aGH d 1 (2.6.5) sa,|| = aBK,|| (2.6.12)
ta = aBK,W
with
Rules of signs
1 § ·
aNH ˜ ¨ sa 
sa2  4 ˜ t a2 ¸ (2.6.6) The cyclic degrees of utilization aBK,zd, aBK,by and aBK,bz
2 © ¹
in Eq. (2.6.8), aBK,sy, aBK,sz and aBK,t in Eq. (2.6.9) or
aGH sa2  t a2 (2.6.7) aBK,A and aBK,|| in Eq. (2.6.12) shall always be inserted
using the sign of the amplitudes of the individual stress
and types at the reference point.
sa = aBK,zd + aBK,by + aBK,bz (2.6.8) If the amplitudes always act proportionally or synchro-
ta = aBK,sy + aBK,sz + aBK,t (2.6.9) nously out of phase, the addition results in a higher total
utilization. If the amplitudes act proportionally or synchro-
aBK,zd, } cyclic degree of utilization, Eq. (2.6.3).
nously in phase, stress components may cancel each other
Comment: In general, the comments given in Clause 2.1.0 in part or completely as a result of the subtraction.
apply to taking into consideration the shear stresses due to 2.6.2.2 Non-proportional stresses
transverse forces. The additive superposition of the degrees
of utilization aBK,sy and aBK,sz is always on the safe side. It The cyclic degree of utilization of rod-shaped components
for non-proportional stresses is
is valid, if—in the case of thin-walled cross-sections—the
shear stresses due to Qy and Qz are oriented along the xm x x
aBK,Sv sa m  t a m (2.6.13)
profile. In the case of prismatic cross-sections, the follow-
ing more practicable superposition applying the SRSS xm exponent of multiaxiality;
method may be used: sa, ta in accordance with Eqs. (2.6.8) and (2.6.9).

2 2 Table 2.6.2 Exponent of multiaxiality xm

t aBK, sy  aBK, sz  aSK, t
Component Exponent of multiaxiality xm
The following applies to q, see Table 2.6.1;
non-welded 1,5 —1
3  (1/ fw,W ) welded 1,0 —2
q (2.6.10)
3 1 —1 For semi-ductile and brittle materials, the value x = 1,5 is con-
m
fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re- servative. An improved representation of the exponent of multiaxiality,
which has not yet been safely confirmed on the basis of a sufficient
versed shear stress, Table 2.2.1. number of tests however, is xm = 1,5 + q with q in accordance with
Eq. (2.6.10).
Table 2.6.1 Values for q as a function of fW,W
—2 approximately conforming with IIW requirements.
Steel,
GJM,
wrought
GJS cast alumi- GJL
aluminum
num alloys
alloys
fW,W 0,577 0,65 0,75 1,0
q 0 0,264 0,544 1,0
3.0 General 62 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

3 Assessment of the static Table 3.0.1 Width of the heat affected zone
strength using local stresses t [mm]
bWEZ
[mm]
3.0 General d6 20
In accordance with this chapter, the assessment of the d 12 30
static strength shall be carried out using local stresses. The d 25 35
assessment applies uniformly to all types of components ! 25 40
and materials.
Provided the heat treatment for softening aluminum mate-
Welded components
rials is performed using the result of the original strength
When assessing the static strength of a weld joint, the existing after welding, the HAZ does not have to be taken
general areas to be differentiated between are the base into consideration.
material (BM), the heat affected zone (HAZ) and the weld
For welded components and material groups such as condi-
(W). The HAZ shall only be taken into consideration in the
tionally weldable steel, stainless steel and weldable cast
case of surface treated or hardended aluminum materials
iron materials, the calculation is provisional and may be
exhibiting reduced tensile strength and reduced yield
applied with caution only.
strength under the influence of temperature (softening). In
detail, the following areas shall be assessed at a weld joint: Elevated temperature
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials In the case of elevated temperatures, the assessment of the
BM: The assessment shall be performed in the static strength for the maximum stress values Vmax and
same way as for a non-welded component, Vmin shall generally be performed as follows:
using the equivalent stress in the base mate-
rial. a) In each case, i.e for short-term or long-term action of
WS: The assessment shall be performed using the elevated temperatures, the assessment shall first be per-
equivalent stress in the primarily stressed formed using the short-term strength values (strength at
welds. elevated temperature, yield strength at elevated tempera-
The assessment of the weld is not required for secondarily ture), Chapter 3.2.1.7.
stressed welds (no force flow through the weld) as well as b) In the case of a long-term combined action of maxi-
for welds loaded only by stresses acting parallel with the mum stress and elevated temperature, additionally an as-
weld (V__). sessment using the long-term strength values (creep
strength, 1 % creep limit) shall additionally be performed,
Softening aluminum materials
Chapter 1.2.1.7.
HAZ (BM): The assessment shall be performed in the
same way as for a non-welded component, This applies to a long-term acting stress Vmax which is
using the equivalent stress in the BM/HAZ. constant over time. Otherwise the assessment is on the safe
In general, BM and HAZ shall be assessed side, as the absolute values of the stresses are usually lower
separately. If the stresses in the HAZ are
than Vmax or Vmin. The reason for this is that, in the case of
equal to or higher than those in the BM, the
assessment of the HAZ is relevant. stresses which vary with location or time, the maximum
W: The assessment shall be performed using the values act only very limitedly or over a short period of
equivalent stress in the primarily stressed time.
welds. c) Instead of b), the assessment can be carried out using
The assessment of the weld is not required for secondarily the mean stress value Vm and the long-term strength values
stressed welds (no force flow through the weld) as well as to obtain a rough approximate result.
for welds loaded only by stresses acting parallel with the
weld (V__).
The area of the heat affected zone can be calculated based
on its width bWEZ, Table 3.0.1.
3.1 Characteristic service stresses 63 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

3.1 Characteristic service stresses If the surface is subject to compression loads only (no
shear stress), directions 1 and 2 are parallel to the surface,
3.1.0 General while direction 3 is perpendicular, independent of the
amount of the load. In the case of transmission of shear
In accordance with this chapter, the required characteristic
stresses, the directions of the principle stress are sloped
local elastic service stress values shall be specified sepa-
with regard to the surface; in this case, the directions are
rately for non-welded and for welded components.
not specified.
In general, different stress components act as normal
Equivalent stress
stresses V and shear stresses W at a critical component
point, either relative to a local coordinate system or as Based on the individual stress components, an equivalent
principle stresses. The relevant factors are their maximum stress shall be calculated using the following variants or, if
and minimum values (Vmax, Vmin or Wmax, Wmin) for: possible, directly as the result of an FEM analysis.

– the most unfavorable operating conditions; Ductile materials

– special load cases according to specification or due to For ductile materials (steel, cast steel and wrought alumi-
physical limits. num alloys with fW = 0,577), the von Mises theory applies.

The values Vmax, Vmin or Wmax, Wmin, shall at least corre- Plane stress state:
spond with the extreme values of a generally varying stress ıv ı GH ı 2x  ı x ı y  ı 2y  3W xy
2
history for which an assessment of the fatigue strength is to (3.1.3)
be carried out. By including special load cases, however, ı12  ı1ı 2  ı 22
they can also assume higher values, as the special load
cases do not necessarily have to be taken into consideration Triaxial state of the principle stress:
in the assessment of the fatigue strength. ı v ı GH
The individual stress components at the reference point are
initially combined with a sign, tension (+) and compres-
1
2
>ıx  ıy 2
 ıy  ız 2
 ız  ıx 2

@
sion (-). For the purposes of the assessment of the static
strength, a value for both  6 W2xy  W 2yz  W2zx
– the equivalent stress Vv and

– the degree of multiaxiality h

1
2
>ı1  ı 2 2
 ı2  ı3 2
 ı 3  ı1 2
@
is calculated based on these stress components. The com- (3.1.4)
ponent static strength is the critical value of the equivalent
stress which, in general, depends on the multiaxiality of the Semiductile or brittle materials
stress state. Both the equivalent stress and the component For semiductile and brittle materials, a combined strength
strength are positive. hypothesis applies, where the equivalent stress results from
If the absolute value of the degree of multiaxiality exceeds a superposition of the von Mises criterion and the normal
a specified limit value, the hydrostatic strength (mean stress hypothesis:
principle stress) shall be assessed in addition to the equiva- ıv q ˜ ıNH,q  1  q ˜ ı GH,q
lent stress. As this is a special case which very rarely oc- (3.1.5)
curs, this additional assessment is completely described in
The weighting factor q (ductility factor) is calculated based
Chapter 3.6.
on the shear strength factor fW, applying

3  (1/ fw,W )
3.1.1 Non-welded components q (3.1.6)
3 1
At the critical point on the unloaded surface of a compo- fW shear strength factor, Table 3.1.1 or 3.2.5.
nent, a plane stress state prevails which is represented by
the stress components The values q resulting from (3.1.6) for the individual mate-
rial groups are summarized in Table 3.1.1.
Vx, Vy, W = Wxy (3.1.1)
Table 3.1.1 Relationship between fW and q as a function
The directions of the coordinates x, y are in the surface of of the material group, according to (3.1.6)
the component, while the z-axis is normal to it. Alterna-
Steel,
tively, or in the case of the component surface being load- GJM,
wrought
ed, the stress state is to be determined by the three princi- GJS cast alumi- GJL
aluminum
ple stresses num alloys
alloys
V1, V2, V3 (3.1.2) fW 0,577 0,65 0,75 1,0
q 0 0,264 0,544 1,0
3.1 Characteristic service stresses 64 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Caution: For non-ductile wrought aluminum alloys 3.1.2 Welded components

(A  6 %), q = 0,5 applies.
3.1.2.0 General
The two equivalent stress proportions in (3.1.5) are calcu-
lated based on the principle stress components (3.1.2). The As a rule, welded components consist of individual sheets,
following applies: connected or joined by means of butt welds or fillet welds.
The stresses for the assessment of the static strength may
ıi
ıi (3.1.7) be determined as structural stresses (local nominal stresses)
fı,i ˜ K NL,i or, in the special case of structural steels, as notch stresses.
fV compression strength factor, Table 3.2.5;
KNL factor for grey cast iron, Chapter 3.3.1.2;
i index of the stress component, i = 1 } 3. 3.1.2.1 Assessment using structural stresses

Plane stress state: In the case of shell-shaped welded spatial structures, the
stress determination is generally performed by FEM anal-
ı NH,q
1
2
>
˜ ı1  ı 2  ı1  ı 2 @ yses on plate or volume elements. At reference points
exhibiting high local stress values, generally no definition
^
MAX ı1 ; ı 2 ` (3.1.8) of a cross-section is possible. The local stresses to be used
for the assessment are determined as local nominal stresses
ı GH,q ı12  ı1 ˜ ı 2  ı 22 or structural stresses. Singularities in the model should be
avoided if possible. If this is not possible, the mesh-related
Triaxial state of principle stress: influence should be suppressed by the respective lineariza-
ıNH,q MAX ı1 ; ı2 ; ı3^ ` tion (e.g. internal linearization or surface extrapolation). In
that case, the user shall make sure that the stress value thus
ı GH,q
1
2
>
ı1  ı 2 2  ı 2  ı 3 2  ı 3  ı1 2 @ calculated is suitable for a strength assessment.
Comment: In principle, a load carrying cross-section may
be defined by specifying a shear lag effect, see Figure 0.3-
(3.1.9)
2. If this is done, the stresses can be calculated as nominal
Comment: The following applies to ductile material: stresses, based on the existing cutting forces. In that case,
the assessment of the static stress should be performed in
K NL 1; f ı 1; f W 0,577 Ÿ q 0 accordance with Chapter 1, using nominal stresses. How-
ever, no general knowledge regarding the reasonable size
Thus, Eqs. (3.1.3) and (3.1.4) for the calculation of the of the shear lag effect is available.
equivalent stress for ductile materials represent a special
case of non-ductile materials according to Eqs. (3.1.5) to Base material BM and heat affected zone HAZ
(3.1.9). Non-ductile materials comprise the different cast The stress state in the sheet metal is almost plane. From the
materials characterized by different tensile and compres- individual stress components, an equivalent stress Vv shall
sion strengths and a higher shear strength as compared be calculated in accordance with Chapter 3.1.1, in the same
with steel. These properties are accounted for by fV in the manner as for a non-welded component.
equivalent stresses and by parameter q in the mixed
strength hypothesis. In the case of GJL, the factor KNL can For ductile materials, the von Mises theory in accordance
with (3.1.3) applies.
additionally occur and accounts for the Young's modulus
which is different for the tension and the compression For weldable cast materials, the mixed strength hypothesis
fields. in accordance with (3.1.5) to (3.1.8) applies. The calcula-
tion is performed based on the principle stresses.
Multiaxiality
Weld W
The degree of multiaxiality is calculated uniformly for all
materials, based on With regard to the weld line, the stress components
ıH V|| – normal stress parallel
h (3.1.10)
ıv VA – normal stress perpendicular (3.1.12)
VH hydrostatic stress in accordance with W = W|| – shear stress parallel
(3.1.11);
to the weld shall initially be distinguished.
Vv = VGH equivalent stress in accordance with
Eq. (3.1.3) or Eq. (3.1.4), including for non- Component V|| is not used for the assessment of the static
ductile materials. stress.
The hydrostatic stress results from: The shear stresses WA occuring in fillet welds can alterna-
1 1 tively be regarded as normal stresses VA, Figure 3.1-1:
ıH ı1  ı 2  ı 3 ıx  ıy  ız (3.1.11)
3 3
3.1 Characteristic service stresses 65 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

VA { WA (3.1.13) The equivalent stress is calculated using the von Mises

criterion.
For the following calculations, VA is used.
ı vwK ı 2x, wK  ı x, wK ı y,wK  ı 2y,wK  3W 2xy,wK

ı1,2 wK  ı1, wK ı 2, wK  ı 2,2 wK

(3.1.17)
The degree of multiaxiality is given by
ı HwK
h wK (3.1.18)
ı vwK
with the following hydrostatic strength
1
ı HwK ı1, wK  ı 2,wK
Figure 3.1-1: Stress in the fillet weld regarded as normal 3
(3.1.19)
stress VA or as shear stress WA 1
ı x,wK  ı y,wK
3
Example: axial force Fzd. When assessing based on notch stresses, the differentiation
between base material (BM) and weld (W) is omitted.
For W not covering the cross-section (a d t, fillet weld, Y-
weld) or for eccentric W, the stresses shall be increased as
a function of the ratio between sheet metal thickness and
weld thickness or as a function of the influence of eccen-
tricity (e ! 0).
From the individual stress components, an equivalent
stress value in accordance with the empirical strength hy-
pothesis analogously to DIN 18800 shall be calculated.

ı vw ı 2A  W||2 (3.1.14)

3.1.2.2 Assessment using notch stresses

The application of notch stresses in the assessment of the
static stress is currently limited to structural steels.
Notch stresses are determined based on three- or two-
dimensional FEM models (plane distortion state) which
completely simulate the weld. Toe and root of the weld are
modelled with a ficticious radius of 1 mm, respectively, in
accordance with Radaj's R1 concept. A complete fillet
should be ensured, particularly at the end of the welds.
Advice on cross-linking is given in /17/.
The stress state at the reference point (within an R1 radius
in most cases) is usually plane. The notch stresses are
determined as local elastic stresses, either as stress compo-
nents
Vx,wK, Vy,wK, WwK = Wxy,wK (3.1.15)

or as principle stresses
V1,wK, V2,wK (3.1.16)

in the same manner as for a non-welded component.

From the stress components in accordance with
Eq. (3.1.15) or Eq. (3.1.16), an equivalent stress and a
degree of multiaxiality shall be determined.
3.2 Material properties 66 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

3.2 Material properties ucts Rm,N, Rp,N or the component values according to the
drawings Rm,Z, Rp,Z.
3.2.0 General
In accordance with this chapter, the required material
strength values tensile strength Rm, yield strength Rp and
further characteristic values shall be determined separately
for non-welded and for welded components. The term
yield strength is used as a generalized term for the yield
stress (of milled and forging steel) and for the 0.2 proof
stress (of nodular cast iron, malleable cast iron and alumi-
num materials).
Chapter 3.2 is identical with Chapter 1.2.

3.2.1 Non-welded components Figure 3.2-1: Standard values and standard component
values
3.2.1.0 General
All material strength values apply to the material specimen Standard specimen diameter, d0;
of a diameter d0 = 7,5 mm. Standard values for semi- Standard values Rm,N and Rp,N at deff,N;
finished products (deff,N) and component values (deff) shall
Values according to the drawings Rm,Z and Rp,Z at deff;
be distinguished. Examples of component values are
standard values, values according to the drawings and Standard component values Rm and Rp at deff.
actual values, Figure 3.2-1.
All material groups except GJL: semi-logarithmic decrease of the
Material specimen strength values with the effective diameter deff. GJL: double-
The material specimen is an unnotched polished round logarithmic decrease of the strength values with deff.
specimen of a diameter d0 = 7,5 mm. Here, the calculated
Standard component values based on standard values for
strength values apply even if standard specimens for ten- semi-finished products
sile tests have other diameters.
Rm = Kd,m · KA · Rm,N (3.2.1)

Rp = Kd,p · KA · Rp,N
3.2.1.1 Standard values for semi-finished products
Rm, Rp standard component values for tensile
The standard values for semi-finished products or the test strength and yield strength;
piece (Rm,N, Rp,N) are valid for the effective diameter deff Kd,m, Kd,p technological size factors, Chapter 3.2.1.4;
and have a probability of survival of PÜ = 97,5 %. KA anisotropy factor, Chapter 3.2.1.5;
Rm,N is the minimum value, the guaranteed value or the Rm,N, Rp,N standard values for semi-finished products or
lower limit of the range specified for the smallest size of standard values for the test piece, respective-
the semi-finished product (wrought alloys) or for the test ly, Chapter 5.1.
piece (cast alloys) defined by the material standard. Standard component values based on component values
Rp,N is the minimum value or the guaranteed value for the according to the drawings
smallest size of the semi-finished product or for the test Rm = 0,94 · Rm,Z (3.2.2)
piece defined by the material standard. Rm standard component value for tensile
strength;
Rm,Z component value according to the drawings.
3.2.1.2 Standard component values
Rm,Z is the tensile strength of the component’s material
The standard component values Rm, Rp are valid for the
required "according to the drawings". As Rm,Z is verified
effective component diameter deff and have the same prob-
ability of survival as Rm,N, Rp,N, i.e. PÜ = 97,5 %. by random inspection only *1 it is assumed to have a prob-

Rm and Rp may be used for an assessment of strength valid 1 Rm,Z is to be checked, for example, by three hardness meas-
for the "entirety of all components" (not limited to a certain urements (n = 3). Each test value shall reach or exceed the re-
component). quired value. The probability of survival of the lowest test value
The standard component values Rm, Rp can be calculated is 25 % (1/(n1) = 1/(3  1) = 0,25); the probability of survival
for Rm,z is PÜ,Z = 75 %. The standard component value
based on the standard values for semi-finished prod- PÜ = 97,5 % required for the strength assessment is smaller: for a
coefficient of variation of 4 %, Eq. (3.2.2) applies.
3.2 Material properties 67 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

ability of survival less than PÜ = 97,5 %, thus being less Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 (3.2.7)
safe. Rm,Z becomes the standard component value Rm only
deff ! deff,N:
after conversion in accordance with (3.2.2).
1  0,7686 ˜ a d,m ˜ lg(deff / 7,5 mm )
The yield strength Rp is calculated as follows: K d,m
1  0,7686 ˜ a d,m ˜ lg(deff,N,m / 7,5 mm)
(3.2.8)
K d,p Rp,N
Rp ˜ ˜ Rm deff is valid within the ranges of dimensions given in the
K d,m Rm,N
(3.2.3) material standards.
Kd,p, Kd,m technological size factors, Chapter 3.2.1.4;
Rp,N, Rm,N standard values for the semi-finished product For milled steel no further strength drop is taken into con-
sideration above the limit deff,max = 250 mm.
or standard values for the test piece, respec-
tively, Chapter 5.1. deff > deff,max = 250 mm:
The conversion in accordance with Eq. (3.2.3) takes into Kd = Kd (deff,max = 250 mm) (3.2.9)
consideration the different size effects of the tensile
deff effective diameter;
strength and the yield strength.
deff,N, ad Tables 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, for Rm with index m,
for Rp with index p.
3.2.1.3 Actual component values
Aluminum material
If actual component values (Rm,I, Rp,I) for a particular
For wrought aluminum alloys the standard component
component have been determined experimentally, the
values Rm and Rp are given in Chapter 5.1 as a function of
strength assessment can be performed for that particular
component (e.g. recalculation of consequences of failure, the type of material and its condition and depending on the
safety factor jges = 1). This value applies to the particular thickness or diameter of the semi-finished product; the
technological size factor Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 applies.
component only, not for the "entirety of all components".
If only the tensile strength Rm,I is known, the yield For cast aluminum alloys the following technological size
factor is valid for Rm and Rp.
strength Rp,I can be calculated in accordance with
Eq. (3.2.3) (with Rm = Rm,I). deff d 12 mm:
3.2.1.4 Technological size factor Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 (3.2.10)
The technological size factor Kd in Eq. (3.2.1) accounts for 12 mm < deff < 150 mm:
the decrease of the material strength values usually ob-
served with increasing dimensions of the component. It is Kd,m = Kd,p = 1,1 · (deff/7,5 mm)–0,2 (3.2.11)
valid within the ranges of dimensions given in the material
deff t 150 mm:
standards, Figure 3.2-1.
Outside the scope of the material standards, agreements Kd,m = Kd,p = 0,6 (3.2.12)
shall be made between the involved parties.
Effective diameter
The profile is described as Kd (deff,N, ad); more precisely,
For components with a simple shape of the cross-section,
Kd,m (deff,N,m, ad,m) for the tensile strength and Kd,p the effective diameter deff is given in Table 3.2.3 as a func-
(deff,N,p, ad,p) for the yield strength. tion of the cross-sectional shape.
Steel and cast iron materials The upper limit of deff is generally specified in the material
GJL standards; an exception is milled steel, Eq. (3.2.9).

deff d 7,5 mm: For the specification of deff as a function of the material
group, case 1 and case 2 shall be distinguished.
Kd,m = Kd,p = 1,207 (3.2.4)
Case 1
deff ! 7,5 mm:
For components (including forgings) made of quenched
Kd,m = Kd,p = 1,207 · (deff/7,5 mm)0,1922 (3.2.5) and tempered heat treatable steel, case hardening steel,
nitriding steel—both nitrided or quenched and tempered—,
Stainless steel heat treatable cast steels, GJS, GJM and GJL, deff accord-
Kd,m = Kd,p = 1 (3.2.6) ing to Table 3.2.3, Case 1, applies.
In general, the following applies:
Other material groups
deff = 4 ˜ V/O (3.2.13)
deff d deff,N: V, O volume and surface of the considered cut-out of the
component.
3.2 Material properties 68 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Comment: In the case of a complicated component, a b) machining prior to the heat treatment: deff equals the
practicable possibility to specify the effective diameter local diameter.
consists in the following approach: A representative sec-
tion through the component is made at the reference point; The first case results in higher deff and lower Kd and is,
this is possible in most cases using the applied CAD sys- therefore, on the safe side.
tem. Then, the section area is to be adapted as best as pos- Table 3.2.2 Constants deff,N,m, } and adm, } for cast
sible to a rectangle. To do so, the effective diameter can be
iron materials
calculated in accordance with Table 3.2.3, No. 4.
Values in the respective upper row refer to Rm, while val-
Case 2
ues in the lower row refer to Rp.
For components (including forgings) made of non-alloyed
structural steel, fine grain structural steel, normalized heat
treatable steel, general cast steel and aluminum materials, deff,N,m ad,m
deff according to Table 3.2.3, Case 2, applies. Material group deff,N,p ad,p
in mm
The effective diameter deff equals the diameter or the wall Cast steel in accordance 0,15
thickness of the component. DIN EN 10293 with Table 5.1.10 0,3
Heat treatable cast steel 0,15
Table 3.2.1 Constants deff,N,m, } and adm, } for steel in accordance
DIN EN 10293 —1 with Table 5.1.11 0,3
Values in the respective upper row refer to Rm, while val- GJS 60 0,15
ues in the lower row refer to Rp. DIN EN 1563 60 0,15
GJM 15 0,15
deff,N,m ad,m
—1 ad,p DIN EN 1562 15 0,15
Material group deff,N,p
in mm —2 —1 For G28Mn6, G34CrMo4 and G42CrMo4: a
d,m = 0,3.
Non-alloyed structural steel 40 0,15
DIN EN 10025 40 0,3 Table 3.2.3 Effective diameter deff
Fine grain structural steel 70 0,2 deff deff
No. Cross-sectional shape
DIN 17102 40 0,3 Case 1 Case 2
Fine grain structural steel 100 0,25
DIN EN 10113 30 0,3
Heat treatable steel, q&t 16 —3 0,3 1 d d
DIN EN 10083-1 16 0,4
Heat treatable steel, n 16 0,1
DIN EN 10083-1 16 0,2
Case hardening steel, bh 16 0,5
DIN EN 10084 16 0,5 2 2s s
Nitriding steel, q&t 40 0,25
DIN EN 10085 40 0,30
Stainless steel – –
DIN EN 10088-2 —4 – –
Steel for larger forgings, q&t 250 0,2 3 2s s
SEW 550 —5 250 0,25
Steel for larger forgings, n 250 0
SEW 550 250 0,15
—1 The material group is comprised of the material types. 2b ˜ s
—2 For more precise values depending on the material type (except for
4 s
bs
non-alloyed structural steel) see Tables 5.1.2 to 5.1.7, 5.1.9.
—3 For 30CrNiMo8 and 36NiCrMo16: d = 40 mm, with un-
eff,N,m
changed values ad,m and ad,p.
—4 No technological size effect within the ranges of dimensions of the
material standards. 5 b b
—5 For 28NiCrMoV8 5 and 33NiCrMo14 5: d =d =
eff,N,m eff,N,p
500 mm or 1000 mm, respectively, with unchanged values ad,m and
ad,p.

Components made of heat treatable steel 3.2.1.5 Anisotropy factor

deff depends on the processing sequence. The anisotropy factor KA for Eq. (3.2.1), depending on the
tensile strength, is the quotient of the material strength
a) machining subsequent to the heat treatment: deff equals
transversely and longitudinally to the preferred direction of
the largest diameter. processing. For milled steel and forgings (wrought alloys:
3.2 Material properties 69 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

steel, aluminum) transverse to the preferred direction of fV compression strength factor, Table 3.2.5;
processing, KA in accordance with Table 3.2.4 applies. Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength,
Material strength values in accordance with Chapter 5 Eqs. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3).

The material strength values given in Chapter 5 are valid Shear strength factor
for stresses longitudinally to the preferred direction of The shear strength factor fW, Table 3.2.5, takes into consid-
processing. Here, the following applies: eration the difference between shear strength Rs,m and
KA = 1 (3.2.14) tensile strength Rm or between yield strength in shear Rs,p
and yield strength Rp. Rs,m and Rs,p are not explicitly re-
Cast iron and cast aluminum alloys
quired for the strength assessment; only fW is necessary and
KA = 1 (3.2.15) is used in Chapter 3.1 to calculate the equivalent stress. In
Multiaxial stresses, including shear stress detail, the following applies:

KA = 1 (3.2.16) Rs,m = fW · Rm
(3.2.19)
Table 3.2.4 Anisotropy factor KA Rs,p = fW · Rp
Rs,m shear strength;
Steel: Rs,p yield strength in shear;
Rm up to 600 above above above fW shear strength factor, Table 3.2.5;
in MPa 600 and 900 and 1200 Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength,
up to 900 up to Eqs. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3).
1200
Table 3.2.5 Compression strength factor fV and shear
KA 0,90 0,86 0,83 0,80 strength factor fW
fV fV fW
Material group for for compres-
Wrought aluminum alloys: tension sion
Case hardening
Rm up to 200 above above
steel
1 1 0,577—1
in Mpa 200 and 400 and
Stainless steel 1 1 0,577
up to 400 up to 600
Forging steel 1 1 0,577
KA 1 0,95 0,90 Other kinds of
1 1 0,577
steel
GS 1 1 0,577
3.2.1.6 Compression strength factor and shear GJS 1 1,3 0,65
strength factor GJM 1 1,5 0,75
Compression strength factor GJL 1 2,5 1,0—2
Wrought alumi-
The compression strength factor fV, Table 3.2.5, takes into 1 1 0,577
num alloys
consideration the difference between tensile strength Rm Cast aluminum
1 1,5 0,75
and compression strength Rc,m or between yield alloys
strength Rp and yield strength in compression Rc,p. Here, —1 0,577 = 1 / 3 , in accordance with v. Mises criterion.
compression strength and yield strength in compression are —2 in accordance with normal stress criterion.
assumed to be positive, resulting in fV being positive as
well. Rc,m and Rc,p are not explicitely necessary for the 3.2.1.7 Temperature factors
strength assessment; only fV is required and is used in
The temperature factors allow for the fact that the material
Chapter 3.1 to calculate the equivalent stress. In detail, the strength decreases with an increasing temperature. The
following applies: short-term and long-term values Rm,T, Rp,T or Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt,
Tension or tension in bending: are not explicitely required for the strength assessment;
only the temperature factors KT,m, KT,p or KTt,m , KTt,p,
fV = 1 (3.2.17)
are necessary and are used in Chapter 3.5.
Compression or compression in bending: A differentiation shall be made between normal tempera-
Rc,m = fV · Rm ture, low temperature and elevated temperature.
(3.2.18)
Rc,p = fV · Rp
Rc,m compression strength;
Rc,p yield strength in compression;
3.2 Material properties 70 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Normal temperature – GS, T > 100 °C:

Normal temperatures are as follows: KT,m = KT,p = 1 – 1,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100) (3.2.24)
– for fine grain structural steel from –40 °C to +60 °C,  GJS, GJM, GJL, T > 100°C:
– for other kinds of steel from –40 °C to +100 °C, KT,m = KT,p = 1 – aT,m ˜ (10–3 ˜ T/°C)2 (3.2.25)
– for cast iron materials from –25 °C to +100 °C,
aT,m constant, Table 3.2.6.
– for age-hardening auluminum alloys from –25 °C to
+50 °C, Eqs. (3.2.22) to (3.2.25) are valid starting from the indicat-
ed temperature and up to 500 °C. For temperatures exceed-
– for non-age-hardening auluminum alloys from ing approximately 350 °C they are generally valid only for
–25 °C to +100 °C. stresses acting for a short time. So far, no values are known
For normal temperatures, the temperature factors are as for stainless steel.
follows: Table 3.2.6 Constant aT,m
KT,m = } = 1 (3.2.20) Material
GJS GJM GJL
group
Low temperature
aT,m 2,4 2,0 1,6
Low temperatures below the limits listed above are outside
the scope of this guideline. When performing a strength
assessment at low temperatures, the danger of brittle frac-
ture shall be taken into consideration.
Elevated temperature
In the case of elevated temperatures—up to 500 °C for
steel and cast iron materials and up to 200 °C for alumi-
num materials—the influence of the temperature on the
strength values shall be taken into consideration. The ten-
sile strength Rm is replaced by the strength at elevated
temperature Rm,T or by the creep strength Rm,Tt. The yield
strength Rp is replaced by the yield strength at elevated
temperature Rp,T or by the 1 % creep limit Rp,Tt. The deci-
sion as to which of the mentioned values is relevant is
taken at the assessment stage, taking the associated safety
factors into consideration.
For the short-term and long-term values Rm,T, Rp,T or
Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt, Eqs. (3.2.21) to (3.2.29) apply.

Short-term values
Rm,T = KT,m · Rm (3.2.21)
Rp,T = KT,p · Rp
KT,m, KT,p temperature factors, Eqs. (3.2.22) to (3.2.27);
Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength, Eqs.
(3.2.1) to (3.2.3).
Rm,T and Rp,T are not explicitly required for the strength
assessment, only KT,m and KT,p are necessary.

Steel and cast iron materials

– fine grain structural steel, T > 60 °C:
(there is an insignificant discontinuity at T = 60 °C)
KT,m = KT,p = 1 – 1,2 ˜ 103 ˜ T/°C, (3.2.22)

– other kinds of steel, except stainless steel

T > 100 °C, Figure 3.2-2: Figure 3.2-2: Static strength values for non-alloyed
structural steel as a function of the temperature, plotted for
KT,m = KT,p = 1 – 1,7 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100) (3.2.23)
comparison
3.2 Material properties 71 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Safety factors (Chapter 3.5):

Rm,T/Rm = KT,m, Rp,T/Rp = KT,p

Rm,Tt/Rm = KTt,m, Rp,Tt/Rp = KTt,p

Top: unalloyed structural steel with Rp/Rm = Re/Rm = 0,65

Rm,T, Rp,T as well as Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt for t = 105 h
jm = 2,0, jp = jmt = 1,5, jpt = 1,0

Below: GJL,
Rm,T as well as Rm,Tt for t = 105 h
jm = 3,0, jmt = 2,4

Aluminum alloys
– age-hardening auluminum alloys:
T > 50 °C, Figure 3.2-3
KT,m = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 50); 0,1)

KT,p = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 50); 0,1)

(3.2.26)
Figure 3.2-3: Strength values for aluminum materials as a
– non-age-hardening auluminum alloys: function of the temperature, plotted for comparison
T > 100 °C, Figure 3.2-3
Static strength values:
KT,m = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100); 0,1)
Rm,T/Rm = KT,m = Rp,T/Rp = KT,p
KT,p = MAX (1 – 4,5 ˜ 103 ˜ (T/°C – 100); 0,1) Rm,Tt/Rm = KTt,m = Rp,T/Rp = KTt,p
(3.2.27) Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt for t = 105 h

Eqs. (3.2.26) and (3.2.27) are valid starting from the indi- Fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
cated temperature T up to 200 °C; in general, this is appli- (for 106 cycles):
cable only for stresses acting for a short time. VW,zd/Rm = 0,30; VW,zd,T/VW,zd = KT,D
Long-term values Safety factors (Chapters 3.5 and 4.5):
Rm,Tt = KTt,m ˜ Rm jm = 2,0, jp = jmt = 1,5, jpt = 1,0, jD = 1,5

Rp,Tt = KTt,p ˜ Rp (3.2.28) Pm = 104 · (T/°C + 273) · [Cm + lg(t/h)]

(3.2.30)
KTt,m, KTt,p temperature factors, Figures 3.2-2 and 3.2.3, Pp = 104 · (T/°C + 273) · [Cm + lg(t/h)]
Eq. (3.2.29); aTt,m, }, Cp constants, Table 3.2.7;
Rm, Rp tensile strength and yield strength, T temperature [°C];
Eqs. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3). t operating time [h] at T.
Steel and cast iron materials Eqs. (3.2.29) are valid for temperatures from approximate-
KTt,m and KTt,p as a function of T and t, Figure 3.2-2: ly 350 °C and up to 500 °C, but only for stresses acting for
a long time. In general, they do not apply to temperatures
(Larsen-Miller parameter P and Larsen-Miller constant C) below approximately 350 °C (this could lead to unrealistic
results), here the short-term values KT,m and KT,p are rele-
2
(a Tt,m  b Tt,m ˜ Pm  c Tt,m ˜ Pm )
KTt,m = 10 vant instead.

( a Tt,p  b Tt,p ˜ Pp  c Tt,p ˜ Pp2 )

KTt,p = 10 (3.2.29)
3.2 Material properties 72 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Table 3.2.7 Constants aTt,m, }, Cp —1 sible to provide an equation for aluminum materials similar
to Eqs. (3.2.29) which can be used to compute KTt,m and
Non-
Fine grain Heat KTt,p as a function of temperature T and time t.
alloyed
Steel —2 structural
structural treatable
steel —4 steel —5
steel —3
Creep strength
aTt,m 0,994 1,127 3,001
bTt,m 2,485 2,485 3,987
cTt,m 1,260 1,260 1,423
Cm 20 20 24,27
Creep limit
aTt,p 5,019 6,352 3,252
bTt,p 7,227 9,305 5,942
cTt,p 2,636 3,456 2,728
Figure 3.2-4: Temperature factor KTt,m = Rm,Tt/Rm for
Cp 20 20 17,71
aluminum materials and 100 000 hours

The curve is the same as in Figure 3.2-3, except for the

Cast iron
GS —6 GJM —7 GJL —8 factor (1/jm).
materials
Creep strength
aTt,m 7,524 2,50 –1,46 3.2.2 Welded components
bTt,m 9,894 1,83 2,36
3.2.2.0 General
cTt,m 3,417 0 –0,90
Cm All material strength values are valid for the dimensions
19,57 20 25
given in the material tables for the base material BM, Ta-
Creep limit bles 5.1.24 and 5.1.25. The technological size factor Kd
aTt,p 10,582 0,12 and the anisotrophy factor KA are omitted in the case of
bTt,p 8,127 1,52 welded components.
cTt,p 1,607 1,28 For material groups such as conditionally weldable steel
Cp 35,76 18 and stainless steel as well as for cast iron and cast alumi-
—1 guideline values, valid starting from approximately 350 °C and up to num, the calculation is provisional and may be applied
500 °C. with caution only.
—2 except for stainless steel.
—3 initially only for St 38, R = 360 MPa, approximately similar to St
m
37. 3.2.2.1 Static strength values for milled steel and
—4 initially only for H 52, R = 490 MPa, approximately similar to StE cast steel
m
355; the absolute values Rm,Tt are the same as for St 38. Tensile strength Rm and yield stress Re for the base materi-
—5 initially only for C 45 N (normalized) with R = 620 MPa. For C 35 al BM in welded components made of milled steel and cast
m
N, with Rm = 550 MPa, the constants –3,001 and –3,252 shall be re- steel as a function of the thickness of the product in ac-
placed by –2,949 and –3,198, the absolute values Rm,Tt and Rp,Tt are cordance with DIN 18800, see Table 5.1.24.
the same as for C 45 N.
—6 initially only for GS-C 25 with R = 440 MPa.
m
—7 initially only for GGG-40 with R = 423 MPa. 3.2.2.2 Static strength values for aluminum
m
—8 initially only for GG-25 with R = 250 MPa. Static strength values tensile strength Rm and 0.2 proof
m
stress Rp0.2 for the base material BM in welded compo-
Aluminum materials
nents made of aluminum as a function of the semi-finished
For aluminum materials and t = 100 000 hours, KTt,m is product and the material state in accordance with
given by Figure 3.2-4. DIN 4113, see Table 5.1.25.
Factor KTt,p has not been specified thus far. It may be
assumed, however, that the quotient Rp,Tt/jpt—which is
relevant for the assessment of the static strength—is more
or less equal to Rm,Tt/jmt, see Figure 3.2-2 (required safety
factors jpt = 1,0 and jmt = 1,5). So far, it has not been pos-
3.3 Design parameters 73 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

3.2.2.3 Compression strength factor and shear 3.3 Design parameters

strength factor
Compression strength factor fV in accordance with Ta-
3.3.0 General
ble 3.2.5, shear strength factor fW in accordance with Ta- In accordance with this Chapter, the required design pa-
ble 3.2.8. rameters shall be calculated individually, separately for
non-welded and for welded components. In general, the
Table 3.2.8 Shear strength factor fW for base material following design parameters shall be differentiated be-
BM and heat affected zone HAZ in welded components tween:
Material fW npl: section factor to make best use of the load-
Steel, BM 0,577 bearing reserves once the elastic limit load
has been exceeded by means of the permis-
Aluminum, BM, HAZ 0,577 sible partial or total plasticization of full
component cross-sections;
KNL: grey cast iron factor to account for the dif-
The difference between shear and tensile strength for the ferent tension and compression behaviors in
weld W is specified based on the weld factor Dw,W in ac- the case of GJL;
cordance with Chapter 1.3 and not based on the shear DW: weld factor to reduce the strength of the
strength factor fW. weld as compared with the adjacent material
(BM or HAZ).
3.2.2.4 Temperature factors
The design factors are introduced at different points of the
Temperature factors KT,m, } as in Chapter 3.2.1.7.
strength assessment: npl and DW for the purposes of calcu-
3.2.2.5 Softening factor lating the component strength in accordance with Chap-
ter 3.4; KNL for the purposes of calculating the equivalent
In the case of welded components made of aluminum,
particularly strain hardened or heat treated alloys, the heat stress in accordance with Chapter 3.1. In the case of weld-
introduced by welding can result in a considerable reduc- ed components, the areas BM, HAZ and W shall be con-
tion of the static strength. In terms of analysis, this strength sidered separately.
reduction is taken into consideration by the softening fac- 3.3.1 Non-welded components
tor, Table 5.1.25,
3.3.1.1 Section factor
UWEZ ” 1 (3.2.31)
The section factor npl ! 1 enables making best use of the
analogously to DIN 4113. load-bearing reserves of a component once the elastic limit
Comment: The resulting strength reduction of aluminum load has been exceeded (beginning of flow at the critical
is higher for the yield strength Rp than for the tensile point) and up to the plastic limit load. The pre-requisite for
npl is an inhomogeneous stress distribution, Figure 3.3.1.
strength Rm. The values for UWEZ given in Table 5.1.25
npl is limited by reaching the plastic limit load or the criti-
have been set such that, in combination with the different
safety factors for Rm and Rp, they result in the HAZ stress- cal local strain. For a constant stress in the cross-section,
npl = 1 applies.
es permissible in accordance with DIN 4113. The mean
values for the softening factor for all materials given in
Table 5.1.25 are as follows: UWEZ | 0,5 for Rp,
UWEZ | 0,68 for Rm and UWEZ | 0,62 as the mean value
for the analytical strength assessment.
3.3 Design parameters 74 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

­İ ref for h d 1/3

° 3˜h
İ ertr ® § İ ref  İ 0 ·
İ
° 0  0,3 ˜ ¨ ¸ for h ! 1/3
¯ © 0,3 ¹
(3.3.3)
H0 minimum of the critical strain at high multi-
axiality, Table 3.3.1;
Href reference strain, corresponds with the critical
strain at an uniaxial stress state, Eq. (3.3.4)
or Eq. (3.3.5);
h degree of multiaxiality, Eq. (3.1.10).
The reference strain is calculated as a function of the elon-
gation at break, for
Ductile materials (steel, GS, wrought aluminum alloys
with fW = 0,577)

Href = A (3.3.4)

Semi-ductile and brittle materials

(GJS, GJM, GJL, cast aluminum alloys with fW > 0,577)
Figure 3.3-1: Definition of the section factor npl for a
notched component Href = 0,4 · A (3.3.5)
A elongation at break, Chapter 5.1, for GJL
Top: Detail of the component. Force F, yield strength Rp, always: A = 0,6 %.
component static strength for normal stress VSK, section Table 3.3.1 Young’s modulus E and minimum value of
factor npl = VSK/Rp critical total strain İ0
Continuous curve: fictitious distribution of the elastically 10–5·E H0
Material group
computed stress [MPa] A•6% A<6%
Bent curve: actual stress distribution in the case of elastic Steel, GS 2,1 0,05
ideal-plastic material behavior GJS 1,7 0,04
Bottom: flow curve of the component. Plastic notch factor GJM 1,8 0,02
Kp, critical value of total strain Hertr, Young’s modulus E GJL 1,0 –
Wrought alumi- Rp/E
The following section factors npl t 1 can be taken into 0,7 0,05
num alloys
consideration.
Cast aluminum
0,7 0,02
Austenitic steel in the solution annealed condition: alloys
Due to the high ductility of the material, only the plastic
limit load is relevant.
Should Href ” H0 result in individual cases, the following
npl = Kp (3.3.1)
applies to the critical elongation.
All other materials: Hertr = Href (3.3.6)
The relevant factor is the double criterion
Special case of "plastic spot"
npl = MIN ( E ˜ İ ertr /Rp ; Kp) (3.3.2) In the special case of the plastic zone being surrounded by
E Young's modulus, Table 3.3.1; a large elastic area, resulting in a very high plastic limit
Hertr critical value of total strain, Eq. (3.3.3); load, only the critical strain is relevant.
Rp yield strength, Eqs. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3);
npl E ˜ İ ertr /Rp (3.3.7)
Kp, } plastic notch factors, Eq. (3.3.8).
Surface treatment
Critical strain
Mechanical surface treatment
The critical strain depends on the elongation at break of
material A and the multiaxiality h of the stress state at the For components with mechanical surface treatment, npl
reference point. shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. (3.3.2) (in the
same manner as without surface treatment).
3.3 Design parameters 75 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Surface hardening stresses result in a stress redistribution which, in turn, leads

to an increase in the limit load. In this case, the previously
For case hardened components, npl shall be calculated in
determined plastic notch factor increases by a factor of
accordance with Eq. (3.3.2), but with Hertr = 1 %.
2 fı
For other methods with chemo-thermal or thermal surface K p,a (3.3.9)
1  fı
hardening (e.g. nitriding, inductive hardening), the critical
strain can be estimated based on the tensile strength of the fV, } compression strength factor, Table 3.2.5.
hard surface layer Rm,RS from Hertr = Rm,RS/E. Provided If, in the plastic limit state, only tension or only compres-
the hardness of the surface layer is known, Rm,RS = 3,3 ˜ sion fields arise in the vicinity of the reference point,
HVRand applies approximately. Kp,a = 1 applies.

Plastic notch factor Special case of reference cross-section

The plastic notch factor Kp characterizes the load-bearing If it is possible to define a reasonable reference cross-
reserve of a component up to the plastic limit load. In ge- section for a component at the reference point where one
neral, the following applies: of the basic load states (axial stress, bending, shear stress
or torsion) prevails, the plastic notch factor may be esti-
plastic limit load mated based on one of the following equations:
Kp (3.3.8)
elastic limit load Kp = Kt,zd
For a constant stress in the cross-section, Kp = 1 applies. Kp = Kp,b ˜ Kt,b
(3.3.10)
Kp = Kt,s
The elastic limit load is achieved when the local stress at
the reference point corresponds with the yield stress. Kp = Kp,t ˜ Kt,t
Kt,zd, } stress concentration factor, Chapter 5.2;
The plastic limit load is achieved when, under the assump-
tion of an elastic ideal-plastic material behavior, a continu- Kp,b, } plastic notch factors for nominal stresses,
ous component cross-section, which does not necessarily Table 1.3.2 or approximate determination in
have to be plane, exhibits full plasticization. In that case, accordance with Chapter 1.3.1.1.
no further load increase would be possible. This way the As the flow restriction due to the multiaxiality of the stress
hardening mostly present in real materials is not made full state is not accounted for, the plastic notch factors estimat-
use of. The best way to calculate the plastic limit load is a ed based on Eq. (3.3.10) are usually conservative. The
non-linear FE analysis based on an idealized elastic ideal- increase in the plastic notch factor associated with this may
plastic stress-strain curve. The respective FE mesh may be be taken into consideration by means of an additional con-
coarser than that for calculating the notch stress. straint factor Kp,c, for which, however, there are no univer-
The plastic notch factor calculated in accordance with sally applicable calculation approaches. Some information
Eq. (3.3.8) is independent of the value of the yield can be found in /26/.
stress Rp, as the same value Rp shall be used for the calcu-
lation of both the elastic limit load and the plastic limit
load. 3.3.1.2 Grey cast iron factor
Due to the fact that the hardening has been neglected, the The grey cast iron factor KNL accounts for the non-linear
calculated limit load—and thus also the plastic notch fac- stress/strain behavior of GJL.
tor—become increasingly conservative as the yield stress
The following applies to all material groups except GJL:
ratio Rp/Rm becomes smaller when compared with the real
failure load. This is why—in order to calculate the plastic KNL = 1 (3.3.11)
limit load—the offset yield strength
For GJL, the factor KNL shall be used if a global bending
Rp,ers = 0,5 ˜ (Rp + Rm) state prevails in the vicinity of the reference point, i.e. if
there are both tension and compression fields in the com-
may be used, if the yield stress ratio is Rp/Rm  0,75. Thus, ponent. KNL shall be specified in accordance with Ta-
as compared with Eq. (3.3.8), the plastic notch factor with- ble 3.3.2, depending on the sign of the stress. Otherwise,
out the offset yield strength increases by a factor of 0,5 ˜ (1 KNL = 1 applies for GJL as well.
+ Rm/Rp).
Table 3.3.2 Grey cast iron factor KNL
Special case of cast material
Type of GJL GJL GJL GJL GJL GJL
The yield stress of cast materials is higher in the compres- material -100 -150 -200 -250 -300 -350
sion field than in the tension field. In calculating the plastic
KNL,Zug 1,15 1,15 1,10 1,10 1,05 1,05
limit load, however, this effect is neglected in most cases.
If the plastic limit state is characterized mainly by bending, KNL,Druck 0,87 0,87 0,91 0,91 0,95 0,95
i.e. if there are both tension and compression fields in the
vicinity of the reference point, then the differing yield
3.3 Design parameters 76 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

3.3.2 Welded components The critical strain depends on the multiaxiality.

3.3.2.1 Section factor The following applies to hwk d 1/3
Taking a section factor into consideration for welded com- Hertr,wK = Href,wk, (3.1.16)
ponents is only permissible
The following applies to hwk > 1/3
– for full penetration welds (including those welded on
one side, if verifiable); 3˜h wK
§H  H0,wK ·
– in the case of welds with partial penetration on both H ertr,wK H0,wK  0,3 ˜ ¨¨ ref,wK ¸¸
© 0,3 ¹
sides but covering the whole cross-section (e.g. double
fillet weld). (3.1.17)
The section factors are the same for BM, HAZ and W. As H0,wk minimum of the critical strain at high multi-
the section factors may only be taken into consideration in axiality, Table 3.3.4;
the case of welds covering the cross-section, they can be Href,wk reference point, corresponds with the critical
calculated based on the cross-sectional dimensions of the strain at a uniaxial stress state, Table 3.3.4;
sheets. hwk degree of multiaxiality, Eq. (3.1.18).
For non-ductile materials of low elongation at Table 3.3.4 Parameters H0,wk and Href,wk for welded
break A  6 %, no section factors shall be applied: components made of structural steel, applying the concept
npl = 1 (3.3.12) of notch stresses
Strength range H0,wk Href,wk
For ductile materials (A t 6 %), the section factors shall be
Rp02 ” 460 MPa 0,05 0,17
calculated as follows.
460 MPa ” Rp02 ” 690 MPa 0,05 0,14
Assessment using structural stresses
Steel and non-softening aluminum alloys

npl = MIN ( E ˜ H ertr /Rp ; Kp) Special case of "plastic spot"

(3.3.13)
In the special case of the plastic zone being surrounded by
Softening aluminum alloys a large elastic area, resulting in a very high plastic limit
load, only the critical strain is relevant.
npl = MIN ( E ˜ H ertr /(ȡ WEZ ˜ Rp ) ; Kp) (3.3.14)
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
E Young's modulus, Table 3.3.3;
Hertr total critical strain, Table 3.3.3; npl E ˜ H ertr /Rp (3.1.18)
Rp yield strength, Tables 5.1.24 and 5.1.25;
UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25; Softening aluminum materials
Kp, } plastic notch factors, Eq. (3.3.8). npl E ˜ H ertr /(U WEZ ˜ Rp ) (3.1.19)
Table 3.3.3 Young's modulus E and total critical
strain Hertr for welded components Plastic notch factor

Wrought The plastic notch factor Kp characterizes the load-bearing

Material Steel, Cast alumi-
GJS GJM aluminum reserve of a component up to the plastic limit load,
group GS num alloys
alloys Eq. (3.3.8). For the calculation, the same comments apply
10–5 · E as for non-welded components, Chapter 3.3.1.1.
2,1 1,7 1,8 0,70 0,70
[MPa]
If, for softening aluminum materials, the plastic limit load
Hertr [%] 5 4 2 5 2
is determined based on an FEM analysis, the reduced yield
strength in the HAZ area shall be taken into consideration
in the model. For the dimensions of the HAZ, see Chap-
Assessment using notch stresses ter 3.0.
The use of notch stresses in the assessment of the static Surface treatment
strength is only possible for structural steels. The section
In the case of mechanically surface treated components, npl
factor is calculated using
shall be calculated in accordance with (3.3.12) to (3.3.19)
npl,wK = MIN ( E ˜ H ertr,wK /Rp ; Kp) (3.3.15) in the same manner as for non-surface treated components.
E Young's modulus, Table 3.3.3;
Hertr,wK total critical strain, Eqs. (3.1.15), (3.1.16);
Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.24;
Kp, } plastic notch factors, Eq. (3.3.8).
 77 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

3.3.2.2 Weld factor 3.4 Component strength

The weld factor DW results from Table 3.3.5 (for steel and
3.4.0 General
cast iron materials) and from Table 5.1.26 (for aluminum).
In accordance with this chapter, the values of the compo-
Table 3.3.5 Weld factor DW for steel nent static strength VSK shall be calculated separately for
S355 S42 non-welded and for welded components.
S235
S27 P355 0
Weld GS200
quali-
Stress 5 G20Mn5 S46 S69 The component strength is the critical equivalent stress at
Weld GS240
type P27 +N 0 0 the reference point.
ty —1 G17Mn5+
5 G20Mn5 S46
QT
+Q 0 3.4.1 Non-welded components
com-
full The following applies to non-welded components:
all pres-
penetra- sion1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 0,9 VSK = Rp ˜ npl (3.4.1)
tion
veri- Rp yield strength, Eq. (3.2.1) or Eq. (3.2.3);
weld or
fied tension
with
or npl, } section factor, Eq. (3.3.1) or Eq. (3.3.2).
back not
weld veri- shear
fied
com-
3.4.2 Welded components
partial
pres- 0,95 0,85 0,8 0,7 0,55 3.4.2.0 General
penetra-
sion/
tion or all
tension The component strength values VSK are calculated sepa-
fillet
or rately for the areas listed in Chapter 3.0 (BM, HAZ, W),
weld
shear
depending on the material (steel or aluminum).
—1 The weld quality is verified if testing of 10 % of the welds by radio-
graphic or ultrasound test does not result in any failures.

The following applies to butt joints of sectional steel made 3.4.2.1 Base material BM and heat affected zone
of S235JR (obsolete: St 37-2) and S235JRG1 (obsolete: HAZ
USt 37-2) with t > 16 mm under tension load:
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
Dw = 0,55
The following applies to the base material of welded com-
ponents:
VSK = Rp · npl (3.4.2)
Rp yield strength, Tables 5.1.24 and 5.1.25;
npl section factor, Eq. (3.3.1) or Eq. (3.3.2).

The HAZ is not taken into consideration.

Softening aluminum materials
Also in this case, (3.4.2) applies to the base material. Pro-
vided the stresses in the HAZ are not smaller than those in
the BM, the assessment of the HAZ is relevant.
The following applies to the HAZ:
VSK = Rp ˜ UWEZ ˜ npl (3.4.3)
Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.25;
npl section factor, Eq. (3.3.2);
UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25.

Provided, for softening aluminum materials, the heat

treatment is performed using the result of the original
strength existing after welding, the HAZ does not have to
be taken into consideration (UWEZ = 1).
3.5 Safety factors 78 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

3.4.2.2 Weld W 3.5 Safety factors

Assessment using structural stresses
3.5.0 General
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
In accordance with this chapter, the required safety factors
VSK,w = Rp ˜ Dw ˜ npl (3.4.4) and the resulting total safety factor to be used for the as-
Rp yield strength, Tables 5.1.24 and 5.1.25; sessment shall be determined separately for non-welded
npl section factor, Eq. (3.3.13); and for welded components.
Dw weld factor, Tables 3.3.5 and 5.1.26. The safety factors refer to a probability of survival of the
characteristic strength values of PÜ = 97,5 %.
Softening aluminum materials
In general, the safety factor consists of partial safety fac-
VSK,w = Rp ˜ Dw ˜ UWEZ ˜ npl (3.4.5) tors with regard to the load (existing stress) and to the
Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.25; material (critical stress).
npl section factor, Eq. (3.3.14);
j = jS ˜ jF (3.5.1)
DW weld factor, Table 5.1.26;
j safety factor;
UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25. js load factor;
jF material factor.
Assessment using notch stresses
Structural steels The load factor can be specified only in combination with
the design load, Chapter 5.7. Provided the load is assumed
VSK,wk = Rp ˜ npl,wK (3.4.6) with sufficient safety such that the resulting stress, Vmax,
Rp yield strength, Table 5.1.24; becomes the design value, the strength assessment may be
npl,wK section factor, Eq. (3.3.15). performed without the load factor and the following ap-
plies: jS = 1.

The material factor is comprised of a stepped basic safety

factor and additional partial safety factors.

3.5.1 Individual safety factors

Basic safety factors
The following basic safety factors are used for the assess-
ment of the static strength:
jm assessment of fractures in the case of normal
or short-term elevated temperatures, i.e. as-
sessment of the tensile strength Rm or the
strength at elevated temperature Rm,t;
jp assessment of flow in the case of normal or
short-term elevated temperatures, i.e. as-
sessment of the yield strength Rp or the yield
strength at elevated temperature Rp,t;
jmt assessment of fractures in the case of long-
term elevated temperatures, i.e. assessment
of the creep strength Rm,Tt;
jpt assessment of flow in the case of long-term
elevated temperatures, i.e. assessment of the
creep limit Rm,t.

The basic safety factors in accordance with Table 3.5.1

apply to ductile and non-ductile materials (elongation at
break A in accordance with Table 5.1.12 or 5.1.13):
Ductile materials have an elongation at break of A t 6 %:
– steel and GS: all material types;
– cast iron material: GJS and GJM, partly;
– aluminum material: wrought and cast alloys, partly.
3.5 Safety factors 79 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Non-ductile materials have an elongation at break of For welded aluminum components, an additional partial
A  6 %: safety factor shall be taken into consideration in accord-
ance with DIN 4113:
– cast iron material: GJS and GJM, partly;
GJL, all types; jw = 1,13 (aluminum)
(3.5.3)
– aluminum material: wrought and cast alloys, partly. jw = 1 (milled steel and cast iron)
The basic safety factors have different values depending on Partial safety term for non-ductile cast components
the probability of the occurrence of the highest stress or the
most unfavorable stress combination and depending on the For non-ductile cast components (A < 6 %), an additional
consequences of failure. partial safety term shall be taken into consideration, Fig-
ure 3.5-1:
Table 3.5.1 Basic safety factors
jm Consequences of failure ǻj 0,5  A/24 % (3.5.4)
jp A elongation at break.
jmt moderate
high mean —1
jpt
2,0 1,85 1,75
Probability 1,5 1,4 1,3
of the occur- high
1,5 1,4 1,3
rence of the 1,0 1,0 1,0
stress or the
stress com- 1,8 1,7 1,6
1,35 1,25 1,2 Figure 3.5-1 Partial safety term 'j, as a function of the
bination low —3
1,35 1,25 1,2 elongation at break A
—2
1,0 1,0 1,0
—1 moderate consequences of failure of a less important component in
the sense of "no catastrophic effects" being associated with a failure; 3.5.2 Total safety factor
e.g. due to a load redistribution towards other members of a statically
undeterminate system. Reduction by a factor of 1,15 (rounding 0,05). From the individual safety factors, the total safety fac-
—2 generally with reference to the magnitude of the load, not the fre- tor jges shall be determined (maximum value is relevant):
quency. Reduction by a factor of 1,10 (rounding of 0,05).
—3 including exactly estimable loads which can safely be assumed to § j Rp jp Rp jpt ·
j
occur infrequently due to e.g. the testing and assembling conditions. jges jS ˜ j z ˜ MAX ¨ m ˜ ; ; mt ˜ ; ¸  ǻj
¨ K T,m R m K T,p K Tt,m R m K Tt,p ¸
© ¹
Partial safety factor for cast components (3.5.5)
For cast components, an additional partial safety fac- jS load factor;
tor (casting factor jG) shall be taken into consideration. jm, } individual safety factors, Table 3.5.1;
This way, the larger strength dispersions caused by una- KT,m, } temperature factors, Chapter 3.2.1.7;
voidable and, therefore, permissible imperfections in the Rm,Rp tensile strength and yield strength,
material are taken into consideration2: Eqs. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3);
jG = 1,4 castings that have not been sub- jz additional partial safety factor for cast or
ject to non-destructive testing; welded components, Table 3.5.2; here, jG
(3.5.2) and jw shall not be applied in combination,
jG = 1,25 castings that have been subject to
only jG (BM and HAZ) or jw (W);
non-destructive testing.
'j additional partial safety term for non-ductile
The cast factor specified analogously to other standards is materal, Eq. (3.5.4).
very high and is often not confirmed when checked exper-
imentally. In accordance with Chapter 0.0, supplementary Based on the total safety factor in accordance with
agreements are possible in this case. Eq. (3.5.5), it is implicitely specified which of the four
individual assessments is relevant.
Partial safety factor for welded components
Special cases
The following special cases apply to Eq. (3.5.5):
2 In mechanical engineering, cast components are of standard
quality for which a further reduction of the cast factor—as is – in the case of normal temperatures, proportions 3 and 4
done for high quality cast components (jF = 1,0 in limit cases are omitted; the equations for KTt,m and KTt,p would
such as the aircraft industry)—does not seem possible thus far. lead to unrealistic results. Furthermore,
Those high quality cast components meet special requirements KT,m = KT,p = 1 applies;
for the qualification and monitoring of the manufacturing process
as well as for the quality and extent of product testing so that – for Rp/Rm d 0,75, proportions 1 and 3 are omitted;
component properties with little scatter can be ensured.
3.6 Assessment 80 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

for Rp/Rm ! 0,75, proportions 2 and 4 are omitted; 3.6 Assessment

– for milled steel and ductile aluminum alloys in welded 3.6.0 General
components, proportions 1 and 3 are omitted.
The assessment shall be carried out by calculating the
Table 3.5.2 Additional partial safety factor jz for non- degree of utilization aSK for the equivalent stress. aSK is
welded and for welded components the quotient of the existing equivalent stress Vv and the
welded allowable static stress at the reference point. The allowable
jz non-welded
BM, HAZ W static stress is the quotient of the critical stress VSK and the
milled steel, total safety factor jges.
wrought aluminum 1 jw jw
alloys Furthermore it shall be checked whether the stress state has
GS, GJS, GJM, a high multiaxiality. If the degree of multiaxiality exceeds
GJL, cast alumi- jG jG jw a specified limit value, the hydrostatic strength shall be
num alloys assessed in addition.
Comment: In most cases, particularly when the reference
point is situated on the free component surface, the as-
Base material BM, heat affected zone HAZ, Weld W. jg in sessment of the hydrostatic stress is not required. There-
accordance with Eq. (3.5.2), jw in accordance with fore, the additional assessment ist completely described in
Eq. (3.5.3). this chapter.

Comment: As the required total safety factor comprises the Relevant degree of utilization
temperature factors and the yield stress ratio, it can no The assessment is successful if all required degrees of
longer be interpreted directly as a safety factor in the sense utilization are a maximum of one. Usually, the relevant
of safety against failure as would be the case with e.g. factor is the equivalent degree of utilization; the degree of
jp = 1,5 or jm = 2. utilization of the hydrostatic strength is additionally rele-
vant only in cases of high multiaxiality. With welded com-
ponents, the areas BM, HAZ and W shall be considered
separately.

3.6.1 Non-welded components

3.6.1.1 Degree of utilization of the equivalent stress
The equivalent degree of utilization is calculated as fol-
lows:
ıv
a SK d1 (3.6.1)
ı SK /j ges
Vv equivalent stress at the reference point in
accordance with Chapter 3.1.1;
VSK static component strength, Eq. (3.4.1);
jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5).

3.6.1.2 Control of multiaxiality

An additional assessment of the hydrostatic stress is only
required when the degree h of multiaxiality exceeds the
required limit values or falls short of these. The test is
performed separately for the tension and the compression
fields.
Tension field
If the following applies to the degree of multiaxiality:
h > hmax = 1,333 (3.6.2)
h degree of multiaxiality, Eq. (3.1.10),
the degree of utilization of the hydrostatic stress shall be
calculated in the tension field.
3.6 Assessment 81 3 Assessment of the static strength using local
stresses

Comment: Because of the negative values of VH and

ıH
a SH, Zug d1 (3.6.3) VSH,Druck, the degree of utilization aSH,Druck in accordance
ı SH, Zug /j ges
with (3.6.9) is positive.
VH hydrostatic stress, Eq. (3.1.11);
VSH,Zug critical value of the hydrostatic stress, The critical value of the hydrostatic stress in the compres-
sion field is calculated as follows:
Eq. (3.6.4) or Eq. (3.6.5);
jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5). Ductile materials

Comment: Because of the positive values of VH and VSH,Druck = 1,333 ˜ VSK,Druck (3.6.10)
VSH,Zug, the degree of utilization aSH,Zug in accordance Semi-ductile or brittle materials
with (3.6.3) is also positive.
f V,Druck K NL,Durck
The critical value of the hydrostatic stress in the tension V SH,Druck  ˜ V SK,Druck
field is calculated as follows: 0,75  0,65˜ q
Ductile materials: (3.6.11)
VSH,Zug = 1,333 ˜ VSK,Zug (3.6.4) VSK,Druck component strength for the limit multiaxiali-
ty, Eq. (3.6.12);
Semi-ductile or brittle materials KNL,Druck grey cast iron factor, Clause 3.3.1.2;
K NL,Zug q ductility factor, Eq. (3.1.6).
ı SH,Zug ˜ ı SK,Zug (3.6.5)
0,75  0,65 ˜ q The component strength for the limit multiaxiality is the
VSK,Zug component strength for the limit multiaxiali- critical equivalent stress for the case that the multiaxiality
is just equal to the limit value h = hmin = –1,333. The cal-
ty, Eq. (3.6.6);
KNL,Zug grey cast iron factor, Clause 3.3.1.2; culation is performed as follows:
q ductility factor, Eq. (3.1.6). VSK,Druck = Rp ˜ npL,Druck (3.6.12)
The component strength for the limit multiaxiality is the § E ˜ H ertr,Druck ·
critical equivalent stress for the case that the multiaxiality npl,Druck MIN¨ ;K p ¸ (3.6.13)
¨ Rp ¸
is just equal to the limit value h = hmax = 1,333. The calcu- © ¹
lation is performed as follows: Hertr,Druck critical strain, Eq. (3.3.3), if the limit value h
VSK,Zug = Rp ˜ npL,Zug (3.6.6) = hmax = 1,333 is used as the degree of
multiaxiality;
§ E ˜ H ertr, Zug · E Young's modulus, Table 3.3.1;
npl, Zug MIN¨ ;K p ¸ (3.6.7)
¨ Rp ¸ Rp yield strength, Eqs. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3);
© ¹ Kp plastic notch factor, Eq. (3.3.8).
Hertr,Zug critical strain, Eq. (3.3.3), if the limit value h
= hmax = 1,333 is used as the degree of mul-
tiaxiality; 3.6.2 Welded components
E Young's modulus, Table 3.3.1; 3.6.2.0 General
Rp yield strength, Eqs. (3.2.1) to (3.2.3);
Kp plastic notch factor, Eq. (3.3.8). For welded components, all assessments shall be per-
formed separately for the different areas (BM, HAZ, W).
Compression field
If the following applies for the degree of multiaxiality: 3.6.2.1 Base material BM and heat affected zone
h < hmin = –1,333 (3.6.8) HAZ
h degree of multiaxiality, Eq. (3.1.10), Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
the degree of utilization of the hydrostatic stress shall be ıv
calculated in the compression field. aSK d1 (3.6.14)
ı SK /jges
ıH
a SH,Druck d1 (3.6.9) Vv equivalent stress at reference point in ac-
ı SH, Druck /j ges
cordance with Chapter 3.1.2.1;
VH hydrostatic stress, Eq. (3.1.11); VSK static component strength, Eq. (3.4.2);
VSH,Druck critical value of the hydrostatic stress, jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5).
Eq. (3.6.10) or Eq. (3.6.11);
jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5).
4.0 General 82 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

Softening aluminum materials 4 Assessment of the fatigue

ıv strength using local stresses
aSK d1 (3.6.15)
ı SK /jges
Vv equivalent stress at reference point in ac-
4.0 General
cordance with Chapter 3.1.2.1; In accordance with this chapter, the assessment of the
VSK static component strength, Eq. (3.4.3); fatigue strength is carried out using local elastic stresses.
jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5). The assessment applies uniformly to all types of compo-
nents.

3.6.2.2 Weld joint W

4.1 Characteristic service stresses
Assessment using structural stresses
4.1.0 General
Steel and non-softening aluminum materials
In accordance with this chapter, the required parameters of
ı vw
aSK,w d1 (3.6.16) the stress spectrum shall be specified. A stress spectrum
ı SK,w /jges shall usually be specified for the intended operation. Non-
Vvw equivalent stress at reference point, recurrent stresses due to special events or misuse shall be
taken into consideration in the assessment of the static
Eq. (3.1.14);
strength.
VSK,w static component strength, Eq. (3.4.4);
jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5). Relevant are the stress spectra of the individual stress
components with the stress cycles consisting of the ampli-
tudes Va,i and the mean values Vm,i, see Figure 4.1-1, as
Softening aluminum materials well as with the associated numbers of cycles correspond-
ing with the required fatigue life N with ni load cycles
ı vw
aSK,w d1 (3.6.17) per step i = 1 to j.
ı SK,w /jges
Vvw equivalent stress at reference point, The calculation applies from approximately N = 104
cycles onwards.
Eq. (3.1.14);
VSK,w static component strength, Eq. (3.4.5); The reference value of a stress spectrum to be used for
jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5). calculation is the step i = 1 with the highest amplitude Va,1
and the associated mean value Vm,1.
Assessment using notch stresses
Structural steels Stress ratio:
V (4.1.1)
ı vwK
aSK,wK d1 (3.6.18) Va
ı SK,wK /jges Vm  V a Vm
R Va
Vvwk equivalent notch stress at reference point, Vm  V a
Eq. (3.1.17);
t
VSK static component strength, Eq. (3.4.6);
jges total safety factor, Eq. (3.5.5).

Figure 4.1-1: Stress cycle

Tensile stresses have positive signs and compression

stresses have negative signs.
Superposition
If several proportional or synchronous stress components
act simultaneously at the reference point, Chapter 0.3.4,
they shall be overlaid. The superposition shall be carried
out at the assessment stage, Chapter 4.6.
Shear stresses
The characteristic service stresses describing the stress
spectra are described in Chapters 4.1.3 to 4.1.5, based on
the normal stresses V. They apply analogously to shear
stresses W.
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 83 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

4.1.1 Non-welded components If the maximum stresses do not occur at the weld but in the
non-welded area, an additional assessment of the base
At the critical point on the unloaded surface of a compo- material is required in that area.
nent, a plane stress state prevails which is represented by
the stress components 4.1.2.2 Assessment using notch stresses

Vx, Vy, W = Wxy (4.1.2) The determination of notch stresses in welds is usually
performed based on FEM analyses, using the respective
The directions of the coordinates x, y are in the surface of detail models. See also Figure 0.3-5 for the definition of
the component, the z-axis is normal to it. Alternatively, or the notch model.
in the case of the component surface being loaded, the
The stress components are calculated inside the notch
stress state is to be determined by the three principle
based on a coordinate system oriented with regard to the
stresses
weld.
V1, V1, V3 (4.1.3)
VA, V||, W
Independent of the height of the principle stresses, direc-
tions 1 and 2 are parallel to the surface while direction 3 is The stress component perpendicular to the weld VA and the
perpendicular. shear stress W shall be assessed using the strength values
for notch stresses in accordance with Chapter 5.4.3. The
By means of this specification, the case of shear transmis- stress component parallel to the weld V|| shall be assessed
sion is ruled out. Solid body contact accompanied by po-
in the same manner as a structural stress, using Chap-
tential fretting corrosion is not covered by the values for
ter 4.1.2.1.
local fatigue strength calculated here. An exception is the
assessment of the fatigue strength using nominal stresses Unlike the assessment of the static strength, generally no
of shaft-hub connections, based on experimentally deter- separate consideration of the base material BM, the heat
mined fatigue notch factors, Chapter 5.3.3. affected zone HAZ and the weld W is required for the
assessment of the fatigue strength.
If the maximum stresses do not occur at the weld but in the
4.1.2 Welded components non-welded area, an additional assessment of the base
4.1.2.0 General material is required in that area.
As a rule, welded components consist of individual sheets,
connected or joined by means of butt welds or fillet welds.
4.1.3 Stress spectrum and constant
The stresses for the assessment of the fatigue strength can amplitude S-N curve
be determined in the form of structural stresses (local nom-
inal stresses) or as notch stresses. 4.1.3.1 Parameters of the stress spectrum
In the case of variable amplitudes, a stress spectrum shall
be specified for every stress component. A stress spectrum
4.1.2.1 Assessment using structural stresses describes the frequency distribution of the stress cycles
Structural stresses (local nominal stresses) are usually contained in the stress history.
determined based on FEM analyses by e.g. the respective The derivation of the stress spectrum from the stress histo-
extrapolation techniques or internal linearizations, see also ry shall be performed in accordance with the rainflow
Chapter 3.1.2.1. In that case, the user shall make sure that counting procedure or to the same effect of that method.
the stress value which has been calculated is suitable for a
strength assessment. For the definition of the structural Parameters of the stress spectrum:
stresses see also Figure 0.3-4. Va,1 highest amplitude, i = 1 (maximum value of
the spectrum);
In general, the stress components are calculated in sheet
Vm,1 mean value with regard to Va,1, step 1;
metal (plane stress state) based on a coordinate system
oriented with regard to the weld. Va,i amplitude in step i, Va,i ! 0, ordered by size:
Va,i+1 d Va,i;
VA, V||, W
Vm,i mean value in step i;
Special requirements for the stress determination for cer- N total number of cycles corresponding to the
tain weld cases, e.g. welds not covering the cross-section, required fatigue life (required total number
are given in the FAT catalogue, see Chapter 5.4.
of cycles), N = 6ni (i summed up for 1 to j),
Unlike the assessment of the static strength, generally no ni related number of cycles in step i, Ni = 6nk
separate consideration of of base material BM, heat affect- (k summed up for 1 to i),
ed zone HAZ and weld W is required for the assessment of i spectrum step, i = 1 to j;
the fatigue strength. j number of all steps of the spectrum;
v damage potential, characteristic value for the
shape of the spectrum, Chapter 4.4.3.5.
4.1 Characteristic service stresses 84 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

Va,i/Va,1 and ni/ N characterize the shape of the stress kII only for model II constant amplitude S-N
spectrum. The amplitudes Va,i are always positive, the curves: exponent of the component constant
amplitude S-N curve for ND  N  ND,II;
mean values Vm,i can be positive, negative, or zero.
fII factor by which the endurance limit is lower
The constant amplitude stress spectrum can be regarded as than the nominal component fatigue limit.
a special case, for which the following applies: i = 1 and
Va = Va,i = Va,1, 4.1.4 Adaptation of a stress spectrum to
Vm = Vm,i = Vm,1 and match the component constant amplitude S-N
N = ni = n1. curve
4.1.3.2 Characteristic values of the constant The component constant amplitude S-N curve applies to a
amplitude S-N curve constant stress ratio R. Stress spectra, e.g. from rainflow
matrices, can have different mean stresses per step of the
The constant amplitude S-N curve describes the relation- spectrum. To allow the adaptation of any stress spectrum
ship between stress amplitude and critical number of load to the component constant amplitude S-N curve, all steps
cycles and shall be determined for each site of the assess- of a spectrum must be converted to the stress ratio of the
ment and each stress component. highest step R1 or that of another suitable spectrum step.
Based on the material constant ampiltude S-N curve and
Conversion to a stress ratio R = 1
taking into consideration the design factor, Chapter 4.4.1,
and the mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2, the component In a first step, a conversion to the stress ratio Ri = R = 1
constant amplitude S-N curve results, Chapter 4.4.3.4. shall be performed, as the constant amplitude S-N curve is
Model I constant amplitude S-N curves exhibit one knee initially calculated for a stress ratio R = 1 as well, Chap-
point and a horizontal profile for N ! ND. ter 4.4.1.
In order to do so, the damage-equivalent alternating stress
Model II constant amplitude S-N curves exhibit two knee
amplitude Va,W,i at R = 1 shall be calculated from the
points and a horizontal profile for N ! ND,II.
amplitude existing at the stress ratio Ri for each step of a
Characteristic values of the constant amplitude S-N spectrum:
curve: (see Figure 4.1-2)
Va,W,i = Va,i/KAK,i (4.1.4)
Va
Va,i stress amplitude of spectrum step i, Chap-
(lg)
ter 4.1.3.1;
k KAK,i mean stress factor of spectrum step i with
stress ratio Ri for type of overlading F2,
VAK I Eqs. (4.4.8) to (4.4.12).
kII fII
VAK,II II Control of spectrum sorting
When calculating the alternating stress spectrum from a
two-parametric classification result, usually a rainflow
matrix, in accordance with Eq. (4.1.4), it is not generally
ND ND,II N (lg)
expected for the spectrum steps to be sorted by size as
required in Chapter 4.1.3.1.
Figure 4.1-2: Constant amplitude S-N curve
In this case, the spectrum steps of the alternating stress
Va stress amplitude; spectrum shall be sorted such that the condition Va,W,i+1
VAK nominal component fatigue limit; d Va,W,i is fulfilled.
VAK,II endurance limit;
Conversion to another stress ratio R
N number of cycles;
ND number of cycles at knee point of the com- In the second step, the stress amplitudes Va,W,i of the spec-
ponent constant amplitude S-N curve; trum for R = 1 can be converted to any other uniform
ND,II only for model II constant amplitude S-N stress ratio R:
curves: number of cycles at second knee Va,R,i = Va,W,i · KAK (4.1.5)
point of the component constant amplitude
S-N curve; Va,W,i alternating stress amplitude of spectrum
k exponent of the component constant ampli- step i, Eq. (4.1.4);
tude S-N curve for N  ND; KAK mean stress factor for type of overload-
ing F2, Eqs. (4.4.8) to (4.4.12), as a function
of the required stress ratio R.
4.2 Material properties 85 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

4.1.5 Damage-equivalent stress amplitude 4.2 Material properties

The damage-equivalent stress amplitude Väqu is a constant 4.2.0 General
stress amplitude which is damage-equivalent to the stress
spectrum in question and has an assigned number of cycles In accordance with this chapter, the required material
equal to the number of cycles at knee point of the compo- properties (standard component values) shall be deter-
nent constant amplitude S-N curve, ND, taking into consid- mined; these are the material fatigue limit for completely
reversed axial stress, VW, and shear stress, WW, as well as
eration the shape of the stress spectrum, the required total
number of cycles and the maximum value in the spectrum, further characteristics.
Figure 4.1-3. An influence of the frequency on the material fatigue limit
for completely reversed stress has not been considered thus
far, although it might be of importance for aluminum mate-
rials.

4.2.1 Non-welded components

4.2.1.1 Standard component values
For non-welded components the standard component val-
ues of the material fatigue limits for completely reversed
axial stress and completely reversed shear stress are as
follows:
VW,zd = fW,V · Rm
(4.2.1)
WW,s = fW,W · VW,zd
fW,V fatigue strength factor for completely re-
versed normal stress, Table 4.2.1;
Figure 4.1-3: Damage-equivalent stress amplitude fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re-
versed shear stress, Table 4.2.1;
The damage-equivalent stress amplitude refers to ND and Rm tensile strength, Chapter 3.2.1.1,
thus it allows the external form of the assessment of the Eqs. (3.2.1), (3.2.2).
fatigue limit. The values VW and WW apply to the number of cycles ND,V
Parameters of the damage-equivalent stress spectrum = ND,W = 106. In the case of model I constant amplitude S-
Väqu damage-equivalent stress amplitude as a N curves, they correspond with the fatigue limit as well as
combination of the shape of the spectrum, with the endurance limit for N = f. In the case of model II
the required total number of cycles and the constant amplitude S-N curves, the fatique limit differs
maximum value in the spectrum; from the endurance limit N = f, Chapter 4.4.3.4.
Vm(Väqu) associated mean stress, in general,
The standard component values according to Eq. (4.2.1)
Vm(Väqu) = 0 should be used;
characterize the fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
N (Väqu) associated number of cycles, N (Väqu) = ND. of the material without any influences by the structure, but
by taking Kd,m and KA in Eq. (3.2.1) into consideration for
Using the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK,
the existing component size. Analogous to the standard
Chapter 4.4.3.5, results in the damage-equivalent stress component value of the tensile strength, a probability of
amplitude: survival PÜ = 97,5 % is to be valid.
Väqu = Va,1/KBK (4.1.6)
4.2.1.2 Fatigue strength factors for completely
Va,1 maximum value of the spectrum; reversed normal stress and completely
KBK variable amplitude fatigue strength factor in reversed shear stress
accordance with Chapter 4.4.3.5. The fatigue strength factor for completely reversed normal
Application stress, fW,V, serves to convert the tensile strength to the
fatigue limit for completely reversed axial stress, Table
For a given stress spectrum, the relevant damage-
4.2.1.
equivalent stress amplitude can be calculated. By using the
damage-equivalent stress amplitude, the assessment of the The fatigue strength factor for completely reversed shear
variable amplitude fatigue strength can be performed as an stress, fW,W, takes into consideration the fact that the mate-
assessment of the fatigue limit, which is easier but has the rial fatigue limit for completely reversed stress is lower for
same content-related quality. shear stresses than for axial stresses, Table 4.2.1.
4.2 Material properties 86 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

Table 4.2.1 Fatigue strength factor for completely re- Normal temperature, low temperature and elevated temper-
versed normal stress, fW,V, and shear stress, fW,W —1 ature shall be distinguished.
Material group fW,V fW,W Normal temperature
Case hardening steel 0,40 —2 0,577 —2 —3
Normal temperatures are as follows:
Stainless steel 0,40 —4 0,577
– for fine grain structural steel from –40 °C to +60 °C;
Forging steel 0,40 —4 0,577
– for other kinds of steel from –40 °C to +100 °C;
Steel other than these 0,45 0,577
GS 0,34 0,577 – for cast iron materials from –25 °C to +100 °C,
GJS 0,34 0,65 – for age-hardening auluminum materials from
GJM 0,30 0,75 –25 °C to +50 °C;
GJL 0,34 1,0 —5 – for non-age-hardening auluminum materials from –
Wrought aluminum alloys 0,30 —6 0,577 25 °C to +100 °C.
Cast aluminum alloys 0,30 —6 0,75 For normal temperatures, the temperature factor is
—1 f 6
W,V and fW,W are valid for a number of cycles N = 10 . KT,D = 1 (4.2.2)
fW,W equal to fW in Table 3.2.5.
—2 Blank hardened. The influence of carburization on the component Low temperature
fatigue limit for completely reversed stress shall be taken into consid-
eration based on the surface treatment factor KV, Chapter 4.3.3. Low temperatures below the values listed above are out-
—3 0,577 = 1/ 3 , according to the v. Mises criterion.
side the field of application of this guideline.
—4 Preliminary values. Elevated temperature
—5 According to the normal stress criterion.
In the range of elevated temperatures—up to 500 °C for
—6 f does not correspond with the endurance limit for N = f here.
W,V steel and cast iron materials and up to 200 °C for alumi-
num materials—the influence of the temperature on the
4.2.2 Welded components characteristic strength values shall be taken into considera-
tion. For elevated temperature the characteristic fatigue
4.2.2.1 Standard component values limit values for completely reversed normal stress and
For the throat section and for the toe section of profession- completely reversed shear stress are as follows:
ally welded components—weld imperfections occurring VW,zd,T = KT,D ˜ VW,zd
(4.2.3)
with normal production standards are allowable—, weld- WW,s,T = KT,D ˜ WW,s
specific characteristic values of the fatigue limit for com- KT,D temperature factor in accordance with
pletely reversed stress apply independent of the kind of Eq. (4.2.4);
material. VW,zd, WW,s characteristic material fatigue limit value for
Apart from the material type, completely reversed stress, Chapter 4.2.1.
– steel or The following applies depending on the temperature T:
– aluminum materials, – for fine grain structural steel, T > 60 °C:
the decisive factor for the fatigue strength of welded com- KT,D = 1 – 103 · T/°C (4.2.4 a)
ponents is the concrete design, determined by the structural
detail, the type of joint and the weld design. Therefore, no – for other kinds of steel, T > 100 °C, Figure 2.2-1:
specific characteristic material properties are specified for KT,D = 1 – 1,4 · 103 · (T/°C – 100) (4.2.4 b)
welded components. The fatigue strength is specified in
Chapter 4.4, using design factors in accordance with Chap- No values are known for stainless steel.
ter 4.3. – for GS, T > 100 °C:
Caution: For other types of material (conditionally welda- KT,D = 1 – 1,2 · 103 · (T/°C – 100) (4.2.4 c)
ble steel, stainless steel, weldable cast iron material) this
calculation method shall be considered as provisional and – for GJS, GJM and GJL, T > 100 °C, Figure 2.2-1:
may be applied with caution only.
KT,D = 1 – aT,D · (103 · T/°C)2 (4.2.4 d)

– for aluminum materials, T > 50 °C:

4.2.3 Temperature factor
KT,D = 1 – 1,2 · 103 · (T/°C – 50). (4.2.4 e)
The temperature factor applies to welded and non-welded Figure 3.2.3 in the Chapter 3.2
components and takes into consideration the fact that the
material fatigue limit for completely reversed stress de- aT,D Constant, Table 4.2.2.
creases with an increasing temperature.
4.2 Material properties 87 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

Table 4.2.2 Constant aT,D Safety factors j according to Chapter 3.5.

Material group GJS GJM GJL Rm,T/Rm = KT,m Rp,T/Rp = KT,p
aT,D 1,6 1,3 1,0
Rm,Tt/Rm = KTt,m Rp,Tt/Rp = KTt,p
Rm,T, Rp,T as well as Rm,Tt, Rp,Tt for t = 105 h
Eq. (4.2.4 a–d) apply to steel and cast iron materials from
Fatigue limit for completely reversed stress at elevated
the indicated temperature T and up to 500 °C. Eq. (4.2.4 e)
temperature: VW,zd,T/VW,zd = KT,D
applies to aluminum materials up to 200 °C.
Quantities VW,T and WW,T are not explicitly required for the Top: Non-alloyed structural steel, as in Figure 3.2-2
strength assessment, only the temperature factor KT,D is Rp/Rm = Re/Rm = 0,65, VW,zd/Rm = 0,45
necessary.
jm = 2,0, jp = jmt = 1,5, jpt = 1,0, jD = 1,5
Comment: For elevated temperatures, and in particular in
cases of a mean stress Vm  0, the component fatigue limit, Bottom: GJL, as in Figure 3.2-2
fatigue strength for finite life or variable amplitude fatigue VW,zd/Rm = 0,34, jm = 3,0, jmt = jD = 2,4
strength may be higher in terms of the maximum stress
than the component static strength with the result that the
assessment of the static strength is relevant.

Figure 4.2-1: Temperature dependent values of the

characteristic strength, plotted for comparison
4.3 Design parameters 88 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

~
4.3 Design parameters Table 4.3.1 Constant Kf
4.3.0 General Steel,
GJM,
Material wrought
In accordance with this chapter, the required design pa- GS GJS cast alumi- GJL
group aluminum
rameters shall be computed in terms of design factors. num alloys
alloys
A differentiation shall be made between non-welded and 2,0 2,0 1,5 1,2 1,0
welded components.
4.3.1 Non-welded components Stress concentration factor for a substitute structure
4.3.1.1 Design factors
To compute the estimate of the fatigue notch factor in
The design factors of non-welded components for normal accordance with Eq. (4.3.2), the stress concentration fac-
and shear stress are: tors Kt,V and Kt,W must be known, if the effect of surface
roughness, as desirable, is to be considered in relation to
1 ª 1 § 1 ·º 1
K WK, V «1  ~ ˜ ¨¨  1¸¸» ˜ the notch severity.
nı ¬« K f © R
K ¹»¼ V S ˜ K NL,E
K ˜ K
For the stress concentration factor Kt,V and for the shear
1 ª 1 § 1 ·º 1 stress Kt,W, the following approximation is to be valid as a
K WK, W «1  ~ ˜ ¨¨  1¸¸» ˜
nIJ ¬« K f © K R ¹¼» V ˜ K S
K function of the notch radius r and the wall thickness b.

Kt,V = Kt,W = MAX (10 0,066  0,36 ˜ lg(r/s) ; 1)

(4.3.1)
(4.3.3)
n V, n W Kt-Kf ratio, Chapter 4.3.1.3;
~ Equation (4.3.3) is valid for the substitute structure of a flat
Kf estimate of the fatigue notch factor, Chap-
bar with a deep single-sided notch in bending, Fig-
ter 4.3.1.2;
ure 4.3-1. The approximation is a provisional one and may
K R, } roughness factor, Chapter 4.3.1.4;
be applied with caution only.
KV surface treatment factor, Chapter 4.3.3;
KS coating factor, Chapter 4.3.4;
KNL,E factor for GJL, Chapter 4.3.5.

In the case of several normal stress or shear stress compo-

nents being present, the design factors for the stress com-
ponents shall be determined separately.
The additive combination of the fatigue notch factor Kf
with the reciprocal roughness factor KR results in the fact
that, compared with the unnotched component (low Kf), a
lower roughness sensitivity is assumed for the notched
component (high Kf).

In the case of a stress component V3 perpendicular to the

surface, the following always applies:
KWK,V3 = 1

4.3.1.2 Estimate of the fatigue notch factor

In accordance with Eq. (4.3.3), the estimate of the fatigue
~ Figure 4.3-1: Stress concentration factor for the substitute
notch factor Kf can be calculated based on the stress con- structure in accordance with Figure 5.2-15, B/b high
centration factors for a substitute structure, Kt,V and Kt,W
Notch radius and wall thickness shall be specified based on
~ the available characteristic values.
Kf = MAX (Kt,V/nV; 1)
~ (4.3.2)
Kf = MAX (Kt,W/nW; 1) Notch radius
The notch radius r is either given, shall be derived from the
with the Kt-Kf ratios nV and nW in accordance with Chap-
related stress gradient or shall be approximated ficticious-
ter 4.3.1.3. ly, see Table 2.3.5:
The estimates of the fatigue notch factor given in Ta- r = 2 /GV
ble 4.3.1 may also be used as approximate values. (4.3.4)
r = 1 /GW
4.3 Design parameters 89 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

Wall thickness § Rm ·
 ¨¨ a G  ¸¸
b ˜ MPa
The wall thickness b is either given or it shall be deter- nı 1  4 Gı ˜ mm ˜ 10 © G ¹
(4.3.9)
mined based on the equivalent diameter deff. Two cases
shall be distinguished according to the material group, see aG, bG constants, Table 2.3.1.
Table 3.2.3.
Table 4.3.2 Constants aG and bG
Case 1 Mate- Stain- Other
rial less kinds GS GJS GJM GJL
The following applies to components (including forgings)
group steel of steel
made of quenched and tempered heat treatable steel, case
hardening steel, nitriding steel—both nitrided or quenched aG 0,40 0,50 0,25 0,05 0,05 0,05
and tempered —, heat treatable cast steels, GJS, GJM and bG 2400 2700 2000 3200 3200 3200
GJL:
b = deff/2 (4.3.5)
Wrought alumi- Cast aluminum
Material group
Case 2 num alloys alloys
aG 0,05 0,05
The following applies to components (including forgings)
made of non-alloyed structural steel, fine grain structural bG 850 3200
steel, normalized heat treatable steel, general cast steel and
aluminum materials:
b = deff (4.3.6)

4.3.1.3 Computation of the Kt-Kf ratios

4.3.1.3.0 General
The computation of the Kt-Kf ratios can be performed
using two different methods.
According to Stieler’s concept of support effects, the Kt-Kf
ratio depends considerably on the related stress gradient.
This method corresponds with the one given in the FKM
guideline up to the 5th edition (2003). It will continue to be
taken into consideration in the guideline as its application
is somewhat easier when compared with the newer meth-
ods, see Chapter 4.3.1.3.1.
A new aspect is the application of a material-mechanically
reasonable Kt-Kf ratio which, particularly in the case of
severe notches, makes use of strength reserves. Further-
more, the new concept of support effects takes into consid-
eration the static size effect, Chapter 4.3.1.3.2.

4.3.1.3.1 Kt-Kf ratios according to Stieler

The Kt-Kf ratios for normal stress, nV, Figure 2.3-1, shall
be computed as a function of the related stress gradient GV
or using Eqs. (4.3.7) to (4.3.9).
The following applies to GV ” 0,1 mm–1 Figure 4.3-2: Kt-Kf ratio nV
§ Rm ·
¨¨ aG 0,5  ¸
˜ MPa ¸¹ The diagram may be extended to up to = 100 mm1.
˜ mm ˜ 10 ©
b
nı 1  Gı G
(4.3.7)
Numerical values 1/0,65 to 1/0,95: Difference between the
The following applies to 0,1 mm–1 < GV ” 1 mm–1 characteristic fatigue limit for completely reversed axial
and completely reversed bending stresses, valid for the
§ Rm · material specimen of the diameter d0 = 7,5 mm.
 ¨¨ a G  ¸
b G ˜ MPa ¸¹
nı 1  Gı ˜ mm ˜ 10 © Not included in the figure:
(4.3.8)
The following applies to 1 mm–1 < GV ” 100 mm–1
4.3 Design parameters 90 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

Stainless steels, threshold values for GV = 1 mm1: gradients, it may be lower as well. In fact, Kt-Kf ratios
highest value: nV = 1,27 for Rm = 400 MPa and smaller than 1 are possible. The reason is the proportion of
lowest value: nV = 1,14 for Rm = 1070 MPa. the statistical size effect which, for large highly stressed
component areas, can also have a reducing effect on the
Wrought aluminum alloys, threshold values for GV = fatigue strength.
1 mm1:
Statistical Kt-Kf ratio
highest value: nV = 1,69 for Rm = 95 MPa and
lowest value: nV = 1,18 for Rm = 590 MPa. The statistical Kt-Kf ratio is the same for all stress types
and results from the ratio of the highly stressed surfaces of
Cast aluminum alloys, threshold values for: GV = 1 mm1:
a reference specimen and of the component under consid-
highest value: nV = 2,02 for Rm = 130 MPa and eration:
smallest value: nV = 1,88 for Rm = 330 MPa.
1
Particularities in the case of surface hardened compo- § A ref,st · k st
nst ¨ ¸ (4.3.11)
nents ¨ A ¸
© ı,st ¹
For surface hardened components (components with ther- Aref,st reference surface for statistical Kt-Kf ratio;
mal or chemo-thermal surface treatment), the Kt-Kf ratios AV,st highly stressed surface;
are lower than for non-surface hardened components. kst Weibull exponent for the statistical Kt-Kf
The Kt-Kf ratio for a crack originating in the surface is ratio.
lower because the surface tensile strength (tensile strength The geometry of the reference specimen is assumed to be a
of the hard surface layer) of the component is higher than cylindrical round specimen of a diameter of 8 mm and a
the core tensile strength (tensile strength of the weak core cylindrical section of 20 mm. This results in:
material according to the material standard).
Aref,st = 500 mm2 (4.3.12)
The Kt-Kf ratio for a crack originating in the core material
is lower because the related stress gradient in the core The Weibull exponent for the statistical Kt-Kf ratio kst
material of the component is lower than that at the surface. depends on the material group and is specified preliminar-
ily as given in Table 4.3.3.
The surface tensile strength is approximately Rm = (3,3 ·
HV) · MPa where HV is the Vickers hardness of the hard Table 4.3.3 Weibull exponent kst
surface layer. However, as this equation was not specifical- GJS, Wrought
Material Cast alumi-
ly developed for hardened surface layers, it shall be ap- Steel GS GJM, aluminum
group num alloys
plied with caution. In particular the fatigue limit for com- GJL alloys
pletely reversed stress of the hardened surface layer must kst 30 15 10 20 10
not be calculated from the tensile strength thus determined:
VW,zd  fW,V · Rm.

Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress The highly stressed surface is chosen if the fatigue crack
originates from the component surface or the layer near the
The Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress, nW, shall be computed surface layer. This is the general case.
using Eqs. (4.3.7) to (4.3.9), as a function of the related The highly stressed surface of the considered component
stress gradient GW, after having replaced V by W and the can be calculated based on FE analyses, using one of the
tensile strength Rm by fW,W · Rm where fW,W is the fatigue methods given in /32/, /33/, /34/. Diemar’s SPIEL method
strength factor for completely reversed shear stress in ac- /32/ is particularly recommendable due to its straightfor-
cordance with Table 4.2.1. ward application. Alternatively, Sonsino’s A90% method
/35/ may be used.

4.3.1.3.2 Material-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio The literature also gives approaches in which the statistical
Kt-Kf ratio is determined based on the highly stressed
The material-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio nV consists of three
volume VV.
individual factors by which the related influences can be
covered separately: Deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio
nV = nst · nvm · nbm (4.3.10) The deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio is the same for all
nst statistical Kt-Kf ratio; stress types. It represents NEUBER’s macro-support effect
nvm deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio; and is determined for ductile steels and wrought aluminum
nbm fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio. alloys. The following applies to all other material groups:

In the case of high stress gradients, the Kt-Kf ratio clearly nvm = 1 (4.3.13)
exceeds the one according to Stieler; in the case of small
4.3 Design parameters 91 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

The following applies to ductile steels and wrought alumi- Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress
num alloys:
The Kt-Kf ratios for shear stress, nW, shall be calculated in
E ˜ İ pl, W accordance with Eq. (4.3.10), in the same way as the Kt-Kf
n st n' 1
1
n vm 1 ˜ (4.3.14)
ıW ratios for normal stress nV.
nst statistical Kt-Kf ratio, Eq (4.3.11);
VW material fatigue limit for completely re- 4.3.1.3.3 Related stress gradient
versed stress, Eq. (4.2.1);
E Young's modulus, Table 3.3.1; When the stress amplitudes are determined point-by-point,
Hpl,W strain in alternating plasticity rated for en- the related stress gradient normal to the direction of stress
which is necessary to compute the Kt-Kf ratios, is as fol-
durance strength;
– for steel: Hpl,W = 2 · 10–4 · < lows for normal stresses ıa and for shear stresses Wa, see
up to Rm d 630 MPa: Figure 4.3-3.
<=1 1 ǻı a 1 § ı 2a ·
Gı ˜ ˜ ¨1  ¸
from Rm > 630 MPa on:
ı1a ǻs ǻs ¨© ı1a ¸¹
§ Rm · (4.3.17)
1  0,375 ˜ ¨¨
<  1¸¸
© 630 MPa ¹ 1 ǻWa 1 § W2a ·
GW ˜ ˜ ¨1  ¸
– for wrought aluminum alloys: W1a ǻs ǻs ¨© W1a ¸¹
Hpl,W = 1,6 · 10–5; ı1a, W1a stress amplitudes at the surface;
– other, in particular castings: Hpl,W = 0; ı2a, W2a stress amplitudes at 's;
Rm material tensile strength, Eqs. (3.2.1), 's distance between the neighbouring point and
(3.2.2); the surface.
n' for steel: n' = 0,15,
for aluminum: n' = 0,11.
Fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio

The growth of an incipient fatigue crack, which is slower

in a stress field with a stress gradient as compared with that
in a homogenous field of the same maximum stress, is
covered by the fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio. Figure 4.3-3: Stress amplitudes determined on a point-by-
point basis
5  G ˜ mm
nbm (4.3.15) In Eq. (4.3.17), the tangent at V1a is approximately re-
Rm 7,5  G ˜ mm
5 ˜ nvm ˜ nst  placed by the secant. The support points shall be specified
Rm,bm 1  0,2 ˜ G ˜ mm such that the maximum values of GV and GW are calculated.
nvm fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio,
Eqs. (4.3.13) and (4.3.14); If point-by-point determined stress amplitudes (as in Fig-
nst statistical Kt-Kf ratio, Eq. (4.3.11); ure 4.3-3, provided for example by FE analyses) are not
available, the following applies:
G related stress gradient, Chapter 4.3.1.3.3;
Rm tensile strength, Eqs. (3.2.1, 3.2.2); The related stress gradient at the point of maximum stress
Rm,bm reference tensile strength for the fracture- shall be calculated approximately for normal stresses and
mechanical Kt-Kf ratio in accordance with shear stresses—using radius r (influence by the structure)
and dimension d (influence of loading under bending or
Eq. (4.3.15), see Table 4.3.4.
torsion)—applying the following equation:
Table 4.3.4 Reference tensile strength Rm,bm
GV = 2/r + 2/d
Material group Steel Aluminum (4.3.18)
GW = 1/r + 2/d
Rm,bm [MPa] 680 270
If no stress gradient exists, then nV = nW = 1. In general, a
stress gradient normal to the direction of the stress is pre-
Provided Eq. (4.3.15) results in a value smaller than one, sent. In the case of a stress gradient in the direction of the
the following applies: stress (refers only to V3 perpendicular to the surface of the
component), the stress gradient is not taken into considera-
nbm = 1 (4.3.16) tion, and nV,3 = 1 applies.
4.3 Design parameters 92 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

4.3.1.3.4 Kt-Kf ratio for superimposed notches Material Wrought aluminum

Cast aluminum alloys
group alloys
If point-by-point determined stress amplitudes are not
available, the following applies: aR,V 0,22 0,20
Rm,N,min
For superimposed notches—for example fillet and bor- 133 133
in MPa
ing—with the partial Kt-Kf ratios n1 and n2 determined
based on the related stress gradients G1 or G2, the total Kt-
Kf ratio n is valid in the most favorable case; n shall be Comment: The determining factors for the influence of
calculated for the related stress gradient: the surface on the component fatigue limit are, in particu-
G = G 1 + G2 (4.3.19) lar, residual stresses and the surface treatment as a result of
manufacturing, rather than the roughness. According to the
If the distance between the two notches is at least 2 r current state of knowledge, however, no new specifications
(where r is the larger of the two radii), no superposition can be set with the result that the traditional equations are
needs to be taken into consideration. The value 2 r is prob- to be considered valid for the time being.
ably on the safe side.
If no radius is given, it may be calculated approximately by
using Eq. (4.3.18) (e.g. R | 2/GV).

4.3.1.4 Roughness factor

The roughness factor KR,V or KR,W, accounts for the influ-
ence of the surface roughness on the fatigue strength of the
component.
The roughness factor valid for polished components is
KR,V = KR,W = 1 (4.3.20)

For rolling skin, forging skin or the skin of castings, an

average roughness value Rz = 200 ȝm applies.

The roughness factor for normal stress, Figure 4.3-4, and

for shear stress is
§R · § 2˜R ·
K R,V 1  aR,V ˜ lg ¨¨ z ¸¸ ˜ lg ¨ m ¸
© ȝm ¹ ¨ R ¸
© m,N,min ¹
§R · § 2˜R ·
K R,W 1  f w, W ˜ aR,V ˜ lg ¨¨ z ¸¸ ˜ lg ¨ m
© ȝm ¹ ¨ Rm
© ,N,min ¹

(4.3.21)
aR,V constant, Table 4.3.5;
Rz average roughness of the component surface,
in ȝm, in accordance with DIN 4768;
Rm tensile strength, Eqs. (3.2.1), (3.2.2);
Rm,N,min constant, Table 4.3.5;
fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re-
versed shear stress, Table 4.2.1.
Table 4.3.5 Constants aR,V and minimum tensile
strength, Rm,N,min, for the material group considered
Material
Figure 4.3-4: Roughness factor KR,V
Steel GS GJS GJM GJL
group
aR,V 0,22 0,20 0,16 0,12 0,06 Top: steel; bottom: cast iron materials with skin; steel with
rolling skin for comparison.
Rm,N,min
400 400 400 350 100 For surface hardened components and a crack origin at the
in MPa surface, the roughness factor is less favorable (smaller)
than for components which have not been surface hard-
ened, this is due to the higher surface tensile strength Rm,
see also Chapter 4.3.1.3.1.
4.3 Design parameters 93 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

4.3.2 Welded components Case A

4.3.2.0 General This case corresponds with the general wording of the IIW
recommendations and shall be used if the user has no expe-
The following design parameters are relevant for welded rience or no sector-specific experience is available which
components: would justify the application of case B.
FATA, } fatigue class, Chapter 4.3.2.1;
fFAT,V, } factor for conversion from fatigue class to The following applies to sheet metal thickness-
es t d 25 mm:
component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Eq. (4.3.22); ft = 1 (4.3.23)
ft thickness factor, Chapter 4.3.2.2;
The following applies to sheet metal thickness-
KV surface treatment factor, Chapter 4.3.3.
es t ! 25 mm:
n
4.3.2.1 Fatigue class (FAT) and conversion factor § 25 mm ·
ft ¨ ¸
The fatigue classes (FAT) apply to normal stresses perpen- © t ¹ (4.3.24)
dicular and parallel to the weld and to shear stresses in
with n according to Table 4.3.6.
steel, cast iron and aluminum materials, to some extent
derived from the IIW recommendations as well as Euro- Case B
code 3 and Eurocode 9.
The influence of the thickness on the fatigue strength of
The fatigue class in Chapter 5.4 corresponds with the dou- welds, including in the case of sheet metal thicknesses
ble amplitude existing with the reference number of cy-  25 mm, is known; due to insufficient experimental proof,
cles NC. The stress ratio between the reference number of however, it has not yet been generally formulated.
cycles of the fatigue class and the number of cycles at knee If the user has experience or sector-specific experience is
point of the component constant amplitude S-N curve available, e.g. in automotive engineering and railway vehi-
depends on the exponent of the constant amplitude S-N cle manufacturing (technical rules DVS 1608, DVS 1612),
curve and is as follows: the thickness factor according to case B can be used.
1/k ı
§ N · The following applies to sheet metal thickness-
fFAT,ı 0,5 ˜ ¨ C ¸
es t d 10 mm:
¨N ¸
© D,ı ¹
1/k
(4.3.22) ft = 1,1 (4.3.25)
§ NC · W
fFAT,W 0,5 ˜ ¨ ¸
¨N ¸ The following applies to sheet metal thickness-
© D, W ¹ es 10 mm < t d 25 mm:
ND,V, ND,W number of cycles at knee point of the com-
0,1
ponent constant amplitude S-N curve, Ta- § 25 mm ·
ble 4.4.3;
ft ¨ ¸ (4.3.26)
© t ¹
NC reference number of cycles of the fatigue
class, The following applies to sheet metal thickness-
NC = 2 · 106; es t ! 25 mm:
kV, kW exponent of the constant amplitude S-N n
§ 25 mm ·
curve, Table 4.4.3. ft ¨ ¸ (4.3.27)
© t ¹
The following results for the constant amplitude S-N
curves according to Table 4.4.3: with n according to Table 4.3.6.
fFAT,V = 1/2,71 = 0,37
(4.3.22.a)
fFAT,W = 1/4,37 = 0,23

4.3.2.2 Thickness factor

The thickness factor ft accounts for the influence of the
sheet metal thickness on the fatigue strength of the welds,
see Figure 4.3-5. The thickness factor is to be valid for
steel and for aluminum alloys, but not for the assessment
using effective notch stresses.

Figure 4.3-5: Thickness factor ft

4.3 Design parameters 94 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

Table 4.3.6 Exponent n for the thickness factor Thermal methods

Type of the welded joint n Inductive hardening
Cruciform joints, transversely loaded T-joints, Flame-hardening Depth 1,20 – 1,50 1,50 – 2,50
sheets with transverse stiffeners, ends of longi- of case 0,9 to 1,5 mm,
(1,30 – 1,60) (1,60 – 2,80)
surface hardness 51 to
tudinal stiffeners
0,3 64 HRC
- as welded
0,2 Cast iron materials
- toe ground
Nitriding 1,10 (1,15 ) 1,3 (1,9)
Transversely loaded butt joints, as welded 0,2
Case hardening 1,1 (1,2) 1,2 (1,5)
Butt joints ground flush with the sheet, longi-
0,1 Cold rolling 1,1 (1,2) 1,3 (1,5)
tudinally loaded welds or gussets
Shot peening 1,1 (1,1) 1,1 (1,4)
4.3.3 Surface treatment factor Inductive hardening,
1,2 (1,3) 1,5 (1,6)
Flame-hardening
The surface treatment factor KV allows for the influence —1 For component guideline values, including those for additional
of a surface layer on the fatigue strength of the component. methods, see also FVA Worksheet „Schwingfestigkeitssteigerung"
Without a surface treatment, the following applies: ("Increasing the fatigue strength").
—2 The guideline values apply to the component fatigue limit. Values
KV = 1 (4.3.28) applying to the component variable amplitude fatigue strength are usu-
ally lower. The values are valid for specimens of 30 to 40 mm diame-
For components with surface hardening, the surface treat- ter; values in parentheses apply to specimens of 8 to 15 mm diameter.
ment factor depends on whether a crack originates at the —3 For unnotched and slightly notched components.
surface or in the core. Essential factors of influence are the
A simple prelimininary calculation method for estimating
ratio of the fatigue limit values of the surface layer and of
the fatigue limit of surface treated non-welded components
the core as well as the ratio of the local load stress values
made of milled steel is given in Chapter 5.5.
on the surface and in the core (at a distance from the sur-
face which corresponds with the depth of case). 4.3.4 Coating factor
The ranges of the surface treatment factor KV for steel and The coating factor KS accounts for the influence of a sur-
cast iron materials are given in Table 4.3.7. The exact face coating on the fatigue strength of a component made
value shall be specified by the user. of an aluminum material.
Provided the methods of surface treatment are applied to The following applies to steel and cast iron material:
aluminum materials, the KV-values for cast iron materials
KS = 1 (4.3.29)
are to apply approximately.
Table 4.3.7 Surface treatment factor KV, guideline The following applies to aluminum materials without coat-
ing:
values —1—2
Unnotched KS = 1 (4.3.30)
Notched com-
Method components
—3
ponents The following applies to aluminum materials with coating:
Steel KS < 1 (4.3.31)
Chemo-thermal methods
KS for example in accordance with Figure 4.3-6 (guideline
Nitriding
Depth of case 0,1 to values).
1,10 – 1,15 1,30 – 2,00
0,4 mm,
(1,15 – 1,25) (1,90 – 3,00)
surface hardness 700 to
1000 HV 10
Case hardening
Depth of case 0,2 to 1,10 – 1,50 1,20 – 2,00
0,8 mm,
(1,20 – 2,00) (1,50 – 2,50)
surface hardness 670 to
750 HV 10
Carbo-nitriding
Depth of case 0,2 to
0,4 mm, (1,80)
surface hardness 670
HV 10
Mechanical methods
Figure 4.3-6: Influence of a coating based on anodic
1,10 – 1,25 1,30 – 1,80
Cold rolling
(1,20 – 1,40) (1,50 – 2,20)
oxidation on the fatigue limit (at 106 cycles) of a
component made of an aluminum material, as a function of
1,10 – 1,20 1,10 – 1,50
Shot peening the layer thickness (according to Wilson). Guideline
(1,10 – 1,30) (1,40 – 2,50)
values.
4.4 Component strength 95 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

4.3.5 Factor KNL,E 4.4 Component strength

The factor KNL,E accounts for the non-linear elastic stress 4.4.0 General
strain behavior of GJL when loaded in bending. It can be
In accordance with this chapter, the component fatigue
used if the stress state in the vicinity of the assessment site
strength shall be calculated as follows:
is substantially characterized by bending, that is if the
cross-section under consideration comprises both areas of – first the component fatigue limit for completely re-
tension and areas of compression. versed stress taking into consideration the design fac-
tors, Chapter 4.4.1;
The following applies to all material groups except GJL
– then the amplitude of the component fatigue limit de-
KNL,E = 1 (4.3.32)
pending on the the mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2;
For GJL, KNL,E according to Table 4.3.8 applies. – then the amplitude of the component variable ampli-
Table 4.3.8 Factor KNL,E tude fatigue strength depending on the variable ampli-
tude fatigue strength factor, Chapter 4.4.3.
Material GJL GJL GJL GJL GJL GJL
type -100 -150 -200 -250 -300 -350
KNL,E 1,075 1,05 1,025 4.4.1 Component fatigue limit for completely
reversed stress
4.4.1.0 General
In accordance with this chapter, the critical nominal values
of the component fatigue limit for completely reversed
stress shall be calculated taking into consideration the
design factors.

4.4.1.1 Non-welded components

The critical nominal values of the component fatigue limits
for completely reversed axial and completely reversed
shear stresses are as follows
VWK = VW,zd/KWK
(4.4.1)
WWK = WW,s/KWK
VW,zd, WW,s material fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Chapter 4.2.1;
KWK design factor, Chapter 4.3.1.

Equation (2.4.1) shall be calculated separately at the refer-

ence point for each stress component.
Comment: For non-welded components made of austenit-
ic steel or wrought and cast aluminum alloys, the fatique
limit is different from the endurance limit for N = f, Chap-
ter 4.4.3.4.

4.4.1.2 Welded components

The critical nominal values of the component fatigue limit
for completely reversed axial stress perpendicular and
parallel to the weld and for completely reversed shear
stress are as follows:
VWK,A = FATA · fFAT,V · ft · KV · KNL,E
VWK,|| = FAT|| · fFAT,V · ft · KV · KNL,E (4.4.2)
WWK = FATW · fFAT,W · ft · KV
FATA, } fatigue class, Chapter 5.4;
fFAT,V, } factor for conversion from fatigue class to
component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Eq. (4.3.22);
4.4 Component strength 96 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

ft thickness factor, Chapter 4.3.2.2; fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re-
KV surface treatment factor, Chapter 4.3.3, versed shear stress, Table 4.2.1.
KNL,E constant for GJL, Chapter 4.3.5. Table 4.4.1 Constants aM and bM
The normal stress values VWK,A, VWK,|| apply to the num- Material group Steel —1 GS GJS GJM GJL
ber of cycles ND,V = 5 · 106. The shear stress value WWK aM 0,35 0,35 0,35 0,35 0
applies to ND,W = 1 · 108. The characteristic values for bM -0,1 0,05 0,08 0,13 0,5
completely reversed stress of welded components corre-
spond with the fatigue limit at ND and the endurance limit
for N = f. Material group
Wrought alumi- Cast aluminum
num alloys alloys
aM 1,0 1,0
4.4.2 Component fatigue limit as a function bM -0,04 0,2
of the mean stress
—1 including stainless steel.
4.4.2.0 General
For components that have been surface hardened (not
In accordance with this chapter, the amplitude of the com- applicable to cold rolling or shot peening) the mean stress
ponent fatigue limit shall be calculated depending on the sensitivity in the tensile stress field is higher than that of
given mean stress, taking into consideration a multiaxial components which have not been surface hardened; this is
state of stress where appropriate. due to the higher surface tensile strength Rm.
The calculation applies to non-welded and welded compo-
nents, using different input vales in each case.
4.4.2.1.3 Residual stress factor
In the case of a stress spectrum, the stress ratio R refers to
step 1 of the stress spectrum (maximum value), R1. The residual stress factor for non-welded components shall
only be taken into consideration for the purposes of calcu-
The mean stress factor accounts for the influence of the lating the mean stress factor and is as follows:
mean stress on the fatigue strength. Without mean stress KE,V = KE,W = 1 (4.4.6)
the mean stress factor is
KAK = 1 (4.4.3)
4.4.2.2 Welded components
4.4.2.2.1 Amplitude of the component fatigue limit
4.4.2.1 Non-welded components
The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo-
4.4.2.1.1 Amplitude of the component fatigue limit
nent fatigue limit for normal stresses perpendicular and
The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo- parallel to the weld and for shear stress are as follows:
nent fatigue limit for axial and shear stresses are
VAK,A = KAK,A ˜ KE,V ˜ VWK,A
VAK = KAK,V ˜ VWK VAK, || = KAK, || ˜ KE,V ˜ VWK, || (4.4.7)
(4.4.4) WAK = KAK,W ˜ KE,W ˜ WWK
WAK = KAK,W ˜ WWK
KAK,V, KAK,W mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.4; KAK,A, } mean stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.4;
VWK, WWK component fatigue limit for completely re- KE,V, } residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.1.3;
versed stress, Chapter 4.4.1.1. VWK,A, } component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Chapter 4.4.1.2.
4.4.2.1.2 Mean stress sensitivity 4.4.2.2.2 Mean stress sensitivity
The mean stress sensitivity Mı or MW, in combination with For welded components the mean stress sensitivity for
the mean stress factor, describes to what extent the mean normal stress and for shear stress applicable in the case of
stress affects the amplitude of the component fatigue limit, normal or elevated temperatures is dependent on the inten-
Figure 4.4-1. sity of the residual stress, but independent of the material;
values are given in Table 4.4.2.
For non-welded components the mean stress sensitivity for
normal stress and for shear stress applicable in the case of
normal or elevated temperature is 4.4.2.2.3 Residual stress factor

Mı = aM ˜ 103 ˜ Rm/MPa + bM The residual stress factor accounts for the influence of
(4.4.5) residual stresses on the fatigue strength of welded compo-
MW = fW,W ˜ Mı
nents.
aM, bM constants, Table 4.4.1;
4.4 Component strength 97 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

For welded components made of steel and of aluminum, Field II:  v d R d 0. R < 1 is the field of alternating
the residual stress factor is given in Table 4.4.2 for normal compression stress, R = 1 is the completely reversed
stress and shear stress, as a function of the intensity of the stress, R > 1 is the field of alternating tension stress.
residual stress.
Field III: 0 < R < 0,5, field of low fluctuating tension
Table 4.4.2 Residual stress factor KE,ı, KE,W and mean stress. R = 0 is the zero tension stress.
stress sensitivity Mı, MW for welded components
Field IV: R t 0,5, field of high fluctuating tension stress.
Residual Mı KE,W MW —1
KE,ı
stresses
high 1,00 0 1,00 0
moderate 1,26 0,15 1,15 0,09
low 1,54 0,30 1,30 0,17
—1 The following applies to shear stresses:
MW = fW,W · Mı, fW,W = 0,577, Table 4.2.1.

Estimation of residual stresses in accordance with /36/, /37/

High residual stresses shall be assumed in the case of
– complex thick-walled components subject to strong Figure 4.4-1: Diagram for fatigue limit for normal stresses
multiaxial stresses or (Haigh diagram)
– the presence of design-related global residual stresses.
Critical amplitude Vak, mean stress Vm, stress ratio R, com-
Moderate residual stresses shall be assumed in the case of
ponent fatigue limit for completely reversed stress VWK
– narrow girders with longitudinal welds and with trans-
verse welds of less than 300 mm in length; Shear stresses

– transversely stressed welds on components with a sheet For shear stresses, a Haigh diagram which is symmetrical
metal thickness of up to 10 mm; to Wm = 0 and without increasing amplitudes for R < –1 is
valid.
– mainly longitudinally stressed welds on components Field I: not existing for calculation
with a sheet metal thickness of up to 16 mm, provided Field II: 1 d R d 0 (lower boundary changed)
the transverse stress is lower than half the longitudinal Field III: 0 < R < 0,5 (unchanged)
stress (VA < 0,5 · V||); Field IV: R t 0,5 (unchanged).
– all aluminum welded joints to which the criteria for low
residual stresses do not apply.
Low residual stresses (of up to approximately 0,2 · Rp)
shall be assumed in the case of
– welding with subsequent stress-relief heat treatment or
– if residual stress may safely be ruled out.

4.4.2.3 Fatigue limit diagram

Figure 4.4-2: Diagram for fatigue limit for shear stresses
Field of mean stress
(Haigh diagram)
The mean stress factor KAK depends on the mean stress
sensitivity, the field of mean stress and the type of over- Critical amplitude WAK, mean stress Wm, stress ratio R, com-
loading. The field of mean stress is determined by the ponent fatigue limit for completely reversed stress WWK
stress ratio R. Here, four fields of mean stress shall be
distinguished. Mean stress sensitivity

Normal stresses The mean stress sensitivity for normal stresses MV or for
shear stresses MW, is calculated in accordance with Chap-
For normal stresses, a Haigh diagram with increasing
amplitudes applies to the pressure field, see Figure 4.4-1. ter 4.4.2.1.2 (for non-welded components) and in accord-
ance with Chapter 4.4.2.2.2 (for welded components).
Field I: R > 1, field of fluctuating compression stress. R
= + or  v is the zero compression stress.
4.4 Component strength 98 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

4.4.2.4 Mean stress factor Shear stresses

The mean stress factor is calculated in the same manner for The mean stress factor for shear stress shall be calculated
welded and for non-welded components. based on the absolute value of the mean shear stress. This
always results in R t 1.
Type of overloading
The mean stress factor KAK depends on the type of over- Otherwise the mean stress factor for shear stress is calcu-
lated in the same manner as for normal stresses, in accord-
loading, F1 to F4. This shall be specified as a function of ance with Eqs. (4.4.9) to (4.4.12), provided MV is replaced
the stress behavior in the case of a possible load increase in
by MW. Field I is omitted.
service (not by crash), that is in the sense of „safety in
service". The types of overloading are as follows: Calculation for type of overloading F1
– Type F1: the mean stress Vm remains constant; In the case of overloading in service, the mean stress Vm
– Type F2: the stress ratio R remains constant; remains constant.

– Type F3: the minimum stress Vmin remains constant; Normal stresses
Based on the related mean stress
– Type F4: the maximum stress Vmax remains constant.
Vm
Intermediate types of overloading are possible. Depending sm (4.4.13)
K E,ı ˜ V WK
on the type of overloading, the critical amplitude of the
component fatigue limit is different, Figure 4.4-1. Vm mean stress;
KE,V residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.1.3 or
Calculation for type of overloading F2
4.4.2.2.3;
The type of overloading F2 is described first, because it is VWK component fatigue limit for completely re-
of the highest practical importance. In the case of over- versed stress, Chapter 4.4.1,
loading in service, the stress ratio R remains constant. the following applies:
Normal stresses Field I, sm < 1/(1  MV):
Field I, R > 1:
KAK = 1/(1  MV) (4.4.14)
KAK = 1/( 1  Mı) (4.4.8)
Field II, 1/(1  MV) d sm d 1/(1 + MV):
Field II, f d R d 0:
KAK = 1  MV · sm (4.4.15)
1
K AK
1  Mı ˜ ı m /ı a Field III, 1/(1 + MV) < sm < (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2:
(4.4.9)
The notation with Vm/Va avoids numerical problems, if 1  MV / 3 MV
K AK  ˜ sm (4.4.16)
R = –v. 1  MV 3

Vm/Va = (1 + R)/(1 – R) (4.4.10) Field IV, sm t (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2:

3  MV
K AK (4.4.17)
Field III, 0 < R < 0,5: 3 ˜ (1  MV )2
3  MV Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 4.4.2.
K AK (4.4.11)
(1  MV ) ˜ (3  MV ˜ Vm / Va ) Shear stresses
Field IV, R t 0,5: The following applies analogously to Eq. (4.4.13):
3  MV Wm
K AK (4.4.12) tm (4.4.18)
3 ˜ (1  MV )2 K E,W ˜ W WK
R stress ratio;
The mean stress factor for shear stress shall be calculated
Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 4.4.2;
based on the absolute value of the mean shear stress. This
Vm mean stress; always results in a positive value tm t 0.
Va stress amplitude.
Otherwise the mean stress factor for shear stress is calcu-
lated in the same manner as for normal stresses, in accord-
ance with Eqs. (4.4.15) to (4.4.17), provided MV is re-
placed by MW and sm is replaced by tm. Field I is omitted.
4.4 Component strength 99 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

Calculation for type of overloading F3 Calculation for type of overloading F4

In the case of overloading in service, the minimum In the case of overloading in service, the maximum
stress Vmin remains constant. stress Vmax remains constant.

Normal stresses Normal stresses

Based on the related minimum stress Based on the related maximum stress
Vmin ı max
smin (4.4.19) smax (4.4.25)
K E,ı ˜ V WK K E,ı ˜ ı WK
Vmin minimum stress; Vmax maximum stress;
KE,V residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.1.3 or KE,V residual stress factor, Chapter 4.4.2.1.3 or
4.4.2.2.3; 4.4.2.2.3;
VWK component fatigue limit for completely re- VWK component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Chapter 4.4.1, versed stress, Chapter 4.4.1,
the following applies: the following applies:
Field I, smin < 2/(1  MV): Field I, smax < 0:

KAK = 1/(1  MV) (4.4.20) KAK = 1/(1  MV) (4.4.26)

Field II, 2/(1  MV) d smin d 0: Field II, 0 d smax d 2/(1 + MV):

1  MV ˜ smin 1  M V ˜ s max
K AK (4.4.21) K AK (4.4.27)
1  MV 1  MV

Field III, 0 < smin < 2/3 · (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2: Field III, 2/(1 + MV) < smax < 4/3 · (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2:

1 M ˜s 3  MV
K AK  V min (4.4.22)  MV ˜ smax
1  MV 3  MV 1  MV (4.4.28)
K AK
3  MV
Field IV, smin t 2/3 · (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2:
Field IV, smax t 4/3 · (3 + MV)/(1 + MV)2:
3  MV
K AK (4.4.23)
3 ˜ (1  MV )2 3  MV
K AK (4.4.29)
Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 4.4.2. 3 ˜ (1  MV )2
Mı mean stress sensitivity, Chapter 4.4.2.
Shear stresses
The following applies analogously to Eq. (4.4.19): Shear stresses
The following applies analogously to Eq. (4.4.25):
Wmin
t min (4.4.24)
K E, W ˜ W WK Wmax
t max (4.4.30)
K E,IJ ˜ W WK
tmin is calculated in accordance with the sign of the shear
stress tmin. For the calculation of the mean stress factor, the tmax is calculated in accordance with the sign of the shear
following cases shall be distinguished: stress tmax. For the calculation of the mean stress factor,
For tmin t 1 the mean stress factor for shear stress is cal- the following cases shall be distinguished:
culated, in the same manner as for normal stresses, in ac- For tmax t 1 the mean stress factor for shear stress is calcu-
cordance with Eqs. (4.4.21) to (4.4.23), provided MV is lated in the same manner as for normal stresses, in accord-
replaced by MW and smin is replaced by tmin. Field I is omit- ance with Eqs. (4.4.27) to (4.4.29), provided MV is re-
ted. placed by MW and smax is replaced by tmax. Field I is omit-
For tmin  1, tmax = tmin applies and the mean stress ted.
factor for shear stress is calculated, analogously to the type For tmax  1, tmin = tmax applies and the mean stress factor
of overloading F4 and in the same manner as for normal for shear stress is calculated analogously to the type of
stresses, in accordance with Eqs. (4.4.27) to (4.4.29), pro- overloading F3 and in the same manner as for normal
vided MV is replaced by MW and smax is replaced by tmax. stresses, in accordance with Eqs. (4.4.21) to (4.4.23), pro-
Field I is omitted. vided MV is replaced by MW and smin is replaced by tmin.
Field I is omitted.
4.4 Component strength 100 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

4.4.2.5 Individual or equivalent mean stress q constant in accordance with Table 4.6.1;
Vm, Wm individual mean stresses, Eq. (4.4.36).
In each case the quantities R, ımin and ımax are determined
based on the mean stress and the amplitude. The mean The following applies to shear stresses:
stress may be taken either as the individual mean stress
Wm,v = fW,W · Vm,v (4.4.35)
according to the type of stress or as an equivalent mean
stress determined based on the individual mean stresses of fW,W shear strength factor, Table 4.2.1.
all types of stress.
Non-welded components
Non-welded components: For normal and shear stresses,
For non-welded components the equivalent mean stress in
the quantities Vmin, Vmax, Va, Vm as well as Wmin, Wmax, Wm
accordance with Eq. (4.4.33) shall be computed only for
and Wa apply. values Vm,x + Vm,y + Vm,z t 0. The following applies:
Welded components: For normal stresses perpendicular Vm = Vm,x + Vm,y + Vm,z
and parallel to the weld as well as shear stresses, the quan- (4.4.36)
Wm = Wm,yz + Wm,xz + Wm,xy
tities Vmin,A, }, Vmin,||, } or Wmin, }, apply.
Vm,x, } individual mean stresses, Chapter 4.1.
Individual mean stress
As their effects may become added or subtracted, the val-
As a rule, Vmin, Vmax and R shall be determined based on ues Vm,x, Vm,y, Vm,z, Wm,yz, Wm,xz and Wm,xy shall be inserted
the individual mean stress Vm. In that case, the following into Eq. (4.4.36) with the proper signs.
applies:
Welded components
Vmin = Vm  Va
For welded components the equivalent mean stress in ac-
Vmax = Vm + Va (4.4.31) cordance with Eq. (4.4.33) shall be computed only for
R = Vmin/Vmax values Vm,A t 0 and Vm,|| = 0 (or vice versa). The following
ıa stress amplitude; applies:
ımin minimum stress; Vm = Vm,A or Vm = Vm,||
ımax maximum stress; (4.4.37)
Wm = Wm
R stress ratio.
Vm,A, } individual mean stresses, Chapter 4.1.
Equivalent mean stress
Preference of the individual mean stress
In the case of „bending and torsion" which is typical of
numerous applications in machine design, and in similar Should the equivalent mean stress in accordance with
cases of normal and shear stresses, the equivalent variables Eq. (4.4.33) be smaller than the individual mean stress in
Vmin,v, Vmax,v and Rv shall be used with an equivalent the case of an individual stress type, this stress type shall
be calculated using the individual mean stress.
mean stress Vm,v derived from the individual mean stresses
of all stress types, using Eq. (4.4.33). In that case, the
following applies: 4.4.3 Component variable amplitude fatigue
Vmin,v = Vm,v  Va strength
Vmax,v = Vm,v + Va (4.4.32)
4.4.3.0 General
Rv = Vmin,v/Vmax,v
ıa individual stress amplitude; In accordance with this chapter, the amplitude of the com-
Rv equivalent stress ratio; ponent variable amplitude fatigue strength shall be com-
ımin,v equivalent minimum stress; puted as a function of the stress spectrum and the compo-
nent constant amplitude S-N curve, Chapter 4.4.3.4.
ımax,v equivalent maximum stress.
The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor KBK to be
The equivalent mean stress, Eq. (4.4.32), for normal stress
calculated depends on the stress spectrum, that is on the
is as follows:
required total number of cycles (equals the required com-
Vm,v = q ˜ Vm,v,NH + (1 – q) · Vm,v,GH (4.4.33) ponent fatigue life) and on the shape of the spectrum, as
well as on the component constant amplitude S-N curve.
3  (1/ f w, W )
q (4.4.34) The calculation may be performed
3 1
– for a constant amplitude stress spectrum using an as-
1 § 2 2 · sessment of the fatigue limit (or an assessment of the
Vm,v,NH ˜ ¨ V m  Vm  4 ˜ Wm ¸ endurance limit for N = f) or an assessment of the fa-
2 © ¹
tigue strength for finite life or
2 2
Vm,v,GH Vm  3 ˜ Wm – for a variable amplitude stress spectrum using an as-
sessment of the variable amplitude fatigue strength. In
4.4 Component strength 101 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

a simplified manner the assessment of the variable am-

plitude fatigue strength can be performed on the basis
of the damage-equivalent stress amplitude, in which
case it takes the form of an assessment of the fatigue
limit.
The calculation for a constant amplitude stress spectrum is
a special case of the general case of calculation for a varia-
ble amplitude stress spectrum. In each case the calculation
procedure is the same, but the variable amplitude fatigue
strength factors are different.
The calculation algorithm applies to non-welded and weld-
ed components, using different input vales in each case. Figure 4.4-3: Restriction of the critical amplitudes of the
variable amplitude fatigue strength, VBK, displayed in
terms of the Haigh diagram
4.4.3.1 Non-welded components
The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo- Thus, the maximum value of the amplitude of the compo-
nent variable amplitude fatigue strength (highest critical nent variable amplitude fatigue strength, determined sepa-
amplitude in stress spectrum) for normal and shear stresses rately for each stress component at the reference point, is
are for non-welded components
VBK = KBK,V ˜ VAK VBK,max = 0,75 ˜ Rp ˜ np
(4.4.38) (4.4.40)
WBK = KBK,W ˜ WAK WBK,max = 0,75 ˜ fW ˜ Rp ˜ npl
KBK,V, KBK,W variable amplitude fatigue strength factor for
the respective stress component, Chapter and for welded components
4.4.3.5, taking Eq. (4.4.42) into considera- VBK,max,A = 0,75 · Rp · npl · Dw · UWEZ
tion;
VBK,max,|| = 0,75 · Rp · npl · Dw · UWEZ (4.4.41)
VAK, WAK component fatigue limit, Chapter 4.4.2.
WBK,max = 0,75 · Rp · npl · Dw · UWEZ
Eq. (4.4.38) shall be calculated separately at the reference Rp yield strength, Chapter 3.2.1.1;
point for each stress component. fW shear strength factor, Table 3.2.5;
npl, } section factors, Chapter 3.3.1.1;
4.4.3.2 Welded components Dw weld factor, Chapter 3.3.2.2;
UWEZ softening factor, Table 5.1.25.
The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo-
nent variable amplitude fatigue strength (highest critical The following applies to each stress component:
amplitude in stress spectrum) for normal stresses perpen-
dicular and parallel to the weld as well as for shear stress if VBK t VBK,max then
are VBK = VBK,max and (4.4.42)
VBK,A = KBK,A ˜ VAK,A KBK = VBK,max/VAK
VBK, || = KBK, || ˜ VAK,|| (4.4.39) KBK,… variable amplitude fatigue strength factor,
WBK = KBK,W ˜ WAK Chapter 4.4.3.5;
KBK,A, } variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, VBK, } component variable amplitude fatigue
Chapter 4.4.3.5, taking Eq. (4.4.42) into con- strength, Eqs. (4.4.38), (44.4.39);
sideration; VAK, } component fatigue limit, Chapter 4.4.2.
VAK,A, } component fatigue limit, Chapter 4.4.2.

4.4.3.3 Restriction of the maximum amplitude

The critical amplitude of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength VBK is restricted by the static strength VSK as well
as by the component yield strength, Figure 4.4-3.
4.4 Component strength 102 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

For surface hardened components (not applicable to cold

4.4.3.4 Component constant amplitude S-N curve
rolling or shot peening) the slope of the component con-
For numbers of cycles at knee point ND and slope expo- stant amplitude S-N curves is more shallow than for com-
nents k of the component constant amplitude S-N curves ponents which have not been surface hardened. Instead of
for non-welded (without surface hardening) and welded the values kV = 5 and kW = 8, Table 4.4.3, the values kV =
components as well as for normal and shear stresses, see 15 and kW = 25 apply to surface hardened, non-welded
Table 4.4.3, Figure 4.4-4 and Figure 4.4-5. components made of steel and cast iron materials, provided
The value of the component fatigue limit VAK shall be the numbers of cycles at knee point ND,V and ND,W remain
taken from Chapter 4.4.2. In the case of model I constant unchanged.
amplitude S-N curves, fatigue limit and endurance limit for Shear stress
N = f are identical. In the case of model II constant ampli- Component ND,W ND,IIW kW kII,W fII,W
tude S-N curves, fatigue limit and endurance limit for
Steel and cast iron materials (model I S-N curve)
N = f differ by the factor fII, Table 4.4.3. The fatigue limit
is the relevant basis for calculation in all cases.
non-welded 106 - 8 - -
welded 108 - 5 - -
Table 4.4.3 Number of cycles at knee point, slope ex-
Aluminum materials and austenitic steel
ponents and values fII,V, fII,W—1 of the component constant (model II S-N curve)
amplitude S-N curves non-welded 106 108 8 25 0,83
Normal stress welded 108 - 5 - -
Component ND,V ND,IIV kV kII,V fII,V
Steel and cast iron materials (model I S-N curve)
non-welded 106 - 5 - -
welded 5 ˜ 106 - 3 - -
Aluminum materials and austenitic steel
(model II S-N curve)
non-welded 106 108 5 15 0,74
welded 5 ˜ 106 - 3 - -
—1 f , f from N , N
II,V II,W D D,II and kII in accordance with Eq. (4.4.49)

Figure 4.4-5:
Component constant amplitude S-N curves for welded
components

Top: Normal stress V (perpendicular and parallel to the

weld).
Bottom: Shear stress W (shear).
Figure 4.4.-4: Component constant amplitude S-N curves Steel, cast iron materials and aluminum materials (mod-
for non-welded components el I).
NC is the reference number of cycles corresponding to the
Top: Normal stress V. characteristic strength value VAC or WAC (the fatigue class),
Bottom: Shear stress W. see Eq. (4.3.22).
Steel and cast iron materials, except austenitic steel (mod-
el I).
Aluminum materials and austenitic steel (model II).
4.4 Component strength 103 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

4.4.3.5 Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor

4.4.3.5.1 Calculation for a constant amplitude stress 4.4.3.5.2 Calculation for a variable amplitude stress
spectrum spectrum
Model I component constant amplitude S-N curve: In the case of a variable amplitude stress spectrum, the
calculation shall preferably be performed using the con-
Horizontal for N > ND (steel and cast iron material, weld-
sistent version of Miner’s rule or, in a simplified manner,
ed components). using the more conservative elementary version of Miner’s
The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue rule.
strength for finite life:
1
§ N ·k (4.4.43)
KBK = ¨ D ¸ for N < ND
© N ¹
The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue limit
and the endurance limit for N = f:

KBK = 1 for N t ND (4.4.44)

Model II component constant amplitude S-N curve:
Horizontal for N > ND,II sloping for ND < N < ND,II
(aluminum materials and austenitic steel, non-welded)
The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue Figure 4.4-6: Variable amplitude fatigue strength
strength for finite life: factor KBK
1
§ N ·k (4.4.45) Example: elementary version of Miner’s rule,
KBK = ¨ D ¸ for N < ND
© N ¹ Model I component constant amplitude S-N curve, Dm = 1
1
§ N ·k The variable amplitude fatigue strength factor, Figure 4.4-
KBK = ¨ D ¸ II for ND < N < ND,II (4.4.46) 6, for model I and model II constant amplitude S-N curves
© N ¹ is
The following applies to the assessment of the fatigue 1
§ A ˜ ND ˜ Dm · k (4.4.50)
limit: K BK ¨ ¸
© N ¹
KBK = 1 for N = ND (4.4.47)
N required number of cycles;
The following applies to the assessment of the endurance ND number of cycles at knee point of the com-
limit for N = f: ponent constant amplitude S-N curve, Chap-
ter 4.4.3.4;
KBK = fII for N t ND,II (4.4.48) A distance between fatigue life curve and con-
N required number of cycles; stant amplitude S-N curve,
ND number of cycles at knee point of the com- Aele for the elementary version of Miner’s rule,
ponent constant amplitude S-N curve, Chap- Eq. (4.4.55);
ter 4.4.3.4; Akon for the consistent version of Miner’s rule,
k slope exponent of the component constant Eqs. (4.4.58), (4.4.60);
amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chapter k slope exponent of the component constant
4.4.3.4; amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chap-
ND,II number of cycles at second knee point of the ter 4.4.3.4.
component constant amplitude S-N curve, The effective damage sum Dm, Figure 4.4-7, is
only for model II constant amplitude S-N
2
curve, Chapter 4.4.3.4; Dm (4.4.51)
4
kII slope exponent of the component constant A
amplitude S-N curve for ND < N < ND,II, on- as well as
if Dm > 1 then: Dm = 1 and
ly for model II constant amplitude S-N
curve, Chapter 4.4.3.4; if Dm < Dm,min then: Dm = Dm,min
fII factor by which the endurance limit is lower Dm,min lower limit of the effective damage sum in ac-
than the fatigue limit, Chapter 4.4.3.4. cordance with Table 4.4.4.
1
§ ND · kII
fII ¨ ¸ (4.4.49)
¨N ¸
© D,II ¹
4.4 Component strength 104 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

Dm (lg) k slope exponent of the component constant

2 amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chap-
1 ter 4.4.3.4.
Calculation using the elementary version of Miner’s
Dm,min rule
4
1 16 16/Dm,min A (lg) The calculation using the elementary version of Miner’s
rule may be performed directly. For or model I and mod-
Figure 4.4-7: Effective damage sum Dm el II constant amplitude S-N curves, the following applies:
1
Table 4.4.4 Lower limit of the effective damage sum A ele
k
n i §¨ V a,i ·¸
j
(4.4.55)
Dm,min ¦ ˜
¨ V ¸
Steel, GS, Aluminum, not welded 0,3 i 1 N © a,1 ¹
Welded components 0,5 N required number of cycles, N = 6 ni
GJS, GJM, GJL not welded 1,0 (summed up for 1 to j), Chapter 4.1.3;
ni related number of cycles in step i, Chap-
ter 4.1.3;
Comment: The values given in Table 4.4.4 shall be used k slope exponent of the component constant
with caution, as the effective damage sum may be lower in amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chapter
special cases, e.g. with intense mean load variations. 4.4.3.4;
j total number of steps in the spectrum;
Distinction from constant amplitude stress spectrum i running number of the respective step in the
The following applies to model I constant amplitude S-N spectrum;
curves: If a value KBK  1 is calculated using Eq. (4.4.50), Va,i stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum;
then KBK = 1. Va,1 maximum stress amplitude in step 1 of the
spectrum.
The following applies to model II constant amplitude S-N
curves: If a value KBK smaller than KBK calculated using Calculation using the consistent version of Miner’s rule
Eq. (4.4.46) or Eq. (4.4.48) (depending on N ) is obtained The calculation using the consistent version of Miner’s
using Eq. (4.4.50), then KBK calculated using Eq. (4.4.46) rule shall be performed iteratively.
or Eq. (4.4.48) shall be applied. Model I component constant amplitude S-N curve:
Calculation using a damage-equivalent stress amplitude Horizontal for N > ND (Steel and cast iron material, weld-
Alternatively, the calculation may be performed based on ed components)
the damage-equivalent stress amplitude. In that case, the
As an iteration start value, an approximate damage-
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor to be used in
equivalent amplitude
Eqs. (4.4.38) and (4.4.39) is, as a rule:
~
V
KBK,äqu = 1 (4.4.52) äqu Va,1/K BK,ele (4.4.56)

For the assessment of the fatigue strength in accordance shall be calculated in accordance with the elementary ver-
with Chapter 4.6, the damage-equivalent stress amplitude sion of Miner's rule with KBK,ele using Eqs. (4.4.50) and
shall be used instead of the highest amplitude of the stress (4.4.55). Based on the approximate damage-equivalent
spectrum Va,1 amplitude, the following number of cycles results
~ k
Väqu = Va,1/KBK ~ §V äqu ·¸
(4.4.53) N A kon ˜ ND ˜ Dm ˜ ¨ (4.4.57)
¨V ¸
© a,1 ¹
taking into consideration the restriction of KBK in accord-
ance with Eq. (4.4.42). where
k 1
Damage potential ª Z1 j
Z2 º §¨ Va,1 ·¸
The damage potential (not required for further calculation)
A kon «  ¦ »˜
« N1 Ȟ m N2 » ¨© V~äqu ¸¹
¬ ¼
for model I and model II constant amplitude S-N curves is k 1 k 1
~
§V · § Va,m ·
1 Z1 ¨
äqu ¸ ¨ ¸ (4.4.58)
v (4.4.54) ¨V ¸ ¨V ¸
k
A © a,1 ¹ © a,1 ¹
A Aele or Akon, Eq. (4.4.55), Eq. (4.4.58) or k 1 k 1
§ Va,Ȟ · §V ·
Eq. (4.4.60), respectively; Z2 ¨ ¸  ¨ a,Ȟ 1 ¸
¨V ¸ ¨ V ¸
© a,1 ¹ © a,1 ¹
4.5 Safety factors 105 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

m 1 k and
ni §¨ Va,i ·¸
N1 ¦ N
˜
¨V ¸ ~
§ fII ˜ V ·
k 1
§ V a,p ·
k 1
© a,1 ¹ ¨ ¸ ¨ ¸
i 1 äqu
Z3
Ȟ k ¨ V ¸ ¨V ¸
ni §¨ Va,i ·¸ © a,1 ¹ © a,1 ¹
N2 ¦ ˜
N ¨© Va,1 ¸¹ k 1 k 1
i 1 § Va,Q · §V ·
ND number of cycles at knee point of the com- Z4 ¨ ¸  ¨ a,Q 1 ¸
¨V ¸ ¨ V ¸
ponent constant amplitude S-N curve, Chap- © a,1 ¹ © a,1 ¹
ter 4.4.3.4; ~
The following applies to Va,1 t V äqu :
k slope exponent of the component constant
amplitude S-N curve for N < ND, Chap- k k II  k p 1 k II
m 1 §V · §V · §V ·
¦ ¦
ni ni
ter 4.4.3.4; N3 ˜ ¨ a,i ¸  ¨ ~ a,1 ¸ ˜ ˜ ¨ a,i ¸
Dm effective damage sum, Eq. (4.4.51); N ¨V ¸ ¨ V äqu ¸ N ¨V ¸
i 1 © a,1 ¹ © ¹ i m © a,1 ¹
N required number of cycles, N = 6 ni k II  k
rȞ k p 1 k II
§V · § f ˜V · §V ·
¦ ¦
(summed up for 1 to j), Chapter 4.1.3; ni ni
N4 ˜ ¨ a,i ¸  ¨ II a,1 ¸ ˜ ˜ ¨ a,i ¸
ni related number of cycles in step i, Chap- N ¨V ¸ ¨ V ¸ N ¨V ¸
i 1 © a,1 ¹ © a,Q ¹ i rQ 1 © a,1 ¹
ter 4.1.3;
Va,i stress amplitude in step i of the spectrum;
~
The following applies to V ~
Va,1 maximum stress amplitude in step 1 of the äqu > Va,1 t fII ˜ Väqu :
spectrum;
p 1 k II
~
V ni §¨ Va,i ·¸
¦
approximate damage-equivalent amplitude;
äqu
N3 ˜
j total number of steps in the spectrum; i m 1
N ¨© Va,1 ¸¹
i running number of the respective step in the
spectrum; ~ k II  k rQ k
§V · §V ·
¦
¨ äqu ¸ ni
m number of the first step in the spectrum be- N4 ˜ ˜ ¨ a,i ¸
~ ¨V ¸ N ¨V ¸
low V äqu , to be specified for each iteration © a,1 ¹ i 1 © a,1 ¹
~ k II  k Ȟ k II
step. § fII ˜ V äqu ·¸ §V ·
¦
ni
¨ ˜ ˜ ¨ a,i ¸
For the summation of the term Z2, it shall be observed that ¨ V ¸ N ¨V ¸
© a,Q ¹ i rQ 1 © a,1 ¹
~ ~
Va,j+1 = 0. If V äqu > Va,1, then N = v applies in
in addition to the designations for Eq. (2.4.57):
Eq. (4.4.57). ND,II number of cycles at second knee point of the
The computation in accordance with Eq. (4.4.57) shall be component constant amplitude S-N curve,
~
repeated iteratively for differing values of V only for model II constant amplitude S-N
äqu , until a
~ curves, Chapter 4.4.3.4;
value N is obtained which corresponds with the required kII slope exponent of the component constant
number of cycles N . Based on the obtained value of Akon amplitude S-N curve for ND < N < ND,II, on-
the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor shall be cal- ly for model II constant amplitude S-N
culated using Eq. (4.4.50). curves, Chapter 4.4.3.4;
fII factor by which the endurance limit is lower
Model II component constant amplitude S-N curve:
than the fatigue limit, Table 4.4.3;
Horizontal for N > ND,II, sloping for ND < N < ND,II p ~
first step in the spectrum below fII · V äqu ;
(aluminum materials and austenitic steel, non-welded) rQ number of the last step in the spectrum to
As an iteration start value, an approximate damage- which the following applies:
equivalent amplitude in accordance with the elementary Va,i t Va,Q/fII for i = 1}j.
version of Miner's rule shall be calculated using
Eq. (4.4.56). Based on the approximate damage-equivalent The summation limits m, p and rQ shall be specified for
amplitude, the following number of cycles results each iteration step.
~ ~
~ §V~ ·
kx
If fII ˜ V äqu > Va,1, then N = f applies to Eq. (4.4.59).
ND ˜ A kon ˜ Dm ˜ ¨ ¸
äqu
N (4.4.59)
¨V ¸
© a,1 ¹ The computation in accordance with Eq. (4.4.59) shall be
repeated iteratively for differing values of V~
~
with kX = k for V ~ äqu , until a
äqu < Va,1 and kX = kII for Väqu t Va,1.
~
value N is obtained which corresponds with the required
ª Z3 k 1
Z4 º» §¨ Va,1 ·¸
j total number of cycles N . From the obtained value of
A kon «  ¦ ˜
« N3 Q p N4 » ¨© fII ˜ V
~ ¸
äqu ¹
(4.4.60) Akon the variable amplitude fatigue strength factor shall be
¬ ¼ calculated using Eq. (4.4.50).
4.5 Safety factors 106 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

components, such as in the aircraft industry, does not, thus far, seem
4.5 Safety factors possible.

4.5.0 General
4.5.2 Welded components
The safety factors are valid on the condition that the char-
acteristic strength values exhibit an average probability of The material safety factor for the fatigue strength depends
survival of PÜ = 97,5 %. on the possibilities of inspection and the consequences of
failure, see Table 4.5.3.
Provided that reliable design loads are used, the following
load safety factor applies: Table 4.5.3 Material safety factors jF for welded com-
ponents
jS = 1,0 (4.5.1)
Consequences of failure— 1
jF
For comments on the load safety factor, see Chapter 5.7. severe mean moderate
Regular inspec- no 1,4 1,25 1,15
tions —2 yes 1,2 1,1 1,0
4.5.1 Non-welded components
—1 Severe consequences of failure: loss of human life.
4.5.1.1 Steel and wrought aluminum alloys Mean consequences of failure: loss of the entire structure, reduction by
about 10 %.
The material safety factor for the fatigue strength depends Moderate consequences of failure: loss of secondary components;
on the possibilities of inspection and the consequences of possibilities for load redistribution in statically indeterminate system,
reduction by about 20 %.
failure, see Table 4.5.1. —2 Regular inspection in the sense of monitoring for early detection of
Table 4.5.1 Material safety factors jF for non-welded damage: reduction by about 15 %.
steel and for wrought aluminum alloys
Consequences of failure —1 4.5.3 Total safety factor
jF
severe mean moderate The total safety factor for the assessment of the fatigue
Regular inspec- no 1,5 1,4 1,3 strength jD is
tions —2 yes 1,35 1,25 1,2
jF
—1 Severe consequences of failure: loss of human life. jD jS ˜ (4.5.2)
Mean consequences of failure: loss of the entire structure, reduction by
K T,D
about 7,5 %.
Moderate consequences of failure: loss of secondary components; For cast components in accordance with Chapter 4.5.1.2,
possibilities for load redistribution in statically indeterminate system, the following shall be used instead of Eq. (4.5.2).
reduction by about 15 %.
—2 Regular inspection in the sense of monitoring for early detection of j ˜j
damage: reduction by about 10 %. jD jS ˜ F G (4.5.3)
K T,D
jS load safety factor, Chapter 4.5.0;
4.5.1.2 Cast iron and cast aluminum materials
jF material safety factor, Tables. 4.5.1 and
The material safety factor for the fatigue strength jF of cast 4.5.3;
iron and cast aluminum materials shall be specified based jG cast factor, Table 4.5.2;
on Table 4.5.1. Kt,D temperatur factor, Chapter 4.2.3.
Due to inevitable but allowable defects in castings, the
safety factors shall be increased by a partial safety factor
(casting factor) jG in accordance with Table 4.5.2.

Table 4.5.2 Casting factors jG

jG
Castings not subject to non-destructive
1,4
testing
Castings subject to non-destructive testing
—1
1,25

High quality cast components —2 1,0

—1 It is assumed that testing ensures a verifiably higher quality of the
cast components.
—2 High quality cast components meet special requirements for qualifi-
cation and monitoring of the production process as well as for the ex-
tent and quality of product testing in order to ensure uniform compo-
nent properties with little scatter.
In mechanical engineering, cast components are of a standard quality for
which a further reduction of the casting factor for high quality cast
4.6 Assessment 107 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

4.6 Assessment Eq. (4.6.5) has the character of a strength hypothesis in the
case of proportional stresses only. In general, Eq. (4.6.5)
4.6.0 General has the character of an empirical interaction equation. It
can be applied to proportional stresses and—by way of
The assessment of the fatigue strength using local stresses
approximation—to synchronous stresses.
shall be carried out in accordance with Chapter 4.6.1 for
each individual stress component. For non-proportional stresses, proceed as described in
Chapter 4.6.2.2.
The assessment of the fatigue strength using local stresses
shall be carried out in accordance with Chapter 4.6.2 for
the combined stress.
4.6.1 Individual stress types
The calculation applies to both non-welded and welded
components. The cyclic degrees of utilization of non-welded compo-
nents for normal and shear stresses shall be calculated for
Degree of utilization all stress components.
The assessment shall be carried out based on the cyclic ı a,1
degree of utilization. The cyclic degree of utilization is the aBK,ı d1
ı BK /jD
quotient of
(4.6.3)
– the existing stress amplitude Va,1 and Wa,1
aBK,W d1
WBK /jD
– the allowable amplitude of the component variable
amplitude fatigue strength at the reference point.
The allowable amplitude of the component variable ampli- In the case of welded components with normal stresses
tude fatigue strength is the quotient of perpendicular and parallel to the weld as well as shear
stresses, the following applies:
– the critical amplitude of the component variable ampli-
tude fatigue strength VBK and Va,A,1
aBK,A d1
– the required total safety factor jD. VBK,A /jD

Existing and critical amplitudes as well as the cyclic de- Va,||,1

gree of utilization are always positive. aBK,|| d1 (4.6.4)
VBK,||/jD
A differentiation shall be made between the assessments of
W a,1
– the variable amplitude fatigue strength; aBK,W d1
WBK,W /jD
– the fatigue strength for finite life; Va,1, } highest stress amplitude, depending on the
– the fatigue limit or type of stress, Chapter 4.1 or 4.6.0;
VBK, } related component variable amplitude fa-
– the endurance limit for N = f.
tigue strength (highest critical stress ampli-
In each case the calculation procedure is the same, provid- tude), Chapter 4.4.3;
ed the appropriate variable amplitude fatigue strength jD total safety factor, Chapter 4.5.3.
factors KBK are chosen in accordance with Chapter 4.4.3
and the following is applied in the calculation:
– in the case of a constant amplitude spectrum:
Va,1 = Va (4.6.1)

– and in the case of a damage-equivalent stress ampli-

tude:
Va,1 = Väqu (4.6.2)
Va existing constant stress amplitude for the
required number of cycles;
Väqu damage-equivalent stress amplitude for ND
cycles.
Superposition
If different stress components act in combination at the
reference point, the superposition shall be performed as
described below by computing a degree of utilization for
the combined stress.
4.6 Assessment 108 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using local
stresses

Table 4.6.1 Values for q as a function of fW,W

4.6.2 Combined types of stress
Steel, wrought GJM,
4.6.2.1 Proportional or synchronous stresses aluminum GJS cast alumi- GJL
The applied strength hypothesis for combined stress types alloys num alloys
consists of two proportions in accordance with the normal fW,W 0,577 0,65 0,75 1,0
stress hypothesis and the von Mises criterion. q 0 0,264 0,544 1,0
Both proportions are controlled by constant q or by fW,W in
accordance with Eq. (4.6.12), depending on the ductility of
the material. Special cases

For steel and wrought aluminum alloys q = 0 applies, with The following applies to non-ductile wrought aluminum
the result that only the von Mises criterion is valid. For alloys (elongation at break A < 6 %):
cast components, q z 0 applies, with the result that both the q = 0,5
von Mises criterion and the normal stress hypothesis are
valid in certain proportions. The following applies to surface hardened components
(except for mechanical surface treatment):
The cyclic degree of utilization of non-welded components
for combined stress types is: q=1

aBK,Vv = q · aNH + (1  q) · aGH d 1 The following applies to welded components:

(4.6.5)
1 ˜§ s  sa,||  sa,A  sa,|| 2 ·
 4 ˜ t a2 ¸
The following applies to spatial stress states: aBK,ıv ¨
2 © a, A ¹ d1
aNH MAX sa,1 , sa,2 , sa,3 (4.6.6)
(4.6.13)

aGH
1
2
>
sa,1  sa,2 2  sa,2  sa,3 2  sa,3  sa,1 2 @ with
sa,A = aBK,A
(4.6.7) sa,|| = aBK,|| (4.6.14)
ta = aBK,W
with
aBK,A, } cyclic degree of utilization, Eq. (4.6.4).
sa,1 = aBK,V1
sa,2 = aBK,V2 (4.6.8) Rules of signs
sa,3 = aBK,V3
aBK,V1, } cyclic degree of utilization, Eq. (4.6.3). The cyclic degrees of utilization aBK,Vi, } in Eq. (4.6.8),
The following applies to plane stress states: aBK,Wi, } in Eq. (4.6.11) or aBK,A and aBK,|| in Eq.
(4.6.14), shall always be inserted using the sign of the
1§ 2 ·
aNH ¨ sa, x  sa, y  sa, x  sa, y  4 ˜ t a2 ¸ amplitudes of the individual stress types at the reference
2© ¹ point.
(4.6.9) If the amplitudes always act proportionally or synchro-
nously out of phase, the addition results in a higher total
a GH s a,2 x  s a,2 y  s a, x ˜ s a, y  t a2 utilization. If the amplitudes act proportionally or synchro-
nously in phase, stress components may cancel each other
(4.6.10) in part or completely as a result of the subtraction.
with
sa,x = aBK,Vx 4.6.2.2 Non-proportional stresses
sa,y = aBK,Vy (4.6.11)
The evaluation of non-proprtional stresses is partly still the
ta = aBK,W
subject of research. A differentiation is to be made be-
aBK,Vx, } cyclic degree of utilization, Eq. (4.6.3). tween the effects of maximum amplitudes occurring

The following applies to q, see Table 4.6.1; – simultaneously

– time-delayed and
3  (1/ fw,W )
q (4.6.12)
3 1 – uncorrelated in terms of time.
fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re- A necessary reservation with respect to this procedure is
versed shear stress, Table 4.2.1. that in every case of application both the loading situation
has to be thoroughly analyzed and the final result critically
evaluated. In cases of doubt, an experimental assessment
of the fatigue strength shall be carried out.
4.6 Assessment 109 4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses

Simultaneous occurrence of maximum amplitudes load I

If it is to be expected that maximum amplitudes will simul- load II, etc.
taneously occur on a regular basis due to the attacking
For each of the loads I, II, }, the characteristic stress spec-
loads, the addition of the partial spectra of all load propor-
trum values shall be calculated in accordance with Chap-
tions shall be performed in the direction of the stress, Fig-
ter 4.1. From the individual spectra, the design spectrum
ure 4.6-1.
shall be calculated by adding the number of load cycles. To
Va do so, the further calculations given in Chapter 4 shall be
(lg) performed. The result of the calculations is the degree of
Va,1,ges utilization in accordance with Eq. (4.6.5).
Occurrence of maximum amplitudes uncorrelated in
Va,1,I
Va,1,II terms of time
Due to the lack of a better method, the procedure used for
proportional or synchronous stresses given in Chap-
NI NII N (lg) ter 4.6.2.1 may be used in the general case of an occur-
rence of maximum amplitudes uncorrelated in terms of
time.
Figure 4.6-1: Addition in the direction of the stress
This procedure should only be used if there is/are confirm-
The loads acting on the component which are changing ative experience or experimental results for the same or
non-proportionally with regard to time, shall be determined similar case(s) of application.
as
In the case of a lack of confirmative previous knowledge,
load I the conservative procedure for the "simultaneous occur-
rence of maximum amplitudes" shall be used.
load II, etc.
Procedure in the case of rotating main axes
For each of the loads I, II, }, the characteristic stress spec-
trum values shall be calculated in accordance with Chap- In general, non-proportional stresses have a main axis
ter 4.1 and the further calculations shall be performed in system that changes with time.
accordance with Chapter 4. The results of these calcula-
In this case, the assessment of the fatigue strength in ac-
tions are the degrees of utilization for each of the loads I,
cordance with Chapter 4 can be performed successively at
II, }, in accordance with Eq. (4.6.5).
the reference point for various rotation angles of the coor-
aBK,Vv,I, dinate system.
aBK,Vv,II , u.s.w. The calculated degrees of utilization may vary, depending
The degrees of utilization calculated for each of the loads on the rotation angle of the coordinate system.
shall be added to become the total degree of utilization: When applying the "method of the critical section plane",
aBK,Vv,ges = aBK,Vv,I + aBK,Vv,II + } (4.6.15) the highest calculated degree of utilization of all these
degrees of utilization is used for the assessment of the
fatigue strength. This procedure may be regarded as con-
Time-delayed occurrence of maximum amplitudes servative.

If the time-delayed occurrence of the maximum amplitudes

can be expected due to the attacking loads, the addition of
the partial spectra of all load proportions shall be per-
formed in the direction of the load cycle, Figure 4.6-2.

Va
(lg)
Va,1,I
Va,1,II

NI NII Nges N (lg)

Figure 4.6-2: Addition in the direction of the load cycle

The loads acting on the component which are changing

non-proportionally with regard to time, shall be determined
as
5.1 Material tables 110 5 Annexes

5 Annexes Material fatigue limit for completely reversed shear stress

WW,s = fW,W · VW,zd (2.2.1) (5.1.2)
5.1 Material tables fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely re-
5.1.0 General versed shear stress, Tab. 2.2.1.

No responsibility can be taken for the strength values given Material fatigue strength for completely reversed bending
in the material tables, see page 3 „Terms of liability". The stress
applicable valid standards are relevant. The strength values VW,b = nV (d0) · VW,zd (5.1.3)
given in the material tables should not be used for selecting
the material in design, as this would require that the entire-
ty of all material properties be taken into consideration.
nV Kt-Kf ratio in accordance with Eq. (2.3.7), with d0 =
The material types (e.g. St 37-2) are sorted in terms of 7,5 mm.
material groups (e.g. unalloyed structural steel).
Eq. (5.1.3) for bending and, analogously, Eq. (5.1.4) for
In compliance with the material standards, the material torsion result from a combination of the following equa-
tables contain tions:
– standard values Rm,N, } applicable to the smallest – Eq. (2.4.1) VW,b, understood as a component value
semi-finished product (in the case of steel) or to the test SWK,b
piece (in the case of cast iron and cast aluminum mate-
rials), or – Eq. (2.3.1) KWK,b = Kf,b

– component values Rm = Rm,N, } applicable to the – Eq. (2.3.2) Kt,b = 1; nV(r) = 1; K f,b = 1/nV(d)
given semi-finished product (in the case of wrought – Eq. (2.3.7) nV(d) with d = d0 = 7,5 mm for each materi-
aluminum alloys).
al in question
Standard values, component values and standard compo-
nent values shall be distinguished as explained in Chapters – Eq. (2.3.16) GV (d0) = 2/d0 = 0,267 mm1
1.2, 2.2, 3.2, 4.2.
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed torsional
Rm,N or Rm, is the minimum value, the guaranteed value or stress
the lower limit of the range specified for the tensile WW,t = nW(d0) ˜ WW,s (5.1.4)
strength. Rp,N or Rp, (Rp for the yield stress Re or the 0,2
proof stress Rp0,2) is the minimum value or the guaranteed nW Kt-Kf ratio in accordance with Eq. (2.3.7), with d0 =
value of the yield strength. For the values Rm,N, Rp,N, Rm, 7,5 mm.
Rp, an average probability of survival PÜ = 97,5 % is as- Material fatigue strength for zero-tension axial stress (am-
sumed. This is also to apply to the further values plitude)
VW,zd,N, }, VW,zd, }
VSch,zd = VW,zd/(1 + MV) (5.1.5)
The characteristic values of the fatigue limit for completely MV mean stress sensitivity in accordance with
reversed stress and for zero-tension loading, VW,zd,N, Eq. (2.4.5).
VSch,zd,N, } are intended for information only and are not
Eq. (5.1.5) follows from Eq. (2.3.2) with Rzd = 0 or
required for the calculation because they can be computed Sm,zd/Sa,zd = 1.
as described below.
All of the following equations are supposed to be valid for Units
a material test specimen of the diameter d0 = 7,5 mm, All strength values given in this Chapter have the unit
independent of the real dimension of the semi-finished megapascal (MPa), corresponding with Newtons per
product or of the raw casting (index N omitted, VW,zd in- square millimeter (N/mm2).
stead of VW,zd,N, etc.).

The values VW,zd, } in accordance with Eqs. (5.1.1) to

(5.1.5) are valid for the number of cycles N = ND,V = ND,W
= 106.
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed axial stress
VW,zd = fW,V · Rm (2.2.1) (5.1.1)
fW,V fatigue strength factor for completely re-
versed normal stress, Table 2.2.1.
5.1 Material tables 111 5 Annexes

From these and in accordance with Chapter 1.2.1 or 3.2.1,

5.1.1 Material tables for steel and cast iron the standard component values Rm, } shall be computed
materials under observation of the technological size factor and
Tables 5.1.1 to 5.1.14 contain standard values Rm,N, } for depending on the diameter of the semi-finished product or
the following material groups: milled steel (non-alloyed the width of the raw casting.
structural steel, weldable fine grain structural steel, heat The values VW,zd,N, } correspond with the fatigue limit.
treatable steel, case hardening steel, nitriding steel and Except for austenitic steels, this is also the endurance limit
stainless steel), forging steel and cast iron materials (cast for N = f, see Chapter 2.4.3 or 4.4.3.
steel, heat treatable cast steel, nodular cast iron (GJS),
malleable cast iron (GJM) and cast iron with lamellar
graphite (GJL)).
Table 5.1.2 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, and elongation at break A, in %, for non-alloyed structural steel in
accordance with DIN EN 10025-2 (April 2005) —1
Type Material No. Rm,N Re,N A VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N
—2
S185 1.0035 310 185 10 140 138 155 80 90
S235JR 1.0038 360 235 17 160 158 180 95 105
S235J0 1.0114
S235J2 1.0117
S275JR 1.0044 430 275 15 195 185 215 110 125
S275J0 1.0143
S275J2G 1.0145
S355JR 1.0045 510 355 14 230 215 255 130 150
S355J0 1.0553
S355J2 1.0577
S355K2 1.0596
S450J0 1.0590 550 450 – 250 225 275 145 160
E295 1.0050 490 295 12 220 205 245 125 145
E335 1.0060 590 335 8 265 240 290 155 170
E360 1.0070 690 360 4 310 270 340 180 200
—1 Equivalent diameter deff,N = 40 mm.
—2 Re,N/Rm,N  0,75 for all types of material.

Table 5.1.3 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, and elongation at break A, in %, for weldable fine grain structural
steel in the normalized condition in accordance with DIN EN 10025-3 (Feb. 2005) and DIN EN 10025-4 (April 2004) —1
Type Material No. Rm,N Re,N A VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N W W,t,N ad,m —3 ad,p
—2 —3
S 275 N 1.0490 370 275 24 165 160 185 95 110 0,30 0,30
S 275 NL 1.0491
S 355 N 1.0545 470 355 22 210 200 235 120 140 0,25 0,28
S 355 NL 1.0546
S 420 N 1.8902 520 420 19 235 215 260 135 150 0,23 0,30
S 420 NL 1.8912
S 460 N 1.8901 550 460 17 245 225 275 140 160 0,00 0,22
S 460 NL 1.8903
S 275 M 1.8818 360 275 24 160 158 180 95 105 0,30 0,30
S 275 ML 1.8819
S 355 M 1.8823 450 355 22 205 190 225 115 130 0,25 0,28
S 355 ML 1.8834
S 420 M 1.8825 500 420 19 225 210 250 130 145 0,23 0,30
S 420 ML 1.8836
S 460 M 1.8827 530 460 17 240 220 265 140 155 0,00 0,22
S 460 ML 1.8838
—1 Equivalent diameter for tensile strength deff,N = 100 mm, for yield stress deff,N = 30 mm.
—2 Re,N / Rm,N  0,75 up to and including S 275; Re,N / Rm,N ! 0,75 from S 355 onwards.
—3 More specific values for the individual types of material instead of merely the values for the material groups given in Table 1.2.1 or Table 3.2.1.
5.1 Material tables 112 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.4 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, and elongation at break A, in %, for heat treatable steel in the
quenched and tempered condition in accordance with DIN EN 10083-2 (December 2006) and DIN EN 10083-3 (January
2007) —1
Type, Designa- Material Rm,N Re,N A VW,zd,N VSch,zd, VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N ad,m ad,p
tion No. —2 N —3 —3
C22E 1.1151 500 340 20 225 210 250 130 145 0,19 0,43
C22R 1.1149
C35E 1.1181
C35R 1.1180 630 430 17 285 255 310 165 185 0,20 0,39
C35 1.0501
C40E 1.1186
C40R 1.1189 650 460 16 295 260 320 170 190 0,12 0,36
C40 1.0511
C45E 1.1191
C45R 1.1201 700 490 14 315 275 345 180 205 0,16 0,36
C45 1.0503
C50E 1.1206
750 520 13 340 290 365 195 215 0,21 0,35
C50R 1.1241
C55E 1.1203
C55R 1.1209 800 550 12 360 305 390 210 230 0,19 0,35
C55 1.0535
C60E 1.1221
C60R 1.1223 850 580 11 385 320 415 220 245 0,18 0,34
C60 1.0601
28Mn6 1.1170 800 590 13 360 305 390 210 230 0,30 0,38
38Cr2 1.7003 800 550 14 360 305 390 210 230 0,37 0,52
46Cr2 1.7006 900 650 12 405 335 435 235 260 0,41 0,54
34Cr4 1.7033 900 700 12 405 335 435 235 260 0,33 0,49
34CrS4 —4 1.7037
37Cr4 1.7034 950 750 11 430 345 460 245 270 0,32 0,46
37CrS4 —4 1.7038
41Cr4 1.7035 1000 800 11 450 360 480 260 285 0,30 0,44
41CrS4 —4 1.7039
25CrMo4 1.7218 900 700 12 405 335 435 235 260 0,33 0,49
25CrMoS4 —4 1.7213
34CrMo4 1.7220 1000 800 11 450 360 480 260 285 0,30 0,44
34CrMoS4 —4 1.7226
42CrMo4 1.7225 1100 900 10 495 385 525 285 315 0,32 0,43
42CrMoS4 —4 1.7227
50CrMo4 1.7228 1100 900 9 495 385 525 285 315 0,28 0,38
34CrNiMo6 1.6582 1200 1000 9 540 410 570 310 340 0,33 0,39
30CrNiMo8 —1 1.6580 1250 1050 9 565 420 595 325 355 0,36 0,42
35NiCr6 1.5815 880 740 12 395 330 430 230 250 0,18 0,23
36NiCrMo16 —1 1.6773 1250 1050 9 565 420 595 325 350 0,28 0,32
39NiCrMo3 1.6510 980 785 11 440 355 470 255 280 0,25 0,31
30NiCrMo16-6 1.6747 1080 880 10 485 380 520 280 310 0,37 0,42
51CrV4 1.8159 1100 900 9 495 385 525 285 315 0,28 0,33
—1 Equivalent diameter deff,N = 40 mm for 30CrNiMo8 and 36NiCrM16, deff,N = 100 mm for 30NiCrMo 16-6, for all others deff,N = 16 mm.
—2 Re,N / Rm,N  0,75 up to and including 46 Cr 2, 46 CrS 2; Re,N / Rm,N ! 0,75 from 34 Cr 4, 34 CrS 4 onwards.
—3 More specific values for the individual types of material instead of merely the values for the material groups given in Table 1.2.1 or Table 3.2.1.
—4 To be used with caution for fatigue-stressed components, as the addition of sulphur causes a decrease in the corrosion resistance.
5.1 Material tables 113 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.5 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, and elongation at break A, in %, for heat treatable steel in the normal-
ized condition in accordance with DIN EN 10083-2 (December 2006) —1
Type, Designati- Material Rm,N Re,N A VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N ad,m ad,p
on No. —2 —3 —3
C22E 1.1151 430 240 24 195 185 215 110 125 0,08 0,19
C22R 1.1149
C35E 1.1181
C35R 1.1180 550 300 18 250 225 275 145 160 0,10 0,19
C35 1.0501
C40E 1.1186
C40R 1.1189 580 320 16 260 235 285 150 170 0,09 0,19
C40 1.0511
C45E 1.1191
C45R 1.1201 620 340 14 280 250 305 160 180 0,10 0,20
C45 1.0503
C50E 1.1206
650 355 13 295 260 320 170 190 0,10 0,19
C50R 1.1241
C55E 1.1203
C55R 1.1209 680 370 11 305 270 335 175 195 0,09 0,20
C55 1.0535
C60E 1.1221
C60R 1.1223 710 380 10 320 280 350 185 205 0,09 0,19
C60 1.0601
28Mn6 1.1170 630 345 17 285 250 310 165 185 0,07 0,17
—1 Equivalent diameter deff,N = 16 mm.
—2 Re,N / Rm,N  0,75 for all types of material.
—3 More specific values for the individual types of material instead of merely the values for the material groups given in Table 1.2.1 or Table 3.2.1.
5.1 Material tables 114 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.6 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, and elongation at break A, in %, for case hardening steel in the blank
hardened condition —1 in accordance with DIN EN 10084 (June 2008) (selection) —2
Type —3 Material No. Rm,N Re,N A VW,zd, VSch,zd, VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N ad,m —7
—4 —5 —6 N N ad,p
C10E 1.1121 500 310 16 200 185 220 115 130 0,56
C15E 1.1141 800 545 14 320 270 345 185 205 0,68
C16E 1.1148 800 545 320 270 345 185 205 0,68
17Cr3 1.7016 800 545 11 320 270 345 185 205 0,37
28Cr4 * 1.7030 900 620 360 295 385 210 230 0,33
16MnCr5 * 1.7131 1000 695 10 400 320 430 230 255 0,44
20MnCr5 * 1.7147 1200 850 8 480 365 510 280 305 0,48
18CrMo4 * 1.7243 1100 775 440 340 470 255 280 0,52
18CrMoS4 * —8 1.7244 1100 775 440 340 470 255 280 0,52
22CrMoS3-5 * —8 1.7333 1100 775 8 440 340 470 255 280 0,28
20MoCr3 1.7320 900 620 360 295 385 210 230 0,33
20MoCr4 1.7321 900 620 10 360 295 385 210 230 0,33
16NiCr4 1.5714 1000 695 400 320 430 230 255 0,30
10NiCr5-4 * 1.5805 900 620 360 295 385 210 230 0,61
18NiCr5-4 * 1.5810 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
17CrNi6-6 * 1.5918 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
15NiCr13 * 1.5752 1000 695 400 320 430 230 255 0,30
20NiCrMo2-2 * 1.6523 1100 775 10 440 340 470 255 280 0,52
17NiCrMo6-4 * 1.6566 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
20NiCrMoS6-4 *—8 1.6571 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
18CrNiMo7-6 * 1.6587 1200 850 8 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
14NiCrMo13-4 * 1.6657 1200 850 480 365 510 280 305 0,37
—1 Values according to DIN EN 10084, Annex F ("tensile strength … after hardening and tempering at 200 °C") given for information only.
—2 Equivalent diameter deff,N = 16 mm.
—3 Only for diameters of up to 40 mm; for types marked with * up to 100 mm diameter, however.
—4 Re,N in accordance with DIN 17210 (October 1984 draft), adjusted.
—5 Re,N / Rm,N  0,75 for all types of material.
—6 A in accordance with DIN 17210 (October 1984 draft), if provided.
—7 More specific values for the individual types of material instead of merely the values for the material groups given in Table 1.2.1 or Table 3.2.1.
—8 To be used with caution for fatigue-stressed components, as the addition of sulphur causes a decrease in the corrosion resistance.

Table 5.1.7 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for nitriding steel in the quenched and tempered condition in accord-
ance with DIN EN 10085 (July 2001) —1
Type Material Rm,N Re,N A VW,zd, VSch,zd, VW,b,N WW,s, WW,t, ad,m ad,p
No. —2 —2 N N N N —4 —4
24CrMo13-6 1.8516 1000 800 450 360 480 260 285 0,22 0,26
31CrMo12 1.8515 1030 835 11 465 370 495 270 295 0,21 0,27
32CrAlMo7-10 1.8505 1030 835 465 370 495 270 295 0,21 0,27
31CrMoV5 1.8519 1100 900 11 495 385 525 285 315 0,31 0,36
33CrMoV12-9 1.8522 1150 950 520 395 550 300 330 0,30 0,35
34CrAlNi7-10 1.8550 900 680 12 405 335 435 235 260 0,17 0,17
41CrAlMo7-10 1.8509 950 750 430 345 460 250 275 0,23 0,24
40CrMoV13-9 1.8523 950 750 430 345 460 250 275 0,23 0,24
34CrAlMo5-10 1.8507 —5 800 600 14 360 305 390 210 230 0,00 0,00
—1 Equivalent diameter deff,N = 40 mm.
—2 Re,N / Rm,N ! 0,75 for all material types.
—3 A in accordance with DIN 17211 (April 1987), if provided.
—4 More specific values for the individual types of material instead of merely the values for the material groups given in Table 1.2.1 or Table 3.2.1.
—5 Only up to a diameter of 100 mm.
5.1 Material tables 115 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.8 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for stainless steels in accordance with DIN EN 10088-2 (September
2005) (selection) —1 —2
Type Material No. Kind of Rm,N Re,N A VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N
product —3
Ferritic steels in the annealed condition, standard qualities
X2CrNi12 1.4003 P(25) 450 250 18 180 170 205 105 120
X6CrAl13 1.4002 P(25) 400 210 17 160 155 180 90 110
X6Cr17 1.4016 P(25) 430 240 20 170 165 195 100 115
X6CrMo17-1 1.4113 H(12) 450 260 18 180 170 205 105 120
Ferritic steels in the annealed condition, special qualities
X6CrNi17-1 1.4017 C(6) 650 480 12 260 230 290 150 175
X2CrTiNb18 1.4509 C(6) 430 230 18 170 165 195 100 115
Martensitic steels in the heat treated condition, standard qualities
X20Cr13 1.4021 P(75)
QT650 650 450 12 260 230 290 150 170
QT750 750 550 10 300 260 330 175 195
X4CrNiMo16-5-1 1.4418 P(75)
QT840 840 680 14 335 280 370 195 220
Precipitation hardening martensitic steels in the heat treated condition, special qualities
X5CrNiCuNb16-4 1.4542 P(50)
P1070 1070 1000 8 430 335 460 245 275
P950 950 800 10 380 310 410 220 245
P850 850 600 12 340 285 370 195 220
Austenitic steels in the solution annealed condition, standard qualities
X10CrNi18-8 1.4310 C(6) 600 250 40 240 215 270 140 160
X2CrNiN18-10 1.4311 P(75) 550 270 40 220 200 245 125 145
X5CrNi18-10 1.4301 P(75) 520 220 45 210 190 235 120 140
X6CrNiTi18-10 1.4541 P(75) 500 200 40 200 185 225 115 135
X6CrNiMoTi17- 1.4571 P(75) 520 220 40 210 190 235 120 140
12-2 1.4439 P(75) 580 270 35 230 210 260 135 155
X2CrNiMoN17-
13-5
Austenitic steels in the solution annealed condition, special qualities
X1NiCrMoCuN25- 1.4529 P(75) 650 300 40 260 230 290 150 170
20-7
Austenitic-ferritic steels in the solution annealed condition, standard qualities
X2CrNiN23-4 1.4362 P(75) 630 400 20 250 225 280 145 165
Austenitic-ferritic steels in the solution annealed condition, special qualities
X2CrNiMoN25-7- 1.4410 P(75) 730 530 20 290 250 320 170 190
4
—1 The characteristic fatigue strength values are provisional values.
—2 No equivalent diameter deff,N is required, as there is no technological size effect within the range of dimensions covered by the material standard.
—3 Kind of product: P(25) hot-rolled sheet of up to 25 mm in thickness,
H(12) hot-rolled strip of up to 12 mm in thickness,
C(6) cold rolled strip of up to 6 mm in thickness,
QT650 heat treated to a tensile strength of 650 MPa,
P1070 hot rolled sheet with a tensile strength of 1070 MPa.
5.1 Material tables 116 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.9 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, of steel for bigger forgings in accordance with SEW 550 (August
1976) —1 —2

Type Material Rm,N Re,N VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N ad,m ad,p
No. —3 —3
Quenched and tempered condition
Ck 22 1.1151 410 225 165 155 185 95 105 0,00 0,16
Ck 35 1.1181 490 295 195 185 215 115 130 0,00 0,22
Ck 45 1.1191 590 345 235 215 260 135 155 0,00 0,19
Ck 50 1.1206 630 365 250 225 275 145 165 0,00 0,25
Ck 60 1.1221 690 390 275 240 300 160 180 0,00 0,27
20 Mn 5 1.1133 490 295 195 185 215 115 130 0,00 0,22
28 Mn 6 1.1170 590 390 235 215 260 135 155 0,26 0,31
20 MnMoNi 4 5 1.6311 580 420 230 210 255 135 150 0,18 0,23
22 NiMoCr 4 7 1.6755 560 400 225 205 245 130 145 0,00 0,00
24 CrMo 5 1.7258 640 410 255 230 280 150 165 0,24 0,26
34 CrMo 4 1.7220 690 460 275 240 300 160 180 0,23 0,30
42 CrMo 4 1.7225 740 510 295 255 320 170 190 0,34 0,37
50 CrMo 4 1.7228 780 590 310 265 340 180 200 0,23 0,30
32 CrMo 12 1.7361 880 685 350 290 380 205 225 0,27 0,33
34 CrNiMo 6 1.6582 780 590 310 265 340 180 200 0,19 0,26
30 CrNiMo 8 1.6580 880 685 350 290 380 205 225 0,19 0,22
28 NiCrMoV 8 5— 2 1.6932 780 635 310 265 340 180 200 0,22 0,26
1.6956 930 785 370 305 400 215 235 0,35 0,37
33 NiCrMo 14 5— 2
Normalized condition
Ck 22 1.1151 410 225 165 155 185 95 105 0,00 0,16
Ck 35 1.1181 490 275 195 180 215 115 130 0,00 0,19
Ck 45 1.1191 590 325 235 215 260 135 155 0,00 0,16
Ck 50 1.1206 620 345 250 220 270 145 160 0,00 0,15
Ck 60 1.1221 680 375 270 240 295 155 175 0,00 0,14
—1 The fatigue strength values are provisional values.
—2 Equivalent diameter deff,N = 500 mm for 28 NiCrMoV 8 5 and deff,N = 1000 mm for 33 NiCrMo 14 5, for all other material types
deff,N = 250 mm.
—3 More specific values for the individual types of material instead of merely the values for the material groups given in Table 1.2.1 or Table 3.2.1.

Table 5.1.10 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for steel castings for general engineering uses in accordance with
DIN EN 10293 (June 2005)
Type Material Symbol deff,N Rm,N Re,N VW,zd,N VSch,zd, VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N
No. —1 N
GE200 (GS-38) 1.0420 +N 300 380 200 130 110 150 75 90
GE240 (GS-45) 1.0446 +N 300 450 230 155 125 180 90 110
GE300 (GS-60) 1.0558 +N 30 600 300 205 160 235 120 140
—1 Equivalent raw casting diameter deff,N in mm.
5.1 Material tables 117 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.11 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for heat treatable steel castings for general engineering uses in ac-
cordance with DIN EN 10293 (June 2005)
Type Material Symbol deff,N Rm,N Re,N VW,zd,N VSch,zd VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N
No. —1 ,N
G17Mn5 1.1131 + QT 50 450 240 155 125 180 90 110
G20Mn5 1.6220 +N 30 480 300 165 135 190 95 115
+ QT 100 500 300 170 140 200 100 120
G24Mn6 1.1118 + QT1 50 700 550 240 185 270 140 160
+ QT2 100 650 500 220 175 250 130 150
+ QT3 150 600 450 205 160 235 120 140
G28Mn6 1.1165 +N 250 520 260 175 145 205 100 125
+ QT 100 600 450 205 160 235 120 140
+ QT1 50 700 550 240 185 270 140 160
G20Mo5 1.5419 + QT 100 440 245 150 125 175 85 105
G10MnMoV6-3 1.5410 + QT1 50 500 380 170 140 200 100 120
+ QT2 50 600 500 205 160 235 120 140
+ QT3 100 520 400 175 145 205 100 125
G15CrMoV6-9 1.7710 + QT1 50 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
+ QT2 50 980 930 335 240 365 190 220
G17CrMo5-5 1.7357 + QT 100 490 315 165 135 195 95 115
G17CrMo9-10 1.7379 + QT 150 590 400 200 160 230 115 140
G26CrMo4 1.7221 + QT1 100 600 450 205 160 235 120 140
+ QT2 100 700 550 240 185 270 140 160
G34CrMo4 1.7230 + QT1 100 700 540 240 185 270 140 160
+ QT2 100 830 650 280 210 315 165 190
G42CrMo4 1.7231 + QT1 100 800 600 270 205 305 155 185
+ QT2 100 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
G30CrMoV6-4 1.7725 + QT1 100 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
+ QT2 100 900 750 305 225 340 175 205
G35CrNiMo6-6 1.6579 +N 150 800 550 270 205 305 155 185
+ QT1 100 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
+ QT2 100 900 800 305 225 340 175 205
G9Ni14 1.5638 + QT 35 500 360 170 140 200 100 120
GX9Ni5 1.5681 + QT 30 550 380 185 150 215 110 130
G20NiMoCr4 1.6750 + QT 150 570 410 194 155 223 112 134
G32NiCrMo8-5-4 1.6570 + QT1 100 850 700 290 215 320 165 195
+ QT2 100 1050 950 355 250 390 205 235
G17NiCrMo13-6 1.6781 + QT 200 750 600 255 195 285 145 175
G30NiCrMo14 1.6771 + QT1 100 900 700 305 225 340 175 205
+ QT2 100 1100 1000 375 260 405 215 245
GX3CrNi13-4 1.6982 + QT 300 700 500 240 185 270 140 160
GX4CrNi13-4 1.4317 + QT 300 760 550 260 195 290 150 175
GX4CrNi16-4 1.4421 + QT1 300 780 540 265 200 297 153 180
+ QT2 300 1000 830 340 245 370 195 225
GX4CrNiMo16-5-1 1.4405 + QT 300 760 540 260 195 290 150 175
GX23CrMoV12-1 1.4931 + QT 150 740 540 250 190 285 145 170
—1 Equivalent raw casting diameter deff,N in mm.
5.1 Material tables 118 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.12 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for nodular cast iron in accordance with DIN EN 1563 (October
2005) or DIN 1693/01 (October 1973) (designations given in brackets) —1
Type Material No. Rm,N Rp0,2,N A5 VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N
—2 —3
EN-GJS-350-22-LT EN-JS1015 350 220 22 120 100 160 75 110
(GGG-35.3) (0.7033)
EN-GJS-350-22-RT EN-JS1014
EN-GJS-350-22 EN-JS1010
EN-GJS-400-18-LT EN-JS1025 400 240 18 135 110 185 90 120
(GGG-40.3) (0.7043)
EN-GJS-400-18-RT EN-JS1024 250
EN-GJS-400-18 EN-JS1020 250
EN-GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030 400 250 15 135 110 185 90 120
(GGG-40) (0.7040)
EN-GJS-450-10 EN-JS1040 450 310 10 155 125 205 100 135
EN-GJS-500-7 EN-JS1050 500 320 7 170 135 225 110 150
(GGG-50) (0.7050)
EN-GJS-600-3 EN-JS1060 600 370 3 205 160 265 135 180
(GGG-60) (0.7060)
EN-GJS-700-2 EN-JS1070 700 420 2 240 180 305 155 205
(GGG-70) (0.7070)
EN-GJS-800-2 EN-JS1080 800 480 2 270 200 340 175 235
(GGG-80) (0.7080)
EN-GJS-900-2 EN-JS1090 900 600 2 305 220 380 200 260
—1 Equivalent raw casting diameter deff,N = 60.
—2 Rp0,2,N / Rm,N  0,75 for all material types.
—3 Elongation at break, in %. For non-ductile materials, A5 < 6%, the assessment of the static strength shall be carried out using local stresses, Chap-
ter 1.0, and the safety factor shall be increased by adding the term 'j, Eq. (3.4.5) in Chapter 3.5.

Table 5.1.13 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for cast iron with lamellar graphite (grey cast iron) in accordance with
DIN EN 1561 (January 2012) or DIN 1691 (May 1985) (designations in brackets) —1
Type Material Rm,N Rp0,1,N VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N
No. —2 —2
EN-GJL-100 EN-JL1010 100 - 34 23 52 34 52
(GG-10) —3 (0.6010)
EN-GJL-150 EN-JL1020 150 100 51 34 78 51 78
(GG-15) (0.6015)
EN-GJL-200 EN-JL1030 200 130 68 45 102 68 102
(GG-20) (0.6020)
EN-GJL-250 EN-JL1040 250 165 85 57 126 85 126
(GG-25) (0.6025)
EN-GJL-300 EN-JL1050 300 195 102 68 150 102 150
(GG-30) (0.6030)
EN-GJL-350 EN-JL1060 350 230 119 79 173 119 173
(GG-35) (0.6035)
—1 Equivalent raw casting diameter deff,N = 20.
—2 VW,b,N and VW,t,N in accordance with Eqs. (5.1.3) and (5.1.4). Using the deviating values of DIN EN 1561 is permissible.
—3 Not to be used for load carrying components.
5.1 Material tables 119 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.14 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for malleable cast irons in accordance with DIN EN 1562 (August
2006) or DIN 1692 (January 1982) (designation in brackets) —1
Type Material No. Rm,N Rp0,2,N A3 VW,zd,N VSch,zd,N VW,b,N WW,s,N WW,t,N
—2 —3
Black heart malleable (nondecarburized) cast irons
EN-GJMB-300-6 EN-JM1110 300 - 6 90 75 130 70 100
(-) (-)
EN-GJMB-350-10 EN-JM1130 350 200 10 105 85 150 80 115
(GTS-35-10) (0.8135)
EN-GJMB-450-6 EN-JM1140 450 270 6 135 105 190 100 145
(GTS-45-06) (0.8145)
EN-GJMB-500-5 EN-JM1150 500 300 5 150 115 210 115 160
(-) (-)
EN-GJMB-550-4 EN-JM1160 550 340 4 165 125 230 125 175
(GTS-50-04) (0.8155)
EN-GJMB-600-3 EN-JM1170 600 390 3 180 135 250 135 190
(-) (-)
EN-GJMB-650-2 EN-JM1180 650 430 2 195 145 265 145 205
(GTS-65-02) (0.8165)
EN-GJMB-700-2 EN-JM1190 700 530 2 210 155 285 160 220
(GTS-70-02) (0.8170)
EN-GJMB-800-1 EN-JM1200 800 600 1 240 170 320 180 250
(-) (-)
White heart malleable (decarburized) cast irons
EN-GJMW-350-4 EN-JM1010 350 - 4 105 85 150 80 115
(GTW-35-04) (0.8035)
EN-GJMW-360-12 EN-JM1020 360 190 12 110 85 155 80 120
(GTW-S 38-12) (0.8038)
EN-GJMW-400-5 EN-JM1030 400 220 5 120 95 170 90 130
(GTW-40-05) (0.8040)
EN-GJMW-450-7 EN-JM1040 450 260 7 135 105 190 100 145
(GTW-45-07) (0.8045)
EN-GJMW-550-4 EN-JM1050 550 340 4 165 125 230 125 175
(-) (-)
—1 Equivalent raw casting diameter deff,N = 15.
—2 Upper part of table: Rp0,2,N / Rm,N  0,75; exception: for GTS-70-02, Rp0,2,N/Rm,N ! 0,75 is valid; lower part of table: Rp0,2,N/Rm,N  0,75.
—3 Elongation at break, in %. For non-ductile materials, A3 < 6%, the assessment of the static strength shall be carried out using local stresses, Chap-
ter 1.0, and the safety factor shall be increased by adding the term 'j, Eq. (3.4.5) in Chapter 3.5.
5.1 Material tables 120 5 Annexes

nological size factor and depending on the width of the raw

5.1.2 Material tables for aluminum material casting.
See Table 5.1.15 for an overview. Tables 5.1.16 to 5.1.23 contain the respective elongation at
Tables 5.1.16 to 5.1.19 contain standard component val- break values A. For non-ductile materials with A < 6 %,
ues Rm, } for wrought aluminum alloys for the indicated the assessment of the static strength shall be carried out
dimensions, as a function of the type of material and its using local stresses, Chapter 1.0, and the safety factor shall
condition. be increased by adding the term 'j, Chapter 3.5,
Eq. (3.5.4).
Tables 5.1.20 to 5.1.23 contain standard material val-
ues Rm,N, } for cast aluminum alloys, as a function of the The fatigue limit values VW,zd, } in Tables 5.1.16 to
type of material and its condition, from which the standard 5.1.23 are reference values for ND,V = ND,W = 106. The
component values Rm, } shall be computed in accordance endurance limit VW,zd,II, } for N = v is obtained from
with Chapter 1.2.1 or 3.2.1, under observation of the tech- ND,II,V = ND,II,W = 108 onwards and is lower than VW,zd }
by a factor of fII,V or fII,W, see Tables 2.4.3 and 4.4.3.

Table 5.1.15 Overview of the various aluminum materials

Material standard
Table Material group Type of semi-finished product/type of casting
(edition)
5.1.16 strips, sheets, plates DIN EN 485-2 (01/2009)
5.1.17 Wrought aluminum cold drawn bars/rods and tubes DIN EN 754-2 (06/2008)
5.1.18 alloys extruded profiles DIN EN 755-2 (06/2008)
5.1.19 forgings DIN EN 586-2 (11/1994)
5.1.20 sand cast alloys DIN EN 1706 06/2010)
5.1.21 Cast aluminum al- chill cast alloys DIN EN 1706 (06/2010)
5.1.22 loys investment cast alloys DIN EN 1706 (06/2010)
5.1.23 pressure die cast alloys DIN EN 1706 (06/2010)
5.1 Material tables 121 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for wrought aluminum alloys, strips, sheets, plates in accordance with
DIN EN 485-2 (January 2009) (selection)
Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
EN AW-2014 T3 t 0,4 1,5 395 245 120 85 140 70 85 14 111
1,5 6,0 400 245 120 90 140 70 85 14 112
Al Cu4SiMg T4 t 0,4 1,5 395 240 120 85 140 70 85 14 110
T451 1,5 6,0 395 240 120 85 140 70 85 14 110
6,0 12,5 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 14 112
T451 12,5 40,0 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 10* 112
40,0 100,0 395 250 120 85 140 70 85 7* 111
T42 t 0,4 6,0 395 230 120 85 140 70 85 14 110
6,0 12,5 400 235 120 90 140 70 85 14 111
12,5 25,0 400 235 120 90 140 70 85 12* 111
T6 t 0,4 1,5 440 390 130 95 150 75 95 6 133
T651 1,5 6,0 440 390 130 95 150 75 95 7 133
6,0 12,5 450 395 135 95 155 80 95 7 135
T651 12,5 40,0 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 6* 138
40,0 60,0 450 390 135 95 155 80 95 5* 135
60,0 80,0 435 380 130 95 150 75 95 4* 131
80,0 100,0 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4* 126
100,0 120,0 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 4* 123
T62 t 0,4 12,5 440 390 130 95 150 75 95 7 133
12,5 25,0 450 395 135 95 155 80 95 6* 135
EN AW-2017A T4 t 0,4 1,5 390 245 115 85 135 70 85 14 110
Al Cu4MgSi(A) T451 1,5 6,0 390 245 115 85 135 70 85 15 110
6,0 12,5 390 260 115 85 135 70 85 13 111
T451 12,5 40,0 390 250 115 85 135 70 85 12* 110
40,0 100,0 385 240 115 85 135 65 85 10* 108
100,0 120,0 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 8* 105
120,0 150,0 350 240 105 80 125 60 75 4* 101
T42 t 0,4 3,0 390 235 115 85 135 70 85 14 109
3,0 12,5 390 235 115 85 135 70 85 15 109
12,5 25,0 390 235 115 85 135 70 85 12* 109
EN AW-2024 T4 t 0,4 1,5 425 275 130 90 145 75 90 12 120
1,5 6,0 425 275 130 90 145 75 90 14 120
Al Cu4Mg1 T3 t 0,4 1,5 435 290 130 95 150 75 95 12 123
T351 1,5 3,0 435 290 130 95 150 75 95 14 123
3,0 6,0 440 290 130 95 150 75 95 14 124
6,0 12,5 440 290 130 95 150 75 95 13 124
T351 12,5 40,0 430 290 130 95 150 75 90 11* 122
40,0 80,0 420 290 125 90 145 75 90 8* 120
80,0 100,0 400 285 120 90 140 70 85 7* 115
100,0 120,0 380 270 115 85 135 65 85 5* 110
120,0 150,0 360 250 110 80 130 60 80 5* 104
T42 t 0,4 6,0 425 260 130 90 145 75 90 15 119
6,0 12,5 425 260 130 90 145 75 90 12 119
12,5 25,0 420 260 125 90 145 75 90 8* 118
T8 t 0,4 1,5 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 5 138
T851 1,5 6,0 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 6 138
6,0 12,5 460 400 140 95 160 80 100 5 138
T851 12,5 25,0 455 400 135 95 155 80 95 4* 137
25,0 40,0 455 395 135 95 155 80 95 4* 136
T62 t 0,4 12,5 440 345 130 95 150 75 95 5 129
12,5 25,0 435 345 130 95 150 75 95 4* 128
—1 Elongation at break A for gauge length of 50 mm or (with *) elongation at break A5 for gauge length of 5 x specimen diameter.
5.1 Material tables 122 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16, continued, page 1 of 7

Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
EN AW-4006 H12 0,2 0,5 120 90 35 35 50 20 30 4 38
0,5 1,5 120 90 35 35 50 20 30 4 38
Al Si1Fe 1,5 3,0 120 90 35 35 50 20 30 5 38
H14 0,2 0,5 140 120 40 40 55 25 35 3 45
0,5 1,5 140 120 40 40 55 25 35 3 45
1,5 3,0 140 120 40 40 55 25 35 3 45
T4 0,2 0,5 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 14 35
0,5 1,5 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 16 35
1,5 3,0 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 18 35
3,0 6,0 120 55 35 35 50 20 30 21 35
EN AW-4007 O/H111 0,2 0,5 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 15 32
0,5 1,5 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 16 32
Al Si1, 5Mn 1,5 3,0 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 19 32
3,0 6,0 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 21 32
6,0 12,5 110 45 35 30 45 20 25 25 32
H12 t 0,2 0,5 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 4 44
0,5 1,5 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 4 44
1,5 3,0 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 5 44
EN AW-5049 O/H111 0,2 0,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 12 52
0,5 1,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 14 52
Al Mg2Mn0,8 1,5 3,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 16 52
3,0 6,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 52
6,0 12,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 52
12,5 100,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 17* 52
H112 t 6,0 12,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 12 62
12,5 25,0 200 120 60 50 75 35 45 10* 58
25,0 40,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 12* 52
40,0 80,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 14* 52
H12 0,2 0,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 4 66
0,5 1,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 5 66
1,5 3,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 6 66
3,0 6,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 7 66
6,0 12,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9 66
12,5 40,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9* 66
H14 0,2 0,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
0,5 1,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
1,5 3,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
3,0 6,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
6,0 12,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5 72
12,5 25,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 6* 72
H16 0,2 0,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 80
0,5 1,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
1,5 3,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
3,0 6,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
H18 0,2 0,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 1 88
0,5 1,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
1,5 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 7 63
0,5 1,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 8 63
1,5 3,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
3,0 6,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 11 63
6,0 12,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
12,5 40,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 9* 63
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
0,5 1,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
1,5 3,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 7 70
3,0 6,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8 70
6,0 12,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 10 70
12,5 25,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8* 70
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
0,5 1,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
1,5 3,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 5 78
3,0 6,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 6 78
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
5.1 Material tables 123 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16 continued, page 2 of 7

Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
EN AW-5052 O/H111 0,2 0,5 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 12 47
0,5 1,5 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 14 47
Al Mg2,5 1,5 3,0 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 16 47
3,0 6,0 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 18 47
6,0 12,5 165 65 50 45 65 30 40 19 46
12,5 80,0 165 65 50 45 65 30 40 18* 46
H112 t 6,0 12,5 190 110 55 50 75 30 45 7 55
12,5 40,0 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 10* 47
40,0 80,0 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 14* 47
H12 0,2 0,5 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 4 63
0,5 1,5 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 5 63
1,5 3,0 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 6 63
3,0 6,0 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 8 63
6,0 12,5 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 10 63
12,5 40,0 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 9* 63
H14 0,2 0,5 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 3 69
0,5 1,5 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 3 69
1,5 3,0 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 4 69
3,0 6,0 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 4 69
6,0 12,5 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 5 69
12,5 25,0 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 4* 69
H16 0,2 0,5 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 2 76
0,5 1,5 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 3 76
1,5 3,0 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 3 76
3,0 6,0 250 210 75 60 95 45 55 3 76
H18 0,2 0,5 270 240 80 65 100 45 60 1 83
0,5 1,5 270 240 80 65 100 45 60 2 83
1,5 3,0 270 240 80 65 100 45 60 2 83
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 5 61
0,5 1,5 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 6 61
1,5 3,0 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 7 61
3,0 6,0 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 10 61
6,0 12,5 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 12 61
12,5 40,0 210 130 65 55 80 35 50 12* 61
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 4 67
0,5 1,5 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 5 67
1,5 3,0 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 6 67
3,0 6,0 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 7 67
6,0 12,5 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 9 67
12,5 25,0 230 150 70 60 85 40 55 9* 67
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 3 74
0,5 1,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 4 74
1,5 3,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 5 74
3,0 6,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 6 74
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 270 210 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
0,5 1,5 270 210 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
1,5 3,0 270 210 80 65 100 45 60 4 81
EN AW-5251 O/H111 0,2 0,5 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 13 44
0,5 1,5 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 14 44
Al Mg2 1,5 3,0 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 16 44
3,0 6,0 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 18 44
6,0 12,5 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 18 44
12,5 50,0 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 18* 44
H12 0,2 0,5 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 3 58
0,5 1,5 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 4 58
1,5 3,0 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 5 58
3,0 6,0 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 8 58
6,0 12,5 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 10 58
12,5 25,0 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 10* 58
H14 0,2 0,5 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 2 64
0,5 1,5 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 2 64
1,5 3,0 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 3 64
3,0 6,0 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 4 64
6,0 12,5 210 170 65 55 80 35 50 5 64
H16 0,2 0,5 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 1 71
0,5 1,5 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 2 71
5.1 Material tables 124 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16, continued, page 3 of 7

Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
Al Mg2 continued noch H16 1,5 3,0 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 3 71
3,0 4,0 230 200 70 60 85 40 55 3 71
H18 0,2 0,5 255 230 75 65 95 45 60 1 79
0,5 1,5 255 230 75 65 95 45 60 2 79
1,5 3,0 255 230 75 65 95 45 60 2 79
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 4 56
0,5 1,5 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 6 56
1,5 3,0 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 8 56
3,0 6,0 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 10 56
6,0 12,5 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 12 56
12,5 25,0 190 120 55 50 75 35 45 12* 56
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 3 62
0,5 1,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 5 62
1,5 3,0 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 6 62
3,0 6,0 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 8 62
6,0 12,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 10 62
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 3 69
0,5 1,5 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 4 69
1,5 3,0 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 5 69
3,0 4,0 230 170 70 60 85 40 55 7 69
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 255 200 75 65 95 45 60 2 77
0,5 1,5 255 200 75 65 95 45 60 3 77
1,5 3,0 255 200 75 65 95 45 60 3 77
EN AW-5154A O/H111 0,2 0,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 12 58
0,5 1,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 13 58
Al Mg3,5(A) 1,5 3,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 15 58
3,0 6,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 17 58
6,0 12,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 18 58
12,5 50,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 16* 58
H112 t 6,0 12,5 220 125 65 55 85 40 50 8 63
12,5 40,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 9 59
40,0 80,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 13* 59
H12 0,2 0,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 3 75
0,5 1,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 4 75
1,5 3,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 5 75
3,0 6,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6 75
6,0 12,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 7 75
12,5 40,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6* 75
H14 0,2 0,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 81
0,5 1,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
1,5 3,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
3,0 6,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4 81
6,0 12,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 5 81
12,5 25,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4* 81
H18 0,2 0,5 310 270 95 75 110 55 70 1 94
0,5 1,5 310 270 95 75 110 55 70 1 94
1,5 3,0 310 270 95 75 110 55 70 1 94
H19 0,2 0,5 330 285 100 75 120 55 75 1 100
0,5 1,5 330 285 100 75 120 55 75 1 100
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 5 74
0,5 1,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 6 74
1,5 3,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 7 74
3,0 6,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 8 74
6,0 12,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 10 74
12,5 40,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 9* 74
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 4 80
0,5 1,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 5 80
1,5 3,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 6 80
3,0 6,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7 80
6,0 12,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 8 80
12,5 25,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7* 80
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
3,0 6,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 5 87
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
0,5 1,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
1,5 3,0 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
5.1 Material tables 125 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16, continued, page 4 of 7

Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
EN AW-5454 O/H111 0,2 0,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 12 58
0,5 1,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 13 58
Al Mg3Mn 1,5 3,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 15 58
3,0 6,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 17 58
6,0 12,5 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 18 58
12,5 80,0 215 85 65 55 80 35 50 16* 58
H112 12,5 220 125 65 55 85 40 50 8 63
40,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 9* 59
120,0 215 90 65 55 80 35 50 13* 59
H12 0,2 0,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 3 75
0,5 1,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 4 75
1,5 3,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 5 75
3,0 6,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6 75
6,0 12,5 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 7 75
12,5 40,0 250 190 75 60 95 45 55 6* 75
H14 0,2 0,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 81
0,5 1,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
1,5 3,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 81
3,0 6,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4 81
6,0 12,5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 5 81
12,5 25,0 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 4* 81
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 5 74
0,5 1,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 6 74
1,5 3,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 7 74
3,0 6,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 8 74
6,0 12,5 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 10 74
12,5 40,0 250 180 75 60 95 45 55 9* 74
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 4 80
0,5 1,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 5 80
1,5 3,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 6 80
3,0 6,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7 80
6,0 12,5 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 8 80
12,5 25,0 270 200 80 65 100 45 60 7* 80
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
3,0 6,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 5 87
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
0,5 1,5 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
1,5 3,0 310 250 95 75 110 55 70 3 93
EN AW-5754 O/H111 0,2 0,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 12 52
0,5 1,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 14 52
Al Mg3 1,5 3,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 16 52
3,0 6,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 52
6,0 12,5 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 18 52
12,5 100,0 190 80 55 50 75 35 45 17* 52
H112 t 6,0 12,5 210 140 65 55 80 35 50 12 62
12,5 25,0 200 120 60 50 75 35 45 10* 58
25,0 40,0 190 80 55 50 75 30 45 12* 52
40,0 80,0 190 80 55 50 75 30 45 14* 52
H12 0,2 0,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 4 66
0,5 1,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 5 66
1,5 3,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 6 66
3,0 6,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 7 66
6,0 12,5 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9 66
12,5 40,0 220 170 65 55 85 40 50 9* 66
H14 0,2 0,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
0,5 1,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 3 72
1,5 3,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
3,0 6,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 4 72
6,0 12,5 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5 72
12,5 25,0 240 190 70 60 90 40 55 5* 72
H16 0,2 0,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 80
0,5 1,5 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
1,5 3,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
3,0 6,0 265 220 80 65 100 45 60 3 80
H18 0,2 0,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 1 88
0,5 1,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
1,5 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
5.1 Material tables 126 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16, continued, page 5 of 7

Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
EN AW-5754 H18 0,2 0,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 1 88
Al Mg3 0,5 1,5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
continued 1,5 3,0 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 2 88
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 7 63
0,5 1,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 8 63
1,5 3,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
3,0 6,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 11 63
6,0 12,5 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 10 63
12,5 40,0 220 130 65 55 85 40 50 9* 63
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
0,5 1,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 6 70
1,5 3,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 7 70
3,0 6,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8 70
6,0 12,5 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 10 70
12,5 25,0 240 160 70 60 90 40 55 8* 70
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
0,5 1,5 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 4 78
1,5 3,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 5 78
3,0 6,0 265 190 80 65 100 45 60 6 78
H28/H38 0,2 0,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
0,5 1,5 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 3 87
1,5 3,0 290 230 85 70 105 50 65 4 87
EN AW-5083 O/H111 0,2 0,5 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 11 75
0,5 1,5 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 12 75
Al Mg4,5Mn0,7 1,5 3,0 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 13 75
3,0 6,0 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 15 75
6,0 12,5 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 16 75
12,5 50,0 275 125 85 65 100 45 60 15* 75
50,0 80,0 270 115 80 65 100 45 60 14* 73
80,0 120,0 260 110 80 65 95 45 60 12* 70
120,0 150,0 255 105 75 65 95 45 60 12* 69
H112 t 6,0 12,5 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 12 75
12,5 40,0 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 10* 75
40,0 80,0 270 115 80 65 100 45 60 10* 73
H116
2) t 1,5 3,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 8 89
3,0 6,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 10 89
6,0 12,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 12 89
12,5 40,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 10* 89
40,0 80,0 285 200 85 70 105 50 65 10* 83
H12 0,2 0,5 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 3 94
0,5 1,5 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 4 94
1,5 3,0 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 5 94
3,0 6,0 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 6 94
6,0 12,5 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 7 94
12,5 40,0 315 250 95 75 115 55 70 6* 94
H14 0,2 0,5 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 2 102
0,5 1,5 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3 102
1,5 3,0 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3 102
3,0 6,0 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3 102
6,0 12,5 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 4 102
12,5 25,0 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 3* 102
H16 0,2 0,5 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 1 108
0,5 1,5 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 2 108
1,5 3,0 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 2 108
3,0 4,0 360 300 110 80 130 60 80 2 108
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 5 89
0,5 1,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 6 89
1,5 3,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 7 89
3,0 6,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 8 89
6,0 12,5 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 10 89
12,5 40,0 305 215 90 70 110 55 70 9* 89
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 4 99
0,5 1,5 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 5 99
1,5 3,0 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 6 99
3,0 6,0 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 7 99
6,0 12,5 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 7 99
12,5 25,0 340 250 100 80 120 60 75 7* 99
5.1 Material tables 127 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16, continued, page 6 of 7

Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
EN AW-5083 H26/H36 0,2 0,5 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 2 106
0,5 1,5 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 3 106
Al Mg4,5Mn0,7 1,5 3,0 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 3 106
continued 3,0 4,0 360 280 110 80 130 60 80 3 106
EN AW-5086 O/H111 0,2 0,5 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 11 65
0,5 1,5 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 12 65
Al Mg 4 1,5 3,0 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 13 65
3,0 6,0 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 15 65
6,0 12,5 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 17 65
12,5 150,0 240 100 79 60 90 40 55 16* 65
H112 t 6,0 12,5 250 125 75 60 95 45 55 8 69
12,5 40,0 240 105 70 60 90 40 55 9* 65
40,0 80,0 240 100 70 60 90 40 55 12* 65
H116 t 1,5 3,0 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 8 81
3,0 6,0 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 9 81
6,0 12,5 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 10 81
12,5 50,0 275 195 85 65 100 50 60 9* 81
H12 0,2 0,5 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 3 81
0,5 1,5 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 4 81
1,5 3,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 5 81
3,0 6,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 6 81
6,0 12,5 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 7 81
12,5 40,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 6* 81
H14 0,2 0,5 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 2 90
0,5 1,5 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3 90
1,5 3,0 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3 90
3,0 6,0 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3 90
6,0 12,5 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 4 90
12,5 25,0 300 240 90 70 110 50 65 3* 90
H16 0,2 0,5 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 1 98
0,5 1,5 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 2 98
1,5 3,0 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 2 98
3,0 4,0 325 270 100 75 120 55 70 2 98
H18 0,2 0,5 345 290 105 80 125 60 75 1 104
0,5 1,5 345 290 105 80 125 60 75 1 104
1,5 3,0 345 290 105 80 125 60 75 1 104
H22/H32 0,2 0,5 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 5 80
0,5 1,5 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 6 80
1,5 3,0 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 7 89
3,0 6,0 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 8 80
6,0 12,5 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 10 80
12,5 40,0 275 185 85 65 100 50 60 9* 80
H24/H34 0,2 0,5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 4 88
0,5 1,5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 5 88
1,5 3,0 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 6 88
3,0 6,0 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 7 88
6,0 12,5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 8 88
12,5 25,0 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 7* 88
H26/H36 0,2 0,5 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 2 96
0,5 1,5 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 3 96
1,5 3,0 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 3 96
3,0 4,0 325 250 100 75 115 55 70 3 96
EN AW-6082 T4 t 0,4 1,5 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 12 58
T451 1,5 3,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14 58
Al SiMgMn 3,0 6,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 15 58
6,0 12,5 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14 58
T451 12,5 40,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 13* 58
40,0 80,0 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 12* 58
T42 t 0,4 1,5 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 12 57
1,5 3,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 14 57
3,0 6,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 15 57
6,0 12,5 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 14 57
12,5 40,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 13* 57
40,0 80,0 205 95 60 55 80 35 50 12* 57
T6 t 0,4 1,5 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 6 94
T651 1,5 3,0 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 7 94
T62 3,0 6,0 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10 94
6,0 12,5 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 9 91
5.1 Material tables 128 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.16, continued, page 7 of 7

Material Condition Nominal thickness in Rm Re VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A —1 Hardness
mm
over up to % HB
EN AW-6082 T651 12,5 60,0 295 240 90 70 110 50 65 8* 89
T62 60,0 100,0 295 240 90 70 110 50 65 7* 89
AlSiMgMn continu- 100,0 150,0 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 6* 84
ed 150,0 175,0 275 230 85 65 100 50 60 4* 83
T61 t0,4 1,5 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 10 82
T6151 1,5 3,0 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 11 82
3,0 6,0 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 11 82
6,0 12,5 280 205 85 70 105 50 65 12 82
T6151 12,5 60,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 12* 81
60,0 100,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 10* 81
100,0 150,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 9* 81
150,0 175,0 275 200 85 65 100 50 60 8* 81
EN AW-7020 T4 t0,4 1,5 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 11 92
T451 1,5 3,0 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 12 92
Al Zn4,5Mg1 3,0 6,0 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 13 92
6,0 12,5 320 210 95 75 115 55 70 14 92
T6 t0,4 1,5 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 7 104
T651 1,5 3,0 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 8 104
T62 3,0 6,0 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 104
6,0 12,5 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 104
T651 12,5 40,0 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 9* 104
40,0 100,0 340 270 100 80 120 60 75 8* 101
100,0 150,0 330 260 100 75 120 55 75 7* 98
150,0 175,0 330 260 100 75 120 55 75 6* 98
EN AW-7021 T6 t1,5 3,0 400 350 120 90 140 70 85 7 121
Al Zn5,5Mg1,5 3,0 6,0 400 350 120 90 140 70 85 8 121
EN AW-7022 T6 t3,0 12,5 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 8 133
Al Zn5Mg3Cu T6 12,5 25,0 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 8* 133
T651 25,0 50,0 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 7* 133
50,0 100,0 430 350 130 90 150 75 95 5* 127
100,0 200,0 410 330 125 90 145 70 90 3* 121
EN AW-7075 T6 t0,4 0,8 525 460 160 105 175 90 110 6 157
T651 0,8 1,5 540 460 160 110 180 95 115 6 160
Al Zn5,5MgCu T62 1,5 3,0 540 470 160 110 180 95 115 7 161
3,0 6,0 545 475 165 110 180 95 115 8 163
6,0 12,5 540 460 160 110 180 95 115 8 160
T651 12,5 25,0 540 470 160 110 180 95 115 6* 161
T62 25,0 50,0 530 460 160 105 180 90 110 5* 158
50,0 60,0 525 440 160 105 175 90 110 4* 155
60,0 80,0 495 420 150 100 170 85 105 4* 147
80,0 90,0 490 390 145 100 165 85 105 4* 144
90,0 100,0 460 360 140 95 160 80 100 3* 135
100,0 120,0 410 300 125 90 145 70 90 2* 119
120,0 150,0 360 260 110 80 130 60 80 2* 104
T76 t1,5 3,0 500 425 150 105 170 85 105 7 149
T7651 3,0 6,0 500 425 150 105 170 85 105 8 149
6,0 12,5 490 415 145 100 165 85 105 7 146
T73 t1,5 3,0 460 385 140 95 160 80 100 7 137
T7351 3,0 6,0 460 385 140 95 160 80 100 8 137
6,0 12,5 475 390 145 100 160 80 100 7 140
T7351 12,5 25,0 475 390 145 100 160 80 100 6* 140
25,0 50,0 475 390 145 100 160 80 100 5* 140
50,0 60,0 455 360 135 95 155 80 95 5* 133
60,0 80,0 440 340 130 95 150 75 95 5* 129
80,0 100,0 430 340 130 95 150 75 95 5* 126
5.1 Material tables 129 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.17 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for wrought aluminum alloys, cold drawn bars/rods and tubes, in
accordance with DIN EN 754-2 (June 2008)
Material, chemical Condition Bars/rods Tubes Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A A50
composition D; S —1 e —1 % %
[mm] [mm] —2 —2
DIN No. from to from to
EN AW-2007 T3 - 30 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 7 5
AlCu4PbMgMn 30 80 - - 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 6 -
3.1645 - - - 20 370 250 110 85 130 65 80 7 5
T351 - 80 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3510 - - - 20 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3511
EN AW-2011 T3 - 40 - - 320 270 95 75 115 55 70 10 8
AlCu6BiPb 40 50 - - 300 250 90 70 110 50 70 10 -
3.1655 50 80 - - 280 210 85 70 105 50 65 10 -
- - - 5 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10 8
EN AW-2011A - - 5 20 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 8 6
AlCu6BiPb(A) T8 - 80 - - 370 270 110 85 130 65 80 8 8
- - - 20 370 275 110 85 130 65 80 8 6
EN AW-2014 0 - 80 - 20 < 240 < 125 70 60 90 40 55 12 10
AlCu4SiMg H111
3.1255 T3 - 80 - 20 380 290 115 85 135 65 85 8 6
T351 - 80 - - 380 290 115 85 135 65 85 6 4
T3510 - - - 20 380 290 115 85 135 65 85 6 4
T3511
EN AW-2014A T4 - 80 - - 380 220 115 85 135 65 85 12 10
AlCu4SiMg(A) - - - 20 380 240 115 85 135 65 85 12 10
T451 - 80 - - 380 220 115 85 135 65 85 10 8
T4510 - - - 20 380 240 115 85 135 65 85 10 8
T4511
T6 - 80 - 20 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 8 6
T651 - 80 - - 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 6 4
T6510 - - - 20 450 380 135 95 155 80 95 6 4
T6511
EN AW-2017A 0 - 80 - 20 < 240 < 125 < 70 < 60 < 90 40 55 12 10
AlCu4MgSi(A) H111
3.1325 T3 - 80 - 20 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 10 8
T351 - 80 - - 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 8 6
T3510 - - - 20 400 250 120 90 140 70 85 8 6
T3511
EN AW-2024 0, H111 - 80 - - < 250 < 150 < 75 < 60 < 90 < 45 < 55 12 10
AlCu4Mg1 - - 20 < 240 < 140 < 70 < 60 > 90 < 40 < 55 12 10
3.1355 T3 - 10 - - 425 310 130 90 145 75 90 10 8
10 80 - - 425 290 130 90 145 75 90 9 7
- - - 5 440 290 130 95 150 75 95 10 8
- - 5 20 420 270 125 90 145 75 90 10 8
T351 - 80 - - 425 310 130 90 145 75 90 8 6
T3510 - - - 20 420 290 125 90 145 75 90 8 6
T3511
T6 - 80 - - 425 315 130 90 145 75 90 5 4
T651 - 80 - - 425 315 130 90 145 75 90 4 3
T8 - 80 - - 455 400 135 95 155 80 95 4 3
T851 - 80 - - 455 400 135 95 155 80 95 3 2
EN AW-2030 T3 - 30 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 7 5
AlCu4PbMg 30 80 - - 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 6 -
T351 - 80 - - 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3510 - - - 20 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 5 3
T3511
EN AW-3003 0, H111 - 80 - - 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25 16
AlMn1Cu - - - 20 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25 10
3.0517 H14 (D) 40 - 10 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
(S) 10 - - 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
H16 (D) 15 - 5 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
(S) 5 - - 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
H18 (D) 10 - 3 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
(S) 3 - - 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
—1 D: diameter of round bars, S: width across flats of square or hexagonal rods, S: thickness of rectangular rods, e: wall thickness of tubes.
—2 The elongation at break A shall be used for the calculation.
5.1 Material tables 130 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.17, continued page 1 of 2

Material, chemical Condition Bars/rods Tubes Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A A50
composition D; S —1 e —1 % %
[mm] [mm] —2 —2
DIN No. from to from to
EN AW-3103 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25 20
AlMn1 (S) 60 - - 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25 20
3.0515 H14 (D) 40 - 10 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
(S) 10 - - 130 110 40 35 50 25 30 6 4
H16 (D) 15 - 5 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
(S) 5 - - 160 130 50 45 65 30 40 4 3
H18 (D) 10 - 3 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
(S) 3 - - 180 145 55 45 70 30 40 3 2
EN AW-5005 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 100 40 30 30 40 17 25 18 16
AlMg1(B) (S) 60 - - 100 40 30 30 40 17 25 18 16
H14 (D) 40 - 5 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 6 4
EN AW-5005A (S) 10 - - 140 110 40 40 55 25 35 6 4
AlMg1(C) H18 (D) 15 - 3 185 155 55 50 70 30 45 4 2
3.3315 (S) 2 - - 185 155 55 50 70 30 45 4 2
EN AW-5019 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 16 14
AlMg5 (S) 60 - - 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 16 14
3.3555 H12, H22, (D) 40 - 10 270 180 80 65 100 45 60 8 7
H32 (S) 25 - - 270 180 80 65 100 45 60 8 7
H14, H24, (D) 25 - - 300 210 90 70 110 50 65 4 3
H34 (S) 10 - - 300 210 90 70 110 50 65 4 3
- - - 5 300 220 90 70 110 50 65 4 3
H16, H26, (D) - - 3 320 260 95 75 115 55 70 2 2
H36 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
EN AW-5251 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 17 15
AlMg2 (S) 60 - - 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 17 15
3.3525 H12, H22, (D) - - 10 180 110 55 45 70 30 40 5 4
H32 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H14, H24, (D) 30 - - 200 160 60 50 75 35 45 5 4
H34 (S) 5 - - 200 160 60 50 75 35 45 5 4
- - 5 200 160 60 50 75 35 45 4 3
H16, H26, (D) - - 5 220 180 65 55 85 40 50 3 2
H36 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H18, H28, (D) 20 - 3 240 200 70 60 90 40 55 2 2
H38 (S) 3 - - 240 200 70 60 90 40 55 2 2
EN AW-5052 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 20 17
AlMg2,5 (S) 60 - - 170 65 50 45 65 30 40 20 17
3.3523 H12, H22, (D) 40 - - 210 160 65 55 80 35 50 7 5
H32 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H14, H24, (D) 25 - 5 230 180 70 60 85 40 55 5 4
H34 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H16, H26, (D) 15 - - 250 200 75 60 95 45 55 3 3
H36 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H18, H28, (D) 10 - 5 270 220 80 65 100 45 60 2 2
H38 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
EN AW-5154A 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16 14
AlMg3,5(A) (S) 60 - - 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16 14
H14, H24, (D) 25 - 10 260 200 80 65 95 45 60 5 4
H34 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H18, H28, (D) 10 - 5 310 240 95 75 110 55 70 3 2
H38 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
EN AW-5754 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 16 14
AlMg3 (S) 60 - - 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 16 14
3.3535 H14, H24, (D) 25 - 10 240 180 70 60 90 40 55 4 3
H34 (S) 5 - - 240 180 70 60 90 40 55 4 3
H18, H28, (D) 10 - 3 280 240 85 70 105 50 65 3 2
H38 (S) 3 - - 280 240 85 70 105 50 65 3 2
EN AW-5083 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 270 110 80 65 100 45 60 16 14
AlMg4,5Mn0,7 (S) 60 - - 270 110 80 65 100 45 60 16 14
3.3547 H12, H22, (D) 30 - 10 280 200 85 70 105 50 65 6 4
H32 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H14, H24, - - - 5 300 235 90 70 110 50 65 4 3
H34 - - - - - - - - - - -
5.1 Material tables 131 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.17, continued page 2 of 2

Material, chemical Condition Bars/rods Tubes Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A A50
composition D; S —1 e —1 % %
[mm] [mm] —2 —2
DIN No. from to from to
EN AW-5086 0, H111 (D) 80 - 20 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 16 14
AlMg4 (S) 60 - - 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 16 14
3.3545 H12, H22, (D) 30 - 10 270 190 80 65 100 45 60 5 4
H32 (S) - - - - - - - - - - - -
H14, H24, - - - 5 295 230 90 70 110 50 65 3 2
H34 - - - - - - - - - - -
H16, H26, - - - 3 320 260 95 75 115 55 70 2 1
H36 - - - - - - - - - - -
EN AW-6012 T4 - 80 - 20 200 100 60 50 75 35 45 10 8
AlMgSiPb T6 - 80 - 20 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 8 5
3.0615
EN AW-6060 T4 - 80 - - 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 15 13
AlMgSi - - - 5 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 12 10
3.3206 - 5 20 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 15 13
T6 - 80 - 20 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 12 10
-
EN AW-6061 0, - 80 - 20 < 150 < 110 < 45 < 40 < 60 < 25 < 35 16 14
AlMg1SiCu H111
3.3211 T4 - 80 - 20 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 16 14
T6 - 80 - 20 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 10 8
EN AW-6262 T6 - 80 - 5 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 10 8
AlMg1SiPn - - 5 20 290 240 85 70 105 50 65 10 8
T8 - 50 - 10 345 315 105 80 125 60 75 4 3
T9 - 50 - 10 360 330 110 80 130 60 80 4 3
EN AW-6063 T4 - 80 - - 150 75 45 40 60 25 35 15 13
AlMg0,7Si - - - 5 150 75 45 40 60 25 35 12 10
- - 5 20 150 75 45 40 60 25 35 15 13
T6 - 80 - 20 220 190 65 55 85 40 50 10 8
T66 - 80 20 230 195 70 60 85 40 55 10 8
T832 - - - 5 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 5 3
EN AW-6063A 0, - 80 - 20 < 140 - < 40 < 40 < 55 <25 <35 15 13
AlMg0,7Si(A) H111
T4 - 80 - 20 150 90 45 40 60 25 35 16 14
T6 - 80 - 20 230 190 70 60 85 40 55 9 7
EN AW-6082 0, - 80 - 20 < 160 < 110 <50 < 45 < 65 < 30 < 40 15 13
AlSi1MgMn H111
3.2315 T4 - 80 - 20 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 4 12
T6 - 80 - - 310 255 95 75 110 55 70 10 9
- - - 5 310 255 95 75 110 55 70 8 7
- - 5 20 310 240 95 75 110 55 70 10 9
EN AW-7020 T6 (D) 80 - 20 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 8
AlZn4,5Mg1 (S) 50 - - 350 280 105 80 125 60 75 10 8
3.4335
EN AW-7022 T6 - 80 - 20 460 380 140 95 155 80 100 8 6
AlZn5Mg3Cu - - - - - - - - - - -
3.4345 - - - - - - - - - - -
EN AW-7049A T6 - 80 - - 590 500 175 115 195 100 120 7 5
AlZn8MgCu T6, T6510, - - - 5 590 530 175 115 195 100 120 6 4
T6511 - - 5 20 590 530 175 115 195 100 120 7 5
EN AW-7075 0, - 80 - 20 < 275 < 165 < 85 < 65 < 100 < 50 < 60 10 8
AlZn5,5MgCu H111
3.4365 T6 - 80 - 20 540 485 160 110 180 95 115 7 6
T651 - 80 - - 540 485 160 110 180 95 115 5 4
T6510, - - - 20 540 485 160 110 180 95 115 5 4
T6511 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
T73 - 80 - 20 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 10 8
T7351 - 80 - - 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 8 6
T73510 - - - 20 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 8 6
T73511 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5.1 Material tables 132 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for wrought aluminum alloys, extruded bars/rods, tubes and profiles
in accordance with DIN EN 755-2 (June 2008)

Numerical desig- Condition Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A

nation, Bars/rods S
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
Profiles e —3
DIN symbol,
[mm]
DIN No.

—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-2007 T4 D - 80 370 250 110 85 130 65 80 8
AlCuMgPb T4510 S - 80
3.1645 T4511 eR - 25
eP - 30
D >80 200 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 8
S >80 200
eR - -
eP - -
D >200 250 330 210 100 75 120 55 75 7
S >200 250
eR - -
eP - -
EN AW-2011 T4 D - 200 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 14
AlCuBiPb S - 60
3.1655 eR - -
eP - -
T6 D - 75 310 230 95 75 110 55 70 8
S - 60
eR - 25
eP - -
D >75 200 295 195 90 70 110 50 65 6
S - -
eR - -
eP - -
EN AW-2011A T4 D - 200 275 125 85 65 100 50 60 14
- S - 60
- eR - -
eP - -
T6 D - 75 310 230 95 75 110 55 70 8
S - 60
eR - 25
eP - -
D >75 200 295 195 90 70 110 50 65 6
S - -
eR - -
eP - -
EN AW-2014 O D - 200 <250 <135 < 75 < 60 < 95 < 45 <55 12
AlCuSiMn H111 S - 200
3.1255 eR - 20
eP - all
und T4 D - 25 370 230 110 85 130 65 80 13
T4510 S - 25
EN AW-2014A T4511 eR - 20
- eP - 25
- D >25 20 410 270 125 90 145 70 90 12
S >25 25
eR >25 75 10
eP - 75
D >75 75 390 250 115 85 135 70 85 10
S >75 -
eR - 150
eP - 150

D >150 - 350 230 105 80 125 60 75 8

S >150 -

eR - -

eP - -
—1 Sequence and designations in accordance with DIN EN 755-2, page 2. —2 The values "F" are for information only.
—3 D: diam. of round rods, S: width across flats of square or hexag. rods, S: thickness of rectang. rods, e: wall thickn. of tubes and profiles.
—4 "<" for R and R means that only maximum values of R and R are given in DIN EN 755-2. For the strength assessment, however, minimum
m p m p
values are required.
—5 Elongation at break referring to an initial length of the specimens of 5,65 x (specimen area)1/2.
—6 Open = open profile, hollow = hollow profile.
5.1 Material tables 133 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 1 of 9

Numerical designa- Condition Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A
tion, Bars/rods S %
EN AW-}, Tubes e
DIN symbol, Profiles e —3
DIN No. [mm]
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-2014 T6 D - 25 415 370 125 90 145 70 90 6
AlCuSiMn T6510 S - 25
3.1255 T6511 eR - 10 7
eP - 25
und
D >25 75 460 415 140 95 160 80 100 7
EN AW-2014A S >25 75
- eR - -
- eP >25 75
continued
D >75 150 465 420 140 95 160 80 100 7
S >75 150
eR - -
eP - -
D >150 200 430 350 130 95 150 75 95 6
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
D >200 250 420 320 125 90 145 75 90 5
S >200 250
eR >10 40 450 400 135 95 155 80 95 6
eP - -

EN AW-2017A O D - 200 <250 <135 < 75 <60 < 95 < 45 < 55 12

AlCuMg1 H111 S - 200
3.1325 eR - 20
eP - -
T4 D - 25 380 260 115 85 135 65 85 12
T4510 S - 25
T4511 eR - 10
eP - 30 10
D >25 75 400 270 120 90 140 70 85 10
S >25 75
eR >10 75
eP - -
D >75 150 390 260 115 85 135 70 85 9
S >75 150
eR - -
eP - -
D >150 200 370 240 110 85 130 65 80 8
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
D >200 250 360 220 110 80 130 60 80 7
S >200 250
eR - -
eP - -
EN AW-2024 O D - 200 <250 <150 < 75 < 60 < 95 < 45 < 55 12
AlCuMg2 H111 S - 200
3.1355 eR - 30
eP - all
—1 to —6, see page 134.
5.1 Material tables 134 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 2 of 9

Numerical Condi- Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,z VW,b WW,s WW,t A
designation, tion Bars/rods S d
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
Profiles e —3
DIN symbol,
[mm]
DIN No.
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-2024 T3 D - 50 450 310 135 95 155 80 95 8
AlCuMg2 T3510 S - 50
3.1355 continued T3511 eR - -
eP - -
D >50 100 440 300 130 95 150 75 95 8
S >50 100
eR - -
eP - -
D >100 200 420 280 125 90 145 75 90 8
S >100 200
eR - 30
eP >15 50
D >200 250 400 270 120 90 140 70 85 8
S >200 250 125 90 145 75 90 8
eR - 15 395 290 120 85 140 70 85 8
eP - -
T8 D - 150 455 380 135 95 155 80 95 5
T8510 S - 150
T8511 eR - 30
eP - 50
EN AW-2030 T4 D - 80 370 250 110 85 130 65 80 8
- T4510 S - 80
- T4511 eR - 25
eP - 30
D >80 200 340 220 100 80 120 60 75 8
S >80 200
eR - -
eP - -
D >200 250 330 210 100 75 120 60 75 7
S >200 250
eR - -
eP - -
EN AW-3003 F D - all 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25
AlMnCu H112 S - all
3.0517 O eR - all
H111 eP - all
EN AW-3103 F D - all 95 35 30 25 40 15 25 25
AlMn1 H112 S - all
3.0515 O eR - all
H111 eP - all
EN AW-5005 F D - all 100 40 30 30 40 17 25 18
- H112 S - all
- eR - all
eP - all

O D - all 100 40 30 30 40 17 25 20
H111 S - all
eR - all
eP - -
EN AW-5005A F D - all 100 40 30 30 40 17 25 18
AlMg1 H112 S - all
3.3315 eR - all
eP - all
O D - all 100 40 30 30 40 17 25 20
H111 S - all
eR - all
eP - -
EN AW-5051A F D - all 150 50 45 40 60 25 35 16
AlMg1,8 H112 S - all
3.3326 eR - all 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 16
eP - all
O D - all 150 50 45 40 60 25 35 18
H111 S - all
eR - all 150 60 45 40 60 25 35 18
eP - -
—1 to —6 see page 134.
5.1 Material tables 135 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 3 of 9

Numerical desig- Condition Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A
nation, Bars/rods S %
EN AW-}, Tubes e
DIN symbol, Profiles e —3
DIN No. [mm]
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-5251 F D - all 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 16
AlMg2Mn0,3 H112 S - all
3.3525 eR - all
eP - all
O D - all 160 60 50 45 65 30 40 17
H111 S - all
eR - all
eP - -
EN AW-5052 F D - all 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 15
AlMg2,5 H112 S - all
3.3523 eR - all
eP - all
O D - all 170 70 50 45 65 30 40 17
H111 S - all
eR - all
eP - -
EN AW-5154A F D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16
- H112 S - 200
- eR - 25
eP - 25
O D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 18
H111 S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 25
EN AW-5454 F D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 16
AlMg2,7Mn H112 S - 200
3.3537 eR - 25
eP - 25
O D - 200 200 85 60 50 75 35 45 18
H111 S - 200
eR - 25
eP - -
EN AW-5754A F D - 150 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 14
AlMg3 H112 S - 150
3.3535 eR - 25
eP - 25
D >150 250 180 70 55 45 70 30 40 13
S >150 250
eR - -
eP - -
O D - 150 180 80 55 45 70 30 40 17
H111 S - 150
eR - 25
eP - -
EN AW-5019 F D - 200 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 14
AlMg5 H112 S - 200
3.3555 eR - 30
eP - 30
O D - 200 250 110 75 60 95 45 55 15
H111 S - 200
eR - 30
eP - -
EN AW-5083 F D - 200 270 110 80 65 100 45 60 12
AlMg4,5Mn O S - 200
3.3547 H111 eR - all
eP - all
D >200 250 260 100 80 65 95 45 60 12
S >200 250
eR - -
eP - -

H112 D - 200 270 125 80 65 100 45 60 12

S - 200
eR - all
eP - all

—1 to —6 see page 134.

5.1 Material tables 136 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 4 of 9

Numerical Conditi- Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A
designation, on Bars/rods S
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
Profiles e —3
DIN symbol,
[mm]
DIN No.
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-5086 F D - 250 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 12
AlMg4Mn H112 S - 250
3.3545 eR - all
eP - all
O D - 200 240 95 70 60 90 40 55 18
H111 S - 200
eR - all
eP - -
EN AW-6101A T6 D - 150 200 170 60 50 75 35 45 10
- S - 150
- eR - all
eP - all
EN AW-6101B T6 D - 15 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 8
E-AlMgSi0,5 S - 15
3.3207 eR - 15
eP - 15
T7 D - 15 170 120 50 45 65 30 40 12
S - 15
eR - 15
eP - -
EN AW-6005 T6 D - 25 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 10
- S - 25
- eR - 5
eP - -
D ->25 50 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
S >25 50
eR - 5
eP - -
D >50 100 260 215 80 65 95 45 60 8
S >50 100
eR >5 10
eP - -
T4 open eP - 25 180 90 55 45 70 30 40 15
T4 hollow —6 - 10
T6 open eP - 5 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
—6 >5 10 260 215 80 65 95 45 60
>10 25 250 200 75 60 95 45 60
T6 hollow - 5 255 215 75 65 95 45 60
>5 15 250 200 75 60 95 45 60
EN AW-6005A T6 D - 25 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 10
AlMgSi0,7 S - 25
3.3210 eR - 5 8
eP - -
D >25 50 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
S >25 50
eR - 5
eP - -
D >50 100 260 215 80 65 95 45 60 8
S >50 100
eR >5 10
eP - -
T4 open eP - 25 180 90 55 45 70 30 40 15
T4 hollow —6 - 10
T6 open eP - 5 270 225 80 65 100 45 60 8
—6 >5 10 260 215 80 65 95 45 60
>10 25 250 200 75 60 95 45 60
T6 hollow - 5 255 215 75 65 95 45 60
>5 15 250 200 75 60 95 45 60
EN AW-6106 T6 D - -
- S - -
- eR - -
eP - 10 250 200 75 60 95 45 60 8
—1 to —6 see page 134.
5.1 Material tables 137 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 5 of 9

Numerical Conditi- Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,z VW,b WW,s WW,t A
designation, on Bars/rods S d
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
DIN symbol, Profiles e —3

DIN No. [mm]

—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-6012 T6 D - 150 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 8
AlMgSiPb T6510 S - 150
3.0165 T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >150 200 260 200 80 65 95 45 60 8
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -

EN AW-6018 T6 D - 150 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 8

- T6510 S - 150
- T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >150 200 260 200 80 65 95 45 60 8
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
EN AW-6351 O D - 200 < 160 < 110 < 50 <45 < 65 <30 <40 14
- H111 S - 200
- eR - 25
eP - all
T4 D - 200 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 25
T5 open eP - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
T5 hollow —6 - -
T6 open eP - 5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 8
T6 hollow —6 >5 25 300 255 90 70 110 50 65 10
EN AW-6060 T4 D - 150 120 60 35 35 50 20 30 16
AlMgSi0,5 S - 150
3.3206 eR - 15
eP - 25
T5 D - 150 160 120 50 45 60 30 40 8
S - 150
eR - 15
eP - 5
>5 25 140 100 40 40 55 25 35 8
T6 D - 150 190 150 55 50 75 35 45 8
S - 150
eR - 15
eP - 3
>3 25 170 140 50 45 65 30 40 8
T64 D - 50 180 120 55 45 70 30 40 12
S - 50
eR - 15
eP - 15
T66 D - 150 215 160 65 55 80 35 50 8
S - 150
eR - 15
eP - 3
>3 25 195 150 60 50 75 35 45 8
EN AW-6061 O D - 200 < 150 < 110 < 45 < 40 < 60 < 25 < 35 16
AlMg1SiCu H111 S - 200
3.3211 eR - 25
eP - 25
T4 D - 200 180 110 55 45 70 30 40 15
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 25
T6 D - 200 260 240 80 65 95 45 60 8
S - 200
eR - 5 8
>5 25 10
eP - 5 9
>5 25 10
—1 to —6 see page 134.
5.1 Material tables 138 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 6 of 9

Numerical Conditi- Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A
designation, on Bars/rods S
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
Profiles e —3
DIN symbol,
[mm]
DIN No.
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-6261 O D - 100 < 170 < 120 < 50 < 45 < 65 < 30 < 40 14
- H111 S - 100
- eR - 10
eP - 10
T4 D - 100 180 100 55 45 70 30 40 14
S - 100
eR - 10
eP - 25
T6 D - 20 290 245 85 70 105 50 65 8
>20 100
S - 20
>20 100
eR - 5
>5 10 9
eP - 5 8
>5 10 9
T5 open eP - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
—6 >5 25 260 220 80 65 95 45 60 9
>25 - 250 210 75 60 95 45 60 9
T5 hollow - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
>5 10 260 220 80 65 95 45 60 9
T6 open eP - 5 290 245 85 70 105 50 65 8
—6 >5 25 280 235 85 70 105 50 65 8
T6 hollow - 5 290 245 85 70 105 50 65 8
>5 10 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 9

EN AW-6262 T6 D - 200 260 240 80 65 95 45 60 10

- S - 200
- eR - 25
eP - 25
EN AW-6063 O D - 200 < 130 - < 40 < 35 < 50 < 25 < 30 18
- H111 S - 200
- eR - 25
eP - -
T4 D - 150 130 65 40 35 50 25 30 14
S - 150
eR - 10
eP - 25
D >150 200 120 65 35 35 50 20 30 12
S >150 200
eR >10 25
eP - -
T5 D - 200 175 130 55 45 70 30 40 8
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 3
>3 25 160 110 50 45 65 30 40 7
T6 D - 150 215 170 65 55 80 35 50 10
S - 150
eR - 25
eP - 10 8
D >150 200 195 160 60 50 75 35 45 10
S >150 200
eR - -
eP >10 25 8
T66 D - 200 245 200 75 60 90 40 55 10
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 10 8
>10 25 225 180 70 55 85 40 50 8
T64 D - -
S - -
eR - -
eP - 15 180 120 55 45 70 30 40 12
——1 to —6 see page 134.

Table 5.1.18, continued page 7 of 9

5.1 Material tables 139 5 Annexes

Numerical Conditi- Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A

designation, on Bars/rods S
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
Profiles e —3
DIN symbol,
[mm]
DIN No.
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-6063 O, H111 D - 200 < 150 - < 45 < 40 < 60 < 25 < 35 16
- S - 200
- eR - 25
eP - -
T4 D - 150 150 90 45 40 60 25 35 12
S - 150
eR - 10
eP - 25
D >150 200 140 90 40 40 55 25 35 10
S >150 200
eR >10 25
eP - -
T5 D - 200 200 160 60 50 75 35 45 7
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 10
>10 25 190 150 60 50 75 35 45 6
T6 D - 150 230 190 70 60 85 40 55 7
S - 150
eR - 25
eP - 10
D >150 200 220 160 65 55 85 40 50 7
S >150 200
eR >10 25 220 180 65 55 85 40 50 5
eP - -

EN AW-6463 T4 D - 150 125 75 40 35 50 20 30 14

- S - 150
- eR - -
eP - 50
T5 D - 150 150 110 45 40 60 25 35 8
S - 150
eR - -
eP - 50
T6 D - 150 195 160 60 50 75 35 45 10
S - 150
eR - 25
eP - 50
EN AW-6081 T6 D - 250 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 8
- S - 250
- eR - 25
eP -
T6 open eP - 25 275 240 85 65 100 50 60 8
T6 hollow —6 - 15
EN AW-6082 O, H111 D - 200 < 160 < 110 < 50 < 45 < 65 <30 <40 14
AlMgSi1 S - 200
3.2315 eR - 25
eP - all
T4 D - 200 205 110 60 55 80 35 50 14
S - 200
eR - 25
eP - 25
T5 open eP - 5 270 230 80 65 100 45 60 8
T5 hollow —6 - -
T6 open eP - 5 290 250 85 70 105 50 65 8
T6 hollow —6 >5 15 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10
—1 to —6 see page 134.
5.1 Material tables 140 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 8 of 9

Numerical Conditi- Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A
designation, on Bars/rods S
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
Profiles e —3
DIN symbol,
[mm]
DIN No.
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-7003 T5 D - all 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 10
- S - all
- eR - all
eP - all
T6 D - 50 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10
S - 50
eR - 10
eP - 10
D >50 150 340 280 100 80 120 60 75 10
S >50 150
eR >10 25
eP >10- 25
EN AW-7005 T6 D - 50 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10
- S - 50
- eR - 15
eP - 40
D >50 200 340 270 100 80 120 60 75 10
S >50 200
eR -
eP -
EN AW-7020 T6 D - 50 350 290 105 80 125 60 75 10
AlZn4,5Mg1 S - 50
3.4335 eR - 15
eP - 40
D >50 200 340 275 100 80 120 60 75 10
S >50 200
eR -
eP -
EN AW-7022 T6, D - 80 490 420 145 100 165 85 105 7
AlZn5Mg3Cu T6510 S - 80
3.4345 T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >80 200 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 7
S >80 200
eR -
eP -
EN AW-7049A T6, D - 100 610 530 185 115 200 105 125 5
AlZnMgCu0,5 T6510, S - 100
3.4345 T6511 eR - 30
eP - 30
D >100 125 560 500 170 110 185 95 115 5
S >100 125
eR - -
eP - -
D >125 150 520 430 155 105 175 90 110 5
S >125 150
eR - -
eP - -
D >150 180 450 400 135 95 155 80 95 3
S >150 180
eR - -
eP - -
—1 to —6 see page 134.
5.1 Material tables 141 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.18, continued page 9 of 9

Numerical Conditi- Bars/rods D Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,zd VW,b WW,s WW,t A
designation, on Bars/rods S
%
Tubes e
EN AW-},
Profiles e —3
DIN symbol,
[mm]
DIN No.
—1 —2 from to —4 —5
EN AW-7075 O D - 200 < 275 < 165 < 85 < 65 <100 < 50 < 60 10
AlZnMgCu1,5 H111 S - 200
3.4365 eR - 10
eP - -
T6 D - 25 540 480 160 110 180 95 115 7
T6510 S - 25
T6511 eR - 5 8
eP >25 60 6
D >25 100 560 500 170 110 185 95 115 7
S >25 100
eR 5 10
eP - -
D >100 150 530 470 160 105 175 90 110 6
S >100 150
eR - -
eP - 25 530 460 160 105 175 90 110 6
D >150 200 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 5
S >150 200
eR - -
eP - -
T73 D - 25 485 420 145 100 165 85 100 7
T73510 S - 25
T73511 eR 5 25
eP - 25
D >25 75 475 405 145 100 160 80 100 7
S >25 75
eR >25 50 8
eP - -
D >75 100 470 390 140 100 160 80 100 6
S >75 100 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 7
eR >5 25 485 420 145 100 165 85 105 8
- 5 470 400 145 100 160 80 100 7
eP - -
D >100 150 440 360 130 95 150 75 100 6
S >100 150
eR - -
eP - -
—1 to —6 see page 134.
5.1 Material tables 142 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.19 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for wrought aluminum alloys, forgings in accordance with
DIN EN 586-2 (November 1994)
Material Product Con- Section size Testing Rm Rp VW,z VSch, VW,b WW,s WW,t A
dition t direc- d zd %
tion —1
EN AW-2014 forgings of any T4 t d 150 L 370 270 110 85 130 65 80 11
Al Cu4SiMg kind
die forgings t d 50 L 440 380 130 95 150 75 95 6
T6 or T 430 370 130 95 150 75 95 3
50 < t d 100 L 440 370 130 95 150 75 95 6
or T 430 360 130 95 150 75 95 3
hammer forgings T652 t d 75 L 440 380 130 95 150 75 95 8
or LT 430 370 130 95 150 75 95 4
or ST 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 3
75 < t d 150 L 420 370 125 90 145 75 90 7
or LT 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4
or ST 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 3
150 < t d 200 L 410 360 125 90 145 70 90 6
or LT 410 350 125 90 145 70 90 3
or ST 400 340 120 90 140 70 85 2
EN AW-2024 forgings of any T4 t d 100 L 420 260 125 90 145 75 90 8
AlCu4Mg1 kind
EN AW-5083 forgings of any H112 t d 150 L 270 120 80 65 100 45 60 12
AlMg4,5Mn0,7 kind or T 260 110 80 65 95 45 60 10
EN AW-5754 forgings of any H112 t d 150 L 180 80 55 50 70 30 40 15
AlMg3 kind
EN AW-6082 forgings of any T6 t d 100 L 310 260 95 75 110 55 70 6
AlSi1MgMn kind or T 290 250 90 70 105 50 65 5
EN AW-7075 die forgings T6 t d 50 L 510 430 155 105 170 90 105 7
Al Zn5,5MgCu or T 480 410 145 100 165 85 100 4
50 < t d 100 L 500 425 150 105 170 85 105 6
or T 470 400 140 100 160 80 100 4
T73 t d 50 L 455 385 135 95 155 80 95 6
or T 420 360 125 90 145 75 90 4
50 < t d 100 L 445 375 135 95 150 80 95 6
or T 410 350 125 90 140 70 90 3
hammer forgings T652 t < 75 L 490 415 145 100 165 85 105 6
or LT 480 400 145 100 160 85 100 4
or ST 470 390 140 100 160 80 100 3
75 < t d 150 L 470 385 140 100 160 80 100 6
or LT 460 375 140 95 160 80 100 4
or ST 445 370 135 95 155 75 95 3
T7352 t d 75 L 450 370 135 95 155 80 95 6
or LT 440 360 130 95 150 75 95 4
or ST 430 350 130 95 150 75 95 3
75 < t d 150 L 420 350 125 90 145 75 90 6
or LT 410 340 125 90 145 70 90 4
or ST 395 330 120 85 140 70 85 3
—1 L Direction parallel to the main grain flow;
LT Direction parallel to larger cross-sectional dimension (width);
T Direction not parallel to the main grain flow;
ST Direction parallel to smaller cross-sectional dimension (thickness) (usually forging direction).
5.1 Material tables 143 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.20 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for cast aluminum alloys, sand cast alloys, separately cast test pieces
in accordance with DIN EN 1706 (June 2010)
Alloy designation Con- Rm Rp VW,z VSch,z VW,b WW,s WW,t A50 Hard
dition d d ness
Numerical Chemical symbols % HBS
EN AC-21000 EN AC-Al Cu4MgTi T4 300 200 90 60 130 65 100 5 90
EN AC-21100 EN AC-Al Cu4Ti T6 300 200 90 60 130 65 100 3 95
T64 280 180 85 55 125 65 95 5 85
EN AC-21200 EN AC-Al Cu5MgMn T4 330 225 100 65 145 75 110 3 100
T7 370 310 110 70 160 85 125 2 110
EN AC-41000 EN AC-Al Si2MgTi F 140 70 40 30 65 30 50 3 50
T6 240 180 70 50 105 55 80 3 85
EN AC-42000 EN AC-Al Si7Mg F 140 80 40 30 65 30 50 2 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 1 75
EN AC-42100 EN AC-Al Si7Mg0,3 T6 230 190 70 50 105 50 80 2 75
EN AC-42200 EN AC-Al Si7Mg0,6 T6 250 210 75 50 110 55 85 1 85
EN AC-43000 EN AC-Al Si10Mg(a) F 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 2 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 1 75
EN AC-43100 EN AC-Al Si10Mg(b) F 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 2 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 1 75
EN AC-43200 EN AC-Al Si10Mg(Cu) F 160 80 50 35 75 35 55 1 50
T6 220 180 65 45 100 50 75 1 75
EN AC-43300 EN AC-Al Si9Mg T6 230 190 70 50 105 50 80 2 75
EN AC-44000 EN AC-Al Si11 F 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 6 45
EN AC-44100 EN AC-Al Si12(b) F 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 4 50
EN AC-44200 EN AC-Al Si12(a) F 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 5 50
EN AC-44400 EN AC-Al Si9 F 170 80 50 37 75 38 60 4 50
EN AC-45000 EN AC-Al Si6Cu4 F 150 90 45 35 70 35 50 1 60
EN AC-45300 EN AC-Al Si5Cu1Mg T4 170 120 50 35 75 40 60 2 80
T6 230 200 70 50 105 50 80 <1 100
EN AC-45500 EN AC-Al Si7Cu0,5Mg T6 250 190 75 50 110 55 85 1 85
EN AC-46200 EN AC-Al Si8Cu3 F 150 90 45 35 70 35 50 1 60
EN AC-46400 EN AC-Al Si9Cu1Mg F 135 90 40 30 60 30 45 1 60
EN AC-46600 EN AC-Al Si7Cu2 F 150 90 45 35 70 35 50 1 60
EN AC-47000 EN AC-Al Si12(Cu) F 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 1 50
EN AC-51100 EN AC-Al Mg3(a) F 140 70 40 30 65 30 50 3 50
EN AC-51300 EN AC-Al Mg5 F 160 90 50 35 75 35 55 3 55
EN AC-51400 EN AC-Al Mg5(Si) F 160 100 50 35 75 35 55 3 60
EN AC-71100 EN AC-Al Zn10Si8Mg T1 210 190 65 45 95 47 70 1 90
5.1 Material tables 144 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.21 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for cast aluminum alloys, chill cast alloys, separately cast test pieces
in accordance with DIN EN 1706 (June 2010)
Alloy designation Zst. Rm Rp VW,z VSch,z VW,b WW,s WW,t A50 Hard
d d ness
Numerical Chemical symbols % HBS
EN AC-21000 EN AC-Al Cu4MgTi T4 320 200 95 65 140 70 105 8 95
EN AC-21100 EN AC-Al Cu4Ti T6 330 220 100 65 145 75 110 7 95
T64 320 180 95 65 140 70 105 8 90
EN AC-21200 EN AC-Al Cu5MgMn T4 400 240 120 75 170 90 130 7 95
T7 410 325 125 75 175 90 135 8 90
EN AC-41000 EN AC-Al Si2MgTi F 170 70 50 35 75 40 60 5 50
T6 260 180 80 55 115 60 90 5 85
EN AC-42000 EN AC-Al Si7Mg F 170 90 50 35 75 40 60 2,5 55
T6 260 220 80 55 115 60 90 1 90
T64 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 2 80
EN AC-42100 EN AC-Al Si7Mg0,3 T6 290 210 85 60 130 65 100 4 90
T64 250 180 75 50 110 55 85 8 80
EN AC-42200 EN AC-Al Si7Mg0,6 T6 320 240 95 65 140 70 105 3 100
T64 290 210 85 60 130 65 100 6 90
EN AC-43000 EN AC-Al Si10Mg(a) F 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 2,5 55
T6 260 220 80 55 115 60 90 1 90
T64 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 2 80
EN AC-43100 EN AC-Al Si10Mg(b) F 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 2,5 55
T6 260 220 80 55 115 60 90 1 90
T64 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 2 80
EN AC-43200 EN AC-Al Si10Mg(Cu) F 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 1 55
T6 240 200 70 50 105 55 80 1 80
EN AC-43300 EN AC-Al Si9Mg T6 290 210 85 60 130 65 100 4 90
T64 250 180 75 50 110 55 85 6 80
EN AC-44000 EN AC-Al Si11 F 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 7 45
EN AC-44100 EN AC-Al Si12(b) F 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 5 55
EN AC-44200 EN AC-Al Si12(a) F 170 80 50 35 75 40 60 6 55
EN AC-44400 EN AC-Al Si9 F 180 90 55 40 80 40 60 5 55
EN AC-45000 EN AC-Al Si6Cu4 F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
EN AC-45100 EN AC-Al Si5Cu3Mg T4 270 180 80 55 120 60 90 2,5 85
T6 320 280 95 65 140 70 105 <1 110
EN AC-45300 EN AC-Al Si5Cu1Mg T4 230 140 70 50 105 50 80 3 85
T6 280 210 85 55 125 65 95 <1 110
EN AC-45400 EN AC-Al Si5Cu3 T4 230 110 70 50 105 50 80 6 75
EN AC-45500 EN AC-Al Si7Cu0,5Mg T6 320 240 95 65 140 70 105 4 100
EN AC-46200 EN AC-Al Si8Cu3 F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
EN AC-46300 EN AC-Al Si7Cu3Mg F 180 100 55 40 80 40 60 1 80
EN AC-46400 EN AC-Al Si9Cu1Mg F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
T6 275 235 85 55 120 60 95 1,5 105
EN AC-46600 EN AC-Al Si7Cu2 F 170 100 50 35 75 40 60 1 75
EN AC-47000 EN AC-Al Si12(Cu) F 170 90 50 35 75 40 60 2 55
EN AC-48000 EN AC-Al Si12CuNiMg T5 200 185 60 45 90 45 70 <1 90
T6 280 240 85 55 125 65 95 <1 100
EN AC-51100 EN AC-Al Mg3(a) F 150 70 45 35 70 35 50 5 50
EN AC-51300 EN AC-Al Mg5 F 180 100 55 40 80 40 60 4 60
EN AC-51400 EN AC-Al MG5(Si) F 180 110 55 40 80 40 60 3 65
EN AC-71100 EN AC-Al Zn10Si8Mg T1 260 210 80 55 115 60 90 1 100
5.1 Material tables 145 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.22 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for cast aluminum alloys, investment cast alloys, separately cast test
pieces in accordance with DIN EN 1706 (June 2010)
Alloy designation Zst. Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,z VW,b WW,s WW,t A50 Hardness
d HBS
Numerical Chemical symbols %
EN AC-21000 EN AC-Al Cu4MgTi T4 300 220 90 60 130 70 100 5 90
EN AC-42000 EN AC-Al Si7Mg F 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 2 50
T6 240 190 70 50 105 55 80 1 75
EN AC-42100 EN AC-Al Si7Mg0,3 T6 260 200 80 55 115 60 90 3 75
EN AC-42200 EN AC-Al Si7Mg0,6 T6 290 240 85 60 130 65 100 2 85
EN AC-44100 EN AC-Al Si12(b) F 150 80 45 35 70 35 50 4 50
EN AC-45200 EN AC-Al Si17Cu4Mg F 200 180 60 43 90 45 70 1 90
T5 295 260 90 60 130 65 100 1 125
EN AC-51300 EN AC-Al Mg5 F 170 95 50 35 75 40 60 3 55

Table 5.1.23 Characteristic strength values, in MPa, for cast aluminum alloys, pressure die cast alloys, separately cast test
pieces in accordance with DIN EN 1706 (June 2010), not mandatory, for information only
Alloy designation Zst. Rm Rp VW,zd VSch,z VW,b WW,s WW,t A50 Hardness
d HBS
Numerical Chemical symbols %
EN AC-43400 EN AC-Al Si10Mg(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 1 70
EN AC-43500 EN AC-Al Si10MnMg F 250 120 75 50 110 55 85 5 65
T5 270 150 80 55 120 60 90 4 80
T7 200 120 60 43 90 45 70 12 60
EN AC-44300 EN AC-Al Si12(Fe)(a) F 240 130 70 50 105 55 80 1 60
EN AC-44400 EN AC-Al Si9 F 220 120 65 45 100 50 75 2 55
EN AC-44500 EN AC-Al Si12(Fe)(b) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 1 60
EN AC-46000 EN AC-Al Si9Cu3(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 <1 80
EN AC-46100 EN AC-Al Si11Cu2(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 <1 80
EN AC-46200 EN AC-Al Si8Cu3 F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 1 80
EN AC-46500 EN AC-Al Si9Cu3(Fe)(Zn) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 <1 80
EN AC-47100 EN AC-Al Si12Cu1(Fe) F 240 140 70 50 105 55 80 1 70
EN AC-48100 EN AC-Al Si17Cu4Mg F 220 160 65 45 100 50 75 <1 90
EN AC-51200 EN AC-Al Mg9 F 200 130 60 43 90 45 70 1 70
EN AC-51500 EN AC-Al Mg5Si2Mn F 250 140 75 50 110 55 85 5 70
5.1 Material tables 146 5 Annexes

5.1.3 Static strength values for welded components made of steel

Table 5.1.24 Static strength of steel and cast iron in welded components, base material BM: yield stress Re, tensile
strength Rm,
in accordance with DIN 18800 (November 1990) and application guide on structural steelwork (December 2001) for S690
in accordance with DIN EN 1993-1-12 (December 2010)
0 1 2 3 4
No. Material type t Re Rm
[mm] [MPa] [MPa]
Structural steel
1 S235 } 40 240 360
2 40 } 100 215
3 S275 } 40 275 410
4 40 } 80 255
5 S355 } 40 360 470
6 40 } 80 335
7 S450 } 40 440 550
8 40 … 80 410
Fine grain structural steel
9 S275 N, NL, M, ML } 40 275 370
10 P275 NH, NL1, NL2 40 … 80 255
11 S355 N, NL … 40 360 470
12 P355 N, NH, NL1, NL2, QH1 40 … 80 335
13 S355 M/ML … 40 360 450
14 40 … 80 335
15 S420 N/NL … 40 420 520
16 40 … 80 390
17 S420 M/ML … 40 420 520
18 40 … 80 390 500
19 S460 N/NL … 40 460 550
20 40 … 80 430
21 S460 M/ML … 40 460 530
22 40 … 80 430
S690 … 50 690 770
50 … 100 650
Heat treatable steel
23 C35+N … 16 300 550
24 16 … 100 270 520
25 C45+N … 16 340 620
26 16 … 100 305 580
Cast materials
27 GS200 … 100 200 380
28 GS240 … 100 240 450
29 GE200 … 160 200 380
30 GE240 … 160 240 450
31 G17Mn5+QT … 50 240 450
32 G20Mn5+N … 30 300 480
33 G20Mn5+QT … 100 300 500
34 EN-GJS-400-15 … 60 250 390
35 EN-GJS-400-18 … 60 250 390
36 EN-GJS-400-18-LT … 60 230 390
37 EN-GJS-400-18-RT … 60 250 390
5.1 Material tables 147 5 Annexes

5.1.4 Static strength values for welded aluminum components

Table 5.1.25 Static strength of aluminum in welded components in accordance with DIN 4113-1/A1, Table 1, and
DIN 4113-2, Table 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

* 2a 3a 4a 2b 3b 4b 2c 3c 4c

Line Material Rm Rp dmax UWEZ

AW- B R P B R P B R P

1 6005A.T6 250 200 25 0,63

2a 6060.T6 215 170 160 140 20 25 0,55

2b 6060.T66 195 150 25 0,55

3 6061.T6/T651 290 290 260 240 240 240 100 20 25 0,61

4a 6063.T6 220 195 190 160 20 25 0,51

4b 6063.T66 230 225 195 180 20 25 0,53

5a 6082.T6/T651 295 310 290 240 240 250 100 20 25 0,55

5b 6082.T61/T6151 275 200 175 0,70

5b 6082.T5 270 230 5 0,70

6 6106.T6 250 200 10 0,61

7 7020.T6/T651 340 350 350 270 280 290 100 20 40 0,75

8 3103.H18 185 165 3 0,36

9a 3004.H14/H24/H34 220 170 6 0,56

9b 3004.H16/H26/H36 240 190 4 0,51

10a 3005.H16 195 175 4 0,46

10b 3005.H18/H28 220 190 3 0,40

11b 5005A.H12 125 95 12.5 0,57

11c 5005A.H22/H32 125 80 12.5 0,70

11d 5005A.H14/H24/H34 145 140 110 110 12.5 5 0,50

12b 5049.H112 200 120 6-25 0,68

12c 5049.H14 240 190 25 0,68

12d 5049.H24/H34 240 160 25 0,79

13c 5083.H12 315 250 40 0,72

13d 5083.H22/H32/H116 305 215 215 200 40 10 0,88

14c 5754.H14 240 240 190 180 5 10 0,71

14d 5754.H24/H34 240 160 25 0,79

11a 5005A.O/H111/H112 100 100 100 35 40 40 50 20 – 1

12a 5049.O/H111/H112 190 80 80 1

13a 5083.PressO/H111/H112 270 270 110 110 20 200 1

13b 5083.WalzO/H111/H112 275 125 50 1

14a 5754.O/H111/H112 190 180 180 80 80 80 80 20 25 1

14b 5754.H112 200 120 6-25 1

Tensile strength Rm; yield strength Rp, in MPa; maximum thickness dmax, in mm; softening factor UWEZ; B = sheets, strips,
plates; R = drawn tubes; P = profiles, tubes, bars/rods
5.1 Material tables 148 5 Annexes

Table 5.1.26 Weld factor DW in welded components made of aluminum in accordance with DIN 4113
Line Material Filler metal Weld factor
DW
Butt welds Fillet welds
AW- compression; tension, quality shear all
tension, quality not verified
verified

SA or VA, respectively T|| W||, respec- SA, TA, T||

tively VA, WA, W||
1 6005A.T6 SG-AlSi5 0,58
SG-AlMg5 0,75 0,58
AlMg4.5Mn 0,60
1,00
2a 6060.T6 SG-AlSi5 0,91 0,55
2b 6060.T66 SG-AlMg5
0,88 0,58 0,63
AlMg4.5Mn
3 6061.T6/T651 SG-AlSi5 0,95 0,55 0,55
SG-AlMg5 0,74
AlMg4.5Mn
4a 6063.T6 SG-AlSi5 1,00 0,58 0,62
4b 6063.T66 SG-AlMg5 0,88
AlMg4.5Mn
5 6082.T6/T651 SG-AlSi5 0,90 0,53 0,53
T61/T6151 SG-AlMg5
0,63
T5 AlMg4.5Mn
0,75
6 6106.T6 SG-AlSi5 1,00 0,58
SG-AlMg5 0,60
AlMg4.5Mn

7 7020.T6/T651 SG-AlMg5
SG-AlMg4.5Mn 0,92 0,68 0,50 0,50

8 3103.H18
9 3004.H14/H24/H34 SG-AlMg3 0,75
H16/H26/H36 AlMg5 1,00 0,89 0,57
AlMg4.5Mn
10 3005.H16/H18/H28 0,71

11b 5005A.H12/H22/H32 SG-AlMg3

H14/H24/H34 AlMg5 1,00 0,88 0,81
AlMg4.5Mn 0,56
12b 5049.H14/H24/H34 SG-AlMg3 0,96 0,72 0,56
SG-AlMg5
1,00 0,75 0,59 0,67
AlMg4.5Mn
13c 5083.H12/H22/H32/H116 SG-AlMg5
AlMg4.5Mn 0,96 0,72 0,55 0,55
14b 5754.H14/H24/H34 SG-AlMg3
SG-AlMg5
1,00 0,75 0,59 0,64
AlMg4.5Mn

11a 5005A.O/H111/H112
SG-AlMg3
AlMg5 1,20
AlMg4.5Mn
12a 5049.O/H111/H112 SG-AlMg3 0,91
0,91
SG-AlMg5
1,09
AlMg4.5Mn
1,00 0,58
13a 5083.Press/O/H111/H112
SG-AlMg5 0,91
13b 5083.Walz/O/H111/H112 AlMg4.5Mn
0,76 0,78
14a 5754.O/H111/H112 SG-AlMg3 0,91

SG-AlMg5 0,91
1,04
AlMg4.5Mn
5.2 Stress concentration factors 149 5 Annexes

5.2 Stress concentration factors

5.2.0 General
Stress concentration factors for round and flat bars/rods
shall be determined using the following equations and
figures. They are used for the calculation of the fatigue
notch factors based on the stress concentration factors and
Kt-Kf ratios in accordance with Chapter 2.3.1.2.1.

Stress concentration factors are applicable in combination

with nominal stresses. Sometimes the nominal stress may
be defined in a different way, see for example Fig-
ure 5.2-20.
Stress concentration factors may be specified by the user if
he has more detailed knowledge.

5.2.1 Round bars/rods

5.2.1.0 General Figure 5.2-1: Stress concentration factors for round
bars/rods with groove in tension-compression, r > 0, d/D <
Stress concentration factors are given for round bars/rods 1:
in tension-compression (force F), in bending (bending
moment Mb) and in torsion (torsional moment Mt). The
1
related nominal stresses are as follows: K t,zd 1
2
Szd = 4 ˜ F/(S ˜ d2) r r § r· (5.2.3)
0,22 ˜  2,74 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸
Sb = 32 ˜ Mb/(S ˜ d3) (5.2.1) t d © d¹
Tt = 16 ˜ Mt/(S ˜ d3)

Diameter d is shown in the respective figures.

Stress concentration factors for shear are not available.

5.2.1.1 Round bars/rods with groove or shoulder

fillet
The stress concentration factors for round bars/rods with a
groove or shoulder fillet in tension-compression, bending
and torsion shall be computed using Eq. (5.2.2), Fig-
ures 2.1-2 to 5.2.6, r > 0, d/D < 1, according to Petersen:
1
Kt 1
2 z
r r§ r· §r · d (5.2.2)
A  2B ¨1  2 ¸  C ¨ ¸
t d© d¹ ©t¹ D
A, B, C, z constants, Table 5.2.1;
r, t, d, D see Figures 2.1-2 to 5.2-6.
Table 5.2.1 Constants A, B, C and z for round bars/rods
Groove Shoulder fillet
Ten- Ben- Tor- Ten- Ben- Tor- Figure 5.2-2: Stress concentration factors for round
sion ding sion sion ding sion bars/rods with groove in bending, r > 0, d/D < 1:
A 0,22 0,2 0,7 0,62 0,62 3,4
B 1,37 2,75 10,3 3,5 5,8 19 1
K t,b 1
C - - - - 0,2 1 2
r r § r· (5.2.4)
z - - - - 3 2 0,20 ˜  5,5 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸
t d © d¹
5.2 Stress concentration factors 150 5 Annexes

Figure 5.2-3: Stress concentration factors for round Figure 5.2-5: Stress concentration factors for round
bars/rods with groove in torsion, r > 0, d/D < 1: bars/rods with shoulder fillet in bending, r > 0, d/D < 1:

1
1 K t,b 1
K t,t 1 2 3
2 r r § r· §r · d
r r § r· (5.2.5) 0,62 ˜  11,6 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸  0,2 ˜ ¨ ¸ ˜
0,7 ˜  20,6 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸ t d © d¹ ©t¹ D
t d © d¹

(5.2.7)

Figure 5.2-4: Stress concentration factors for round

bars/rods with shoulder fillet in tension-compression, r > 0, Figure 5.2-6: Stress concentration factors for round
d/D < 1: bars/rods with shoulder fillet in torsion, r > 0, d/D < 1:

1
K t,zd 1 K t,t 1
1
2
r r § r· (5.2.6)
r §
2 2
r · §r · d
0,62 ˜  7 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸ r
3,4 ˜  38 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸  ¨ ¸ ˜
t d © d¹ t d © d¹ © t ¹ D

(5.2.8)
5.2 Stress concentration factors 151 5 Annexes

5.2.1.2 Round bars/rods with multiple grooves 5.2.1.4 Round bars/rods with collar (narrow
shoulder)
Stress concentration factors for round bars/rods with cir-
cumferential multiple grooves in tension-compression, The stress concentration factors for the round bars/rods
bending and torsion shall be determined analogously to flat with "bolt head" in tension, Figure 5.2-9, shall be deter-
bars/rods with multiple notches in accordance with Chap- mined in approximately the same manner as for the flat
ter 5.2.2.3. bars/rods with shoulder head, Figure 5.2-26 (d = b, D = B).

5.2.1.3 Round bars/rods with relief groove

Type B
Stress concentration factors for round bars/rods with relief
groove, type B, Figure 5.2-7, shall be determined in the
same way as for round bars/rods with shoulder fillet of
diameters d and D, Figures 5.2-4 to 5.2-6. Figure 5.2-9: Round bar with „bolt head"
It is assumed that the additional small shoulder at the right The stress concentration factors for round bars/rods with
side of the notch does not significantly influence the stress collar, Figure 5.2-10, in tension-compression, bending and
concentration factor (f1/r t 5). torsion, Kt,zd,L, Kt,b,L, Kt,t,L, shall be computed applying
the following equation:

K t,b,L/D  1
K t,L 1 K t  1 ˜ (5.2.10)
K t,b,L/D 2 1
Kt,L stress concentration factor of a narrow collar
with current values L/D and d/D, to be de-
termined depending on the type of stress;
Figure 5.2-7: Round bar/rod with relief groove, type B
Kt stress concentration factor of the "broad"
The fatigue strength of type B is lower than that of type D. collar (shoulder fillet) with current values
d/D, depending on the type of stress, in ac-
Type D cordance with Figure 5.2-4, 5.2-5 or 5.2-6;
The stress concentration factors for round bars/rods with Kt,b,L/D stress concentration factor in bending for the
relief groove, type D, Kt,F, Figure 5.2-8, shall be computed current value L/D, determined by way of ap-
proximation from Figure 5.2-24 (D = B, d =
by superposition of the stress concentration factors for
b, referring to the part of the figure providing
round bars/rods with groove and with shoulder fillet. Un-
the closest approximation of B/b);
like in the case of type B it is assumed that the additional
Kt,b,L/D=2 stress concentration factor in bending for the
small shoulder at the right side of the notch does signifi-
cantly influence the stress concentration factor (f3 /r | 2). value L/D = 2, determined by way of ap-
proximation from Figure 5.2-24 (D, d, refer-
ring to the figure as before).
D1  d
K t,F K t,U  K t,A ˜  K t,A (5.2.9)
Dd
Kt,U stress concentration factor of the round
bar/rod with groove, Figures 2.1-2 to 5.2-3;
Kt,A stress concentration factor of the round
bar/rod with shoulder fillet, Figures 5.2-4 to
5.2-6;
D1 smaller diameter;
d reduced diameter; Figure 5.2-10: Round bars/rods with collar
D larger diameter.

Figure 5.2.8: Round bar/rod with relief groove, type D

5.2 Stress concentration factors 152 5 Annexes

5.2.2 Flat bars/rods 1

K t,zd 1
2
5.2.2.0 General r r § r·
0,22 ˜  1,7 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸
Stress concentration factors are given for flat bars/rods in t b © b¹
tension-compression (force F) and in bending (bending (5.2.13)
moment Mb).

The related nominal stresses shall normally be computed

using the following equations:
Szd = F/(s á b)
(5.2.11)
Sb = 6 Mb/(s á b2)

Otherwise the equations to compute the nominal stresses

are below the figures in question.
Dimensions s and b are shown in the figures.

5.2.2.1 Flat bars/rods with shoulder fillet or notches

on both sides
The stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with
notches on both sides or shoulder fillets in tension-
compression and in bending shall be computed using the
relevant equation, see Figures 5.2-11 to 5.2-14, r > 0, d/D
< 1, thickness s:
1 Figure 5.2-12: Stress concentration factors for flat
K t 1 bars/rods with notches on both sides in bending, r > 0, b/B
2
r r§ r· (5.2.12) < 1:
A  2B ¨1  2 ¸
t b© b¹
1
A, B constants, Table 5.2.2; K t,b 1
r, t, b, B see Figures 5.2-11 to 5.2-14. 2
r r § r· (5.2.14)
0,2 ˜  4,2 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸
Table 5.2.2 Constants A and B for flat bars/rods t b © b¹
Notches on both sides Shoulder fillet
Tension Bending Tension Bending
A 0,22 0,2 0,5 0,5
B 0,85 2,1 2,5 6,0

Figure 5.2-13: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with shoulder fillet in tension-compression, r > 0,
b/B < 1:

Figure 5.2-11: Stress concentration factors for flat 1

K t,zd 1
bars/rods with notches on both sides in tension or 2
r r § r· (5.2.15)
compression, r > 0, b/B < 1: 0,5 ˜  5 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸
t b © b¹
5.2 Stress concentration factors 153 5 Annexes

5.2.2.3 Flat bars/rods with multiple notches

Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with multiple
notches in tension-compression in accordance with Fig-
ure 5.2-16.
For a large number of notches arranged in line in a flat
bar/rod, the release factor J and, in combination with it, the
effective depth t' of an equivalent single notch shall be
computed in accordance with Figure 5.2-17:
t' = J ˜ t (5.2.17)
Figure 5.2-17 approximately applies to both tension-
compression and bending. With the effective depth t' of a
single notch, the stress concentration factors shall be de-
termined in accordance with Figures 5.2-11 and 5.2-12.

Figure 5.2-14: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with shoulder fillet in bending, r > 0, b/B < 1:

1
K t,b 1
2
r r § r· (5.2.16)
0,5 ˜  12 ˜ ˜ ¨1  2 ¸
t b © b¹

5.2.2.2 Flat bar with notch on one side

Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with a notch
on one side in bending in accordance with Figure 5.2-15.

((Text in Bild unverändert, entspricht Bild 5.2.16))

Figure 5.2-16: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with multiple notches in tension-compression.
The stress concentration factor is valid for the first (or last)
notch in the row, according to Peterson (Ref. Durelli, Lake
and Phillips), photoelastic study

F
Nominal stress: S zd (5.2.18)
s ˜ (B  r)

Figure 5.2-15: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with a notch on one side in bending, according to
Sors

Figure 5.2-17: Release factor J for an infinite number of

notches in a row, according to Peterson (Ref. Neuber),
elastic analysis
5.2 Stress concentration factors 154 5 Annexes

5.2.2.4 Flat bars/rods with transverse hole

Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with hole or
slotted transverse hole for different types of stress are
given in Figures 5.2-18 to 5.2-20.

Figure 5.2-20: Stress concentration factors for flat

Figure 5.2-18: Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with eccentric hole in tension-compression,
bars/rods with hole or slotted transverse hole in tension- according to Peterson (Ref.: Sjoestroem), elastic analysis
compression, according to Peterson (Ref. Frocht and
Leven), photoelastic study. In addition circular hole Nominal stresses (infinitely away from or at the hole cross-
according to Peterson (Ref. Howland), elastic analysis. section):
Hole: t/r = 1; limit value for high values r/b: Kt,z = 2 F
S zd,f (5.2.21)
s ˜ (B  b)
F
Nominal stress: S zd
s ˜ (B  2t)
(5.2.19) S zd,f ˜ 1  r/b 2
S zd, A  C
ª § ·º
1  r/b ˜ «1  b/B ˜ ¨1  1  r/b 2 ¸»
¬ © ¹¼
Special case of "center hole": B/b = 1.
5.2.2.5 Flat bars/rods with notches on both sides or
with transverse hole, bending perpendicular
to the plane
Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with notches
on both sides or with transverse hole in bending perpen-
dicular to the plane are given in Figures 5.2-21 to 5.2-23.

Figure 5.2-19: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with hole or slotted transverse hole in bending,
according to Peterson (Ref. Frocht and Leven),
photoelastic study. Hole: t/r = 1; limit value for high
values r/b: Kt,b = 2

Nominal stress (with reference to point G):

Mb
Sb,G
ª § 2 ˜ t ·3 º B2 (5.2.20)
«1  ¨ ¸ » ˜s˜
«¬ © B ¹ »¼ 6 Figure 5.2-21: Stress concentration factors for flat
bars/rods with notches on both sides in bending in plane,
according to Peterson (Ref.: Goodier, Lee and Neuber),
elastic analysis (B—b)/s high, r > 0
5.2 Stress concentration factors 155 5 Annexes

Figure 5.2-22: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with hole in bending, according to Peterson,
photoelastic study; strain measurements, 2r/s = 0 according
to Peterson (Ref.: Howland), elastic analysis

Mb
Nominal stress: Sb (5.2.22)
(B  2r) ˜ s 2

Figure 5.2-24: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with shoulder in bending, according to Peterson
(Ref.: Leven and Hartman), photoelastic study. B/b = 1,25;
2 and 3

Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with narrow

shoulder in tension-compression shall be computed by way
Figure 5.2-23: Stress concentration factors for broad flat of approximation using the following equation:
bars/rods with hole in bending, according to Peterson
(Ref.: Goodier and Reissner), elastic analysis, bending K t,b,L/B  1
moment per unit of length mb in N K t,zd,L 1  K t,zd  1 ˜ (5.2.24)
K t,b,L/B 2 1
Kt,zd,L stress concentration factor to be determined
Nominal stress: Sb = 6 mb/s2 (5.2.23)
for the „narrow" shoulder with current val-
ues L/B and B/b;
Kt,zd stress concentration factor to be determined
5.2.2.6 Flat bars/rods with shoulder
in accordance with Figure 5.2-13 for the
Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with narrow "broad" shoulder (shoulder fillet) in tension-
shoulder in bending are given in Figure 5.2-24. compression with current values b/B;
Kt,b,L/B stress concentration factor to be determined
for the "narrow" shoulder and current values
L/B in bending in accordance with Fig-
ure 5.2-24 (referring to the part of the figure
providing the closest approximation of B/b);
5.2 Stress concentration factors 156 5 Annexes

Kt,b,L/B=2 stress concentration factor in bending for Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with shoulder
L/B = 2 in accordance with Figure 5.2-24 head and distributed load according to Figure 5.2-26.
(referring to the figure as before).
Stress concentration factors for flat bars/rods with shoulder
head and concentrated load depending on the load applica-
tion point according to Figure 5.2-25.

Figure 5.2-25: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with shoulder head and concentrated load,
according to Peterson (Ref.: Hetényi), photoelastic study

Figure 5.2-26: Stress concentration factors for flat

bars/rods with shoulder head and distributed load,
according to Peterson (Ref.: Hetényi), photoelastic study.
r/b = 0,05; 0,075; 0,1 and 0,2
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 157 5 Annexes

5.3 Fatigue notch factors compression, bending and torsion shall be computed in two
steps:
5.3.0 General
1. Step:
The fatigue notch factors are applicable to round and flat
Computing the fatigue notch factor for the round bar/rod
bars/rods. Concerning their determination, the following
with shoulder fillet, Kf, from the stress concentration fac-
cases shall be distinguished:
tor, Kt, and the Kt-Kf ratios, nV(r), in accordance with
– round and flat bars/rods for which stress concentration Chapter 2.3.1.2.1:
factors are given in Chapter 5.2, see Chapter 5.3.1;
Kf = Kt/nV(r) (5.3.1)
– round and flat bars/rods with cone-shaped or wedge-
shaped portion as well as round bars/rods with longitu- 2. Step:
dinal bore hole, Chapter 5.3.2;
Determining the fatigue notch factor for the round bar/rod
– round bars/rods for which experimentally determined with a cone-shaped portion, Kf,Z, as a function of the fa-
fatigue notch factors are available, Chapter 5.3.3; tigue notch factor for the round bar/rod with shoulder fillet,
– components made of cast iron materials and aluminum Kf, and the slope angle Z, Figure 5.3-2.
materials, Chapter 5.3.4;
– components with fatigue notch factors specified by the
user, Chapter 5.3.5.
Fatigue notch factors are applicable in combination with
nominal stresses. The nominal stress may be defined in a
different way, see Eq. (5.3.2) for full round bars/rods, Eq.
(5.3.5) for round bars/rods with longitudinal hole and Eq.
(5.3.15) for round bars/rods with tranverse hole. Figure 5.3-1: Round bar with cone-shaped portion: Slope
angle Z and length l of slope

5.3.1 Fatigue notch factors derived from

stress concentration factors
For designs for which stress concentration factors are giv-
en in Chapter 5.2—for example round or flat bars/rods
with shoulder fillet—the fatigue notch factors for the com-
ponent, Kf (d), shall be computed from the stress concen-
tration factors Kt and the Kt-Kf ratios, nV(r), in accordance
with Chapter 2.3.1.2.1.
Nominal stresses
The nominal stresses for tension-compression, bending and
torsion are the same as for the stress concentration factors,
Chapter 5.2, Eq. (5.2.1), for round bars/rods or Eq. (5.2.11)
for flat bars/rods.

5.3.2 Fatigue notch factors for bars/rods with

cone- or wedge-shaped portion or with
longitudinal hole Figure 5.3-2: Influence of the slope angle on the fatigue
notch factor of a bar with cone- or wedge-shaped portion
5.3.2.0 General
For round and flat bars/rods with cone- or wedge-shaped Kf fatigue notch factor of the bar/rod with
portion as well as for round bars/rods with longitudinal shoulder fillet;
hole the fatigue notch factors shall be determined as fol- Z slope angle;
lows. Kf,Z fatigue notch factor of the bar with a cone-
or a wedge-shaped portion under otherwise
unchanged conditions.
5.3.2.1 Round bars/rods with cone-shaped portion
The initial figure—according to Peterson (Ref.: Leven and
For round bars/rods with a cone-shaped portion, Fig- Frocht), photoelastic study—applies to the stress concen-
ure 5.3-1, the fatigue notch factors for tension- tration factor of flat bars/rods in bending with a notch on
one side. It is applied here as an approximation for the
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 158 5 Annexes

fatigue notch factor of round and flat bars/rods with vari- 2. Step:
ous shapes of the notch and for all types of stress.
Determination of the fatigue notch factor for the round bar
Special case with a cone-shaped portion from the values Kf,b = 1,9 and
For round bars/rods with shoulder fillet and with two dif- Z = 15°:
ferent notch radii rÜ t t and r t t/4, Figure 5.3-3 (top), the Kf,b,Z = 1,6 Figure 5.3-2
fatigue notch factors are the same as for round bars/rods
with a cone-shaped portion where r = 2 t and Z = 30 °, Caution: The stress concentration factor for the round bar
Figure 5.3-3 (bottom). with a cone-shaped portion that follows from Kt,b = 2,47
and Z = 15°,
Kf,b,Z = 1,82 Figure 5.3-2

shall not be applied for the calculation of the fatigue notch

factor for the round bar/rod with a cone-shaped portion
because of the following inequality, Figure 5.3-4:
Kf,b,Z z Kt,b,Z/(nV(r) ˜ nV(d))
(5.3.3)
1,6 z 1,82/(1,24 ˜ 1,03) = 1,4

Figure 5.3-3: Round bar with shoulder fillet, special case

with two notch radii (top) and equivalent round bar with
cone-shaped portion (bottom)

Nominal stresses
Figure 5.3-4: Relationship between Kt,b, Kf,b, Kt,bZ and
The nominal stresses for tension-compression (force F), Kf,b,Z
bending (bending moment Mb) and torsion (torsional mo-
ment Mt) are
Szd = 4 · F/(S · d2)
5.3.2.2 Flat bars/rods with a wedge-shaped portion
Sb = 32 · Mb/(S · d3) (5.3.2)
For flat bars/rods with a wedge-shaped portion, Fig-
Tt = 16 · Mt/(S · d3) ure 5.3-5, the fatigue notch factors for tension-compression
The diameter d is shown in the respective figures in Chap- and for bending shall be determined analytically in the
ter 5.2. same manner as for the round bar with a cone-shaped por-
tion, Chapter 5.3.2.1.
Stress concentration factors for shear are not available.
Illustration example
For a round bar with a cone-shaped portion, Figure 5.3-1,
the fatigue notch factor shall be determined for bending.
Dimensions d = 42 mm, D = 50 mm, t = (D  d)/2 = 4 mm,
r = 1 mm, Z = 15°, l = 14,9 mm, Rm = 583 MPa.
1. Step:
Computation of the fatigue notch factor for the round bar Figure 5.3-5: Flat bar with a wedge-shaped portion: slope
with shoulder fillet: angle Z, length of slope l, thickness s
Kt,b = 2,47 Figure 5.2-5
G V (r) = 2,53 mm–1 Table 2.3.5 Nominal stress
nV(r) = 1,24G G G G G G G Eq. (2.3.8) The nominal stresses for tension-compression (force F) and
bending (bending moment Mb) shall be computed in ac-
GV (d) = 2/d = 0,048 mm–1 Eq (2.3.16)
cordance with the following equations:
nV(d) = 1,03 Eq. (2.3.6)
Szd = F/(s á b)
Kf,b = Kt,b/(nV(r) · nV(d)) Eq. (2.3.2)G S = 6 ˜ M /(s á b2)
b b
(5.3.4)
= 2,47/(1,24 · 1,03) = 1,9
The values s and b are illustrated in the Figures in Chap-
ter 5.2.
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 159 5 Annexes

5.3.2.3 Round bars/rods with longitudinal hole To do so, the Kt-Kf ratios nV(rP), nV(r), nV(d) or nW(rP),
Longitudinal holes, Figure 5.3-6, are possible for round nW(r), nW(d) are required, depending on the characteristic
bars/rods with groove, with shoulder fillet or with a cone- values rP, r, dp and d.
shaped portion.
The following applies because of the similarity of test
specimen and component:
r/rP = d/dP (5.3.6)
r, rP notch radius of the component or of the test
specimen;
d, dP diameter of the component or of the test
Figure 5.3-6: Round bar with longitudinal hole
specimen.
Fatigue notch factors of round bars/rods with longitudinal The missing fourth value may be computed from three
holes in tension-compression and bending are not availa- known values. In the following, the characteristic values,
ble, not even in the form of a reliable way of computation which are not always clearly obvious for the user, are al-
based on the fatigue notch factors of the round bars/rods ways indicated.
without longitudinal holes.
Illustration example
In the case of torsion, fatigue notch factors of a round bar
with a longitudinal hole shall be derived by way of approx- For a shaft with keyway and component diameter d =
imation from the fatigue notch factors of the round bar 100 mm, the fatigue notch factor for torsion shall be de-
without a longitudinal hole, but only in combination with termined. The fatigue notch factor for the test specimen,
the nominal stress for the round bar with a longitudinal Kf,t(dP), shall be derived from Figure 5.3-10, as a function
hole. of detail A or B of the keyway and as a function of the
tensile strength Rm.
Nominal stress
The characteristic values according to Figure 5.3-10 are rP
The nominal stress for torsion (torsional moment Mt) shall
= 0,18 mm, dP = 15 mm and—with d = 100 mm—in ac-
be calculated in accordance with the following equation:
16 ˜ Mt cordance with Eq. (5.3.6):
Tt r = rP · d/dP
§ d4 · (5.3.5)
S ˜ d3 ˜ ¨1  L4 ¸ = 0,18 mm · 100 mm/15 mm (5.3.7)
¨ d ¹ ¸
© = 1,2 mm

The quantities d and dL are illustrated in Figure 5.3-6. Now the conversion of the fatigue notch factor of the test
specimen, Kf,t(dP), to the fatigue notch factor of the com-
ponent in question, Kf,t, in accordance with Chap-
5.3.3 Experimentally determined fatigue ter 2.3.1.2.2, Eq. (2.3.3), is possible with the Kt-Kf ratio
notch factors nW(rP):

5.3.3.0 General nW (rp )

K f,t K f,t (dp ) ˜ (5.3.8)
The following experimentally determined fatigue notch nW (r) ˜ nW (d)
factors apply to round bars/rods of milled steel with tensile
The following applies in the special case of the diameters
strength values from Rm = 400 MPa to 1250 MPa as well
of the component and of the test specimen being identical,
as for tension-compression, bending and torsion. Fatigue i.e. d = dP = 15 mm:
notch factors for shear are not available.
r = rP and
Concerning the consideration of the roughness, see Chap-
ter 2.3.1.3, Eq. (2.3.21). Kf,t = Kf,t(dP)/nW(dP) (5.3.9)
Characteristic values of the radius and the diameter as Nominal stresses
well as conversion of the fatigue notch factor
Normally, the nominal stresses for tension-compression
Normally, an experimentally determined fatigue notch (force F), bending (bending moment Mb) and torsion (tor-
factor Kf(dP) refers to the notched test specimen (radius rP,
sional moment Mt) shall be computed as follows based on
diameter dP); only in exceptional cases does it refer to the
the characteristic notch diameter d:
component (radius r, diameter d). Szd = 4 · F/(S · d2)
In both cases, however, the experimentally determined Sb = 32 · Mb/(S · d3) (5.3.10)
fatigue notch factor shall be converted in accordance with Tt = 16 · Mt/(S · d3)
Chapter 2.3.1.2.2, Eq. (2.3.3). For the consideration of the
size effect and the adaptation to the method of calculation
see Comment in Chapter 2.3.1.2.2 on page 42.
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 160 5 Annexes

Otherwise the equations for computing the nominal stress- Characteristic values: rP = 0,1 mm, r in accordance with
es are given below the figures. The diameter d is illustrated Eq. (5.3.6), dP = 15 mm, known: d.
in the figures.
Nominal stresses in accordance with Eq. (5.3.10).

5.3.3.1 Round bars/rods with groove for snap ring

The fatigue notch factors Kf,zd(dP), } of round bars/rods
with groove for snap ring, Figure 5.3-7, for tension-
compression, bending and torsion are determined analo-
gously to DIN 743 (2000).

K f,zd (dP ) 0,9 ˜ 1,27  1,17 ˜ (D  d)/(2 ˜ rf )

K f,b (dP ) 0,9 ˜ 1,14  1,08 ˜ (D  d)/(2 ˜ rf )

K f,t (dP ) 1,27  1,17 ˜ (D  d)/(2 ˜ rf ) (5.3.11)

rf = r + 2,9 U*;

U* = 0,3 mm for austenitic steel;

U* = 0,1 mm for other kinds of steel, Rm d 500 MPa;
((Text in Bild unverändert, entspricht Bild 5.3.8))
U* = 0,05 mm for other kinds of steel, Rm ! 500 MPa;
Figure 5.3-8: Fatigue notch factors for round bars/rods
U* = 0,4 mm for cast steel and for GJS. with V-notch for tension-compression and bending,
Characteristic values: known: rP = r, dP = d. These fa- according to Tauscher
tigue notch factors are valid here for the component by Notch radius of the test specimen rP = 0,1 mm, test speci-
way of exception. Nevertheless, the conversion described
men diameter dP = 15 mm, t/d = (D  d)/2d = 0,05 to 0,20.
in the illustration example in Chapter 5.3.3.0 is necessary.
For other values t/d, the fatigue notch factors are smaller.
Nominal stresses in accordance with Eq. (5.3.10).
If values Kf,zd(dP), Kf,b(dP) > 4 or Kf,t(dP) > 2,5 are ob-
tained from Eq. (5.3.11), then the values Kf,zd(dP), Kf,b(dP) 5.3.3.3 Round bars/rods with transverse hole
= 4 or Kf,t(dP) = 2,5 are valid. The fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd(dP), }, for round bars/rods
with transverse hole for tension-compression, bending and
torsion shall be taken from Figure 5.3-9 or computed ac-
cording to the following equations:
Kf,zd(dP) = Kf,b(dP) = Kf,t(dP)
(5.3.14)
= 1,54 + 0,0004 ˜ Rm/MPa

Characteristic values: rP in accordance with Eq. (5.3.6),

Figure 5.3-7: Round bar with groove for snap ring known: r = dQ/2; dp = 15 mm, known: d.

Nominal stresses:
5.3.3.2 Round bars/rods with V-groove F 4F
S zd
The fatigue notch factors, Kf,zd(dP), }, for round bars/rods S ˜ d 2 /4  2rd S ˜ d 2 1  4d Q /(Sd)
with V-groove for tension-compression and bending shall Mb 32 Mb
Sb
be taken from Figure 5.3-8 or computed according to the S ˜ d3 /32  2rd2 /3 S ˜ d3 1  16dQ /(3Sd)
following equations:
Mt 16 Mb
Tt
Kf,zd(dP) = 1,06 + 0,00110 ˜ Rm/MPa S ˜ d3 /16  2rd 2 /3 S ˜ d3 1  8d Q /(3Sd)
(5.3.12)
Kf,b(dP) = 0,97 + 0,00095 ˜ Rm/MPa
(5.3.15)
The following applies to torsion:
Kf,t(dP) = 1 + 0,60 ˜ (Kf,b(dP)  1) (5.3.13)
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 161 5 Annexes

Figure 5.3-9 Fatigue notch factors for round bars/rods with

transverse hole for tension-compression, bending and
torsion, according to Tauscher (Ref.: Hempel)

Notch radius of the test specimen rP = dQ,P/2 (dQ,P: diame-

ter of the transverse hole of the test specimen), diameter of Figure 5.3-10: Fatigue notch factors for shafts with
the test specimen dP = 15 mm, 2 r/d = 0,15 to 0,25. For keyway, details A and B, for bending and torsion,
other values 2 r/d the fatigue notch factors are smaller. according to Hänchen

Notch radius of the test specimen rP = 0,18 mm (radius at

5.3.3.4 Shafts with keyway the basis of the keyway); diameter of the test specimen dP
= 15 mm.
The fatigue notch factors, Kf,b(dP), }, for shafts with
keyway for bending and torsion shall be taken from Fig-
ure 5.3-10. The values for bending also apply to tension-
compression.
Details A and B shall be distinguished. The fatigue notch
factors apply to the end of the keyway. In the case of two
keyways, the fatigue notch factors Kf,b(dP), } shall be
increased by a factor of 1,15.
Characteristic values: rP = 0,18 mm, r in accordance with
Eq. (5.3.6), dp = 15 mm, known: d.

Nominal stresses: Eq. (5.3.10).

5.3 Fatigue notch factors 162 5 Annexes

d1/d t 1,1, the influence of the press-fit on the notch effect

5.3.3.5 Shafts with press-fitted members
is small, but if the diameter difference d1/d is small, an
The fatigue notch factors for shafts with press-fitted (or unfavorable interaction may occur (see No. 2 with
shrink-fitted) members shall be determined based on Ta- d1= d).
ble 5.3.1 or Figure 5.3-11.
The fatigue notch factors for shafts with press-fitted mem-
Fatigue notch factor based on Table 5.3.1
ber for bending, Kf,b(dP), shall be determined based on
Table 5.3.1 Fatigue notch factor, Kf,b(dP), of shaft with Table 5.3.1. Details No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 shall be distin-
press-fitted member for bending, according to Tauscher guished. The fatigue notch factor for tension-compression,
(Ref.: Lehr) Kf,zd(dP), is approximately the same as for bending. The
Notch radius of the test specimen rP = 0,06 dP, test speci- fatigue notch factor for torsion is
men diameter dP = 40 mm. The bending moment is trans- Kf,t(dP) = 1 + 0,45 ˜ (Kf,b(dP)  1) (5.3.16)
mitted via the hub. The same fatigue notch factors are valid
for fits with closer seat. The fatigue notch factors apply to the section of the shaft
where the press-fitting of the member ends.
Rm in MPa
Characteristic values: rP in accordance with Eq. (5.3.6),
400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 r = 0,06 d, dP = 40 mm, known: d.
No. 1 Nominal stresses: in accordance with Eq. (5.3.10).
H7/n6 interference fit. Fatigue notch factors in accordance with Figure 5.3-11

2,1 2,3 2,5 2,6 2,8 2,9 3,0 3,1 3,2

No. 2
H8/u8 interference fit.

1,8 2,0 2,1 2,3 2,5 2,7 2,9 2,9 2,9

No. 3
H8/u8 interference fit.

1,5 1,7 1,8 1,9 2,0 2,2 2,3 2,3 2,3

No. 4
H7/n6 interference fit.

1,6 1,8 1,9 2,1 2,3 2,4 2,6 2,6 2,6

No. 5
H8/u8 interference fit.
This design is not rec-
ommended! ((Text in Bild unverändert, entspricht Bild 5.3.11))

Figure 5.3-11: Fatigue notch factors for shafts with press-

Note to No. 1: The given fatigue notch factors are approx- fitted member for bending, according to Kogaev (Ref.:
imate values depending on the design. For plain rotating several authors)
bending they may be higher by a factor of 1,3.
The fatigue notch factors for shafts with press-fitted mem-
Note to No. 4: The fatigue notch factor shall be calculated ber for bending are
for both the press fit and the shaft with shoulder fillet in
accordance with Chapter 5.3.1. The less favorable case is Kf,b(dP) = Kf,b,0(d) ˜ ]' ˜ ]'', (5.3.17)
relevant. In the case of a larger difference of the diameters
Kf,b,0(d), ]' and ]'' from Figure 5.3.11.
5.3 Fatigue notch factors 163 5 Annexes

The fatigue notch factor for tension-compression, Kf,zd(d),

is approximately the same as for bending. The fatigue
notch factor for torsion is
Kf,t(dP) = 1 + 0,45 · (Kf,b(d)  1) (5.3.18)

When determining the fatigue notch factor in acordance

with Figure 5.3-11, it shall be specified in addition whether
the loading is transmitted via the hub or not. The fatigue
notch factors apply to the section of the shaft where the
press-fitting of the member ends.
Characteristic values: known: dP = d.

Nominal stresses: in accordance with Eq. (5.3.10).

Note: The fatigue notch factors determined based on Fig-
ure 5.3-11 are higher than those according to Table 5.3.1.
The differentiation according to the applied pressure p and
as to whether the bending moment is transmitted via the
hub or not, is useful, however.
5.3.3.6 Splined, toothed and serrated shafts
The fatigue notch factors of a splined, toothed or serrated ((Text in Bild unverändert, entspricht Bild 5.3.12))
shaft (profiled shafts) for torsion, related to the internal
diameter, shall be taken from Figure 5.3-12 or determined Figure 5.3-12: Fatigue notch factors of splined, toothed
in accordance with the following equation: and serrated shafts for torsion, according to Meisel,
7 Schuster, Contag, Koch
˜ (Rm /MPa)2
K f,t (dp ) e 4,2˜10 (5.3.19)
Notch radius of the test specimen rP = 0,6 mm (details A
The fatigue notch factors for bending shall be computed and C) or rP = 0,25 mm (detail B), internal diameter of the
using Eq. (5.3.20) for splined shafts and using Eq. (5.3.21) test specimen: dP = 29 mm. The torsional moment is
for toothed and serrated shafts:
transmitted via the hub.
Kf,b(dP) = 1 + 0,45 ˜ (Kf,t(dP)  1) (5.3.20)
The following applies to profiled shafts made of case
Kf,b(dP) = 1 + 0,65 ˜ (Kf,t(dP)  1) (5.3.21) hardened steel:
Kf,RSV(dP) = 1 (5.3.23)
For tension-compression approximately the same values
apply as for bending. Note: In this case the definition of the fatigue notch factor
For profiled shafts (e.g. toothed shafts) with involute pro- is that of Eq. (5.3.28), and the surface treatment factor is
file, lower fatigue notch factors are valid for all types of KV,RSV = 1 (5.3.24)
stress:
The fatigue notch factors apply to the section at the transi-
Kf,Ev(dP) = 1 + 0,75 ˜ (Kf(dP)  1) (5.3.22)
tion from the notched part into the unnotched part of the
The value Kf(dP) shall be taken from Figure 5.3-12 or profiled shaft; the shaft diameter shall be smaller than (d 
0,5 mm)!
determined in accordance with Eq. (5.3.21), depending on
the type of stress. Characteristic values: rP = 0,6 mm (details A and C) or
rP = 0,25 mm (detail B), r in accordance with Eq. (5.3.6),
dP = 29 mm, known: d.

Nominal stress: in accordance with Eq. (5.3.10) with

internal diameter d.
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 164 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

5.3.4 Fatigue notch factors for components 5.3.5 Fatigue notch factors specified by the
made of cast iron and aluminum materials user
Generally, fatigue notch factors specified by the user de-
The experimentally determined fatigue notch factors apply
pending on the type of stress—here only for steel test spec-
to notched test bars/rods made of steel. The fatigue notch
imens—are valid under the following conditions:
factors for components made of cast iron and aluminum
materials are different from those made of steel because – The fatigue notch factor is valid for a certain nominal
the Kt-Kf ratios are different. For example, the fatigue stress. In general—e.g. in the case of a round bar/rod
notch factors for components made of cast iron materials with transverse hole—there are various possibilities of
are smaller than for steel due to the fact that the Kt-Kf specifying the nominal stress so that the corresponding
ratios are higher. fatigue notch factor may be different, too.

If fatigue notch factors are to be used for notched test spec- – It is valid for the notch radius rP and the diameter dP of
imens made of cast iron or aluminum materials, but are not the test specimen, and it is defined as follows:
available, they can approximately be computed applying V W, unnotched test specimen, no surface treatment
the following equations for tension-compression, bending K f (d p )
and torsion: V W, notched test specimen, no surface treatment

n (r )
K f,zd,GA (dP ) K f,zd,St (dP ) ˜ V,St P
(5.3.27)
nV,GA (rP ) W fatigue limit for completely reversed stress;
nV,St (rP ) Nominator and denominator are valid for the same diame-
K f,b,GA (dP ) K f,b,St (dP ) ˜ (5.3.25) ter and for the same type of stress.
nV,GA (rP )
nV,St (rP ) – Any potential surface treatment is not taken into con-
K f,t,GA (dP ) K f,t,St (dP ) ˜ sideration, with the result that the surface treatment fac-
nV,GA (rP ) tor KV in accordance with Chapter 2.3.3 shall be ap-
Kf,zd,St(dP), } fatigue notch factor of the steel test speci- plied.
men, depending on the type of stress; – Roughness Rz is taken into consideration so that the
nV,St(rP) Kt-Kf ratio of the steel test specimen, de-
roughness factor KR in accordance with Chapter 2.3.1.3
pending on rP;
is not to be applied (KR = 1).
nV,GA(rP) Kt-Kf ratio of the cast iron or aluminum test
specimen, depending on rP; Surface treatment
rP notch radius of the test specimen; Provided an existing surface treatment is covered by the
dP diameter of the test specimen. fatigue notch factor, the following applies:
The Kt-Kf ratios nV(rP) shall be computed as a function of – The definition of the fatigue notch factor is
the related stress gradient (rP), following the procedure
V W, unnotched test specimen,no surface treatment
given in Chapter 2.3.1.2.3. K f,RSV (d p )
V W, notched test specimen,no surface treatment
If values Kf,zd,GA(dP ), } < 1 are obtained from Eq.
(5.3.25), then the following values apply: (5.3.28)
Kf,zd,GA (dP ), } = 1 (5.3.26) W fatigue limit for completely reversed stress;
– Nominator and denominator are valid for the same
As in Chapter 5.3.3.0, the fatigue notch factors for cast
diameter and for the same type of stress.
iron or aluminum materials, Kf,zd,GA (dP), }, shall addi-
tionally be converted in accordance with Chapter 2.3.1.2.2, – The surface treatment factor, KV, in accordance with
Eq. (2.3.3), by taking into account the Kt-Kf ratios Chapter 2.3.3 is not to be applied, but
nV,GA(rP), nV,GA(r), nV,GA(d) or nW,GA(rP), nW,GA(r), KV,RSV = 1 (5.3.29)
nW,GA(d).
Characteristic values: rP, r, dP, d, taking Eq. (5.3.6) into
The conversion using Eq. (5.3.25) serves the transition to consideration.
another material group, while the conversion using Eq.
(2.3.3) serves the consideration of the size effect and the As described in Chapter 5.3.3.0, the fatigue notch factors,
adaptation to the assessment procedure. Kf,RSV(dP), shall additionally be converted in accordance
with Chapter 2.3.1.2.2, Eq. (2.3.3), by taking into account
the Kt-Kf ratios nV,GA(rP), nV,GA(r), nV,GA(d) or nW,GA(rP),
nW,GA(r), nW,GA(d), as a function of the respective material
group.
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 165 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

5.4 Fatigue classes for welded 5.4.2 Fatigue classes for the calculation using
components made of structural steel structural stresses
and of aluminum alloys The fatigue classes for the calculation using structural
stresses in accordance with Table 5.4.3 (normal stress)
5.4.0 General comply with the IIW recommendations.
This chapter contains the fatigue classes to be used for the When performing the assessment of the shear stress using
calculation of welded components made of structural steel structural stresses, the fatigue classes for nominal stresses
and aluminum alloys, mainly in accordance with the IIW shall be used.
Recommendations. Material groups in accordance with the
IIW Recommendations are ferritic-perlitic or quenched and The fatigue classes for structural stresses cover the influ-
tempered structural steels and aluminum alloys 5000, ence of the weld type and of the weld itself, but not the
6000, 7000. influence of the component design, as this is covered by
the structural stress.
For other material groups (conditionally weldable steel,
stainless steel, weldable cast iron materials, or other weld- The following comments apply to the structural details in
able aluminum alloys), the calculation is provisional and Table 5.4.3:
shall be applied with caution. – The calculation using structural stresses shall be ap-
Deviations from the IIW Recommendations: plied to the crack at the toe of the weld only, not to a
root crack. The root crack shall be calculated using
The fatigue classes for the base material under normal nominal stresses or effective notch stresses.
stress—FAT 160 (structural steel), FAT 70 (aluminum
alloys 5000, 6000) or FAT 80 (aluminum alloys 7000)— – There are no details for longitudinally loaded welds
are not given as the calculation for the base material shall and, thus, no details for welded profiles. The stress
be carried out as for non-welded components. (normal or shear stress) along the weld shall be regard-
ed as constant here so that the structural stress is equal
The fatigue classes for the base material under shear to the nominal stress and the fatigue classes are the
stress—FAT 100 (structural steel) or FAT 36 (aluminum same. Examples:
alloys)—are included as they are also valid for full pene- "Longitudinally loaded butt weld", detail No. 312 of
tration butt welds. Table 5.4.1 (normal stress).
The fatigue classes differ, depending on the structural "Full penetration butt weld", detail No. 1 of Table 5.4.2
detail: (shear stress).

– for the calculation in accordance with Chapter 2.4.1.2 – Transversely loaded butt welds, details No. 200, are of
using nominal stresses, see Table 5.4.1 or 5.4.2, and the full-penetration type.

– for the calculation in accordance with Chapter 4.4.1.2 – The fillet welds, details No. 300, may be externally
using structural stresses (local nominal stresses), see loaded or not.
Table 5.4.1, 5.4.2 or 5.4.3, or using effective notch Examples valid for the fatigue classes of details No.
stresses in accordance with Chapter 5.4.3. 300 of Table 5.4.3:
"Non-load carrying transverse attachment", detail No.
511 of Table 5.4.1: externally and internally non-
loaded fillet weld. Structural stress and nominal stress
5.4.1 Fatigue classes for the calculation using
are identical.
nominal stresses "Longitudinal flat side gusset welded at the edge of a
The fatigue classes for the calculation using nominal flange", detail No. 525 of Table 5.4.1: externally non-
stresses in accordance with Table 5.4.1 (normal stress) and loaded, but internally loaded edge fillet weld. The cal-
Table 5.4.2 (shear stress) comply with the IIW recommen- culation shall be carried out with the structural stress at
dations. the end of the welded gusset. Structural stress and nom-
inal stress are different.
The fatigue classes for nominal stresses cover the influ- "Cruciform joint", detail No. 411 of Table 5.4.1: exter-
ences of the component design, of the weld type and of the nally and internally loaded fillet welds. The calculation
weld itself. shall generally be carried out using the structural stress
Comment: In the case of designs without structural notch- due to linear misalignment. Structural stress and nomi-
es (e.g. butt joints, cruciform joints), the linear misalign- nal stress are different if the misalignment is large, but
ment which is covered to a different degree by the FAT they are about the same if the misalignment is minor.
shall be taken into consideration. For supplementary com- Some misalignment is already allowed for by the fa-
ments see IIW recommendations tigue class of detail 411.
– For cruciform joints or T-joints, details No. 400, mi-
nor linear misalignment shall not be taken into consid-
eration when determining the structural stress, as it is
already covered by the fatigue class.
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 166 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), according to Hobbacher /13/

FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al

100 Thermally cut edges

121 Machine gas cut or sheared material with no drag lines, 140 -
corners removed, no cracks by inspection, cutting edges
machined, no visible imperfections.

122 Machine thermally cut edges, corners removed, no cracks 125 40

by inspection.

123 Manually thermally cut edges, free from cracks and se- 100 -
vere notches.

124 Manually thermally cut edges, uncontrolled, no notch 80 -

deeper than 5 mm.

200 Butt welds, transversely loaded

211 Transversely loaded butt weld (X-groove or V-groove) 112 45

ground flush to plate, 100% NDT (NDT = non-destructive
testing). —1
212 Transversely loaded butt weld made in shop in flat posi- 90 36
tion, weld overfill  0,1 u sheet metal thickness, NDT. —1

213 Transversely loaded butt weld not satisfying conditions of 80

212, NDT. —2
Aluminum: weld angle d 50°
32
weld angle ! 50°. 25
214 Transversely loaded butt weld, welded on non-permanent 80 28
ceramic backing, root crack. —2

215 Transversely loaded butt weld on permanent backing bar, 71 25

root crack. —2

216 Transversely loaded butt weld welded from one side

without backing bar, full penetration, root crack. —2
71 28
root tested by NDT
36 12
no NDT.
217 Transversely loaded partial penetration butt weld, analysis 36 12
based on stress in weld throat sectional area, weld overfill
not to be taken into account.
The detail is not recommended for fatigue loaded mem-
bers. It is recommended to verify by fracture mechanics.
—1 linear misalignment < 5 % of the sheet metal thickness
—2 linear misalignment < 10 % of the sheet metal thickness
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 167 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 1 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
200 Butt welds, transversely loaded
221 Transversely loaded butt weld ground flush, NDT, with
transition in thickness and width, —1 112 45
slope 1:5 100 40
slope 1:3 90 32
slope 1:2
Some misalignment is already allowed for by the fatigue
class.
222 Transversely loaded butt weld made in shop, welded in
flat position, weld profile controlled, NDT, with transition 90 32
in thickness and width, —1 80 28
slope 1:5 72 25
slope 1:3
slope 1:2
Some misalignment is already allowed for by the fatigue
class.
223 Transversely loaded butt weld, NDT —2, with transition in
thickness and width, 80 25
slope 1:5 71 22
slope 1:3 63 20
slope 1:2
Some smaller misalignment is already allowed for by the
fatigue class.
224 Transversely loaded butt weld, different thicknesses with- 71 22
out transition, centres aligned. —2
In the case of a moderate slope transition, see No. 222.
225 Three plate connection, root crack. —2 71 22

226 Transversely loaded butt weld flange splice in built-up 100 40

section welded prior to the assembly, ground flush, with
radius transition, NDT.

231 Transversely loaded butt weld splice in rolled section or 80 28

bar besides flats, ground flush, NDT.

232 Transversely loaded butt weld splice in circular hollow

section, welded from one side, full penetration, 71 28
root tested by NDT 36 12
no NDT.

—1 linear misalignment < 5 % of the sheet metal thickness

—2 linear misalignment < 10 % of the sheet metal thickness
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 168 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 2 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
200 Butt welds, transversely loaded
233 Tubular joint with permanent backing, full penetra- 71 28
tion weld.

234 Transversely loaded butt weld splice in rectangular

hollow section, welded from one side, full penetra- 56 25
tion, 36 12
root tested by NDT
no NDT.

241 Transversely loaded butt weld ground flush, welded 100 40

from both sides, no linear misalignment, weld ends
and radius ground, 100 % NDT at crossing flanges,
radius transition.

242 Transversely loaded butt weld made in shop at flat 90 36

position, welded from both sides, weld profile con-
trolled, NDT, at crossing flanges, radius transition.
—1

243 Transversely loaded butt weld ground flush, NDT, at 80 32

crossing flanges with welded triangular transition
plates, welded from both sides, weld ends ground.
Crack starting at butt weld. —2
Regarding cracks in the continuous sheet, see
No. 525 and No. 526.
244 Transversely loaded butt weld, NDT, at crossing 71 28
flanges, with welded triangular transition plates,
welded from both sides, weld ends ground. Crack
starting at butt weld. —2
Regarding cracks in the continuous sheet, see
No. 525 and No. 526.
245 Transversely loaded butt weld at crossing flanges, 50 20
welded from both sides. Crack starting at butt weld.
—2
Regarding cracks in the continuous sheet, see
No. 525 and No. 526.

—1 linear misalignment < 5 % of the sheet metal thickness

—2 linear misalignment < 10 % of the sheet metal thickness
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 169 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 3 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
300 Longitudinally loaded welds
311 Automatic longitudinal weld in hollow sections,
without stop/start positions 125 50
with stop/start positions, 90 36

312 Longitudinally loaded butt weld, both sides ground 125 50

flush parallel to load direction, 100 % NDT,

313 Longitudinally loaded butt weld,

without stop/start positions, NDT, 100 40
with stop/start positions. 90 36

321 Continuous automatic longitudinal fully penetrated 125 50

K-butt weld without stop/start positions (based on
stress range in flange), 100 % NDT.

322 Continuous automatic longitudinal double sided 100 40

fillet weld without stop/start positions (based on
stress range in flange).

323 Continuous manual longitudinal fillet or butt weld 90 36

(based on stress range in flange).

324 Intermittent longitudinal fillet W/V,

W/V = 80 32
0 71 28
normal stress in flange V and 0,0 – 0,2 63 25
shear stress in web W at weld ends. 0,2 – 0,3 56 22
0,3 – 0,4 50 20
0,4 – 0,5 45 18
0,5 – 0,6 40 16
0,6 – 0,7 36 14
> 0,7
325 Longitudinal butt weld, fillet weld or
W/V =
intermittent weld with cope holes, 71 28
0
cope holes not higher than 40 % of 63 25
web, 0,0 – 0,2
0,2 – 0,3 56 22
0,3 – 0,4 50 20
normal stress in flange V and shear 45 18
0,4 – 0,5
stress in web W at weld ends. 40 16
0,5 – 0,6
> 0,6 36 14
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 170 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 4 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
300 Longitudinally loaded welds
331 Joint at stiffened knuckle of a flange to be assessed - -
according to Nos. 411 – 414, depending on type of
joint.
Stress in stiffener plate:
ı = 2 ˜ sin Į ˜ ıf ˜ Af/ȈASt
Stress in weld:
ıW = 2 ˜ sin Į ˜ ıf ˜ Af/ȈAW
Af = area of flange
ASt = area of stiffener
Aw = area of weld throat.
332 Unstiffened curved flange to web joint, to be as- - -
sessed according to Nos. 411 – 414, depending on
type of joint.
Stress in web plate:
ı = Ff/(r ˜ t)
Stress in weld:
ı = Ff/(r ˜ Ȉa)
Ff = axial force in flange
t = thickness of web plate
a = weld.
400 Cruciform joints and/or T-joints
411 Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full pene-
tration, weld toes ground, no lamellar tearing, misa-
lignment e  0.15 ˜ t, toe crack.
Misalignment e  0.15 ˜ t 80 28
No misalignment. 90 32
412 Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full pene-
tration, no lamellar tearing, misalignment
e  0.15 ˜ t, toe crack.
Misalignment e  0.15 ˜ t
No misalignment. 71 25
80 28
413 Cruciform joint or T-joint, fillet welds or partial
penetration K-butt welds, no lamellar tearing, toe
crack.
Misalignment e  0.15 ˜ t, 63 22
No misalignment. 71 25
414 Cruciform joint or T-joint, fillet welds or partial
penetration K-butt welds including toe ground joints,
root crack.
Analysis based on stress in weld
V = F/6(a ˜ l) l length of the weld joint 36 12
for a/t d 1/3 t sheet metal thickness 40 14
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 171 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 5 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
400 Cruciform joints or T-joints
415 Cruciform joint or T-joint, arc-welded or laser-
welded V-groove on one side, full penetration weld-
ing,
root tested by NDT: toe crack expected, no NDT:
root crack expected. 71 25
36 12
416 Cruciform joint or T-joint, partial or full penetration
Y-weld on one side, arc-welding, tested for continu-
ous welding, no lamellar tearing, linear misalign-
ment < 0,15 · t.
Caution! Bending due to eccentricity e shall be taken
into consideration. Stress in the weld root:
'VW = 'VNenn ˜ (1 + 6e/a) with weld thickness a. 71 25
421 Splice of rolled section with intermediate plate, fillet 36 12
welds, weld root crack, analysis based on stress in
weld throat.

422 Splice of circular hollow section with intermediate

plate, single-sided half V-weld, full penetration, root
tested by NDT, toe crack;
wall thickness t 8 mm 56 22
wall thickness < 8 mm. 50 20
423 Splice of circular hollow section with intermediate
plate, single-sided fillet weld, root crack;
wall thickness t 8 mm
wall thickness < 8 mm
45 16
Analysis based on stress in weld.
40 14
424 Splice of rectangular hollow section with intermedi-
ate plate, single-sided fillet weld, root tested by
NDT, toe crack;
wall thickness t 8 mm
wall thickness < 8 mm. 50 20
45 18
425 Splice of rectangular hollow section with intermedi-
ate plate, single-sided fillet welds, root crack;
wall thickness t 8 mm
wall thickness < 8 mm
Analysis based on stress in weld. 40 16
36 14
431 Weld connecting web and flange, loaded by a con- - -
centrated force in web plane perpendicular to weld.
Force distributed on width,
b = · h + 50 mm.
Assessment according to Nos. 411 – 414. Local
bending due to eccentric load shall be considered!
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 172 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 6 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
500 Non-load carrying attachments
511 Transverse non-load carrying attachment, not thicker
than main plate;
fillet weld, toe ground
100 36
two-sided fillets, toe ground
100 36
fillet weld(s), as welded, also single-sided
80 28
if attachment thicker than main plate,
71 25
512 Transverse stiffener welded on girder web or flange,
not thicker than main plate;
fillet weld, toe ground
two-sided fillets, toe ground 100 36
fillet weld(s), as welded, also single-sided 100 36
if stiffener thicker than main plate 80 28
For weld ends on web principle stress to be used! 71 25
513 Non-loaded rectangular or circular bolts, blocks or
sheets
L d 50 mm
50 mm  L d 150 mm
150 mm  L d 300 mm 80 28
300 mm  L. 71 25
63 20
50 18
514 Trapezoidal stiffener to deck plate, 71 25
half V-weld, full penetration
calculated on basis of stiffener thickness and
out of plane bending.

515 Trapezoidal stiffener to deck plate, 71 25

fillet or partial penetration weld,
calculated on basis of stiffener thickness and weld
throat, whichever is smaller,
out of plane bending.

521 Longitudinal fillet welded gusset at length l

L d 50 mm
50 mm  L d 150 mm 80 28
150 mm  L d 300 mm 71 25
300 mm  Ll 63 20
gusset near edge: see 525 "flat side gusset". 50 18
522 Longitudinal fillet welded gusset with radius transi- 90 32
tion, end of fillet weld reinforced and ground,
c < 2 ˜ t, max 25 mm,
r > 150 mm.
t thickness of longitudinal stiffener
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 173 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 7 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
500 Non-load carrying attachments
523 Longitudinal fillet welded gusset with smooth transi-
tion (sniped end or radius),
welded on beam flange or plate, at edge,
fillet weld drawn around outlet,
c < 2 · t, max 25 mm;
r > 0,5 ˜ h 71 25
r < 0,5 ˜ h or M < 20°. 63 20
524 Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plate edge or
beam flange edge, with smooth transition (sniped
end or radius), fillet weld drawn around outlet
c < 2 · t, max 25 mm;
r > 0,5 ˜ h
r < 0,5 ˜ h or M < 20°. 50 18
at t2 < 0.7 · t1, FAT increases by 12 %. 45 16
525 Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plate edge or
beam flange edge, gusset length l:
L d 150 mm
150 mm  L d 300 mm
300 mm  L
at t2  0,7 ˜ t1 FAT increases by 12 %,
50 18
t1 } thickness of the flange or sheet, 45 16
t2 } thickness of the gusset. 40 14
526 Longitudinal flat side gusset welded
on edge of plate or beam flange,
radius transition ground.
r ! 150 mm or 1/3  r/w, 90 36
1/6  r/w  1/3, 71 28
r/w  1/6 50 22
531 Circular or rectangular hollow section, 71 28
fillet welded to another section with fillet welds,
non-load carrying fillet welds,
section width parallel to stress direction < 100 mm,
otherwise like longitudinal attachment,
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 174 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 8 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
600 Lap joints
611 Transversely loaded lap joint with fillet welds,
Fatigue of parent metal, 63 22
Fatigue of weld, 45 16
No buckling due to loading and design!
612 Longitudinally loaded lap joint with side fillet
welds; weld end at least 10 mm in front of the edge
of the base plate, 50 18
Fatigue of parent metal, 50 18
Fatigue of weld, length max. 40 ˜ a.
613 Lap joint gusset, fillet welded, non-load carrying,
with smooth transition (sniped end with M < 20° or
radius), welded to loaded element c < 2 ˜ t, max
25 mm,
to flat bar 63 22
to bulb section 56 20
to angle section. 50 18
614 Transversely loaded lap joint with fillet welds;
Fatigue of parent metal (crack in the toe of the
63 22
weld),
36 12
Fatigue of the root (root crack),
Take bending due to eccentricity into consideration!
700 Reinforcements
711 End of long doubling plate on I-beam, welded ends,
based on stress range in flange at weld toe,
tD d 0,8 ˜ t
56 20
0,8 ˜ t < tD d 1,5 ˜ t 50 18
1,5 ˜ t  tD. 45 16
712 End of long doubling plate on beam, reinforced
welded ends ground, based on stress range in flange
at weld toe,
tD d 0,8 ˜ t
0,8 ˜ t < tD d 1,5 ˜ t 71 28
63 25
1,5 ˜ t  tD.
56 22
721 End of reinforcement plate on rectangular hollow 50 20
section.
wall thickness: t < 25 mm,
No undercut of the transverse weld!

731 Reinforcements welded on with fillet welds,

toe ground,
toe as welded,
80 32
Analysis based on modified (local) nominal stress;
assessment using structural stress recommended. 71 25
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 175 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 9 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
800 Flanges, branches and nozzles
811 Stiff block flange, 71 25
full penetration weld.

812 Stiff block flange,

partial penetration or fillet weld,
63 22
toe crack in plate,
36 16
root crack in weld.

821 Flat flange with ! 80 % penetration butt welds,

toe crack,
modified nominal stress in pipe,
71 25
assessment using structural stresses recommended.

822 Flat flange with fillet welds,

toe crack,
modified nominal stress in pipe, 63 22
assessment using structural stresses recommended.

831 Tubular branch or pipe penetrating a plate, fillet 80 28

welds.
If the diameter is > 50 mm, stress concentration of
cut-out shall be taken into consideration!

832 Tubular branch or pipe penetrating a plate, fillet

welds,
toe crack, 71 25
root crack, 36 12
If the diameter is > 50 mm, stress concentration of
cut-out shall be taken into consideration!
841 Nozzle welded on plate, root pass removed by drill- 71 25
ing.
If the diameter is > 50 mm, stress concentration of
cut-out shall be taken into consideration!

842 Nozzle welded on pipe, root pass as welded. 63 22

If the diameter is > 50 mm, stress concentration of
cut-out shall be taken into consideration!
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 176 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.1 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (normal stress), continued page 10 of 10
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
900 Tubular joints
911 Circular hollow section butt joint to massive bar, on 63 22
one side, full-penetration welding, crack in toe or
root.

912 Circular hollow section welded to component with 63 22

single side butt weld, full penetration welding, back-
ing provided, root crack.

913 Circular hollow section welded to component single 50 18

sided butt weld or double fillet welds, root crack.
Caution! Bad inspectibility shall be taken into con-
sideration by the safety factor!

921 Circular hollow section with welded-on disk,

fillet weld, toe ground,
fillet weld, toe ground, 90 32
fillet weld. 90 32
71 25
931 Tube-plate joint, tubes flattened,
butt weld (X-groove),
tube diameter d 200 mm and
63 18
plate thickness d 20 mm.

932 Tube-plate joint, tube slitted and welded to plate,

tube diameter d 200 mm and
plate thickness d 20 mm,
tube diameter > 200 mm or 63 18
plate thickness > 20 mm.
45 14

Table 5.4.2 Fatigue classes for nominal stress (shear stress), according to Hobbacher /13/
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Al
1 Full penetration butt welds. 100 36

2 Fillet welds, 80 28
partial penetration butt welds.
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 177 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

Table 5.4.3 Fatigue classes for structural stress (normal stress), according to Hobbacher /13/
FAT FAT
No. Structural detail Description
Steel Aluminum
1 Transversely loaded butt weld, as welded, NDT. 100 40

2 Cruciform joint or T-joint, full penetration fillet weld, no 100 40

lamellar tearing, linear misalignment e < 0,15 ˜ t.

3 Transversely loaded fillet weld at transverse non-load 100 40

carrying attachment, not thicker than main plate, as weld-
ed.

4 Ends of fixings and longitudinal stiffeners, fillet welds, as 100 40

welded.

5 Ends of cover plates and similar connections, as welded. 100 40

6 Cruciform joint with load carrying fillet welds, as welded. 90 36

7 Lap joint with load carrying fillet welds, as welded. 90 36

8 Smooth flange (type "b" /9/) with short connection, 100 40

fillet welds or full penetration welds, as welded.

9 Smooth flange (type "b" /9/) with long connection, 90 36

fillet welds or full penetration welds, as welded.
5.4 Fatigue classes for welded components 178 5 Annexes
made of structural steel and of aluminum

– Kt,fiktiv = 4,5 with rref = 0,05 mm (by analogy

5.4.3 Fatigue classes for the calculation using
with/14/).
effective notch stresses
Should a value of less than Kt,fiktiv ˜ VStruktur result for the
For the purposes of calculating using effective notch
stresses, no notch case-specific fatigue classes need to be calculated notch stress VKerb,max, the stress to be used for
taken into consideration, as the notch case-specific stress the strength assessment shall be increased to that value.
concentration factor is implicitly covered by the calcula-
tion of the notch stresses in accordance with Chap-
ter 4.1.2.2.
The fatigue classes (FAT) for effective notch stresses are
given in Tables 5.4.4 and 5.4.5, depending on the reference
radius of the notch model rref.

In general, the notch radius is rref = 1 mm. For thinner

sheets of thicknesses less than 5 mm, the reference radius
rref = 0,05 mm shall be used.

Table 5.4.4 Fatigue classes for effective notch stresses,

in MPa (for normal stresses perpendicular to the weld) Figure 5.4-1: Stress concentration factor for effective notch
according to Fricke /14/ stresses, according to Fricke /14/
rref = 1 mm rref = 0,05 mm
Steel 225 630 Alternatively, an assessment of the fatigue strength based
on nominal or structural stresses is recommended for mild-
Aluminum 71 180
ly notched weld joints. /14/

Table 5.4.5 Fatigue classes for effective notch stresses

(for shear stresses) according to Sonsino et al. /38/
rref = 1 mm rref = 0,05 mm
Steel 160 250
Aluminum 63 90

Notch stresses at weld joints with mild notches

The fatigue classes (FAT) given in Tables 5.4.4 and 5.4.5
are based on the material group-dependent fatigue strength
of welded steel or aluminum, corresponding with the
notch-free fatigue class according to Table 5.4.1, No. 121.
The increase in the values of the fatigue classes for effec-
tive notch stress in accordance with Tables 5.4.4 and 5.4.5
results from the support effect depending on the reference
radius, similar to the Kt-Kf ratio in the case of non-welded
components. This support effect has been experimentally
verified for strongly notched weld joints, e.g. cruciform
joints and weld roots.
In the case of weld joints with mild notches, e.g. full pene-
tration butt welds, the lack of support effects shall be com-
pensated for by introducing a ficticious notch of a refer-
ence radius rref such that the stress concentration factor of
the ficticious notch, see Figure 5.4-1,
Kt,fiktiv = VKerb,max/VStruktur (5.4.1)
is at least
– Kt,fiktiv = 1,6 with rref = 1 mm (in accordance with /14/)
and
5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of surface 179 5 Annexes
treated components

5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of guideline. An essential aspect is that residual stresses are
taken into account. As far as their effect is concerned, they
surface treated components are regarded as additional mean stresses, thus influencing
5.5.0 General the overall evaluation of the mean stress. As both reference
points are affected by this, the calculation of the mean
In this chapter a method is given for estimating, by calcula- stress factors is separately explained in Chapter 5.5.1.
tion, the fatigue limit of surface treated components, see
also /17/. This method is intended to enable a more de-
tailed evaluation than that based on the global surface
treatment factors given in Table 2.3.8 or Table 4.3.7. The
calculation method described here and the corresponding
strength assessment are valid only for components made of
milled steel. The groups of methods and individual meth-
ods considered here are listed in Table 5.5.1:
RH: Case hardness
Table 5.5.1 Surface treatment methods covered by this GH: Limit hardness
Guideline
Chemo-thermal and – Case hardening
thermal surface – Nitriding, carbonitriding Figure 5.5-1: Double assessment of surface treated
hardening: – Inductive hardening, surface components; left side: different reference points; right side:
hardening (basic) distribution of hardness and residual stress
Mechanical surface – Shot peening
Input values to be specified by the user
treatment: – Cold rolling
Surface hardening
In the case of cold rolling, the strength values calculated
here refer to the state where no incipient cracks have Regarding the chemo-thermal and thermal methods, the
formed. Significantly higher strengths— which have been following shall be specified by the user as minimum input
observed experimentally—could be approved, provided values:
non-propagating cracks in the component are accepted. – case hardness HVRand (surface)
Structure of the assessment – depth of case, depending on the method (case harden-
The method is based on the concept of the local fatigue ing—Eht, nitriding—Nht, inductive hardening—Rht).
limit. According to this concept, both strength and residual
Mechanical surface treatment
stresses are locally varying quantities. They depend on the
position in the interior of the component, characterized by Regarding the mechanical methods, the following shall be
the depth t measured from the surface. Combined with a specified by the user as minimum input value:
variable stress value (stress gradient), this results in a lo- – tensile strength Rm of the base material.
cally varying degree of utilization. The failure location
(formation of an incipient crack) is the local position where Another important parameter is the hardness of the core.
the highest degree of utilization occurs. Provided it is available, it may be used for calculating the
For simplification, the calculation method described here strength. If the core hardness is unknown, it is estimated
considers two identified points of a surface treated compo- based on the component's tensile strength.
nent, see Fig. 5.5-1: All further parameters are specified by the calculation
RS: One point on the surface of the component (usu- method. As the method, in general, is an influence factor
ally within the notch), having the strength of the method, the users may specify certain parameters on their
hard surface layer. own responsibility, provided they have the necessary
knowledge.
Ü: One point in the interior of the component, at the
transition from the surface layer to the core, Comment
having the core strength of the base material. The method described here has been derived by evaluating
The distance to the surface is tÜ. a considerable number of experimental findings. It should
be conservative insofar as, provided the surface treatment
For both points the local stresses shall be determined as
technology is correctly applied, the calculated strength
local elastic stresses, the strengths shall be calculated fol-
values can be achieved or even exceeded. Nevertheless, the
lowing the relevant individual steps described and the
method is regarded as preliminary and should be applied
degrees of utilization shall be determined. An analytical
with caution. Furthermore, it shall always be kept in mind
assessment requires both degrees of utilization not to ex-
that, if false technological parameters are applied, the fa-
ceed a value of one. Thus, the higher degree of utilization
tigue limit can even deteriorate.
is decisive.
The strength calculation at both points of the component
follows the general method given in Chapter 3 of this
5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of surface 180 5 Annexes
treated components

5.5.1 Calculation of mean stress factors, Table 5.5.2 Mean stress sensitivity MV of the surface
taking into consideration any residual stresses layer, depending on the method
5.5.1.0 Stress division
Method MV,RS
Case hardening 0,5
In the case of surface treated components, residual stresses
Nitriding, nitrocarborating 0,45
and load-induced stresses will be mutually superimposed.
As long as there is no relaxation in the residual stresses, Inductive hardening, surface hardening 0,4
these can be regarded as constant over time. The load- Shot peening 0,3
induced stresses, on the other hand, vary with time, indi- Cold rolling 0,18
cated here in terms of the mean value and the amplitude.
If the two stress proportions are mutually superimposed,
the residual stresses act like mean stresses 5.5.1.2 Calculation of the mean stress factor

V Vm  V a The mean stress factors are calculated as a function of the

(5.5.1) type of overloading. In doing so, it shall be kept in mind
VE,m  VL,m  VL,a
that the user can indicate the type of overloading only in
Vm overall mean stress, composed of residual relation to the load-induced stresses.
stress and load-induced stress;
Type of overloading F1: Constant mean load-induced
Va stress amplitude, load proportion only;
stress
VE,m residual stress in terms of the constant mean
stress; Based on the related mean stress
VL,m mean load-induced stress; Vm
sm ; Vm VE,m  VL,m (5.5.3)
VL,a amplitude of the load-induced stress. V WK
The shift in the mean stress caused by residual stresses has VE,m residual stress in terms of the constant mean
an influence on the calculation of the mean stress factors. stress, depending on the method, Eqs.
(5.5.38) to (5.5.45);
VL,m mean load-induced stress
5.5.1.1 The Haigh diagram
and the field limits
For the surface layer, a Haigh diagram as illustrated in Fig.
1  Rp, zyk /V WK
5.5-2 applies which has been modified with regard to the BG1
pressure field. Furthermore, the limit curve of the critical 1  MV
(5.5.4)
amplitude consists of four sections (I to IV). However, 1 3  MV
there is a decline in the compression field, depending on BG2 , BG3
1  MV 1  MV 2
the cyclic yield stress. This is meant to avoid a relaxation
in the compressive residual stresses caused by alternating the following applies:
plastifications. The modified Haigh diagram is the basis for
calculating the mean stress factors for both reference Field I: sm  BG1
points.
1  MV ˜ Rp, zyk /V WK
The cyclic yield stress can be estimated based on the ten- K AK (5.5.5)
1  MV
sile strength.
Rp,zyk 0,6 ˜ Rm,RS (5.5.2) Field II: BG1 d sm  BG2
Rm,RS tensile strength of the surface layer, Chapter KAK 1  MV ˜ sm (5.5.6)
5.5.2.1.
Field III: BG2 d sm  BG3
The mean stress sensitivity is specified in accordance with
Table 5.5.2, depending on the method. 1  MV /3 MV
K AK  ˜ sm (5.5.7)
1  MV 3

Field IV: sm t BG3

3  MV
K AK (5.5.8)
3 ˜ 1  MV 2
MV mean stress sensitivity, Table 5.5.2;
Rp,zyk cyclic yield stress, Eq. (5.5.2);
VWK component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Eq. (5.5.36);
Figure 5.5-2: Haigh diagram of the surface layer
5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of surface 181 5 Annexes
treated components

sm related mean stress, Eq. (5.5.3). VL,a amplitude of the load-induced stress
Type of overloading F2: Constant ratio of load-induced and the field limits
stresses
Rp,zyk 2 3  Mı
Based on the parameter of the load-induced stress BG1  , BG2 0 , BG3 ˜
ı WK 3 1  Mı 2
VL,m
sL (5.5.9) (5.5.16)
VL,a
VL,a amplitude of the load-induced stress; the following applies:
VL,m mean load-induced stress, Field I: smin  BG1

and the field limits 1  Mı ˜ Rp,zyk /ı WK

K AK (5.5.17)
2V WK  Rp,zyk ˜ 1  MV  VE ˜ 1  MV 1  Mı
BG1 1 
V WK  MV ˜ Rp,zyk Field II: BG1 d smin  BG2

VE 1  Mı ˜ smin
BG2 1 ˜ 1  MV (5.5.10) K AK (5.5.18)
V WK 1  Mı

2 Field III: BG2 d smin  BG3

VE 3 ˜ 1  MV
BG3 3 ˜
V WK 3  MV 1  Mı /3 Mı
 ˜ smin
1  Mı 3 (5.5.19)
the following applies: K AK
1  Mı /3
Field I: sL  BG1
Field IV: smin t BG3
1  MV ˜ Rp,zyk /V WK
K AK (5.5.11) 3  Mı
1  MV K AK (5.5.20)
3 ˜ 1  Mı 2
Field II: BG1 d sL  BG2
MV mean stress sensitivity, Table 5.5.2;
1  MV ˜ VE /V WK Rp,zyk cyclic yield strength, Eq. (5.5.2);
K AK (5.5.12)
1  M V ˜ sL VWK component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Eq. (5.5.36);
Field III: BG2 d sL  BG3 smin related minimum stress, Eq. (5.5.15).
1  MV /3 MV VE
 ˜ Type of overloading F4 Constant load-induced maximum
1  MV 3 V WK (5.5.13) stress
K AK
1  MV ˜ sL /3
Based on the related maximum stress
Field IV: sL t BG3 ı max
smax ; ı max ı E,m  ı L,m  ı L,a (5.5.21)
3  MV ı WK
K AK (5.5.14) VE,m residual stress, depending on the method,
3 ˜ 1  MV 2
Eqs. (5.5.38) to (5.5.45);
MV mean stress sensitivity, Table 5.5.2;
VL,m mean load-induced stress;
Rp,zyk cyclic yield stress, Eq. (5.5.2);
VL,a amplitude of the load-induced stress
VWK component fatigue limit for completely re-
versed stress, Eq. (5.5.36); and the field limits
sL ratio of load-induced stresses, Eq. (5.5.9). 2  1  Mı ˜ Rp, zyk /ı WK
B G1 
Type of overloading F3: Constant load-induced minimum 1  Mı
stress (5.5.22)
1 4 3  Mı
BG2 , BG3 ˜
Based on the related minimum stress 1  Mı 3 1  Mı 2
Vmin
smin ; Vmin VE,m  VL,m  VL,a (5.5.15) the following applies:
V WK
. Field I: smax  BG1
VE,m residual stress, depending on the method,
Eqs. (5.5.38) to (5.5.45); 1  Mı ˜ Rp, zyk /ı WK
K AK (5.5.23)
VL,m mean load-induced stress; 1  Mı
5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of surface 182 5 Annexes
treated components

Field II: BG1 d smax  BG The tensile strength of the surface layer results, in turn,
from
1  Mı ˜ smax
K AK (5.5.24) Rm,RS 3,3 ˜ HVRand (5.5.31)
1  Mı
HVRand case hardness, Eqs. (5.5.29), (5.5.30).
Field III: BG2 d smax  BG3
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
1  Mı /3 Mı
 ˜ smax Surface hardening
1  Mı 3 (5.5.25)
K AK ­a ˜ HVRand  b for HVRand  500
1  Mı /3 V w,zd,RS ®
¯ V w,zd,RS,max for HVRand t 500
Field IV: smax t BG3
(5.5.32)
3  Mı Vw,zd,RS material fatigue limit for completely re-
K AK (5.5.26) versed stress of the surface layer, in MPa;
3 ˜ 1  Mı 2
HVRand case hardness to be specified by the user;
MV mean stress sensitivity, Table 5.5.2;
a, b parameters, Table 5.5.3;
Rp,zyk cyclic yield strength, Eq. (5.5.2); Vw,zd,RS,max maximum material fatigue limit for com-
VWK component fatigue limit for completely re- pletely reversed stress of the surface layer,
versed stress, Eq. (5.5.36); Table 5.5.3.
smax related maximum stress, Eq. (5.5.21).
Table 5.5.3 Parameters for calculating the material
fatigue limit for completely reversed stress of the surface
5.5.2 Assessment of the surface layer layer
Vw,zd,RS,max
5.5.2.0 Stresses Method a b
[MPa]
The stresses shall be determined as principle stress values Case hardening 1,2 10 610
at the surface of the component. As the normal stress crite- Nitriding 1,2 90 690
rion applies to the hard surface layer, the strength assess-
Inductive harden-
ment is performed uniaxially, using the highest principle 1,42 23 733
ing
stress V1. The relevant parameters are the mean value and
the amplitude. Mechanical surface treatment
V1,a,RS, V1,m,RS (5.5.27) VW,zd,RS fw,V ˜ Rm,RS (5.5.33)
fw,V fatigue strength factor for completely re-
versed normal stress, Table 4.2.1;
5.5.2.1 Strength Rm,RS tensile strength of the surface layer, Eq.
Tensile strength, hardness (5.5.31).

Surface hardening Design factor

Rm,RS 3,3 ˜ HVRand (5.5.28) 1 §¨ 1 § 1 ··

K WK, RS 1 ~ ¨  1¸ ¸ (5.5.34)
HVRand case hardness to be specified by the user. ¨ ¨
nRS © K f © K R,V ¸¸
¹¹
Mechanical surface treatment nRS Kt-Kf ratio of the surface layer, Eq. (5.5.35);
~
The achievable case hardness can be estimated from the Kf constant, Chapter 4.3.1.2;
initial strength. KR,V roughness factor (Eq. (4.3.2.1)), as a func-
Shot peening tion of the surface layer’s tensile strength
Rm,RS calculated applying Eqs. (5.5.28),
­200  0,17 ˜ Rm for Rm d 1500 MPa (5.5.31).
HVRand ®
¯ Rm / 3,3 for Rm ! 1500 MPa The Kt-Kf ratio of the surface layer is calculated from the
(5.5.29) case hardness and the related stress gradient.

Cold rolling 1600

n RS 1 ˜G (5.5.35)
­170  0,19 ˜ Rm for Rm d 1500 MPa (HVRand )²
HVRand ®
¯ Rm / 3,3 for Rm ! 1500 MPa HVRand case hardness; to be specified by the user
(surface hardening) or in accordance with
(5.5.30) Eqs. (5.5.29), (5.5.30) (mechanical surface
Rm tensile strength in the initial state. treatment);
5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of surface 183 5 Annexes
treated components

G related stress gradient, Chapter 4.3.1.3.3. Cold rolling

Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress ­ 0 for Rm d 500 MPa
°
V W,zd,RS V1,E,RS ®350  0,7 Rm for 500 MPa  Rm d 1500 MPa
V WK,RS (5.5.36) °  700 for Rm ! 1500 MPa
K WK,RS ¯
(5.5.43)
Vw,zd,RS material fatigue limit for completely re-
Rm tensile strength in the initial state.
versed stress of the surface layer, Eq.
(5.5.32) or Eq. (5.5.33); Consequently, the following applies to the secondary prin-
KWK,RS design factor, Eq. (5.5.34). ciple stress V2 (circumferential direction):

Estimation of residual stresses Shot peening

Surface hardening V2,E,RS V1,E,RS (5.5.44)
For the principle stress in the preferred direction V1 (longi- Cold rolling
tudinal direction, max. principle stress), the residual stress-
V2,E,RS 0,6 ˜ V1,E,RS (5.5.45)
es can be estimated from the hardness difference 'HV.
'HV HVRand  HVKern (5.5.37) Mean stress factor
HVRand case hardness to be specified by the user; The mean stress factor of the surface layer is calculated in
HVKern core hardness, either to be specified by the accordance with Chapter 5.5.1.2, depending on the respec-
user or to be estimated from the tensile stress tive type of overloading, using the input values for the
Rm, based on HVKern = Rm/3,3. surface layer defined here.

Case hardening VWK VWK,RS

(5.5.46)
VE,m V1,E,RS
­  0,625 ˜ ǻHV for ǻHV d 400
ı1,E,RS ® Component fatigue limit
¯0,75 ˜ ǻHV  550 for ǻHV ! 400
The component fatigue limit of the surface layer character-
(5.5.38) izes the critical amplitude.
Nitriding VAK,RS KAK,RS ˜ VWK,RS (5.5.47)
­ 0,675 ˜ ǻHV for ǻHV d 400 VWK,RS component fatigue limit for completely re-
ı1,E,RS ® versed stress of the surface layer, Eq.
¯  270 for ǻHV ! 400
(5.5.36);
(5.5.39) KAK,RS mean stress factor, depending on the respec-
tive type of overloading, Chapter 5.5.1.2.
Inductive hardening
­  0,8 ˜ ǻHV for ǻHV d 400
ı1,E,RS ® 5.5.2.2 Assessment
¯  5 ˜ ǻHV  1680 for ǻHV ! 400
Assessing the surface layer is performed by calculating the
(5.5.40) degree of utilization of the highest principle stress.
'HV hardness difference, Eq. (5.5.37). V1,a,RS
a AK,RS d1 (5.5.48)
If a residual stress value for the secondary principle stress V AK,RS /jD
V2 (circumferential direction) is of interest, the following
V1,a,RS amplitude of the maximum principle stress,
estimation may be used for all methods:
Eq. (5.5.27);
V2,E,RS 0,72 ˜ V1,E,RS (5.5.41) VAK,RS component fatigue limit of the surface layer,
Eq. (5.5.47);
Mechanical surface treatment
jD safety factor, Chapter 4.5.
For the principle stress in the preferred direction V1 (longi-
tudinal direction, max. principle stress), the residual stress-
es can be estimated from the initial strength.
5.5.3 Assessment of the interior—transition
from surface layer to core
Shot peening
5.5.3.0 Stresses
­ 84  0,26 ˜ Rm for Rm d 1600 MPa
V1,E,RS ® For the weak core of a ductile material, the v. Mises crite-
¯  500 for Rm ! 1600 MPa rion applies as an interaction equation for the purposes of
(5.5.42) overlaying the stress amplitudes of proportional and syn-
chronous loads. Analogous to the procedure for the surface
layer, however, the double strength assessment is also to be
5.5 Estimation of the fatigue limit of surface 184 5 Annexes
treated components

performed at position Ü, applying the maximum principle As the relevant point is in the interior of the component, no
stress. roughness factor applies. Furthermore, no support effect
caused by a stress gradient shall be considered. Thus, the
The stresses shall be determined as local principle stress
material and the component fatigue limits for completely
values in the interior of the components at the transition
reversed stress are identical because of KWK = 1 (see e.g.
from the surface layer to the core. The relevant parameters
are the mean value and the amplitude. Eq. (5.5.34)).

V1,a,Ü, V1,m,Ü (5.5.49) In the case of surface hardening, if the core hardness is
known, the fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
The position is indicated in terms of the distance tÜ from shall be calculated as a function of the core hardness, ap-
the component surface. The following estimation applies: plying

Surface hardening VWK,Ü f(HVKern) (5.5.51)

HVKern core hardness.
Position tÜ is determined depending on the method given
in Table 5.5.4, based on the depth of case to be specified The same approaches as for the surface layer apply, Eq.
by the user, see Fig. 5.5-1. (5.5.32) or Eq. (5.5.33).
Table 5.5.4 Determination of tÜ in the case of surface If the core hardness is unknown, or in the case of mechani-
hardening cal surface treatment, the fatigue limit for completely re-
Method Transition from surface layer to core versed stress is calculated based on
Case harden- VWK,Ü fW,V ˜ Rm,Ü (5.5.52)
tÜ 2 ˜ Eht
ing fw,V fatigue strength factor for completely re-
Nitriding tÜ 1,3 ˜ Nht versed normal stress, Table 4.2.1;
Inductive Rm,Ü tensile strength at the transition from the
tÜ 2 ˜ Rht
hardening surface layer to the core, Eq. (5.5.50), or ini-
tial tensile strength Rm.
Mechanical surface treatment
Estimation of residual stresses
Position tÜ is determined from the initial strength given in
Table 5.5.5. The residual stress (tension) at the transition from the sur-
face layer to the core is specified as a global value, based
Table 5.5.5 Determination of tÜ in the case of mechani- on the compressive residual stress of the surface layer.
cal surface treatment
V1,E,Ü 0,3 ˜ V1,E,RS (5.5.53)
Position of transition from surface
Method
layer to core V1,E,RS residual stress of the surface layer, Eqs.
(5.5.38) to (5.5.45).
Shot peening tÜ 0,33  1 ˜ 104 Rm
Mean stress factor
Cold rolling tÜ 0,4  1 ˜ 104 Rm
The mean stress sensitivity at the transition from the sur-
face layer to the core is calculated in accordance with
Chapter 5.5.3.1, Eq. (5.5.50), as a function of the tensile
5.5.3.1 Strength
strength Rm,Ü.
In general, two parallel variants of how to calculate the
fatigue limit are given: Together with the further quantities defined here, the mean
stress factor KAK,Ü is calculated in accordance with Chap-
a) the core hardness is known, ter 5.5.1.2.
b) the core hardness is unknown. Component fatigue limit
Tensile strength, hardness The component fatigue limit at the transition from the
The tensile strength results from the core hardness calcu- surface layer to the core characterizes the critical ampli-
lated applying tude.
Rm,Ü 3,3 ˜ HVKern (5.5.50) VAK,Ü KAK,Ü ˜ VWK,Ü (5.5.54)
VWK,Ü component fatigue limit for completely re-
If the core hardness is unknown, any further calculation is
versed stress of the surface layer, Eq.
performed using the initial tensile strength in accordance
(5.5.51) or Eq. (5.5.52);
with Chapter 3.2.
KAK,Ü mean stress factor, depending on the type of
Material/component fatigue limit for completely reversed overloading, Chapter 5.5.1.2.
stress
5.6 Experimental determination of 185 5 Annexes
component strength values

5.5.3.2 Assessment 5.6 Experimental determination of

The assessment at the transition from the surface layer to component strength values
the core is performed by calculating the degree of utiliza-
tion of the highest principle stress. 5.6.0 General
ı1,a,Ü In accordance with this chapter, component static strength
a AK,Ü d1 (5.5.55) values or component fatigue strength values can be deter-
ı AK,Ü/jD
mined experimentally; the same procedure also applies to
material strength values. The given recommendations are
V1,a,Ü amplitude of the maximum principle stress, aimed at obtaining strength values that are sufficiently
reliable, although the number of tests will be limited—as
Eq. (5.5.49);
in most cases—to a few individual cases.
VAK,RS component fatigue limit at position Ü, Eq.
(5.5.54); The loading conditions applied to these tests may be speci-
jD safety factor, Chapter 4.5. fied in terms of forces, moments or stresses, combined
with the respective load or stress ratio. The obtained test
results may be presented in terms of forces, moments,
nominal stresses or local stresses (the latter as structural
stresses or effective notch stresses for welded compo-
nents).
In practice, a component may be subject to several kinds of
service loadings, depending on its operating conditions.
The experimental approach described below is restricted to
a single kind of loading. This single kind of loading may
cause multiaxial stresses of the component, which are
proportional stresses, however. Multiaxial testing by ap-
plying simultaneously more than one different kinds of
loading, which will result in non-proportional stresses, is
not considered here.
As test results will normally exhibit a scatter that has to be
taken into consideration, several identical repetitions of the
same test are necessary in order to allow a statistical evalu-
ation of the results. It is common practice to assume a
logarithmic Gaussian scatter distribution to exist, Fig-
ure 5.6-1.

((Text in Bild unverändert, entspricht Bild 5.11.1))

Figure 5.6-1: Sufficiently reliable component strength

value SX derived from experimentally determined
component strength values Si,X

LSD = logarithmic standard deviation

= standard deviation of lg ( Si,X).

From an experimental examination of component strength

values, which has usually to be restricted to a small sample
5.6 Experimental determination of 186 5 Annexes
component strength values

(only a few individual tests) because of testing time and shall be carried out with a stress amplitude exceeding the
cost, only the geometric mean of the component strength expected endurance stress amplitude. This is under the
value, SX,50%, can be determined with sufficient accuracy. assumption that there is a sufficient distance to the yield
It is associated with a probability of survival of PÜ = 50 %. stress and that the critical location and the type of crack do
not change when increasing the stress amplitude.
Using a larger sample it would be possible to determine the
logarithmic standard deviation, LSD, as well; if the sample The experimental examination of the n test pieces on this
is small, however, no reliable result can be obtained. particular stress level, SL, results in the numbers of cycles
Therefore with small samples an empirical value of the NL,i, the logarithmic mean value of which is calculated as
logarithmic standard deviation shall be used. follows:
Consequently, the experimentally obtained geometric n
¦ lg(NL,i )
1
mean and the empirical value of the logarithmic standard lg(NL,50% ) ˜ (5.6.4)
n i 1
deviation can be used to derive the component strength
value to be determined for a probability of survival of PÜ = [lg(NL,50% )]
NL,50% 10 (5.6.5)
97,5 %. It is obtained by dividing the geometric mean,
SX,50%, by a statistical conversion factor, jn,s in accordance The geometric mean value of the component fatigue limit
with Table 5.6.1, which is dependent on the logarithmic follows from an extrapolation along the slope of the con-
standard deviation, LSD, and on the number of tests, n. stant amplitude S-N curve down to its knee point:
The statistical conversion factor jn,s allows for the differ- 1/k
§N ·
ence between the geometric mean (with PÜ = 50 %) and S AK,50% SL ˜ ¨¨ L,50% ¸¸ (5.6.6)
the component strength value for PÜ = 97,5 % and, moreo- © ND ¹
ver, for the statistical uncertainty of an experimentally where the number of cycles at knee point, ND, and the
determined geometric mean as a function of the number n slope of the constant amplitude S-N curve, k, are those
of the individual tests. given in Table 2.4.3 or 4.4.3.
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
5.6.1 Experimental determination of the To determine the component variable amplitude fatigue
geometric mean value strength for a given stress spectrum and for a required
number of cycles, the tests shall be carried out at a stress
Component static strength
amplitude Sa,1 exceeding the expected component fatigue
The geometric mean value of the experimentally obtained limit. This is under the assumption that there is a sufficient
static strength values Si,SK (yield strength or tensile distance to the yield stress.
strength, number of tests n) is
The experimental examination of n test pieces on that
n stress level, SL = Sa,1, results in the numbers of cycles
¦ lg(SSK,i )
1
lg(S SK,50% ) ˜ (5.6.1) N*i,L (i = 1 … n), the logarithmic mean value of which is
n i 1
calculated as follows:
[lg(S SK,50% )]
S SK,50% 10 (5.6.2) n
¦ lg(NL,* i )
1
*
lg(NL,50% ) ˜ (5.6.7)
Component fatigue limit n i 1
There are several ways to examine the component fatigue *
* [lg(NL,50% )] (5.6.8)
limit experimentally. NL,50% 10
Stair case tests and other test methods The mean value of the component variable amplitude fa-
Provided a sufficiently high number of test pieces (n t 15 tigue strength for the required number of cycles N* follows
as a minimum) is available, the component fatigue limit from an extrapolation of the component fatigue life curve:
can be experimentally determined in a direct approach 1/k *
(without extrapolation) using the stair case test method, or § N* ·
SBK,50% SL ˜ ¨ L,50% ¸ (5.6.9)
by another relevant test method proposed in the literature. ¨ N* ¸
The result of the evaluation procedure of the respective test © ¹
method is the mean value of the component fatigue limit,
As a first approximation the slope exponent k* of the com-
SAK,50% = result of the evaluation procedure ponent fatigue life curve can be chosen to be equal to the
(5.6.3) slope exponent k of the component constant amplitude S-N
curve given in Table 2.4.3 or Table 4.4.3. The supposition
Tests on a stress level above the fatigue limit that k* = k implies that a component fatigue life curve
In order to reduce the required testing time and if the num- established following the elementary version of Miner’s
ber of possible tests is less than 15 (1 d n  15), these tests rule is assumed.
5.7 Design loads 187 5 Annexes

The actual slope exponent of the component fatigue life 5.7 Design loads
curve k* may, however, be somewhat larger than that of
the constant amplitude S-N curve, (k* t k), see Fig- 5.7.0 General
ure 2.1-3 or Figure 4.1-3. To observe this actual slope
The height of the loads shall be specified such that it is on
exponent k*, the extrapolation shall be based on the com-
the safe side and with a sufficient probability higher than
ponent fatigue life curve derived by the consistent version
most of the normally occurring loads. Usually this proba-
of Miner’s rule for an estimate of the component fatigue
bility can hardly be quantified, however.
limit—values k and ND given in Table 2.4.3 or Ta-
ble 4.4.3—for the stress spectrum in question. The stress Provided specifications for the loads exist in sector-
amplitudes S*a,1,50% for N*L,50% and S*a,1 for N* may be specific bodies of rules and regulations, these specifica-
tions are relevant for the design. In this particular case,
taken from this component fatigue life curve and used as
special consideration shall be given to the question of
follows in an extrapolation:
whether in that special sector the same strength and safety
*
Sa,1 for N* level is used as in this guideline.
SBK,50% SL ˜ (5.11.10)
* *
Sa,1,50% for NL,50% Otherwise, or by way of complementation, loads can be
calculated analytically or numerically (e.g. multi-body
simulation) or determined based on measurements, see
5.6.2 Logarithmic standard deviation and Chapter 5.7.3. Depending on the loading scenarios chosen
for the component design, representative (medium) or safe
statistical conversion factor (excessive) loads will result, see Chapter 5.7.4.
As a reliable experimental determination of the standard
deviation is not possible for the generally small samples,
an estimate of the standard deviation of the logarithmic 5.7.1 Assessment of the static strength
strength values shall be applied, in the following called
logarithmic standard deviation LSD, see Table 5.6.1. For the purpose of the assessment of the static strength,
extreme loads with regard to size, direction of effects and
The reliable value of the component strength SX to be possible interactions shall be determined in all critical
determined for PÜ = 97,5 % is, see Figure 5.6-1, design areas, based on the required conditions of use.
(page 189) Static loads consist
SX = SX,50%/jn,s (5.6.11) – of the conceivable minimum and maximum load cases
where or load case combinations the component is to with-
stand without failure ("special loads" or "special
jn,S 10 (2 1/ n ) ˜ LSD events") as well as
(5.6.12)
SX,50% geometric mean value SSK,50%, SAK,50% or – of the minimum and maximum values of the fatigue
loads.
SBK,50% of the experimentally determined
stress values Si,X; 5.7.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
jn,S statistical conversion factor, Table 5.6.1; For the purpose of the assessment of the fatigue strength,
n number of the individual tests; the expected service loads with regard to size, direction of
LSD logarithmic standard deviation applicable to effects and possible interactions shall be determined based
the experimentally determined stress values on the required conditions of use.
Si,X, Table 5.6.1.
Fatigue loads consist
Table 5.6.1 Statistical conversion factor jn,s as a func-
– of load-time cycles (stress histories) or
tion of the logarithmic standard deviation LSD and the
number of the individual tests —1 – of predetermined fatigue load cases which consist of
LSD n amplitudes and mean loads.
1 2 4 6 10 100 f Comment: The special static loads are assumed to occur
0,02 —2 1,15 1,13 1,12 1,12 1,11 1,10 1,10 with a frequency of n = 1 and—as, when using MINER’s
linear damage accumulation theory, they do not contribute
0,04 —3 1,32 1,28 1,26 1,25 1,24 1,21 1,20
significantly to the component fatigue—do not generally
0,06 —4 1,51 1,45 1,41 1,39 1,38 1,34 1,32 have to be taken into consideration when performing the
—1 Statistical conversion factor according to the IIW Recommenda- assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue strength.
tions.
—2 Empirical value of the logarithmic standard deviation of the static
strength values of non-welded or welded components.
—3 Empirical value of the logarithmic standard deviation of the fatigue
strength values of non-welded components.
—4 Empirical value of the logarithmic standard deviation of the fatigue
strength values of welded components.
5.7 Design loads 188 5 Annexes

5.7.3 Metrological load or stress Cycle counting

determination Reducing the history of the assessment stresses to a fre-
Assessment stress histories quency distribution of stress cycles which, in turn, are
characterized by amplitude and mean stress is to be per-
The assessment stresses result in terms of local stresses formed by means of the rainflow counting.
from the external loads. They may
– be measured directly or The residuum occurring with the rainflow counting can
– be calculated from the vector of the external loads by either
means of influence coefficients. – be avoided by placing the beginning and the end of
the counting at the global maximum or minimum of
Comment: In the case of considerable stresses due to vi- the series;
bration loads, particularly with temporary excitation of – be avoided by using the method according to CLOR-
component resonances, the vibration behavior of the com- MANN and SEEGER or
ponent shall be taken into consideration when calculating – be counted at half the frequency according to
the assessment stresses. It is recommended to measure the ASTM 1049.
assessment stresses directly in such cases.
From the measured stress to the design strain
Sampling frequency
The relevant factor for the determination of the occurring
The required sampling frequency for the digital determina- stresses consists in taking into consideration all of the
tion of the assessment stress history shall be specified partial service stresses to be expected as well as the suffi-
based on the highest design-relevant frequency proportion cient covering of variable conditions of use.
of the assessment stresses.
The measurement duration required to determine the as-
Nyquist-Shannon's sampling theorem (highest effective sessment stresses is specified such that the measured data
frequency equals half the sampling frequency), which shall have sufficient statistical safety. As the measurement dura-
be followed when interpreting data in the frequency range, tion, however, is generally clearly shorter than the planned
is not a sufficient criterium for the time series classifica- duration of use, the measured stresses shall be expanded or
tion, see Figure 5.7-1. extrapolated.
Fatigue strains
The effects of the occurring fatigue stresses can be de-
scribed by means of their damage-equivalent stress am-
plitude, see Chapter 2.1.5 or 4.1.5.
In the case of stationary processes, a measurement duration
which is short compared to the duration of use, is sufficient
to determine the damage-equivalent stress amplitude
with adequate accuracy, Figure 5.7-2. Therefore, the meas-
ured fatigue stresses may be expanded to the required
duration of use, provided they cover all the essential condi-
tions of use:
Figure 5.7-1: Discretization-related drop of the damage-
ni = iwdh · hi (5.7.2)
equivalent stress amplitude as a function of the relation-
ship between sinusoidal signal frequency and sampling hi number of cycles in the measured spectrum,
frequency step i;
ni number of cycles in the design spectrum, step i;
Analogous to DIN EN 60068-2-6, the following value may
iwdh coverage factor from duration of measurement to
be assumed as guideline value for the required sampling
frequency to be used to determine fatigue stresses from duration of use.
histories:
ft t 5 · fmax (5.7.1)
ft sampling frequency;
fmax highest design-relevant frequency.

Individual pulse-type processes which are usually design-

relevant for the assessment of the static strength, shall be
sampled at such a high frequency that the pulse amplitude
is covered with sufficient accuracy.
5.7 Design loads 189 5 Annexes

5.7.4 Load safety factors

Depending on the height and load cases chosen for the
design, safe or representative loads can be determined.
Safe design loads
When using safe design loads—which usually include
normative specifications, but also loads individually de-
rived under conservative assumptions—the load safety
factor is
jS = 1,0 (5.7.3)

Figure 5.7-2: Damage-equivalent stress amplitude over

the relationship between duration of measurement and
duration of use, idealized case
Counting of a noise signal with normal distribution, repre-
sentation of mean value r 2 · standard deviation
Static stresses
The occurring static stresses are characterized by their
absolute value. They may be covered in terms of
– transient special events (e.g. misoperation, misuse or
operational disturbances) or
– extreme values (minimum and maximum) of the fa-
tigue stresses.
Unlike the damage-equivalent stress amplitude, the ex-
treme stress over the relationship between the duration of
measurement and the duration of use is permanently in-
creasing, Figure 5.7-3.
If a static assessment is performed based solely on meas-
ured fatigue stresses, the extreme stresses shall be extrapo-
lated up to the required duration of use. The extrapolation
may be omitted if there are any load limitations, e.g. me-
chanical stop, safety valves or slip clutches.

Figure 5.7-3: Extreme stress over the relationship

between duration of measurement and duration of use,
idealized case

Noise signal with normal distribution, representation of

mean value r 2 · standard deviation
6.1 Shaft shoulder 190 6 Examples

Representative design loads

6 Examples
When using representative design loads—which are to 6.1 Shaft shoulder
cover the mean expected loading level as well as be subject
to a logarithmic Gaussian distribution—a load safety factor 6.1.0 Task
shall be used:
Known:
x S ˜ LSD S
jS 10 Shaft shoulder in accordance with Figure 6.1.1, having the
(5.7.4)
indicated dimensions
LSDS logarithmic standard deviation of the ex-
pected load, also comprises uncertainties re-
garding the load determination, e.g. meas-
urement uncertainty. Specification based on
sector-specific empirical values;
xS factor for probability PS of exceeding the
Figure 6.1-1: Shaft shoulder
safe load, xS = 2 results in PS = 2,5 %.
D = 50 mm r = 5 mm
d = 42 mm t = 4 mm
Stresses
Sb = r Sa,b = r 150 MPa
Tt = Tm,t r Ta,t = 50 MPa r 80 MPa

Load (rotating bending and torsion), proportional and in

phase, in accordance with Figure 6.1-2.

Figure 6.1-2: Stress-time history

Material
41 Cr4 in accordance with DIN EN 10083
Heat treatable steel, quenched and tempered
Surface
Mean roughness Rz = 10 µm

Type of overloading
When overloaded in service, the stress ratios remain con-
stant (Type of overloading F2).
Safety requirement
Regular inspections, mean consequences of failure. The
design load has been safely specified.
Unknown:
Assessment of the static strength and of the fatigue limit.
General comments
As the component is rod-shaped, the assessment may be
performed using nominal stresses, as specified by the task.
6.1 Shaft shoulder 191 6 Examples

For the purposes of comparison, this is followed by a rep- Rm= 0,895 ˜ 1 ˜ Rm,N= 895 MPa
resentation of the assessment using local stresses. This Rp= 0,841 ˜ 1 ˜ Rp,N= 672 MPa (1.2.1)
clearly shows the difference between the use of the section
force-related stress types and the individual stress compo- 3 Design parameters
nents. The result should be comparable degrees of utiliza-
Calculation of the section factor
tion.
Rp,max = 1150 MPa Tab. 1.3.1
For better clarity of the equations, usually only numerical
values are given without their units. As a rule, the units Comment:
refer to MPa and mm. Stress values are rounded to integral Alternatively, Rp,max may be calculated using
numbers.
E = 2,1 ˜ 105 MPa
Hertr = 0,05 Tab. 1.3.1
6.1.1 Assessment of the static strength using
nominal stresses E ˜ İ ertr ­ 4331 MPa Bending
Rp,max ®
The assessment using nominal stresses is permissible be- K 2t ¯6379 MPa Torsion (1.3.3)
cause:
The mild notch effect results in higher section factors and,
a) the material is ductile, thus, higher static strength values.
A = 11 % t 6 %, see Table 5.1.3, and Bending
b) the stress concentration factors are smaller than 5: Kp,b = 1,7 Tab. 1.3.2
bendingKt,b = 1,557 (5.2.7)
npl,b MIN 1150/672 ;1,7 1,31
torsionKt,t = 1,283 (5.2.8) (1.3.2)
Torsion
When performing the assessment using nominal stresses,
bending and torsion are initially evaluated separately. Su- Kp,t = 1,33 Tab. 1.3.2
perposition is carried out at the assessment stage based on
the degrees of utilization. npl,t MIN 1150/672 ;1,33 1,31
(1.3.2)
1 Characteristic service stresses
In both cases, the strain criterion is relevant.
Maximum nominal stresses
4 Component strength
Sb = Sa,b = 150 MPa (1.1.1)
Basically, the component strength values result from the
Tt = Tm,t + Ta,t = 150 MPa yield stress and the section factor.

2 Material properties Bending

Tensile strength and yield stress for the standard dimension fV =1 Tab. 1.2.5

Rm,N = 1000 MPa, Rp,N = 800 MPa Tab. 5.1.3 SSK,b= 1 ˜ 672 ˜ 1,31 = 880 MPa (1.4.1)

Technological size factor Torsion

ad,m = 0,3 ad,p = 0,44 fW = 0,577 Tab. 1.2.5
deff,N= 16 mm Tab. 5.1.3
TSK,t= 0,577 ˜ 672 ˜ 1,31 = 508 MPa (1.4.1)
deff = 42 mm Tab. 1.2.3
Kd,m = 0,895Kd,p = 0,841 (1.2.8) 5 Safety factor

Comment: Safe design load:

Using the smaller diameter as the effective diameter ap- jS = 1 (1.5.1)
plies to the following processing sequence: 1. machining—
2. heat treatment. If the shaft is manufactured from rod Basic safety factors:
material that has already been heat treated, the maximum jm = 1,85jp = 1,4 Tab. 1.5.1
shaft diameter is relevant.
Comment:
Anisotropy factor
Safe design load means that there is a low probability of a
KA = 1 (1.2.14) higher stress. As the assumed height may occur, however,
the probabaility of the occurrence of the stress shall be
Tensile strength and yield stress of the component regarded as high.
6.1 Shaft shoulder 192 6 Examples

No further partial safety factors shall be taken into consid-

eration. 6.1.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
nominal stresses
jz = 1 Tab. 1.5.2
When performing the assessment using nominal stresses,
Temperature factors do not have to be taken into consid- bending and torsion are initially evaluated separately. Su-
eration. perposition is carried out at the assessment stage based on
Kt,m = 1 Kt,p = 1 the degrees of utilization.
(1.2.20) 1 Characteristic service stresses
For the total safety factor, only the first two proportions Amplitudes and mean stresses of the nominal stresses
shall be taken into consideration. Sa,b = 150 MPaSm,b = 0 MPaChapter 2.1.1
§ 1,85 672 1,4 · Ta,t = 80 MPaTm,t = 50 MPa
jges 1˜ 1˜ MAX¨ ˜ ; ¸ 1,4
© 1 895 1 ¹ (1.5.4) Constant amplitude stress spectrum, spectrum parameters
may be omitted.
6 Assessment
2 Material properties
Calculation of the individual degrees of utilization:
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed axial stress
Bending
and shear stress:
150
a SK,b 0,24 fW,V = 0,45 fW,W = 0,577 Tab. 2.2.1
880/1,4 (1.6.1) VW,zd = 0,45 ˜ 895 = 403 MPa
Torsion WW,s = 0,577 ˜ 403 = 232 MPa (2.2.1)
130 3 Design parameters
a SK, t 0,36
508 / 1,4 (1.6.1) The fatigue notch factors are calculated based on stress
concentration factors and Kt-Kf ratios. For the calculation
Superposition of the stress components by means of calcu-
lating the equivalent degree of utilization: of the Kt-Kf ratios, both concepts are given.

q=0 Tab. 1.6.1 Related stress gradient

Global (nominal) stress gradient
a SK, v 0,24 2  0,36 2 0,43 (1.6.3)–(1.6.8)
2
The degree of utilization of the shaft shoulder static GV d GW d 0,0476 mm 1
42 (2.3.16)
strength is 43 %. The assessment of the static strength
has been successful. Local stress gradient: because of t/d= 0,095 < 0,25, the
Comment: following applies:
Here, the assessment of the static strength can also be 1
achieved without the section factor (npl = 1). In that case, M 0,179 Tab. 2.3.5
4 4 5 2
the degree of utilization is 56 %.
2,3
When calculating the section factor more precisely, based Gı r 1  0,179 0,542 mm 1
on Rp,max in accordance with (1.3.3), as given above, the 5


 


degree of static utilization is 39 %; in that case, however, 


*
U






P
P

the limit load is relevant. W

Total stress gradient

GV = 0,0476 + 0,542 = 0,5896 mm–1
GW = 0,0476 + 0,230 = 0,2776 mm–1 (2.3.17)

Stieler’s Kt-Kf ratio

aG = 0,5bG = 2700Tab. 2.3.4

Bending
nV(d) = 1,022 (2.3.13)

nV(r) = 1,109 (2.3.14)

6.1 Shaft shoulder 193 6 Examples

Torsion Bending
nW(d) = 1,031 (2.3.13) 1
nbm,b
nW(r) = 1,098 (2.3.14) 1,048 ˜ 1,021 2  3 ˜ 1,557 1  1,557  3

1,557 4 ˜ 0,5896 ˜ 0,0577
Mechanical Kt-Kf ratio
nbm,b 0,442
Statistical Kt-Kf ratio (2.3.11)
(equal for bending and torsion) The following applies to a value of less than one:
Aref,st = 500 mm2 (2.3.8) nbm,b = 1 (2.3.12)

kst = 30 Tab. 2.3.1 Torsion

AV = 0,8 ˜ S ˜ 21 ˜ 5 = 264 mm2 Tab. 2.2.2 1

nbm, t
1,048 ˜ 1,021 2  3 ˜ 1,283 1  1,283  3
(line 5) 
1,283 4 ˜ 0,2776 ˜ 0,0577
1 30
§ 500 · nbm, t 0,437
nst ¨ ¸ 1,021
© 264 ¹ (2.3.7) (2.3.11)

Deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio The following applies to a value of less than one:
nbm,t = 1 (2.3.12)
(equal for bending and torsion)
Because of Rm = 895 MPa > 630 MPa, the following ap- Total Kt-Kf ratio
plies: Bending and torsion are generally separated. The differ-
ence is only caused by the fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio,
§ 895 ·
\ 1  0,375¨  1¸ 0,842 which is identical in this case.
© 630 ¹ (2.3.10)
nwm,b= 1,021 ˜ 1,048 ˜ 1 = 1,07 (2.3.6)
Hpl,W= 2 ˜ 10–4 ˜ 0,842 = 1,685 ˜ 10–4 nwm,t= 1,021 ˜ 1,048 ˜ 1 = 1,07
E= 2,1 ˜ 105 MPa Tab. 1.3.1
VW= VW,zd = 403 MPa (2.2.1) Here, the material-mechanical Kt-Kf ratios are slightly
nst = 1,021 (2.3.7) smaller than Stieler’s Kt-Kf ratios, thus resulting in a
n’ = 0,15 (2.3.10) slightly lower strength. In the following, Stieler’s Kt-Kf
§ 1 · ratios are used for the calculations.
1¸
2,1˜ 105 ˜ 1,685 ˜ 10  4 ¨
nvm 1 ˜ 1,021© 0,15 ¹ Fatigue notch factor
403
Use of Stieler’s Kt-Kf ratios; bending and torsion separate-
1,048
ly:
Fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio
1,557
K f,b 1,374
Bending and torsion separately, because stress concentra- 1,109 ˜ 1,022 (2.3.2)
tion factor and related stress gradient differ from one an-
other. The total stress gradient is taken into consideration. 1,283
K f, t 1,133
Rm,bm = 680 MPa Tab. 2.3.3 1,098 ˜ 1,031

2 Roughness factor
§ 680 ·
a 0,1˜ ¨ ¸ 0,0577 mm aR,V= 0,22Rm,N,min = 400 MPa Tab. 2.3.6
© 895 ¹ (2.3.11) Rz= 10 µmRm = 895 MPa

§ 2 ˜ 895 ·
K R,V 1  0,22 ˜ lg 10 ˜ lg¨ ¸ 0,857
© 400 ¹
§ 2 ˜ 895 ·
K R,W 1  0,22 ˜ 0,577 ˜ lg 10 ˜ lg¨ ¸ 0,917
© 400 ¹
(2.3.19)
6.1 Shaft shoulder 194 6 Examples

Component fatigue limit

Further factors
SAK,b = 0,890 ˜ 261 = 232 MPa (2.4.4)
without surface treatment: KV = 1 (2.3.27)
steelKS = 1 (2.3.28) Torsion
no GGKNL,E = 1 (2.3.31)
Tmin,v= 50  80 = 30 MPa
Design factor Tmax,v= 50  80 = 130 MPa
Bending Rv,t = 30/130 = 0,231 (2.4.32)

§ 1 · 1 Thus, field II in the Haigh dagram is relevant. Type of

K WK, b ¨1,374   1¸ 1,541 overloading F2 results in the mean stress factor:
© 0,857 ¹ 1˜ 1˜ 1
(2.3.1)
1
Torsion K AK, t 0,928
50
1  0,123 ˜
§ 1 · 1 80 (2.4.9)
K WK, t ¨1,133   1¸ 1,224
© 0,917 ¹ 1˜ 1˜ 1 (2.3.1) Component fatigue limit
4 Component strength TAK,t= 0,928 ˜ 190 = 176 MPa (2.4.4)
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
403 The following applies to model I constant amplitude S-N
S WK, b 261 MPa
1,541 curves and the assessment of the fatigue limit:
(2.4.1)
KBK,b= KBK,t = 1 (2.4.42)
232
TWK, t 190 MPa SBK,b= 1 ˜ 232 = 232 MPa
1,224
TBK,t= 1 ˜ 176 = 176 MPa (2.4.38)
Component fatigue limit
Control of the critical amplitude
Machine engineering-typical case, calculation using equiv-
alent mean stress. SBK,b d 0,75 ˜ 672 ˜ 1,31 = 660 MPa (2.4.39)
TBK,t d 0,75 ˜ 0,577 ˜ 672 ˜ 1,31 = 381 MPa
Mean stress sensitivity
aM = 0,35 bM = 0,1 Tab. 2.4.1 The conditions are fulfilled.
Rm = 895 MPa fW,V = 0,577
MV = 0,35 ˜ 10–3 ˜ 895  0,1 = 0,213 (2.4.5) 5 Safety factor
MW = 0,577 ˜ 0,213 = 0,123
Safe design load:
Equivalent mean stresses jS = 1 (2.5.1)
q =0
Material safety factor for regular inspections and mean
Sm,v Sm,v,GH 02  3 ˜ 502 86,6 MPa consequences of failure:
Tm,v = 0,577 ˜ 86,6 = 50 MPa (2.4.33)–(2.4.35) jF = 1,25 Tab. 2.5.1
Comment: Temperature factors do not have to be taken into consid-
As no mean bending stress exists, the equivalent mean eration.
stress for torsion shall be identical with the given load
KT,D = 1 (2.2.2)
mean stress.
Bending Total safety factor:

Conversion of stress cycle 1,25

jD 1˜ 1,25
1 (2.5.2)
Smin,v = 86,6  150 = 63,4 MPa
Smax,v = 86,6  150 = 236,6 MPa
Rv,b = 63,4/236,6 = 0,268 (2.4.32) 6 Assessment
Thus, field II in the Haigh dagram is relevant, type of over- Calculation of the individual degrees of utilization:
loading F2 results in the mean stress factor:
Bending
1
K AK,b 0,890 150
86,6 aBK,b 0,81
1  0,213 ˜ 232 / 1,25
150 (2.4.9) (2.6.3)
6.1 Shaft shoulder 195 6 Examples

Torsion Vx= 44 MPa

80 Vy= 247 MPa (3.1.1)
aBK, t 0,57 Wxy= 167 MPa
176 / 1,25 (2.6.2)
Superposition of the stress components by means of calcu- Equivalent stress according to v. Mises:
lating the equivalent degree of utilization: Vv = 369 MPa (3.1.3)
q=0 Tab. 2.6.1 This value can also be taken directly from the FE analysis.
aBK, v 0,812  0,57 2 0,99 (2.6.5)–(1.6.10) Degree of multiaxiality
1
The cyclic degree of utilization of the shaft shoulder is VH 44  247 97 MPa
99 %. The assessment of the fatigue limit has been suc- 3 (3.1.11)
cessful.
h = 97/369 = 0,263 (3.1.10)
As the degree h of multiaxiality is smaller than the limit
6.1.3 Assessment of static strength using local value hmax = 1,333 in accordance with (3.6.2), the assess-
stresses ment of the hydrostatic stress according to item 6 can be
omitted.
Preliminary remark on the assessment using local
stresses Comment:
When performing the assessment using local stresses, As the critical point at the shaft shoulder is situated on a
bending and torsion can no longer be considered separate- free component surface, the stress state is plane. The max-
ly. The relevant factors are the stress components at the imum possible degree of multiaxiality is 2/3 in the case of
reference point due to the simultaneous effect of both a plane stress state and is, thus, always smaller than the
stresses. For the assessment of the static stress, the maxi- limit value. Therefore, the control of the multiaxiality
mum equivalent stress is relevant; for the assessment of the according to Chapter 3.6.1.2 can be omitted. A precise
fatigue strength, both the amplitude and the mean value of calculation of the degree of multiaxiality would not be
the individual stress components are relevant depending on required.
their time-related interaction.
From the section moduli against bending and torsion
2 Material properties
3
Sd As with nominal stresses:
Wb 7274 mm3
32
Rm = 895 MPa Rp = 672 MPa (3.2.1)
3
Sd
Wt 14547 mm3
16
3 Design parameters
and the associated maximum and minimum nominal stress
values, the upper load case and the lower load case can be Calculation of the critical strain:
calculated for bending and torsion. A = 11 % Tab. 5.1.3
Upper load case: E = 2,1 ˜ 105 MPa
H0 = 5 % Tab. 3.3.1
Mb,O= Sb,max ˜ Wb= 1,091 ˜ 106 Nmm
Mt,O= Tt,max ˜ Wt= 1,891 ˜ 106 Nmm Because of h < 1/3, the following applies:
Hertr = Href = A = 0,11 (3.3.3) (3.3.4)
Lower load case
Mb,U= Sb,min ˜ Wb= 1,091 ˜ 106 Nmm Calculation of the plastic notch factor: The basis is an FE
analysis, applying the law on elastic ideal-plastic material
Mt,U= Tt,min ˜ Wt= 4,365 ˜ 105 Nmm behavior. For the purposes of improving convergence, the
For both load cases, the stresses are determined using a calculation may also be performed using a bilinear stress-
volume model, applying the FEM. During post-processing, strain curve with a low plastic module, e.g. Ep = E/1000.
amplitudes and mean values of the stress components can The bending and torsional moment is increased propor-
be determined from this. tionally, Mb/Mt = Mb,O/Mt,O = 0,58. The following limit
values result for the bending moment:
1 Characteristic service stresses
Elastic limit load (Rp at the reference point):
The relevant case is the upper load case. Stress compo-
nents at the reference point in the local coordinate direc- Mb,el = 1,49 ˜ 109 Nmm
tions:
Plastic limit load: (fully plasticized cross-section)
6.1 Shaft shoulder 196 6 Examples

Mb,pl = 2,90 ˜ 109 Nmm 1 Characteristic service stresses

(same evaluation also possible using torsional moment) The relevant factors are the amplitudes and mean values of
the stress components at the reference point as well as the
Kp = 2,9/1,49 = 1,95 (3.3.8) amplitudes at a neighbouring point inside the component,
perpendicular to the surface.
Calculation of the section factor:
Reference point
§ ·
2,1˜ 105 ˜ 0,11
npl MIN¨¨ ;1,95 ¸¸ Va,x= 45 MPaVm,x = 0 MPa
¨ 672 ¸
© ¹ Va,y= 247 MPaVm,y = 0 MPa
1,95 (3.3.2) Wa,xy= 103 MPaWm,xy = 64 MPa (3.1.2)

The relevant factor is the limit load. Neighbouring point—Distance 's = 0,373 mm
Va,x,2= 39 MPa
4 Component strength Va,y,2= 215 MPa
Wa,xy,2= 95 MPa (4.1.2)
VSK = 672 ˜ 1,95 = 1310 MPa (3.4.1)
The stress components refer to a local coordinate system
with the following directions:
5 Safety factor x circumferential direction;
y tangentially in the longitudinal direction in
As with nominal stresses: the notch radius.
§ 1,85 672 1,4 · 2 Material properties
jges 1˜ 1˜ MAX¨ ˜ ; ¸ 1,4
© 1 895 1 ¹ (3.5.5) As with nominal stresses:
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed axial and
6 Assessment shear stress:

Equivalent degree of utilization fW,V= 0,45 fW,W = 0,577 Tab. 4.2.1

VW,zd= 0,45 ˜ 895 = 403 MPa
369
a SK 0,39 WW,s= 0,577 ˜ 403 = 232 MPa (4.2.1)
1310/1,4 (3.6.1)
3 Design parameters
The additional assessment of the hydrostatic stress is not
required due to the low multiaxiality, see characteristic For the calculation of the Kt-Kf ratios, both concepts are
service stresses. given.
The degree of utilization of the shaft shoulder static Related stress gradient
strength is 39 %. The assessment of the static strength
1 § 39 ·
has been successful. GV x ¨1  ¸ 0,357
0,373 © 45 ¹
Comment:
1 § 215 ·
The result corresponds with that of the assessment using GV y ¨1  ¸ 0,347
0,373 © 247 ¹
nominal stresses and applying the accurate calculation of
1 § 95 ·
Rp,max; in both cases, the limit load is relevant. GW ¨1  ¸ 0,208
0,373 © 103 ¹
(4.3.17)
Here, the assessment of the static strength can also be
achieved without the section factor (npl = 1). In that case, Stieler's Kt-Kf ratio
the degree of utilization is 77 %. Without the section fac-
aG = 0,5 bG = 2700 Tab. 4.3.4
tor, the degree of utilization using nominal stresses is low-
er because the local peak stress is neglected. nV,x= 1,088
nV,y= 1,086 (4.3.15)
nW = 1,093
6.1.4 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
Material mechanical Kt-Kf ratio
local stresses
Statistical Kt-Kf ratio
The stress is proportional. When performing the assess-
ment using local stresses, the individual stress components (equal for all stress components)
are initially evaluated separately. Superposition is carried
out at the assessment stage based on the degrees of utiliza- Calculating the highly stressed volume based on the FE
tion. result is only possible applying the given methods with the
6.1 Shaft shoulder 197 6 Examples

respective programmes. In the case described here, the Wall thickness (Case 1—heat-treatable steel):
equation applicable to rod-shaped components can be used.
b = 42/2 = 21 mm (4.3.5)
This results in the same value as for nominal stresses.
Stress concentration factor for substitute structure:
nst =1,021 (4.3.8)
Kt,x = 100,066–0,36 · lg(5,602/21) = 1,873
Deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio
Kt,y = 100,066–0,36 · lg(5,764/21) = 1,854 (4.3.3)
(equal for all stress components) Kt,t = 100,066–0,36 · lg(4,808/21) = 1,979
The same calculation as for nominal stresses Fatigue notch factor:
nvm = 1,048 (4.3.11) ~
K f, x 1,873 / 1,088 1,722
Fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio ~
K f,y 1,854 / 1,086 1,707 (4.3.2)
Due to the differing related stress gradients, the fracture- ~
K f,W 1,979 / 1,093 1,811
mechanical Kt-Kf ratios for the individual stress compo-
nents differ from each other initially. ~
As compared with K f = 2 in accordance with Tab. 4.3.1,
Rm,bm = 680 MPa Tab. 4.3.3 the estimated fatigue notch factors are on the safe side,
which is why they are used for subsequent calculations.
Thus:
1 ª 1 § 1 ·º
5 G K WK, x «1  ¨  1¸» 1,008 0,996
nbm 1,088 ¬ 1,722 © 0,857 ¹¼
7,5  G
5,35  1,316 1 ª 1 § 1 ·º
1  0,2 G K WK, y «1  ¨  1¸» 1,011 0,997
(4.3.12) 1,086 ¬ 1,707 © 0,857 ¹¼
nbm,x = 0,631 nbm,y = 0,629 nbm,W = 0,613 1 ª 1 § 1 ·º
K WK, W «1  ¨  1¸» 0,961 0,956
1,093 ¬ 1,811 © 0,917 ¹¼
For a value smaller than one, the following applies to all
components: (difference between the two variants < 1,4%) (4.3.1)

nbm = 1 (4.3.13) 4 Component strength

Total Kt-Kf ratio Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
403
The same Kt-Kf ratio applies to all components: V WK, x 400 MPa
1,008
nwm = 1,021 · 1,048 = 1,07 (4.3.13) 403
V WK, y 399 MPa
Here, the material-mechanical Kt-Kf ratios are slightly 1,011
232
smaller than Stieler's Kt-Kf ratios, thus resulting in a slight- W WK 241 MPa
ly lower strength. In the following, Stieler’s Kt-Kf ratios 0,961 (4.4.1)
are used for the calculations. Component fatigue limit
Roughness factor Mean stress sensitivity the same as for nominal stresses
As with nominal stresses: aM = 0,35 bM = –0,1
KR,V = 0,857 KR,W = 0,917 (4.3.21) Rm = 895 MPafW,V = 0,577 Tab. 4.4.1

Further factors MV = 0,35 ˜ 10–3 ˜ 895 – 0,1 = 0,213

without surface treatment KV = 1 (2.3.28) MW = 0,577 ˜ 0,213 = 0,123 (4.4.5)
steel KS = 1 (2.3.29) Normal stresses—no mean stress
no GJL KNL,E = 1 (4.3.32)
KAK,x = 1 KAK,y = 1 (4.4.3)
Design factor
Component fatigue limit
Estimation of a fatigue notch factor in accordance with
Chapter 4.3.1.2. VAK,x = 1 ˜ 400 = 400 MPa (4.4.4)
VAK,y = 1 ˜ 399 = 399 MPa
Notch radius:
rx = 2/0,357 = 5,602
ry = 2/0,347 = 5,764
rW = 2/0,208 = 4,808 (4.3.4)
6.1 Shaft shoulder 198 6 Examples

Shear stress The cyclic degree of utilization of the shaft shoulder is

92 %. The assessment of the fatigue limit has been suc-
Wmin = 64  103 = 39 MPa
cessful.
Wmax = 64  103 = 167 MPa
RW = 39/167 = 0,234 (4.1.1)
6.1.5 Complementary considerations
Thus, field II in the Haigh diagram is relevant; type of
overloading F2 results in the following mean stress factor: 6.1.5.1 Comparison of the concepts of support
effects
1
K AK, t 0,929 In the example described here, Stieler’s concept of support
64
1  0,123 ˜ effects used thus far resulted in higher Kt-Kf ratios and,
103 (4.4.10)
correspondingly, higher fatigue limit values as well.
Component fatigue limit
For comparison, the following shaft shoulder is consid-
WAK = 0,929 · 190 = 224 MPa (4.4.4) ered:
Material:S355J2G4
Rm,N = 510 MPa
Rp,N = 355 MPa
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
Geometry: D = 160 mm r = 0,5 mm
The following applies to model I constant amplitude S-N d = 120 mm t = 20 mm
curves and the assessment of the fatigue limit:
Stress concentration
KBK,x = KBK,y = KBK,W = 1 (4.4.42) factors:Kt,b = 6,944 (5.2.7)
VBK,x = 1 ˜ 400 = 400 MPa Kt,t = 3,014 (5.2.8)
VBK,y = 1 ˜ 399 = 399 MPa (4.4.38)
Effective diameter: deff = D = 160 mm
WBK = 1 ˜ 224 = 224 MPa
Technological size
Control of the critical amplitude factors: Kd,m = 0,924 (1.2.8)
VBK,x ; VBK,y ” 0,75 ˜ 672 ˜ 1,95 = 983 MPa Kd,m = 0,833
WBK ” 0,75 ˜ 0,577 ˜ 672 ˜ 1,95 = 567 MPa
Component
(4.4.39) strength:Rm = 0,924 · 1 · Rm,N = 471 MPa
The conditions are fulfilled. Rp = 0,833 · 1 · Rp,N = 296 MPa (1.2.1)
5 Safety factor Material fatigue limit for completely reversed
As with nominal stresses: stress:fw,V = 0,45
VW,zd = 0,45·471 = 212 MPa Tab. 2.2.1
jges = 1,25 (4.5.3) (2.2.1)
6 Assessment The calculation of the Kt-Kf ratios for the assessment of
Calculation of the individual degrees of utilization the fatigue limit is presented for both concepts.

45
aBK, x 0,14
400/1,25 Related stress gradient
247
aBK, y 0,77 Global (nominal) stress gradient
399/1,25
2
aBK,W
103
0,58 GV d GW d 0,0167 mm 1
224/1,25 120 (2.3.16)
(4.6.3)
Local stress gradient: because of t/d = 0,166 < 0,25, the
Superposition of the stress components by means of calcu-
following applies:
lating the equivalent degree of utilization
1
q=0 Tab. 4.6.1 M 0,0366 Tab. 2.3.5
4 20 0,5  2
aBK,v aGH
2,3
0,14 2  0,77 2  0,14 ˜ 0,77  0,58 2 Gı r 1  0,0366 4,768 mm 1
0,5
0,92
1,15
(4.6.5) (4.6.10) GW r 2,30 mm 1
0,5
 199 6 Examples

Total stress gradient 2

§ 680 ·
a 0,1˜ ¨ ¸ 0,2084 mm
GV = 0,0167 + 4,768 = 4,785 mm–1 (2.3.17) © 471 ¹ (2.3.11)
GW = 0,0167 + 2,300 = 2,317 mm–1

Stieler’s Kt-Kf ratio

aG = 0,5bG = 2700 Tab. 2.3.4

Bending
nV(d) = 1,011 (2.3.13)
nV(r) = 1,313 (2.3.15)
nV = 1,011 ˜ 1,313 = 1,327

Torsion
nW(d) = 1,013 (2.3.13)
nW(r) = 1,309 (2.3.15)
nW = 1,013 ˜ 1,309 = 1,326

Material mechanical Kt-Kf ratio

Statistical Kt-Kf ratio

(equal for bending and torsion)

Aref,st = 500 mm2 (2.3.8)
kst = 30 Tab. 2.3.1
AV = 0,8 ˜ S ˜ 60 ˜ 0,5 = 75,4 mm2 Tab. 2.2.2
(line 5)
1 30
§ 500 ·
n st ¨ ¸ 1,065 (2.3.7)
© 75,4 ¹
Deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio

(equal for bending and torsion)

Because of Rm = 471 MPa < 630 MPa, the following ap-
plies:
<=1 (2.3.10)
Hpl,W = 2 ˜ 10–4
E = 2,1 ˜ 105 MPa Tab. 1.3.1
VW = VW,zd = 212 MPa (2.2.1)
nst = 1,065 (2.3.7)
n’ = 0,15 (2.3.10)
§ 1 ·
1¸
2,1˜ 105 ˜ 2 ˜ 10  4 ¨
nvm 1 ˜ 1,065 © 0,15 ¹
212
1,133
Fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio

Bending and torsion are separated due to the fact that stress
concentration factor and related stress gradient differ from
one another. The total stress gradient is taken into consid-
eration.
Rm,bm = 680 MPa Tab. 2.3.3
 200 6 Examples

Bending
1
nbm,b 1,195
1,133 ˜ 1,065 2  3 ˜ 4,933 1  4,933 3

1,933 4 ˜ 4,785 ˜ 0,2084
(2.3.11)
Torsion
1
nbm,t 0,882
1,133 ˜ 1,065 2  3 ˜ 3,0141  3,0143

3,014 4 ˜ 2,317 ˜ 0,2084
(2.3.11)
For a value smaller than one, the following applies:
nbm,t = 1 (2.3.12)

Total Kt-Kf ratio

nwm,b = 1,065 ˜ 1,133 ˜ 1,195 = 1,442

nwm,t = 1,065 ˜ 1,133 ˜ 1 = 1,207 (2.3.6)

When comparing the two concepts, in this example a high-

er Kt-Kf ratio results for bending when applying the mate-
rial-mechanical concept and a slightly higher value results
for torsion when applying Stieler’s concept.
In general, the following tendencies can be noted:
– the level of both concepts can be compared over a large
range of geometries and stresses;
– in the case of very severe notches and low strengths,
the material-mechanical Kt-Kf ratios tend to be higher,
in which case the contribution of the fracture-
mechanical Kt-Kf ratio is significant;

– with very large components, the material-mechanical

Kt-Kf ratios descrease due to the influence of the statis-
tical Kt-Kf ratio. This may also result in values smaller
than one. This way, any direct size influence is taken
into consideration.
6.2 Cast component 201 6 Examples

6.2 Cast component Table 6.2.1 Stress spectrum (constant stress ratio)
6.2.0 Task Step i Va,i/Va,1 ni
1 1,0 1000
Known:
2 0,8 40000
Bearing block as cast component according to Fig-
3 0,5 680000
ure 6.1-1.
4 0,2 1400000
Reference point Total number of cycles N 2121000

x
Material
EN-GJL-250 in accordance with DIN EN 1561
Grey cast iron (obsolete GG-25)
y
Surface

Figure 6.2-1: Component, reference point, local coordinate Skin—roughness Rz = 200 µm

system
Safety requirement
The load consists of two limit load cases acting on the No regular inspections, high consequences of failure. The
internal surfaces of the eye (upper and lower load cases). design load has been specified safely.
The following assumptions are made regarding the design
of the component: Unknown:
Assessment of the static strength and of the fatigue
– The limit load cases act alternately with the result that
strength.
the corresponding local stress cycles are generated in
the component. General remarks
– The height of the loads and, thus, the height of the Due to the low elongation at break A  6 %, the assess-
stress amplitudes can be described based on a spectrum ment shall be performed using local stresses.
in accordance with Table 6.2.1. The stress ratio shall be
constant at every spectrum step. For better clarity of the equations, usually only numerical
values are given without their units. As a rule, the units
Thickness of the base plate: 25 mm refer to MPa and mm. Stress values are rounded to integral
Tickness of the ribs: 25 mm numbers.

Stresses
At the reference point (Figure 6.1-1), the following stresses 6.2.1 Assessment of the static strength using
were derived from the FEM analysis, related to the local local stresses
coordinate system. 1 Characteristic service stresses
Upper load case: Lower load case: The relevant factors are the stresses for the upper load case
Vx,O = 60 MPa Vx,U = 34 MPa (larger absolute value of the stresses; at the same time, it is
the lower strengths for tension):
Vy,O = 16 MPa Vy,U = 8 MPa
V1 = 60 MPa V2 = 16 MPa (3.1.2)
Wxy,O = 1 MPa Wxy,U = 1 MPa
Equivalent stress
As the shear stresses are small in comparison with the fV,1= fV,2 = 1 (tensile stresses) Tab. 3.2.5
normal stresses, they can be neglected in the strength as-
sessment. Thus, the normal stresses are principle stresses. q = 1,0 Tab. 3.1.1
KNL,1= KNL,2 = 1,1 Tab. 3.3.2
Comment: This approach may be confirmed by calculating
the principle stresses. For the purposes of specifying KNL it is decisive that the
main state at the reference point in the load carrying cross-
The given stresses refer to spectrum step 1.
section is one of bending with tension and compression
fields, see Figure 6.2-2.
6.2 Cast component 202 6 Examples

3 Design parameters
Critical strain
A = A5 = 0,6 % (3.3.5)

Href = 0,4 ˜ 0,006 = 0,0024 (3.3.5)

E = 1 ˜ 105 MPa Tab. 3.3.1

138
H0 0,00138
1˜ 10 5
Figure 6.2-2: Normal stresses in the section through the 3˜0,47
component at the reference point § 0,0024  0,00138 ·
H ertr 0,00138  0,3 ˜ ¨ ¸
© 0,3 ¹
60 16
ı1 55 MPa ı2 15 MPa 0,00148
1˜ 1,1 1˜ 1,1 (3.1.7)
(3.3.3)
ıNH,q MAX 55 ;15 55 MPa
Section factor
ı GH,q 55 2  55 ˜ 15  15 2 49 MPa
(3.1.8) E ˜ İ ertr 1˜ 105 ˜ 0,00148
1,035
ıv 1,0 ˜ 55  1  1,0 ˜ 49 55 MPa (3.1.5)
Rp 138

Degree of multiaxiality In this case of the basic stress state of bending, no precise
calculation of the plastic notch factor is required due to the
1
ıH 60  16 25,3 MPa low reserve up to achieving the critical strain.
3 (3.1.11)
npl = MIN(1,035; Kp) = 1,035 (3.3.2)
ıv 60 2  60 ˜ 16  16 2 53,8 MPa (3.1.3) 4 Component strength

25,3 VSK = 138 ˜ 1,035 = 143 MPa (3.4.1)

h 0,47
53,8 (3.1.10) 5 Safety factor
Thus, no additional assessment of the hydrostatic stress is Safe design load:
required in accordance with Chapter 6. jS = 1
2 Material properties
Basic safety factors:
Tensile strength and yield stress for the standard dimension
jm = 2,0 jp = 2,0
Rm,N = 250 MPa Rp,N = 165 MPa Tab. 3.5.1
Tab. 5.1.12
Cast factor, partial safety term
Technological size factor
jz = jG = 1,4
deff = 2 ˜ 25 = 50 Tab. 3.2.3 Tab. 3.5.2
0,1922
§ 50 · 'j 0,5  0,6% / 24% 0,342
K d,m K d,p 1,207¨ ¸ 0,838 (3.5.4)
© 7,5 ¹ (3.2.5) Temperature factors do not have to be taken into consid-
Comment: eration.

In order to specify the effective diameter at the reference KT,m = KT,p = 1

point, the larger of the two values (thickness of the base (3.2.20)
plate or thickness of the rib) can be used. In this example,
For the total safety factor, only the two first proportions
they are both 25 mm.
shall be taken into consideration.
Anisotrophy factor
ª § 2 138 1,5 · º
KA = 1 (3.2.15) jges 1˜ «1,4 ˜ MAX¨ ˜ ; ¸  0,342» 2,45
¬ © 1 210 1 ¹ ¼
Tensile strength and yield stress for the component (3.5.5)
Rm = 0,838 ˜ 1 ˜ 250 = 210 MPa (3.2.1) The assessment against flow is relevant.
Rp = 0,838 ˜ 1 ˜ 165 = 138 MPa
6.2 Cast component 203 6 Examples

6 Assessment entrant radius transition is rx = 4 mm. As there is no re-

Equivalent degree of utilization: entrant bend for the y-component, no Kt-Kf ratio is re-
quired.
55
aSK 0,94 G1 = 2/(4 mm) = 0,5 mm–1 (4.3.18)
143 / 2,45 (3.6.1)
Stieler’s Kt-Kf ratio
Due to the low multiaxiality, no additional assessment of
the hydrostatic stress is required, see 1. aG = 0,05 bG = 3200 Tab. 4.3.2
The degree of utilization of the casting static strength is n1= 1,682 (4.3.2)
94 %. The assessment of the static strength has been n2 = 1
successful.
Roughness factor
Comment:
aR,V= 0,06 Rm,N,min = 100 MPa Tab. 4.3.5
Here, the assessment of the static strength can also be
RZ= 200 µm Rm = 210 MPa
achieved without the section factor (npl = 1). In that case,
§ 2 ˜ 210 ·
the degree of utilization is 97 %. K R,ı 1  0,06 ˜ lg 200 ˜ lg¨ ¸ 0,914
© 100 ¹
(4.3.21)
6.2.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using Further factors
local stresses
no surface treatment KV =1 (4.3.28)
Given the prescribed stress cycles between two limit stress
states, the relationship between the stress components of cast iron material KS =1 (4.3.29)
the amplitudes is fixed. Thus, the stress is synchronous.
GJL 250 (for the applicability see assessment of the
When performing the assessment using local stresses, the static strength) KNL,E = 1,05 Tab. 4.3.8
two stress components are initially evaluated separately.
Superposition is carried out at the assessment stage based Design factor
on the degrees of utilization. ~
Kf 1 Tab. 4.3.1
1 Characteristic service stresses
1 ª 1§ 1 ·º 1
Amplitudes and mean stresses of the stress components K WK,1 «1  ¨  1¸» 0,619
(spectrum step 1): 1,682 ¬ 1 © 0,914 ¹¼ 1,05
1 ª 1§ 1 ·º 1
V1,a= 0,5 ˜ (60  34) = 47 MPa K WK,2 «1  ¨  1¸» 1,042
1 ¬ 1 © 0,914 ¹¼ 1,05
V2,a= 0,5 ˜ (16  8) = 12 MPa (4.3.1)
V1,m= 0,5 ˜ (60  34) = 13 MPa
V2,m= 0,5 ˜ (16  8) = 4 MPa
4 Component strength
Stress ratio: Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
R1 = 34/60 = 0,57 (4.1.1) 71,4
V WK,1 115 MPa
R2 = 8/16 = 0,5 0,619
71,4
2 Material properties V WK,2 69 MPa
1,042 (4.4.1)
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed axial stress:
Component fatigue limit
fW,V = 0,34 Tab. 4.2.1
Mean stress sensitivity
VW,zd = 0,34 ˜ 210 = 71,4 MPa (4.2.1)
aM = 0bM = 0,5Tab. 4.4.1
3 Design parameters
MV = bM = 0,5 (4.4.5)
The calculation of the Kt-Kf ratios is performed using
Mean stress factor
Stieler’s concept of support effects.
As no type of overloading has been specified, F2—
Related stress gradient
constant stress ratio—is assumed. The relevant factor for
Here, the related stress gradient is estimated based on the both stress ratios R1 and R2 is field II in the Haigh dia-
radii of curvature. This approach is applicable for cases gram.
where detecting the internal stress components is difficult
to perfom with the FEM program used. For Vx, the re-
6.2 Cast component 204 6 Examples

1 199 MPa and VBK,2 = 116 MPa, which, however, would be

K AK,1 0,879
13 limited, in turn, by (4.4.40).
1  0,5 ˜
47 (4.4.9) 5 Safety factor
1 Safe design load:
K AK,2 0,857
4
1  0,5 ˜ jS = 1 (4.5.1)
12
Component fatigue limit Material safety factor without regular inspections and
severe consequences of failure:
VAK,1 = 0,879 ˜ 115 = 101 MPa (4.4.4)
jF = 1,5 Tab. 4.5.1
VAK,2 = 0,857 ˜ 69 = 59 MPa
Cast factor for components which have not been subject to
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
non-destructive testing:
Calculation of the variable amplitude fatigue strength fac- jG = 1,4 Tab. 4.5.2
tor using the elementary version of Miner’s rule:
Parameters for model I constant amplitude S-N curves: Temperature factors do not have to be taken into consid-
eration.
ND,V = 106 kV = 5 Tab. 4.4.3
KT,D = 1 (4.2.2)
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
Total safety factor:
Distance between fatigue life curve and constant amplitude
1,5 ˜ 1,4
S-N curve jD 1˜ 2,1
1
>1000 ˜ 1  40000 ˜ 0,8 
(4.5.3)
1 5 5
Ȉ 6 Assessment
6
2,121˜ 10
6,8 ˜ 10 ˜ 0,5  1,4 ˜ 10 ˜ 0,2 @ 0,01688
5 5 6 5 Calculation of the individual degrees of utilization:
1 47
A ele 59,2 (4.4.55) aBK,1 0,92
0,01688 107/2,1
12
Effective damage sum aBK,2 0,24
107/2,1 (4.6.3)
Dm = Dm,min = 1 Tab. 4.4.4
Superposition of the stress components by means of calcu-
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor lation of the equivalent degree of utilization:
1/ 5
§ 59,2 ˜ 106 ˜ 1· q = 1,0 Tab. 4.6.1
KBK,1 KBK,2 ¨ ¸ 1,946
¨ 2,121˜ 106 ¸ aNH = 0,92 (4.6.9)
© ¹ (4.4.50)
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength aGH = 0,92 2  0,92 ˜ 0,24  0,24 2 0,83 (4.6.10)
VBK,1 = 1,946 ˜ 101 = 197 MPa (4.4.38) (Amplitudes have the same orientation, therefore, all indi-
VBK,2 = 1,946 ˜ 59 = 115 MPa vidual degrees of utilization are positive)

Control of the critical amplitude aBK,v = 1,0 ˜ 0,92  (1  1,0) ˜ 0,83 = 0,92
(4.6.5)
VBK d 0,75 ˜ 138 ˜ 1,035 = 107 MPa (4.4.40)
The cyclic degree of utilization of the bearing block is
The condition is not fulfilled for both components. The 92 %. The assessment of the fatigue strength has been
following values are the final values: successful.
VBK,1 = 107 MPa
VBK,2 = 107 MPa

Comment:
The consistent version of Miner’s rule would result in a
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor of KBK = 1,97.
The calculation would have to be performed iteratively
using Eqs. (4.4.56) to (4.4.58), preferably applying an
available calculation program. This would initially result in
the variable amplitude fatigue strength values VBK,1 =
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast 205 6 Examples
iron

6.3 Compressor flange made of grey Unknown:

cast iron Assessment of the static strength and assessment of the
fatigue limit.
6.3.0 Task
General remarks
Known:
Block-shaped component. The calculation is performed
Compressor flange made of grey cast iron according to using local elastic stresses, Chapters 3 and 4.
Figure 6.3-1. Wall thickness at the reference point
(node 99) s = 32 mm
6.3.1 Assessment of the static strength
1 Characteristic service stresses
The relevant factor are the maximum principle
stresses
V1 = 33,6 MPa V2 = 11,2 MPa
(3.1.2)
Equivalent stress
fV,1 = fV,1 = 1,0 (tensile stresses) Tab. 3.2.5
q = 1,0 Tab. 3.1.3
KNL,1 = KNL,2 =1,05 Tab. 3.3.2
Figure 6.3-1: Compressor flange made of grey cast iron (basic stress state of bending)
33,6
Stresses ı1 32 MPa
1 ˜ 1,05
Proportional, cyclically constant, locally elastic stresses in 11,2
directions 1 (longitudinal) and 2 (circumferential) at the ı2 11 MPa (3.1.7)
1˜ 1,05
reference point (node 99) of a block-shaped component,
VV = VNH,q = 32 MPa (3.1.5), (3.1.8)
Figure 6.3-1,
V1 = V1,m r V1,a = 15,0 MPa r 18,6 MPa Multiaxiality
V2 = V2,m r V2,a = 5,0 MPa r 6,2 MPa VH = 14,9 MPaG (3.1.11)
V3 = 0 VGH = 29,6 MPa (3.1.3)
h = 0,5 (3.1.10)
Stress amplitudes at the neighbouring point (node 98) at a
distance ǻs = 7,7 mm from the surface, perpendicular As the degree h of multiaxiality is smaller than the limit
towards the inside: value hmax = 1,333 according to (3.6.2), the assessment of
V1,a = r 10,0 MPa the hydrostatic stress does not have to be performed in
accordance with Chapter 6.
V2,a = r 5,3 MPa

Material
2 Material properies
GJL-300 (obsolete: GG-30) in accordance with
DIN EN 1561. Tensile strength for the standard dimension

Temperature and time Rm,N = 300 MPa Tab. 5.1.12

T = 380°C, t = 100.000 h. Rp0,1,N = 195 MPa

Surface Technological size factor
Skin deff = 2 ˜ s = 2 ˜ 32 mm = 64 mm Tab. 3.2.3
Type of overloading Kd,m = 0,800 (3.2.5)

When overloaded in service, the stress ratios remain con- Anisotropy factor
stant (Type of overloading F2).
KA = 1 (3.2.15)
Safety requirement
Tensile strength of the component
Severe consequences of failure; no regular inspection,
Rm = 0,800 ˜ 1 ˜ 300 MPa = 240 MPa (3.2.1)
castings tested non-destructively.
Rp = 0,800 ˜ 1 ˜ 195 MPa = 156 MPa
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast 206 6 Examples
iron

Temperature factors Temperature factors, see above,

aT,m = 1,6 Tab. 3.2.6 KT,m = 0,769 KTt,m = 0,511
KT,m= 0,769 (3.2.25)
ª § 2 156 1,5
Cm = 25 Tab. 3.2.7 jges 1˜ «1,25 ˜ MAX¨ ;
aTt,m= 1,46, bTt,m = 2,36, cTt,m = 0,90 ¬ © 0,769 240 0,769

Pm= 104 ˜ (380 + 273) ˜ (25 + lg(100000)) 1,5 156 1 · º

; ¸  0,342»
=1,959 (3.2.39) 0,511 240 0,511 ¹ ¼
KTt,m= 10–1,46+2,36 · 1,959–0,90 · 1,959² 1,25 ˜ MAX 1,69 ;1,95 ;1,91 ;1,96  0,342
= 0,511 2,79
No values are known for the creep limit; this is why KTt,p (3.5.5)
= KTt,m is used with caution. The relevant factor is the creep limit.
6 Assessment

3 Design parameters Degree of utilization of the equivalent stress

Critical strain 32
aSK = = 0,565 (3.6.1)
158 / 2,79
A = A5 = 0,6 % (3.3.5)
Href = 0,4 ˜ 0,006 = 0,0024 No control of multiaxiality is required.
E=1˜ 105 MPa Tab. 3.3.1 The degree of utilization of the static strength is 57 %.
156 The assessment of the static strength has been successful.
H0 0,00156
1˜ 10 5
3˜0,5
§ 0,0024  0,00156 ·
H ertr 0,00156  0,3 ˜ ¨ ¸ 6.3.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength
© 0,3 ¹
1 Characteristic service stresses
0,0016
(3.3.3) Cyclically constant stresses
Section factor V1,a = 18,6 MPaV1,m = 15,0 MPa (4.1.1)
V2,a = 6,2 MPaV2,m = 5,0 MPa
E ˜ İ ertr 1˜ 105 ˜ 0,0016
1,013 2 Material properties
Rp 156
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed axial stress
No precise determination of the plastic notch factor is
required due to the low reserve up to achieving the critical Rm = 240 MPa
strain. fW,V = 0,34G Tab. 4.2.1
npl = MIN( 1,013; Kp) = 1,013 (3.3.2) VW,zd = 0,34 ˜ 240 MPa = 81,6 MPa (4.2.1)

4 Component strength Temperature factor

aT,D = 1,0 Tab. 4.2.2
VSK = 156 MPa ˜ 1,013 = 158 MPaG (3.4.1)
KT,D = 0,856 (4.2.4)
5 Safety factor
3 Design parameters
The load factor is one and is omitted.
Kt-Kf ratios (4.3.17)
The following applies to severe consequences of failure
GV,1 = 1/(7,7mm) ˜ (110,0/18,6) = 0,0600 mm–1
and a high probability of the load occuring:
GV,2 = 1/(7,7mm) ˜ (15,3/6,2) = 0,0189 mm–1
jm = 2,0 jmt = 1,5
aG = 0,05 bG = 3200 Tab. 4.3.2
Tab. 3.5.1
nV,1 = 1,179nV,2 = 1,056 (4.3.7)
The following applies to castings which have been subject
to non-destructive testing: Roughness factor

jG = 1,25 (3.5.2) Rm = 240 MPa

Rz = 200 µm
As a result of the low elongation at break, the safety fac- aR,V = 0,06 Rm,N,min = 100 MPa
tors for grey cast iron shall be increased by a factor of 'j:
Tab. 4.3.5
A = 0,06 'j = 0,342
KR,V = 0,906 (4.3.21)
G (3.5.4)
6.3 Compressor flange made of grey cast 207 6 Examples
iron

Surface treatment factor RV,2= RV,1 = 0,107

KV = 1 (4.3.28) KAK,V,2= 0,713

Coating factor Amplitude of the component fatigue limit

KS = 1 (4.3.29) The critical nominal values of the amplitude of the compo-

nent fatigue limit result from the mean stress factor, the
Constant KNL,E residual stress factor and the critical nominal values of the
component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress:
KNL,E = 1,025 Tab. 4.3.8
V1,AK = 0,713 ˜ 90,0 MPa = 64,1 MPa (4.4.4)
Stress concentration factor
V2,AK = 0,713 ˜ 81,3 MPa = 57,9 MPa
Kt,V = 100,066-0,36 · lg(25/32) = 1,27 (4.3.3)
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
Design factors Component variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
1 § 1,179 § 1 ·· 1 The following applies to fatigue limit (constant amplitude
K WK,ı1 ˜ ¨1  ˜¨  1¸ ¸ ˜
1,179 ¨© 1,27 © 0,906 ¹ ¸¹ 1˜ 1˜ 1,025 stress with N ! ND and model I component constant ampli-
0,907 tude S-N curve with a horizontal progression for N ! ND):
(4.3.1) KBK,V1 = KBK,V2 = 1G (4.4.42)
1 § 1,056 § 1 ·· 1
K WK,ı2 ˜ ¨1  ˜¨  1¸ ¸ ˜ The critical local values of the amplitude of the component
1,056 ¨© 1,27 © 0,906 ¹ ¸¹ 1˜ 1˜ 1,025 variable amplitude fatigue strength result from the variable
1,004 amplitude fatigue strength factor and the critical local
values of the amplitude of the component fatigue limit:
4 Component strength
V1,BK = 1 ˜ 64,1 MPa = 64,1 MPaG (4.4.38)
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
V2,BK = 1 ˜ 57,9 MPa = 57,9 MPa
The material fatigue limit for completely reversed axial
stress and the design factors result in the critical local val- Control of the critical amplitudes
ues of the component fatigue limit for completely reversed VBK,max = 0,75 ˜ 156 ˜ 1,013 = 118,5 MPa
stress: (4.4.40)
V1,WK = 81,6 MPa/0,907 = 90,0 MPa (4.4.1) Condition VBK  VBK,max is fulfilled. (4.4.42)
V2,WK = 81,6 MPa/1,004 = 81,3 MPa
5 Safety factors
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
mean stress The following applies to severe consequences of failure
and irregular inspections:
Mean stress sensitivity
jF = 1,5 Tab. 4.5.1
aM = 0 bM = 0,5 Tab. 4.4.1
MV = 0,5 (4.4.5) The following applies to castings which have been subject
to non-destructive testing:
In accordance with Chapter 4.4.2.2, no equivalent mean
jG = 1,25 Tab. 4.5.2
stress shall be determined, but the calculation shall be
based on the individual mean stresses. The calculation Temperature factor, see above
shall be performed for the type of overloading F2.
KT,D = 0,856
Mean stress factor for direction 1
Total safety factor
V1,min= 15 MPa  18,6 MPa = 3,6 MPa
jges = 1,5 · 1,25/0,856 = 2,19 (4.5.3)
V1,max= 15 MPa  18,6 MPa = 33,6 MPa
RV,1= 3,6/33,6 = 0,107 6 Assessment

Due to f  0,107 d 0, field II applies: Stress amplitudes, see above

MV = 0,5 V1,a,1 = Va,1 = 18,6 MPa

1 V2,a,1 = Va,2 = 6,2 MPa
KAK,V,1= = 0,713 G (4.4.9)
1  0,5 ˜ 15 / 18,6 Amplitudes of the component variable amplitude fatigue
Mean stress factor for direction 2 strength, see above

The stress ratios for both directions are the same: V1,BK = 64,1 MPa
V2,BK = 57,9 MPa
 208 6 Examples

Cyclic degrees of utilization

Indiviual stress types, direction 1 or 2, respectively
18,6
aBK,V1 = = 0,63G (4.6.3)
64,1/ 2,19
6,2
aBK,V2 = = 0,23
57,9 / 2,19

Combined stress types

fW,W = 1,0G q = 1,0G Tab. 4.6.1

s1,a= aBK,V1 = 0,63(4.6.8)

s2,a= aBK,V2 = 0,23

aGH= 0,23 2  0,63 ˜ 0,23  0,63 2 = 0,55

(4.6.7)
aNH= MAX(0,63, 0,23) = 0,63

aBK,Vv= 1,0 · 0,63 + (1 – 1,0) · 0,55 = 0,63

(4.6.6)
The cyclic degree of utilization of the component is 63 %.
The assessment of the fatigue limit has been successful.
Note: As is the case with the assessment of the static
strength, the calculation performed here applies only with
proportional stresses. If, unlike in this example, stresses V1
and V2 could also occur with different signs, the infor-
mation given in Chapter 4.6 would have to be taken into
consideration.
6.4 Welded perforated rod 209 6 Examples

6.4 Welded perforated rod Table 6.4.1 Standard spectrum

6.4.0 Task Step sa,i/sa,1 ni Ni
1 1 2 2
Known:
2 0,95 16 18
Welded perforated rod in accordance with Figure 6.1-1.
3 0,85 280 298
4 0,725 2720 3018
5 0,575 20000 23000
6 0,425 92000 115000
7 0,275 280000 395000
8 0,125 604982 1000000

Material
S235JRG2, 1.0038 (DIN EN 10025-2)
Dimensions
Width of bar/rod B = 375 mm
Thickness of plate s = 20 mm
Figure 6.4-1: Welded perforated rod
Radius of cut-out r = 100 mm
Stresses Weld
Cyclically variable tension, Figure 6.1-1.
Full penetration weld, as welded, toe angle d 30°, weld
Nominal stresses, determined elementary: quality verified, low residual stresses.
Szd = Sm,zd r Sa,zd = 120 MPa r 60 MPa Type of overloading

Maximum structural stresses at the weld at the edge of the When overloaded in service, the stress ratio remains con-
cut-out, determined by means of FEM, without taking the stant.
weld into consideration (stress concentration factor Kt,ı = Safety requirement
Vmax/Szd = 2,16):
According to the statements "with moderate consequences
V = Vm r Va = 259,2 MPa r 129,6 MPa of failure in the case of a crash; regular inspections".
Unknown:
Maximum effective notch stresses at the weld at the edge
of the cut-out, determined by means of FEM, with taking Assessment of the static strength and assessment of the
the weld into consideration (with a fictitious notch radius r variable amplitude fatigue strength.
= 1 mm):
Process of calculation:
Stress concentration factor Kt,A = VK,A/Szd = 4,23
Rod-shaped component. The assessment of the static
Stress concentration factor Kt,|| = VK,||/Szd = 0,409 strength and the assessment of the variable amplitude fa-
tigue strength shall be carried out using nominal stresses,
Stress concentration factor Kt,W = WK/Szd = 0,157 structural stresses and notch stresses.
Comment:
The stress concentration factors shown here are presented
with reference to the nominal tensile/compression stress.
The respective stress amplitude refers to the maximum
value of a spectrum stress which corresponds to a binomi-
nally distributed standard spectrum, Table 6.4, with the
spectrum parameter q = 0.
6.4 Welded perforated rod 210 6 Examples

Rm = 360 MPa, Rp = 240 MPa

6.4.1 Assessment of the static strength
In the case of welded components the assessment of the § jp ·
jges jS ˜ jz ˜ MAX ¨ ¸
static strength shall generally be carried out separately for ¨ K T,p ¸
© ¹ (1.5.4)
the root of the weld (or rather the throat section), for the
toe of the weld (or rather the toe section) and for the heat jges = 1 ˜ 1 ˜ 1,3 = 1,3
affected zone.
6 Assessment
In this example, the assessment shall be performed for the
toe of the weld. Maximum nominal stress, see above,
Smax,ex,zd = 180 MPa
6.4.1.1 Calculation using nominal stresses Component strength, critical nominal value, see above,
1 Characteristic service stresses SSK A zd = 240 MPa
Maximum nominal stress
Degree of utilization of the static strength
Smax,ex,zd = 120 MPa + 60 MPa = 180 MPa
180MPa
a SK A zd 0,98
2 Material properties 240MPa/1,3
(1.6.1)
Tensile strength and yield strength of the base material
The degree of utilization of the component static strength
Rm = 360 MPa, Rp = 240 MPaTab. 5.1.23 is 98 %. The assessment of the static strength has been
successful.
The values apply to the component. The technological size
factor and the anisotrophy factor are omitted.
3 Design parameters 6.4.1.2 Calculation using structural stresses

Section factor 1 Characteristic service stresses

npl,zd = 1,0 Maximum structural stress at the edge of the cut-out

Constant Dw VA = 259,2 MPa + 129,6 MPa = 388,8 MPa

Dw = 1,0 Tab. 1.3.4 Maximum equivalent structural stress

Vwv = VA = 388,8 MPa (3.1.14)
4 Component strength
The critical nominal value of the component strength re- 2 Material properties
sults from the yield stress and the design factors: Tensile strength and yield strength of the base material
SSK A zd = 1 ˜ 240 MPa ˜ 1 = 240 MPa (1.4.5) Rm = 360 MPa,Rp = 240 MPa Tab. 5.1.23
5 Safety factors The values apply to the component. The technological size
factor and the anisotrophy factor are omitted.
Load factor
jS = 1,0 3 Design parameters
Plastic notch factor (determined using FEM)
Basic safety factors
Kp,V = 2,16 (3.3.8)
jm = 2,0,jp = 1,5Tab. 1.5.1
Section factor
The following, however, applies to moderate consequences
of failure: E = 2,1 ˜ 105 MPa Tab. 3.3.3
jm = 1,75,jp = 1,3Tab. 1.5.1 Hertr = 5 % = 0,05

The following applies to normal temperatures: Rp = 240 MPa

KT,m = KT,p = 1
npl,V = MIN ( 2,1˜ 10 5 ˜ 0,05 / 240 ; 2,16)
Partial safety factor for welded components:
npl,V = 2,16 (3.3.13)
jw = 1,0 (1.5.3)
The section factor is limited by the plastic limit load (plas-
Due to the low yield stress ratio and the normal tempera- tic notch factor).
tures, parts 1, 3 and 4 are omitted in Equation (1.5.4):
Constant Dw
6.4 Welded perforated rod 211 6 Examples

Dw = 1,0 Tab. 3.3.5 Rm = 360 MPa, Rp = 240 MPaTab. 5.1.23

4 Component strength The values apply to the component. The technological size
factor and the anisotrophy factor are omitted.
The critical nominal value of the component strength re-
sults from the yield stress and the design factors: 3 Design parameters
VSK,w = 240 MPa ˜ 1 ˜ 2,16 = 518,4 MPa (3.4.4) Plastic notch factor (determined using FEM)

5 Safety factors Kp,V = 4,25 (3.3.8)

The same as for the assessment using nominal stresses. Section factor
jges = 1,3 E = 2,1 ˜ 105 MPa Tab. 3.3.3
H0,wK = 0,05 Tab. 3.3.4
6 Assessment
Href,wK = 0,17 Tab. 3.3.4
Maximum nominal stress, see above, 3 ˜ h wK
§İ  İ 0,wK ·
Vwv = VA = 388,8 MPa İ ertr,wK İ 0,wK  0,3 ˜ ¨¨ ref,wK ¸¸
© 0,3 ¹
Component strength, critical nominal value, see above, (3.3.17)
VSK,w = 518,4 MPa 3 ˜ 0,38
§ 0,17  0,05 ·
İ ertr, wK 0,17  0,3 ˜ ¨ ¸
Degree of utilization of the static strength © 0,3 ¹
388,8MPa Hertr,wK = 0,16
aSK,w 0,98
518,4MPa/1 ,3
(3.6.16) Rp = 240 MPa
The degree of utilization of the component static strength
is 98 %. The assessment of the static strength has been npl,V = MIN ( 2,1˜ 10 5 ˜ 0,16 / 240 ; 4,25)
successful.
npl,V = 4,25 (3.3.15)

The section factor is limited by the plastic limit load (plas-

6.4.1.3 Calculation using notch stresses tic notch factor).
1 Characteristic service stresses 4 Component strength
Maximum notch stresses The critical nominal value of the component strength re-
VA,wK = Vx,wK = 507,6 MPa + 253,8 MPa = sults from the yield stress and the design factors:
761,4 MPa VSK,w = 240 MPa ˜ 4,25 = 1020 MPa (3.4.6)
V||,wK = Vy,wK = 49,1 MPa + 24,5 MPa = 73,6 MPa 5 Safety factors
WwK = Wxy,wK = 18,8 MPa + 9,4 MPa = 28,2 MPa The same as for the assessment using nominal stresses.

Maximum equivalent structural stress jges = 1,3

6 Assessment
ı vwK ı 2x, wK  ı x, wK ı y, wK  ı 2y, wK  3IJ 2xy, wK
Maximum nominal stress, see above,
VvwK = 729 MPa (3.1.14)
VvwK = 729 MPa
Degree of multiaxiality
Component strength, critical nominal value, see above,
ı HwK 278,3MPa
h wK 0,38
ı vwK 729MPa VSK,w = 1020 MPa
(3.1.19)
with the hydrostatic stress Degree of utilization of the shaft shoulder static strength

1 729 MPa
VHwK V x,wK  V y,wK aSKw 0,93
3 1020 MPa/1,3
(1.6.1)
1
VHwK 761,4 MPa  74 MPa 278,3 MPa The degree of utilization of the component static strength
3 is 93 %. The assessment of the static strength has been
(3.1.20) successful.
2 Material properties
Tensile strength and yield strength of the base material
6.4 Welded perforated rod 212 6 Examples

6.4.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength SWK,A = FATA ˜ fFAT,V ˜ ft ˜ KV ˜ KNL,E (2.4.2)
In the case of welded components the assessment of the SWK,A = 46 MPa ˜ 0,37 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 17,0 MPa
fatigue strength shall be carried out in the same manner, Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
but generally separately for the root of the weld (or rather mean stress
the throat section) and for the toe of the weld (or rather the
toe section), as the fatigue classes can be different for the Mean stress sensitivity, low residual stresses,
two cases. MV = 0,3 Tab. 2.4.2
Furthermore the assessment of the fatigue strength for
The calculation shall be performed for the type of over-
welded components shall generally be carried out separate-
loading F2 (constant stress ratio).
ly for the base material (with rolling skin) and for the
weld, as given above; the less favorable case is relevant.
Because of the very low characteristic fatigue strength
Stress ratio
values of welded components, the weld is normally rele-
vant. Smin, A = 120 MPa  60 MPa = 60 MPa
In the present case, an assessment of the fatigue strength Smax, A = 120 MPa  60 MPa = 180 MPa
for the toe of the weld is sufficient. RA = 60/180 = + 0,333 (2.1.1)

6.4.2.1 Calculation using nominal stresses Mean stress factor

1 Characteristic service stresses Because of 0 < RA < 0,5, field III applies:
Cyclically variable stress at the edge of the cut-out, with
3  Mı
the highest amplitude or the mean value: K AK ,zd (2.4.11)
(1  Mı ) ˜ (3  Mı ˜ ı m /ı a )
Sa, A,1 = 60 MPa, Sm, A,1 = 120 MPa
3  0,3
K AK ,zd 0,705
2 Material properties (1  0,3) ˜ (3  0,3 ˜ 120 / 60)
For welded components, weld specific characteristic fa- Residual stress factor, low residual stresses
tigue limits for completely reversed stress are valid, inde-
KE,V = 1,54 Tab. 2.4.2
pendent of the type of material.
3 Design parameters Amplitude of the component fatigue limit

Fatigue class The critical value of the amplitude of the component fa-
tigue limit results from the mean stress factor, the residual
The fatigue class (FAT) is required to calculate the com- stress factor and the critical nominal value of the compo-
ponent fatigue limit for completely reversed stress in ac- nent fatigue limit for completely reversed stress:
cordance with Chapter 2.4.1.2, using nominal stresses.
This case is not contained in Table 5.4.3, therefore, a cal- SAK,A = KAK,A ˜ KE,V ˜ SWK,A(2.4.7)
culation of this example using only nominal stresses is not SAK,A = 0,705 ˜ 1,54 ˜ 17,0 MPa = 18,5 MPa
possible. In order to be able to perform the calculation—
for illustrative purposes—an approximately correct fatigue Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
class is assumed in the following, where the FAT for a butt Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
joint has been divided by the stress concentration factor
given in the example: Here, the calculation of the variable amplitude fatigue
strength factor for the spectrum provided above was per-
FATA 46 formed using the consistent version of Miner’s rule. The
fFAT,V = 1/2,71 = 0,37 (2.3.21) calculation is not shown here. The required number of
cycles is 106 LC.
Thickness factor (case A)
KBK,A = 5,84 (2.4.48)
ft = 1 (2.3.22)
Amplitude of the component variable amplitude fatigue
Surface treatment factor
strength
KV = 1 (2.3.27)
The critical nominal value of the amplitude of the compo-
Constant KNL,E nent variable amplitude fatigue strength results from the
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor and the critical
KNL,E = 1 (2.3.31) nominal value of the amplitude of the component fatigue
limit:
4 Component fatigue strength
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
6.4 Welded perforated rod 213 6 Examples

SBK,A = KBK,A ˜ SAK,A (2.4.40)

SBK,A = 5,84 ˜ 18,5 MPa = 107,9 MPa 3 Design parameters
5 Safety factors Fatigue class
Load factor In order to calculate the component fatigue limit for com-
pletely reversed stress in accordance with Chapter 4.4.1.2,
jS = 1,0
the fatigue class (FAT) for the welded perforated rod is
The following applies to moderate consequences of failure required when calculating using structural stresses. In this
and regular inspection: example, the fatigue class determined using the concept of
structural stresses is used for better comparability with the
jF = 1,0 Tab. 2.5.3 concept of notch stresses. The weld design, and the weld
The following applies to normal temperature: imperfections comprised by the structural stress-related
fatigue class, e.g. misalignments, shall be taken into con-
KT,D = 1 (2.2.2) sideration. In the case of another weld quality, the calcula-
tion may alternatively be performed using fatigue classes
for nominal stresses. In that case, the existing structural
Total safety factor stress is interpreted as local nominal stress.
jF FATA 100Tab. 5.4.5, No. 1
jD jS ˜ (2.5.2)
K T,D fFAT,V = 1/2,71 = 0,37 (4.3.22a)
1,0 Thickness factor (case A)
jD 1,0 ˜ 1,0
1
ft = 1 (4.3.23)
6 Assessment
Surface treatment factor
Highest nominal stress amplitude, see above,
KV = 1 (4.3.28)
Sa, A,1 = 60 MPa
Constant KNL,E
Critical nominal value of the amplitude of the component
variable amplitude fatigue strength, see above, KNL,E = 1 (4.3.32)
SBK,A = 107,9 MPa 4 Component fatigue strength
Individual cyclic degree of utilization Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress

Sa,A,1 VWK,A = FATA ˜ fFAT,V ˜ ft ˜ KV ˜ KNL,E (4.4.2)

aBK,A d1 (2.6.4) VWK,A = 100 MPa ˜ 0,37 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 37 MPa
SBK,A /jD
60 MPa Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
aBK, A 0,56
107,9/1,0 mean stress

Degree of utilization of combined stresses Mean stress sensitivity, low residual stresses

aBK,Sv aBK, A 0,56 MV = 0,3 Tab. 4.4.2

(2.6.11)
The calculation shall be performed for the type of over-
The cyclic degree of utilization of the component is 56 %. loading F2 (constant stress ratio).
The assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue strength
has been successful. Stress ratio
Vmin,A = 259,2 MPa  129,6 MPa = 129,6 MPa
6.4.2.2 Calculation using structural stresses Vmax,A = 259,2 MPa  129,6 MPa = 388,8 MPa
RA = 129,6/388,8 =  0,333 (4.1.1)
1 Characteristic service stresses
Cyclically variable stress at the edge of the cut-out, with Mean stress factor
the highest amplitude or the mean value: Due to 0 < RA < 0,5, field III applies:
Va,A,1 = 129,6 MPa,Vm,A,1 = 259,2 MPa 3  Mı
K AK (4.4.11)
(1  Mı ) ˜ (3  Mı ˜ ı m /ı a )
2 Material properties 3  0,3
KAK,A = = 0,705
1  0,3 ˜ 3  0,3 ˜ 259,2 / 129,6
For welded components, weld specific characteristic fa-
tigue limits for completely reversed stress are valid, inde- Residual stress factor, low residual stresses
pendent of the type of material.
6.4 Welded perforated rod 214 6 Examples

KE,V = 1,54 Tab. 4.4.2 6.4.2.3 Calculation using notch stresses

Amplitude of the component fatigue limit 1 Characteristic service stresses

The critical value of the amplitude of the component fa- Cyclically variable stress at the edge of the cut-out, with
tigue limit results from the mean stress factor, the residual the highest amplitude or the mean value, respectively:
stress factor and the critical nominal value of the compo- Va,A,1 = 253,8 MPa,Vm,A,1 = 507,6 MPa
nent fatigue limit for completely reversed stress.
Va,||,i = 24,5 MPa,Vm, ||,1 = 49,1 MPa
VAK,A = KAK,A ˜ KE,V ˜ VWK,A (4.4.7) Wa,i’ = 9,4 MPa,Wm,i’ = 18,8 MPa
VAK,A = 0,705 ˜ 1,54 ˜ 37 MPa = 40,2 MPa
2 Material properties
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
For welded components, weld specific characteristic fa-
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor tigue limits for completely reversed stress are valid, inde-
pendent of the type of material.
The calculation of the variable amplitude fatigue strength
factor for the spectrum provided above was performed 3 Design parameters
using the consistent version of Miner's rule. The calcula-
Fatigue class
tion is not shown here. The required number of cycles is
106 LC. In order to calculate the component fatigue limits for com-
pletely reversed stress in accordance with Chapter 4.4.1.2,
KBK, A = 5,84 (4.4.48)
the respective fatigue classes FAT are required when the
Amplitude of the component variable amplitude fatigue calculation is performed using the notch stress model. For
strength normal stresses perpendicular to the weld and for shear
stresses, the fatigue classes for the calculation using effec-
The critical nominal value of the amplitude of the compo- tive notch stresses are applied. For normal stresses parallel
nent variable amplitude fatigue strength results from the to the weld, the respective fatigue class for nominal stress-
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor and the critical es is used.
nominal value of the amplitude of the component fatigue
limit: FATA 225 Tab. 5.4.1

VBK,A= KBK,A ˜ VAK,A (4.4.39) FAT|| 100 Tab. 5.4.3, No. 313
VBK,A= 5,84 ˜ 40,2 MPa = 234,6 MPa FATW 160 Tab. 5.4.1
5 Safety factor fFAT,V = 1/2,71 = 0,37 (4.3.22a)
The same as for the assessment using nominal stresses.
fFAT,W = 1/4,37 = 0,23 (4.3.22a)
jD = 1,0
Thickness factor (case A)
6 Assessment
ft = 1 (4.3.23)
Highest structural stress amplitude, see above,
Surface treatment factor
Va,A,1 = 129,6 MPa
KV = 1 (4.3.28)
Amplitude of the critical nominal value of the component
Constant KNL,E
variable amplitude fatigue strength, see above,
VBK,A = 234,6 MPa KNL,E = 1 (4.3.32)

Individual cyclic degree of utilization 4 Component fatigue strength

ı a,A,1 Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
aBK,A d1 (4.6.4)
ıBK,A /jD VWK,A = FATA ˜ fFAT,V ˜ KV ˜ KNL,E (4.4.2)
129,6 MPa VWK,|| = FAT|| ˜ fFAT,V ˜ ft ˜ KV ˜ KNL,E
aBK, A 0,55
234,6 MPa/1 WWK = FATW ˜ fFAT,W ˜ KV

Degree of utilization of combined stresses VWK,A = 225 MPa ˜ 0,37 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 83,3 MPa
aBK,Sv aBK, A 0,55 VWK,|| = 100 MPa ˜ 0,37 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 37,0 MPa
(4.6.13)
WWK = 160 MPa ˜ 0,23 ˜ 1 = 36,8 MPa
The cyclic degree of utilization of the component is
55 %. The assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue Amplitude of the component fatigue limit for the given
strength has been achieved. mean stress
Mean stress sensitivity at low residual stresses
6.4 Welded perforated rod 215 6 Examples

MV = 0,3 Tab. 4.4.2 KBK,A = KBK, || = 5,84 (4.4.48)

KBK,W = 6,714
The calculation shall be performed for the type of over-
loading F2 (constant stress ratio). Amplitude of the component variable amplitude fatigue
Stress ratio strength

Vmin,A= 507,6 MPa  253,8 MPa = 253,8 MPa The critical nominal value of the amplitude of the compo-
nent variable amplitude fatigue strength results from the
Vmax,A= 259,2 MPa  129,6 MPa = 761,4 MPa
variable amplitude fatigue strength factor and the critical
RA= 253,8/761,4 =  0,333 (4.1.1) nominal value of the amplitude of the component fatigue
limit:
Vmin,||= 49,1 MPa  24,5 MPa = 24,6 MPa
Vmax,||= 49,1 MPa  24,5 MPa = 73,6 MPa VBK,A= KBK,A ˜ VAK,A
R||= 24,6/73,6 =  0,333 (4.1.1) VBK,||= KBK,|| ˜ VAK,||
WBK= KBK,W ˜ WAK(4.4.39)
Wmin= 18,8 MPa  9,4 MPa = 9,4 MPa
VBK,A= 5,84 ˜ 90,4 MPa = 527,9 MPa
Wmax= 18,8 MPa  9,4 MPa = 28,2 MPa
VBK,||= 5,84 ˜ 40,2 MPa = 234,6 MPa
RW= 9,4/28,2 = 0,333 (4.1.1)
WBK= 6,714 ˜ 40,0 MPa = 268,3 MPa
Mean stress factor
5 Safety factors
Because of 0 < RA < 0,5, field III applies:
The same as for the assessment using nominal stresses.
3  Mı jD = 1,0
K AK
(1  Mı ) ˜ (3  Mı ˜ ı m /ı a )
(4.4.11) 6 Assessment
3  0,3 Highest notch stress amplitudes, see above,
K AK , A 0,705
(1  0,3) ˜ (3  0,3 ˜ 507,6 / 253,8) Va, A,1 = 253,8 MPa
Va,||,i = 24,5 MPa
3  0,3 Wa,i = 9,4 MPa
K AK , || 0,705
1  0,3 ˜ 3  0,3 ˜ 49,1/ 24,5 Amplitude of the critical nominal values of the component
variable amplitude fatigue strength, see above,
3  0,3
K AK,W 0,705 VBK,A = 527,9 MPa
1  0,3 ˜ 3  0,3 ˜ 18,8 / 9,4
VBK,|| = 234,6 MPa
Residual stress factor, low residual stresses WBK = 268,3 MPa
KE,V = 1,54 Tab. 4.4.2
Individual cyclic degree of utilization
Amplitude of the component fatigue limit ıa,A,1
aBK,A d1
The critical value of the amplitude of the component fa- ıBK,A /jD
tigue limit results from the mean stress factor, the residual
stress factor and the critical nominal value of the compo- ı a,||,1
nent fatigue limit for completely reversed stress: aBK,|| d1
ıBK,||/jD
VAK,A = KAK,A ˜ KE,V ˜ VWK,A
VAK,|| = KAK,|| ˜ KE,V ˜ VWK,|| IJ a,1
aBK, W d1
WAK = KAK,W ˜ KE,W ˜ WWK (4.4.7) IJ BK,IJ /jD
(4.6.4)
VAK,A = 0,705 ˜ 1,54 ˜ 83,3 MPa = 90,4 MPa
VAK,|| = 0,705 ˜ 1,54 ˜ 37,0 MPa = 40,2 MPa 253,8MPa
aBK,A 0,481
527,9/1
WAK = 0,705 ˜ 1,54 ˜ 36,8 MPa = 40,0 MPa
24,5MPa
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength aBK,|| 0,105
234,6MPa/1
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
9,4MPa
Here, the calculation of the variable amplitude fatigue aBK,W 0,035
strength factor for the spectrum provided above was per- 268,3MPa/1
formed using the consistent version of Miner's rule. The Degree of utilization of combined stresses
calculation is not shown here. The required number of
cycles id 106 LC. 1 ˜§ s  sa,||  sa,A  sa,|| 2 ·
 4 ˜ t a2 ¸
aBK,ıv ¨
2 © a,A ¹ d1
 216 6 Examples

(4.6.13)
1
aBK,ıv ˜ 0,481  0,105
2
·
 0,481  0,105 2  4 ˜ 0,035 2 ¸
¹
aBK,ıv 0,48

The cyclic degree of utilization of the component is 48 %.

The assessment of the variable amplitude fatigue strength
has been successful.
6.5 Welded T-section made of aluminum 217 6 Examples

6.5 Welded T-section made of In accordance with Chapter 1.3.2.3, the area of the HAZ
results from Figure 6.5-2:
aluminum
bWEZ = 30 mm Tab. 1.3.5
6.5.0 Task
Known:
Welded T-section in accordance with Figure 6.1-1 with the
given dimensions.

Figure 6.5-2: HAZ, cross-section

The area of the HAZ is calculated as follows:

AWEZ = 3 · bWEZ · t + t2 = 1000 mm

Figure 6.5-1: Welded T-section, dimensions In the following, the two assessments are performed sepa-
rately.
h = 120 mm, b = 80 mm, t = 10 mm, a = 5 mm
For better clarity of the equations, usually only numerical
Loads values are given without their units. As a rule, the units
Longitudinal force L = 60 kN refer to MPa and mm. Stress values are rounded to integral
Bending moment Mby = 2,5 kN numbers.
Transverse force Qz = 12 kN

Material
6.5.2 Assessment of the static strength using
EN AW-6061.T6 nominal stresses for BM + HAZ
Elongation at break A = 8 % Tab. 5.1.17 1 Characteristic service stresses
Filler metal: SG-AlMg5 The following characteristic geometrical values can be
Safety requirement calculated for the overall cross-section:

Moderate consequences of failure Area A = 1900 mm2

Unknown: Position of the

center of gravity: zS = 39,7 mm | 40 mm
Assessment of static strength zmax = 80 mm

Second moment
6.5.1 Classification—Preliminary remarks of area: Iyy = 2,783·106 mm4
Given the existing elongation at break, the assessment of Iyy
the static strength can be performed using nominal stresses. Section modulus: Wby 3,48 ˜ 10 4 mm 3
zmax
In accordance with Chapter 1.0, the following
assessments shall be made: This results in the following stress types
Szd = L/A = 32 MPa (1.1.1)
– BM + HAZ together according to case a) The cross- Sby = Mby/Wby = 72 MPa
section is part of the HAZ.
The maximum normal stress due to longitudinal forces and 2 Material properties
bending occurs at the lower end of the web plate. As no Tensile strength, yield stress, softening factor
shear stress due to transverse forces exists here, only Rm = 290 MPa Rp = 240 MPa Tab. 5.1.24
the two stress types Szd and Sby need to be taken into UWEZ = 0,61 Line 3
consideration.
– SN
In the weld, a normal stress S__ due to longitudinal force
and bending and a shear stress T__ due to transverse
forces occur. S__ does not have to be taken into consid-
eration in the assessment of the static strength. Thus,
the weld is primarily stressed by shear.
6.5 Welded T-section made of aluminum 218 6 Examples

5 Safety factor
3 Design parameters
Safe design load
Section factor
jS =1 (1.5.1)
A section factor for bending is applicable as the weld co-
vers the whole cross-section (2a = t) and the material is Basic safety factors (moderate consequences of failure)
ductile (A ! 6 %).
jm = 1,75 jp = 1,3 Tab. 1.5.1
Rp,max = 400 MPa Tab. 1.3.1
Partial safety factor for welded aluminum structure,
Calculation of the plastic notch factor wrought aluminum
Elastic limit load/limit moment jz= jw = 1,13 Tab. 1.5.3, (1.5.3)
Me= Rp ˜ Wby Temperature factors do not have to be taken into consid-
eration
= Rp ˜ 3,48 ˜ 104 mm3
KT,m = 1 KT,p = 1 (1.2.20)
Plastic limit load/limit moment
For the total safety factor, only the two first proportions
Tension/compression area in the plastic limit state:
have to be taken into consideration
Ap = A/2 = 1900/2 = 950 mm2
§ 1,75 240 1,3 ·
jges 1˜ 1,13 ˜ MAX¨ ˜ ; ¸ 1,64
Plastic limit moment according to Figure 6.5-3. © 1 290 1 ¹
Mp = Rp · Ap · lS = Rp · 950 · 65,5 (1.5.4)
= Rp · 6,22·104 mm3 (assessment against tensile strength is relevant)
6 Assessment
Individual degrees of utilization
32
aSK,zd 0,27
191 / 1,64
72
aSK,by 0,51
233 / 1,64 (1.6.1)
Figure 6.5-3: Tension/compression area in the plastic limit
state Equivalent degree of utilization

Plastic notch factor Calculation based on superposition of the stress compo-

nents
Kp= Mp/Me = 6,22 · 104/3,48·104 (1.3.6)
q =0 Tab. 1.2.5, (1.6.4)
= 1,79
(1.6.3)
Section factor aSK,v= aGH = s = 0,27 + 0,51 = 0,78 (1.6.6)
(1.6.7)
npl,by= MIN 400 / 240 ;1,79 = 1,29 (1.3.8)
For the assessment of the static strength, the degree of
Because of the aluminum, the following applies: utilization is 78 %.
npl,by= 1,1 (1.3.10) Comment:
Here, the assessment of the static strength can also be
Effective softening factor performed without the section factor (npl,by = 1). In that
1000 case, the degree of utilization is 83 %.
U W, zd 1  1  0,61 ˜ 0,795
1900
1000 ˜ 29 2
U W,by 1  1  0,61 ˜ 0,882 6.5.3 Assessment of the static strength using
2,783 ˜ 10 6 (1.3.11) nominal stresses for W
4 Component strength 1 Characteristic service stresses
BM + HAZ, case a) The following characteristic geometrical values can be
fV =1 Tab. 1.2.5 calculated:

SSK,zd= 1 · 240 · 0,795 = 191 MPa (1.3.11) cross-sectional width: t = 2 · b = 10 mm

static moment of the strap: Sy = 35 · 800
SSK,by= 1 · 240 · 0,882 · 1,1 = 233 MPa
6.5 Welded T-section made of aluminum 219 6 Examples

= 2,8·104 mm3 the considered lower point. On the other hand, there are
additional shear stresses. The resulting degree of utiliza-
This results in the shear stress in the W:
tion, however, shall be lower than the sum of the calculat-
12 ˜ 103 ˜ 2,8 ˜ 10 4 ed degrees of utilization of BM + HAZ and W. Therefore,
T|| 12 MPa a more precise calculation is not required.
2,783 ˜ 106 ˜10 (1.1.1)
Comment:
A simplified calculation using

Qz 12 ˜ 103
T|| 11 MPa
A Steg 1100

would also be applicable.

2 Material properties
As with BM + HAZ
Rm = 290 MPaRp = 240 MPa Tab. 5.1.24
UWEZ = 0,61 Line 3

3 Design parameters
No section factor in the case of shear stresses.
Weld factor
Fillet weld T||, depending on filler metal

DW = 0,62 Tab. 5.1.25, Line 3

4 Component strength
TSK,|| = 240 ˜ 0,62 ˜ 0,61 = 91 MPa (1.4.6)

5 Safety factor
As with BM + HAZ
jges = 1 (1.5.4)

6 Assessment
Individual degree of utilization
12
a SK,|| 0,22
91 / 1,64 (1.6.2)
As only one stress component is relevant, the equivalent
degree of utilization is identical with the individual degree
of utilization aSK,Sv = aSK,||.

For the assessment of the static strength for the W, the

degree of utilization is 22 %.

6.5.4 Total result

The relevant factor is the higher of the degrees of utiliza-
tion for BM + HAZ:
The degree of utilization of the section static strength is
78 %; the assessment of the static strength has been suc-
cessful.
Note:
Another potential point in the cross-section (BM + HAZ)
is the upper end of the web plate below the strap. The
bending stresses would be approximately half as high as at
6.6 Welded aluminum structure 220 6 Examples

6.6 Welded aluminum structure Stress component in MPa

Point Load state Stress ratio
6.6.0 Task
VA V|| W
Known:
Upper load 34 16 14
Section of a welded column made of an aluminum alloy in Lower load 0 0 0
accordance with Figure 6.6-1. The detail to be assessed A R-value
refers to the T-joint with one continuous sheet (D) and one (Lankford 0 0 0
connected sheet (A). The connection is designed in the coefficient)
form of a fillet weld (full penetration).
Upper load 52 16 12
Stress components D Lower load 16 0 0
(local nominal stresses)
R-value 3,25 0 0

Reference point

Figure 6.6-2: Stress-time histories at the reference point

Material
EN-AW 5083 H22 in accordance with DIN 485-2, not heat
treatable
Safety requirement
No regular inspections, severe consequences of failure.
The design load has been safely specified.
Figure 6.6-1: Component, schematic diagram; Unknown:
direction of the local stress components; Position at the
reference point Assessment of the static strength and of the fatigue
strength in the form of an assessment of the fatigue strength
Sheet metal thicknesses: for finite life.
dA = 35 mmdD = 28 mm General remarks:

Loading conditions The assessment of the shell-shaped component is per-

formed using local stresses (structural stresses/
– constant loading at T = 120 °C (upper load); local nominal stresses).
– 8 · 104 releases, only residual mass (lower load); For better clarity of the equations, usually only numerical
– total duration of use: approximately 12 years, corre- values are given without their units. As a rule, the units
sponding with 105 120 h | 1 · 105 h refer to MPa and mm. Stress values are rounded to integral
numbers.
Stress state
Based on an FEM analysis applying a plate model; the
local stress components were determined on both sides of
the sheets. The relevant factors for the strength assessment
are the respective highest values, here at positions A and D
in accordance with Figure 6.6-1. The stress components
are listed in Table 6.6.1.
The time history of the stress components is presented in
Figure 6.1-1. The existing strain is synchronous.
Table 6.6.1 Stress components for both extreme load
cases
6.6 Welded aluminum structure 221 6 Examples

6.6.1 Assessment of the static strength using 4 Component strength

local stresses VSK = 215 ˜ 0,88 ˜ 1 = 189 MPa (3.4.3)
6.6.1.0 Preliminary remarks
5 Safety factor
The aluminum alloy is a non-heat treatable, softening al-
Safe design load:
loy. The assessments of the static strength for the heat
affected zone (HAZ) and the weld (W) shall both be per- jS = 1
formed using the maximum equivalent stress. The assess-
ment of the base material (BM) is omitted due to the fact Basic safety factors (severe consequences of failure):
that the stresses decrease with the distance from the T- jm = 2,0 jp = 1,5 Tab. 3.5.1
joint. The highest values occur in the HAZ, the area of jmt = 1,5 jpt = 1,0
which is of no importance.
Cast factor, partial safety term are omitted.
Partial safety factor, welded
6.6.1.1 Assessment of the static strength for the
HAZ jz= jw = 1,13(3.5.3), Tab. 3.5.2
1 Characteristic service stresses Total safety factor
Maximum stresses in D
ª § 2 215 1,5
VA = 52 MPa V|| = 16 MPa W = 12 MPa jges 1 ˜ «1,13 ˜ MAX¨ ˜ ; ;
¬ © 0,91 305 0,91
(3.1.1)
1,5 215 1 · º
Equivalent stress—ductile material ˜ ; ¸  0» 3,19
0,375 305 0,375 ¹ ¼
ıv 52 2  52 ˜ 16  16 2  3 ˜ 12 2 65 MPa (3.5.5)
(3.1.3)
Assessment against creep strength is relevant.
Due to the plane stress state, no control of multiaxiality is
required. 6 Assessment

2 Material properties Equivalent degree of utilization:

EN AW-5083.H22, sheet metal thickness of less than 40 65

a SK 0,97 (3.6.15)
mm 189 / 3,19
Rm= 305 MPaTab. 5.1.24
Rp= 215 MPa Line 13d
6.6.1.2 Assessment of the static strength, W
UWEZ= 0,88
1 Characteristic service stresses
Elongation at break, sheet metal thickness 12.5 – 40 mm
The relevant factors are the maximum stresses in A (force
A=9% Tab. 5.1.15, continuation 5 flow through W), V|| is not taken into consideration:
Temperature factors—short-term values for 120 °C
VA = 34 MPaW = 14 MPa (3.1.12)
3
K T,m K T,p 1  4,5 ˜ 10 120  100 0,91 Equivalent stress
(3.2.27)
ı wv 34 2  14 2 37 MPa (3.1.14)
Temperature factors—long-term values for 120 °C
Rm,Tt 1 2 Material properties
0,25 jmt 1,5 Figure 3.2-3
Rm jmt The same as for HAZ.

Rm,Tt 3 Design parameters

K Tt,m 0,25 ˜ jmt 0,375 K T,p
Rm The assessment is initially performed without a section
factor:
3 Design parameters
npl = 1
The assessment is initially performed without the section
factor: Weld factor (the value for fillet welds is used)
npl = 1 DW = 0,55 Tab. 5.1.25, Line 13c
6.6 Welded aluminum structure 222 6 Examples

VA: FATA = 40 Tab. 5.4.5, No. 2

4 Component strength
V||: FAT|| = 36 Tab. 5.4.3, No. 323
VSK = 215 ˜ 0,55 ˜ 0,88 ˜ 1 = 104 MPa (3.4.5)
W: FATW = 28 Tab. 5.4.4, No. 2
5 Safety factor
Conversion factor
The same as for HAZ.
fFAT,V = 0,37fFAT,W = 0,23 (4.3.22a)
jS = 2,82 (3.5.5)
Thickness factor
6 Assessment 0,3
§ 25 ·
Equivalent degree of utilization: ft ¨ ¸ 0,904 (4.3.24), Tab. 4.3.6
© 35 ¹
37
a SK 1,00 Further factors
104 / 2,82 (3.6.17) without surface treatment KV = 1 (4.3.28)
without coating KS = 1 (4.3.30)
no GJL KNL,E =1 (4.3.32)
6.6.1.3 Result of the assessment of the static
strength 4 Component strength
The relevant factor is the higher degree of utilization in the Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
weld. VWK,A = 40 ˜ 0,37 ˜ 0,904 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 13,4 MPa
The degree of utilization of the weld joint static strength VWK,|| = 36 ˜ 0,37 ˜ 0,904 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 12,0 MPa
is 100 %. The assessment of the static strength has been WWK = 28 ˜ 0,23 ˜ 0,904 ˜ 1 = 6,0 MPa
successful.
(4.4.2)
Component fatigue limit
6.6.2 Assessment of the fatigue strength using
local stresses Residual stress factor, mean stress sensitivity

The assessment shall be performed for both the connected (Aluminum ļ moderate residual stresses)
and the continuous sheet metal using the respective stress KE,V = 1,26 KE,W = 1,15 Tab. 4.4.2
values and FAT classes. MV = 0,15 MW = 0,09
When performing the assessment using local stresses, the Mean stress factor
stress components are initially evaluated separately. Su-
Type of overloading F2—constant stress ratio,
perposition is performed at the assessment stage based on
the degrees of utilization. The relevant area is field II in the Haigh diagram with
Vm = Va or Wm = Wa:
6.6.2.0 Assessment of the fatigue strength of the 1
K AK,ı 0,870
connected sheet metal 1  0,15 (4.4.9)
1 Characteristic service stresses 1
K AK, W 0,917
1  0,09
Amplitudes and mean values of the stress components in A
Va,A = Vm,A = 17 MPa Component fatigue limit
Va,|| = Vm,|| = 8 MPa VAK,A = 0,870 ˜ 1,26 ˜ 13,4 = 14,7 MPa
Wa = Wm = 7 MPa VAK, || = 0,870 ˜ 1,26 ˜ 12,0 = 13,2 MPa
Constant amplitude stress spectrum, characteristic spec- WAK = 0,917 ˜ 1,15 ˜ 6,0 = 6,3 MPa
trum values are omitted.
(4.4.7)
2 Material properties
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength
Material fatigue limit for completely reversed stress is
omitted for welded components. Parameters for model I constant amplitude S-N curve:

Temperature factor for 120 °C

ND,V = 5 · 106 ND,W = 1 · 108 Tab. 4.4.3
KT,D = 1  1,2 · 10–3 · (12050) = 0,916 (4.2.4.e) kV = 3 k W = 5
3 Design parameters
FAT classes for individual stress components
6.6 Welded aluminum structure 223 6 Examples

Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor 1§

aBK,v ¨ 0,427  0,224
(Constant amplitude stress spectrum, fatigue strength for 2 ¨©
finite life) ·
2
 0,427  0,224  4 ˜ 0,3922 ¸
§ 5 ˜ 10 6 ·
1/ 3 ¹
K BK,ı ¨ ¸ 3,969 0,73
¨ 8 ˜ 10 4 ¸
© ¹ (4.4.43) (4.6.13)
1/ 5
§ 1˜ 10 8 ·
K BK, W ¨ ¸ 4,163
¨ 8 ˜ 10 4 ¸ 6.6.2.1 Assessment of the fatigue strength of the
© ¹ continuous sheet
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength 1 Characteristic service stresses
VBK,A = 3,969 ˜ 14,7 = 58 MPa Amplitudes and mean values of the stress components in D
VBK, || = 3,969 ˜ 13,2 = 52 MPa (4.4.39)
Va,A= 18 MPaVm,A = 34 MPa
WBK = 4,163 ˜ 6,3 = 26 MPa
Va,||= Vm,|| = 8 MPa
Control of the limit amplitude Wa= Wm = 6 MPa
The relevant static strength of the weld is applicable to all Constant amplitude stress spectrum, characteristic spec-
components; due to the force flow through the weld, the trum values are omitted.
static strength is determined based on the weld factor.
2 Material properties
VBK,max = WBK,max
The same as for the connected sheet.
= 0,75 ˜ RP ˜ npl ˜ DW ˜ UWEZ
(4.4.41)
= 0,75 ˜ 215 ˜ 1 ˜ 0,55 ˜ 0,88 3 Design parameters
= 78 MPa FAT classes for individual stress components
The condition is fulfilled. VA: FATA = 40
5 Safety factor Tab. 5.4.5, No. 3
Safe design load: V||: FAT|| = 36
jS = 1 (4.5.1) Tab. 5.4.3, No. 323

Material factor without regular inspections and severe W: FATW = 28

consequences of failure: Tab. 5.4.4, No. 2
jF = 1,4 Tab. 4.5.3 Conversion factor

Cast factor is omitted. fFAT,V = 0,37 fFAT,W = 0,23

(4.3.22a)
Total safety factor:
Thickness factor
1,4
jD 1˜ 1,457 0,3
0,916 (4.5.3) § 25 ·
ft ¨ ¸ 0,966 (4.3.24), Tab. 4.3.6
© 28 ¹
6 Assessment
Calculation of the individual degrees of utilization: Further factors
without surface treatment KV
17
aBK, A 0,427 =1
58 / 1,457
(4.3.28)
8 without coating KS
aBK,|| 0,224 (4.6.3)
52 / 1,457 =1
7 (4.3.30)
aBK, W 0,392
26 / 1,457 no GJL KNL,E
=1
Superposition of the stress components by calculating the
(4.3.32)
equivalent degree of utilization:
6.6 Welded aluminum structure 224 6 Examples

Component variable amplitude fatigue strength

4 Component strength
VBK,A = 3,969 ˜ 21,2 = 84 MPa
Component fatigue limit for completely reversed stress
VBK,|| = 3,969 ˜ 14,1 = 56 MPa (4.4.39)
VWK,A = 40 ˜ 0,37 ˜ 0,966 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 14,3 MPa
WBK = 4,163 ˜ 6,5 = 27 MPa
VWK,|| = 36 ˜ 0,37 ˜ 0,966 ˜ 1 ˜ 1 = 12,9 MPa
WWK = 28 ˜ 0,23 ˜ 0,966 ˜ 1 = 6,2 MPa Control of the limit amplitude
The relevant static strength of the continuous sheet is to be
(4.4.2)
used for all components; due to the fact that the force flow
Component fatigue limit is not through the weld, the static strength is determined
without the weld factor
Residual stress factor, mean stress sensitivity
VBK,max = WBK,max
(Aluminum ļ moderate residual stresses)
= 0,75 · RP · npl · UWEZ
KE,V = 1,26 KE,W = 1,15 Tab. 4.4.2 (4.4.40)
= 0,75 · 215 · 1 · 0,88
MV = 0,15 MW = 0,09 = 142 MPa
Mean stress factor The condition is fulfilled.
Type of overloading F2—constant stress ratio 5 Safety factor
Stress component VA: The same as for the continuous sheet:
The relevant area is field I in the Haigh diagram 6 Assessment
1 Calculation of the individual degrees of utilization:
K AK, A 1,176
1  0,15 (4.4.8) 18
aBK, A 0,312
84 / 1,457
Stress components V|| and W:
8
aBK,|| 0,208 (4.6.3)
The relevant area is field II in the Haigh diagram with 55 / 1,457
Vm = Va or Wm = Wa: aBK, W
6
0,324
1 27 / 1,457
K AK,|| 0,870
1  0,15 (4.4.9) Superposition of the stress components by calculating the
1 equivalent degree of utilization:
K AK, W 0,917
1  0,09
1§
aBK,v ¨ 0,312  0,208
Component fatigue limit 2 ¨©
VAK,A = 1,176 ˜ 1,26 ˜ 14,3 = 21,2 MPa ·
 0,312  0,208 2  4 ˜ 0,3242 ¸
VAK, || = 0,870 ˜ 1,26 ˜ 12,9 = 14,1 MPa ¹
WAK = 0,917 ˜ 1,15 ˜ 6,2 = 6,5 MPa 0,59
(4.6.13)
(4.4.7)
6.6.2.2 Result of the assessment of the fatigue
Component variable amplitude fatigue strength strength
Parameters for model I component constant amplitude S-N The relevant factor is the higher degree of utilization in the
curves: connected sheet.
ND,V = 5·106 ND,W = 1·108 Tab. 4.4.3 The cyclic degree of utilization of the weld joint is 73 %.
kV = 3 k W = 5 The assessment of the fatigue strength has been success-
ful.
Variable amplitude fatigue strength factor
1/ 3
§ 5 ˜ 106 ·
K BK,V ¨ ¸ 3,969
¨ 8 ˜ 10 4 ¸
© ¹ (4.4.43)
1/ 5
§ 1˜ 108 ·
K BK,W ¨ ¸ 4,163
¨ 8 ˜ 10 4 ¸
© ¹
6.6 Welded aluminum structure 225 6 Examples

and, thus,
6.6.3 Supplements regarding the section
factor VB = 3,25 VM (6.6.2)

In the example described here, the assessment of the static For the purposes of estimating the plastic notch factor, the
strength could be achieved without a section factor. In following assumptions are made:
general, a section factor would be permissible, because:
– the principle stress state in the connected sheet consists
a) the weld is of the full penetration type and of bending and longitudinal forces with the result that
Kp is determined solely based on these proportions;
b) the material is sufficiently ductile, A > 6 %.
The calculation of the section factor results from the fol- – in the case of a load increase the ratio VB/VM remains
lowing double criterion constant, even if the elastic limit load is exceeded;

§ Eİ · – only the load-bearing reserve in a small strip is taken

npl MIN¨ ertr ; K ¸ into consideration, see hatched cross-section in Fig-
¨ ȡ WEZ Rp p ¸
© ¹ (3.3.14) ure 6.6-3.

The following results for the first proportion Elastic limit load
(maximum stress VA,1 reaches yield strength)
E = 0,7 ˜ 105 MPa
Tab. 3.3.3 VA,1 = VM + VB = (1 + 3,25) ˜ VM = Rp (6.6.3)
Hertr = 5 % = 0,05
and thus
UWEZ = 0,88 Rp
Tab. 5.1.24 VM 50,6 MPa VM,e
4,25 (6.6.4)
Rp = 215 MPa
Plastic limit load
5
E İ ertr 0,7 ˜ 10 ˜ 0,05 (cross-section is fully plasticized)
4,3
ȡ WEZ Rp 0,88 ˜ 215 The following flow condition applies to the section sizes
over the hatched reference cross-section in accordance
The precise calculation of the plastic notch factor should
with Figure 6.6-3:
be performed based on an FE analysis with elastic ideal-
plastic material behavior in accordance with Chap- 2
§ L ·
ter 3.3.1.1. The elastic limit load and the plastic limit load ¨ ¸  M 1
¨ Lp ¸ Mp
are then determined based on the equivalent stress. © ¹ (6.6.5)
A simple, yet conservative estimation consists in consider- The following relationships apply to the individual propor-
ing the plasticization over the sheet metal thickness result- tions:
ing from the membrane and the bending stress proportions.
This approach is justified when the principle loading state L = VM ˜ A, Lp
consists of longitudinal force and bending. In the follow- = Rp ˜ A
ing, the procedure for the connected sheet is presented, in (6.6.6)
this case for the assessment of the W.
M = V B ˜ Wb, Mp
Stresses at the upper and the
= Kp,b ˜ Me = Kp,b ˜ Rp ˜ Wb
lower sides in the connected
sheet with
VA,1 = 34 MPa Tab. 6.6.1 A =b˜h
cross-sectional area;
VA,2 = –18 MPa
Wb = b ˜ h2/6
Figure 6.6-3: Stresses VA, section sizes over the small section modulus against bending;
shear lag effect b Kp,b = 1,5
nominal stress plastic notch factor for bending (Ta-
Splitting of the stresses into the membrane and the bending ble 1.3.2).
proportions:
Thus, the following results from (6.6.5) for the plastic limit
1
ıM ı A1  ı A 2 8 MPa state:
2
1
ıB ı A1  ı A 2 26 MPa
2 (6.6.1)
6.6 Welded aluminum structure 226 6 Examples

2
§ ı M,p · ı B,p
¨ ¸  1
¨ Rp ¸ 1,5 ˜ R p
© ¹ (6.6.7)
and with (6.6.2):

2 3,25
ı M,p ˜ ı M,p ˜ Rp  Rp2 0
1,5 (6.6.8)
The solution of this square equation is as follows:
VM,p = 0,391 ˜ Rp = 84,1 MPa (6.6.9)

Plastic notch factor

ıM,p
Kp 1,66
ıM,e
(6.6.10)
Comments:
– The same calculation procedure would also be possible
based on the bending stress as the
reference quantity.
– In the section force diagram in Figure 6.6-4, the rela-
tionships are presented graphically.
– As both the elastic limit load and the plastic limit load
are proportional to the yield stress, Kp does not depend
on Rp. Thus, no reduction of the yield stress by UWEZ is
required for calculating Kp.

– When exceeding the elastic limit load, the assumed

proportional relationship between the membrane stress
and the bending stress and, thus, between the longitudi-
nal force and the bending moment, is no longer en-
sured. The actual load path depends on the total struc-
ture. As, however, in this case, the load-bearing reserve
is only derived from the plasticization over the thick-
ness, while the plasticization in the longitudinal direc-
tion of the sheet is neglected, the whole estimation be-
comes rather conservative. On the other hand, however,
an elasto-plastic FE analysis can be omitted.

Figure 6.6-4: Loading path in the section force diagram

(A) elastic limit load
(B) plastic limit load
Thus, for the section factor, the estimated limit load is
relevant:
npl = Kp = 1,66 (4.3.14)
7.1 Abbreviations 227 7 Symbols

7 Symbols V normal stressG

W shear stress
7.1 Abbreviations 7.3 Lower case characters
F type of overloading (F1, F2, F3, F4)
ad,m constant for Kd3
FAT fatigue class (for welded components)
aBK cyclic degree of utilization for the assessment of
GS cast steel and heat treatable cast steel the fatigue strength4
GJL cast iron with lamellar graphite, obsolete: GG aBK,Sv aBK for combined stress types
GJS nodular cast iron, obsolete: GGG
aG, } constants for nV, }G
GJM malleable cast iron, obsolete: GT
aM, } constants for MV

7.2 Indexes aR,VGG constant for KR,VG

a amplitude aSK degree of utilization of the static strength (for the

b bending assessment of the static strength)4
aSK,Sv aSK for combined stress types
eff effective
ex extreme aSK,wv aSK in the case of welded components,
equivalent stress for a stress type
ges total
aSK,Swv aSK in the case of welded components, for
i number of a step in a stepped stress spectrum
combined load types
j number of all steps, number of the last step in a
stepped stress spectrum (lowest amplitude) aT,m constant for KT,m3

m mean/medium aT,D constant for KT,D

max maximum aTt,m, } constants for KTt,m3
min minimum b width
s shear d diameter
t torsion deff equivalent diameter of the semi-finished product
v equivalent, comparative or the raw casting
wv equivalent (assessment of the static strength for deff,m deff for Rm3
welded components)
deff,N,m deff,m for Rm,N3
x, y, z coordinate directions
for rod-shaped components: x in the direction of dL diameter of a longitudinal hole
the rod axis; y and z perpendicular to the rod axis
dP diameter of the "small" component
zd tension, compression or axial stress (the test specimen)
AK component fatigue limit d0 diameter of the material test specimen,
BK component variable amplitude fatigue strength d0 = 7,5 mm
K effective notch stress ft thickness factor for welded components
SK static component strength fFAT factor for conversion from fatigue class to
W welded component fatigue limit for completely reversed
stress
WK component fatigue limit for completely reversed
stress fW,V fatigue strength factor for completely reversed
1 number of the first step of the stress spectrum normal stress
(highest amplitude)
1, 2, 3 principle stress directions for block-shaped
components, third principle stress direction per- 3 applies to R . For R , index m shall be replaced by p.
m p
pendicular to the surface and towards the inside 4 Allocation to the stress type by means of further indexing: zd, b,
of the component
s, t, }
7.4 Upper case characters 228 7 Symbols

fW,W fatigue strength factor for completely reversed 7.4 Upper case characters
shear stress
A elongation at break, also A3, A5
fV compression strength factorG
B width
fW shear strength factor
Cm Larsen-Miller constants for KTt,m3
h degree of multiaxialityG
D diameter
j safety factor
Dm effective damage sum
jges total safety factor
Dm,min lower limit of the effective damage sum
jm j for Rm and Rm,T3
F axial force (tension, compression or
jmt j for Rm,Tt3 tension-compression)

jD j for VW or WW GV related stress gradient5

jG partial safety factor for allowable defects in Kd technological size factor

castings Kd,m Kd for Rm or for VWG
kII slope exponent of the constant amplitude
Kd,p Kd for Rp
S-N curve for N ! ND
~
k slope exponent of the constant amplitude
Kf constant, approximation for Kf
S-N curve for N d NDG Kf fatigue notch factor4, applies to the "large"
nbm fracture-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio component of the dimensions deff and r

ni number of cycles in step i of the required Kf(dP) Kf4 of the "small" component (the test specimen)
stress spectrum of the dimensions dP and rP
npl section factor for static strength Kp plastic notch factor4
nVG G Kt-Kf ratio for fatigue strength5G Kt stress concentration factor4
nV(d)G nV for the stress (bending, torsion)5G KA anisotrophy factor
nV(r)GG nV for the design, for the "large" component5 KAK mean stress factor4
nV(rP)G nV for the design, for the "small" KBK variable amplitude fatigue strength factor4
component (the test specimen)5
KE,VGG residual stress factor5G
nst statistical Kt-Kf ratio
KNL constant allowing for the non-linear elastic
nvm deformation-mechanical Kt-Kf ratio
stress-strain behavior of GJL
q constant for aSK,Sv, } KR,VG roughness factor5G
r notch radius of the "large" component KSK design factor4
rP notch radius of the "small" component
KT temperature factor
(the test specimen)
s thickness of the component KT,m KT for Rm,T3

t time of operation at temperature T KT,D KT for VWG

t depth of a notch KTt,m KT for Rm,Tt3
v damage potential of the stress spectrum KV surface treatment factor

KWK design factor4

Mb bending moment

Mt torsional moment
5 applies to normal stresses. For shear stresses, V shall be re-
placed by W. MVG G mean stress sensitivity5G
7.4 Upper case characters 229 7 Symbols

N number of cycles S normal stress at nominal stresses

N total number of cycles of the required stress Sa stress amplitude4 5

spectrum (required size of the spectrum, required
component fatigue life) Säqu damage-equivalent stress amplitude4 5G

NC reference number of cycles for welded Sa,i Sa of step i in the stress spectrum4 5
components Sa, Sa of step 1 in the stress spectrum, highest ampli-
NDG number of cycles at knee point of model I and tude4 5
model II component constant amplitude
Sm mean stress4 5
S-N curves5G
ND,IIG number of cycles at second knee point of Sm,i Sm of step i in the stress spectrum4 5
model II component constant amplitude Sm,1 Sm for Sa,14 5
S-N curves5G
Smax maximum stress in the stress
O surface of the considered cut-out of a component
spectrum4 5
Pm, Pp Larsen-Miller parameters for the long-term
strength at elevated temperature Smax,ex extreme maximum stress4 5

PÜ probability of survival Smax,ex,wv extreme maximum stress for Swv4 5

Rc,m compression strength Smin minimum stress of the stress

spectrum4 5
Rc,p yield strength in compression
Smin,ex extreme minimum stress4 5
Re yield stress
Smin,ex,wv extreme minimum stress for Swv,zd4 5
Rm tensile strength, "standard component value"
for deff Sm,v equivalent mean stress

Rm,I "actual component value" of Rm Swv equivalent stress (welded component)4 5

Rm,N standard value of Rm for deff,N,m SAK critical amplitude of the component fatigue limit
for Sm or for Sm,v4 5
Rm,N,min constant for KR,V5G

Rm,T strength at elevated temperature T SAK,II critical endurance limit for N ! v for Sm or for
Sm,v4 5
Rm,Tt creep strength at T and t
SBK critical amplitude (maximum value) of the
Rm,Z component value of Rm according to the
component variable amplitude fatigue strength
drawings for Sm or for Sm,v4 5
Rp yield strength as a generalization of Re or Rp0,2,
SSK component static strength4 5
"standard component value" for deff
SWK component fatigue limit for completely reversed
Rp,max constant for npl,b (bending) and npl,t
stress4 5
(torsion)
S|| normal stress parallel to the weld direction4
Rp,I "actual component value" of Rp
SA normal stress perpendicular to the weld
Rp,N standard value of Rp for deff,N,p
direction4
Rp,T 0,2 % yield strength at elevated temperature T
T temperature
Rp,Tt 1 % creep limit at T and t
T shear stress at nominal stresses
Rp0,2 0,2 % proof stress T|| shear stress at the weld4
Rs,m shear strength
V volume of the considered component cut-out
Rs,p yield strength in shear

Rz mean roughness of the surface

R stress ratio4 5
7.5 Greek alphabetic characters 230 7 Symbols

7.5 Greek alphabetic characters

DwG G weld constantG

HertrG G critical total strainG

UHAZ softening factor (welded component)

VG local stress (non-welded component) or

structural stress (welded component)G
VKG G notch stress (welded component)5G

VSch,zdG fatigue limit for zero-tension stressG

VWG G material fatigue limit for completely reversed

axial stress, "standard component value" for
deff,m4G

VW,NG standard value of VW for deff,N,m4G

VW,TG fatigue limit for completely reversed stress at

elevated temperature4G
V1G G first principle stress5G

V1,aG G stress amplitude at the surface5G

WWG G material fatigue limit for completely reversed

shear stress, "standard component value" for
deff,m4G

WW,NG standard value of WW for deff,N,m4G

WW,TGG fatigue limit for completely reversed stress at

elevated temperature4G
ZG G slope angle of a changing cross-section
'jG G increase of j for non-ductile material
7.6 Basic equations 231 7 Symbols

7.6 Basic equations

Nominal stresses Local stresses
Assessment of the component static strength
The characteristic service stress values are:
Smax or Tmax,ex Vv,max
The component static strength values are:
SSK = fV ˜ Rp ˜ npl ˜ KNL VSK = fV ˜ Rp ˜ npl ˜ KNL

or
TSK = fW ˜ Rpl ˜ np ˜ KNL

Different values of the section factor npl apply to the individual stress components. Moreover, the section factors used with
nominal stresses or local stresses have different values.
In the case of welded components, the weld factor Dw and the softening factor Uw or UWEZ shall be taken into consideration.
The degree of utilization is determined as follows:

Smax,ex Tmax,ex V max, ex W max,ex

aSK d1 aSK d1 a SK d1 a SK d1
SSK /jges TSK /jges ı SK /j ges W SK /jges
or or
Assessment of the fatigue strength
The characteristic service stress values are:
Sa,1 or Ta,1 Va,1 or Wa,1

The component fatigue strength values are:

 for non-welded components:
f W, V ˜ R m ˜ K AK ˜ K E, V ˜ K BK ˜ K V ˜ K NL f W,V ˜ R m ˜ K AK ˜ K E,V ˜ K BK ˜ K V ˜ K NL
SBK V BK
K t / n V (r) ˜ nV (d)  1/K R, V  1
> ~
1  1 /K R,V  1 /K f /n V (r, d) @
or or
f W, W ˜ f W, V ˜ R m ˜ K AK ˜ K E, W ˜ K BK ˜ K V f W,W ˜ f W,V ˜ R m ˜ K AK ˜ K E,W ˜ K BK ˜ K V
W BK
> @
TBK
K t / n W (r) ˜ n W (d)  1/K R,W  1 ~
1  1/K R,W  1 /K f /n W (r, d)
 for welded components:
SBK = FAT ˜ fFAT,V ˜ ft ˜ KAK ˜ KE,V ˜ KBK ˜ KV ˜ KNL VBK = FAT ˜ fFAT,V ˜ ft ˜ KAK ˜ KE,V ˜ KBK ˜ KV ˜ KNL

or or
TBK = FAT ˜ fFAT,W ˜ ft ˜ KAK ˜ KE,W ˜ KBK ˜ KV WBK = FAT ˜ fFAT,W ˜ ft ˜ KAK ˜ KE,W ˜ KBK ˜ KV

The degree of utilization is determined as follows:

Sa,1 Ta,1 V a,1 W a,1

aBK d1 aSK d1 a SK d1 a SK d1
SBK /jges TBK /jges V BK /j ges W BK /j ges
or or

In the case of multiaxial stresses a total degree of utilization is computed, by means of an interaction equation, from the
degrees of utilization of the individual stress components.
8.1 General 232 8 Modifications

8 Modifications – strain groups as well as

– an improved method for the calculation of the compo-
8.1 General nent fatigue limit at synchronous multiaxial stresses.
The present 6th edition of the FKM Guideline "Analytical Using these methods in accordance with the fifth edition of
strength assessment of components in mechanical engi- the FKM Guideline, however, is still permissible.
neering" has been completely revised with the result that a
list of all modifications would not be comprehensible.
The main modifications to the calculation algorithm are as
follows:
– clear allocation between characteristic service stresses
and component designs: nominal stresses for rod-
shaped components with section size-related stress
types, local stresses for all components based on the
stress components;
– new safety level "mean consequences of failure";
– complete revision of the assessment of the static
strength for welded components with separate material
tables and taking into consideration of the softening of
aluminum in accordance with DIN 4113;
– in the assessment of the static strength, relating the
strength values to the yield strength and omission of a
summarized design factor;
– conversion of the assessment of the static strength
using local stresses to an assessment using equivalent
stresses, degree of multiaxiality and rewording of the
critical strain;
– inclusion of the assessment of the static strength for
welded components using the R1 concept, based on the
critical strains for structural steels;
– complete revision of the assessment of the fatigue
strength for welded components, including an adapta-
tion of FAT classes and safety factors to the current
IIW recommendations as well as rewording regarding
the thickness factor and the estimation of residual
stresses;
– integration of a new material-mechanical concept of
support effects;
– new wording for the differentiation between component
variable amplitude fatigue strength and yield strength;
– improved method of the consistent version of Miner’s
rule for model II constant amplitude S-N curves;
– new wording for the effective damage sum;
– new comparative hypothesis for non-proportional
stresses acting on rod-shaped components;
– complete revision of the material tables;
– new Chapter 5.5 on the estimation of the fatigue limit
of surface treated components;
– new Chapter 5.7 giving advice on design loads.
The Chapters on the following topics were deleted:
– standard spectrums;